Inventors list

Assignees list

Classification tree browser

Top 100 Inventors

Top 100 Assignees


Having a plurality of contiguous regions served by respective fixed stations

Subclass of:

370 - Multiplex communications

370310000 - COMMUNICATION OVER FREE SPACE

Patent class list (only not empty are listed)

Deeper subclasses:

Class / Patent application numberDescriptionNumber of patent applications / Date published
370329000 Channel assignment 8962
370338000 Contiguous regions interconnected by a local area network 2079
Entries
DocumentTitleDate
20110176483SYNCHRONIZATION OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for synchronizing devices in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, a device determines a receive time for a base station, obtains a time offset for the base station from a network entity, and sets its transmit time based on the receive time and the time offset for the base station. The time offset compensates for the degree by which the base station is asynchronous with respect to a reference time, e.g., UTC time. In another aspect, a device determines and sends time difference information (e.g., a time offset or a TDOA measurement) for at least one base station to support synchronization of other devices. In yet another aspect, a network entity supports synchronization of devices, receives time difference information for at least one base station, and determines at least one time offset for the at least one base station based on the time difference information.07-21-2011
20110176482MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method of controlling data transfer between a mobile device and a data telecommunications network includes: receiving a service request requiring a data transfer; determining at least one parameter requirement relating to the service request from a predefined profile; determining a network/user condition relating to one or more of the at least one parameters; comparing the one or more parameter requirements with the relevant network/user condition; and using the comparison to determine whether or not to proceed with the service request. Data transfer to and/or from a mobile device may be managed so that the network conditions, such as available signal strength and bearer type, are taken into consideration before proceeding with the data transfer. Accordingly, if the network conditions are not suitable for the service request requiring a data transfer, it is possible to not proceed with the request, such as by delaying it until network conditions become suitable.07-21-2011
20130044688LONG RANGE WLAN DATA UNIT FORMAT - In a method for generating a data unit for transmission in a wireless network, a physical layer (PHY) preamble is generated. A field to indicate whether an acknowledgment data unit is intended to follow the data unit is generated and included in the PHY preamble. A media access control layer (MAC) header is generated, and the data unit is generated to include the PHY preamble and the MAC header. The data unit is transmitted.02-21-2013
20130044691SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR INTELLIGENT DISCARD IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Systems and methods for optimizing system performance of capacity and spectrum constrained, multiple-access communication systems by selectively discarding packets are provided. The systems and methods provided herein can drive changes in the communication system using control responses. One such control responses includes the optimal discard (also referred to herein as “intelligent discard”) of network packets under capacity constrained conditions. Some embodiments provide an interactive response by selectively discarding packets to enhance perceived and actual system throughput, other embodiments provide a reactive response by selectively discarding data packets based on their relative impact to service quality to mitigate oversubscription, others provide a proactive response by discarding packets based on predicted oversubscription, and others provide a combination thereof.02-21-2013
20130044690METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SUPPORTING AN EVOLVED UTRAN - A method and system for supporting an evolved universal mobile telecommunication systems (UMTS) terrestrial radio access network (E-UTRAN) are disclosed. The system includes a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU), a UTRAN and an E-UTRAN. The UTRAN sends to the WTRU a list of available radio access technologies in a coverage area of the UTRAN. The list includes information related to the E-UTRAN. The WTRU receives the list and may initiate a handoff based on the list. The WTRU then sends its multi-mode/multi-RAT capability information including the E-UTRAN capability to the UTRAN. The UTRAN then sends a measurement capability message to the WTRU. The measurement capability message includes parameters necessary for performing measurements on an E-UTRAN channel. The WTRU performs measurements based on the measurement capability message and reports measurement results to the UTRAN. The UTRAN may initiate a handoff to the E-UTRAN based on the measurement results.02-21-2013
20130044689RANDOM ACCESS BURST TRANSMISSION SCHEME - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving signals in a wireless telecommunication system and to a method for transmitting random access bursts in such an apparatus. The apparatus includes a transmitter for transmitting random access bursts, a receiver for receiving acknowledgement information confirming a successful transmission of a random access burst, a decision unit for deciding if acknowledgement information has been received, and a control unit for randomly choosing a time point for an attempt to retransmit said random access burst from an interval if no acknowledgement information has been received after a random access burst had been transmitted.02-21-2013
20130044685Reference Signal for a Coordinated Multi-Point Network Implementation - A system and method for broadcasting a channel state information reference signal (CSI-RS) is disclosed. A CSI-RS that is orthogonal to CSI-RSs transmitted by each of a first network cell and each of a set of neighbor cells that interfere with the first network cell is identified. In one implementation, the first network cell has a coverage containing a coverage of a second network cell. The method includes transmitting, from the second network cell, the CSI-RS that is orthogonal to CSI-RSs transmitted by each of the first network cell and each of a set of interfering neighbor cells.02-21-2013
20130044684APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION PATH BETWEEN MULTIPLE DIGITAL UNITS AND MULTIPLE RADIO FREQUENCY UNITS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a communication path control apparatus for controlling a communication path between a plurality of DUs and a plurality of RFUs, and a plurality of antennas included in the plurality of RFUs and a wireless communication system including the communication path control apparatus. Each of the plurality of DUs, the plurality of RFUs, and the plurality of antennas has a unique identifier, and the path control apparatus controls paths between the plurality of DUs and the plurality of RFUs based on identifiers. Accordingly, the wireless communication system can transmit and receive a signal through a specific RFU and a specific antenna included in a specific RFU and performs the next-generation wireless BS operation method, such as CoMP and multi-BS MIMO.02-21-2013
20130044680MANAGING TRANSMIT POWER FOR BETTER FREQUENCY RE-USE IN TV WHITE SPACE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for managing transmit power in a television white space (TVWS) network. By managing transmit power as described herein, medium re-use may be improved in such a network, and unfair usage problems may be alleviated. One example method generally includes receiving, from an apparatus, a message with an indication of a highest transmit power used by the apparatus for transmitting data frames; and determining that the apparatus is a dominant interferer based, at least in part, on the highest transmit power. Another example method generally includes receiving, from an apparatus, a control or management message with a first indication of a first transmit power used by the apparatus for transmitting data frames; and determining that the apparatus is a dominant interferer based, at least in part, on the first transmit power.02-21-2013
20130044679System and Methods for Handling an IP Dual-Stack Connection - In a mobile device operative in a packet switched wireless network, the control logic for handling the PS connection resides inside the modem part of the device when dual-stack operation is required (e.g., PDN connections having PDN types IPv4 and IPv6). This effectively hides how dual-stack IPv4v6 connectivity is implemented towards the relevant 3GPP network. Further, the modem always only uses one and only one network interface, as seen from the IP stack, when it operates in dual-stack mode, regardless of how the underlying PDN connection(s) are set up.02-21-2013
20130044678System and Method for Reducing Interference - A system and method for reducing interference are provided. A method for communications controller operations in a multi-carrier system includes generating information for a broadcast channel, preparing the information for transmission, selecting a location for an unoccupied subcarrier from a plurality of available locations, and placing the prepared information into a plurality of contiguous subcarriers, where the plurality of contiguous subcarriers includes the unoccupied subcarrier and a plurality of other subcarriers. The method also includes transmitting the plurality of contiguous subcarriers.02-21-2013
20130039280METHOD, NODE, AND SYSTEM FOR NOTIFYING PROXY UPDATE IN WMN - Embodiments of the present invention disclose Wireless Mesh Network (WMN) for notifying proxy update. By constructing the proxy update add message, where the proxy update add message includes the address of terminal, the current proxy node address after terminal switching and the destination node address of the terminal, and taking the address of the original proxy node before terminal switching as the address of the destination node, and sending the proxy update add message constructed to the original proxy node, where the proxy update add message is used for updating proxy information of the terminal in the proxy information table of the original proxy node to be the current proxy node address. It makes sure that packets received by the original proxy node which should be sent to the terminal could be received by the terminal, and packet loss rate during terminal switching could be reduced.02-14-2013
20130039279System, Method, and Device for Routing Calls Using a Distributed Mobile Architecture - A method includes transmitting communications information from a first DMA gateway of a DMA gateway communication network to a second DMA gateway of the DMA gateway communication network. The communications information is associated with a communication network that is accessible to the first DMA gateway. The method includes receiving a communication from the second DMA gateway via the DMA gateway communication network. The communication network and the DMA communication network are different. The communication is associated with a destination device that is indicated by the communications information to be served by the communication network that is accessible to the first DMA gateway. The method includes routing the communication to the destination device02-14-2013
20130039278PROTOCOL OVERHEAD REDUCTION - Apparatuses and methods may include receiving a data flow comprising a plurality of packets, identifying static data and dynamic data in packet headers of the plurality of packets, generating a plurality of protocol packets by removing the static data from the packet headers while retaining the dynamic data, generating signaling data based on the static data, and generating a transport stream comprising the signaling data and the protocol each data flow packets.02-14-2013
20130039274METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPORTING STATISTIC INFORMATION ASSOCIATED WITH RANDOM ACCESS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for reporting statistic information associated with random access procedure and back-off process are provided. The method proposes a number of back-off interval reporting modes. The reporting modes include the first mode in which a sequence indicating every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported, the second mode in which a total sum of the every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported, the third mode in which an average of the every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported, and the fourth mode in which a variance of the every back-off interval applied during the back-off process is reported. The reporting information is transmitted via RRC signaling.02-14-2013
20130039277MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION EVENT REPORTING METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Disclosed in the present invention are a Machine Type Communication event reporting method, device and system. The method includes: a mobility management network element acquires identifier information of an MTC server corresponding to an MTC device from a user subscription server; the mobility management network element sends the identifier information to an MTC event reporting entity; and the MTC event reporting entity reports an MTC event of the MTC device to the MTC server corresponding to the identifier information. By way of the present invention, the MTC event report can be sent to a correct MTC server, so that the MTC server can effectively monitor the MTC device.02-14-2013
20130039275METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING ACCESS POINT SERVICE CAPABILITIES - A method for determining access point service capabilities may include identifying, at a mobile terminal, an access point to which the mobile terminal is capable of establishing a connection, determining, prior to authentication between the mobile terminal and the access point, whether the access point supports a particular service or connection, and enabling a connection determination to be made at the mobile terminal regarding whether to connect to the access point based on whether the access point supports the particular service or connection. A corresponding computer program product and apparatuses are also provided.02-14-2013
20130039273METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING A MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT HAVING A FRAGMENTATION AND PACKING EXTENDED HEADER - The present invention relates to a method in which a receiver receives an MAC (medium access control) PDU (protocol data unit) in a wireless communication system. The method in which the receiver receives an MAC PDU comprises the following steps: receiving an MAC PDU containing a header and a payload from a transmitter, wherein the header includes a first extended header containing a first length field which indicates the length of a service data unit (hereinafter, referred to as “SDU”) or lengths of fragmented SDUs in the MAC PDU; decoding the header; and determining whether the size of the first length field in the extended header is an extended size or a basic size in accordance with the results of decoding.02-14-2013
20130039272METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION AND BASE STATION AND USER EQUIPMENT USING THE SAME - A method for data transmission, a base station using the same and a user equipment (UE) using the same are provided. According to an exemplary embodiment, the present disclosure provides a method of data transmission, adapted for a user equipment (UE), the method contains the steps of receiving from a base station signaling comprising a sub-frame which comprises a control region and a data region; decoding from the data region a first transport block indicated by a first downlink assignment from the control region; and decoding the first transport block to obtain a first control information, wherein the first control information includes a downlink assignment, an uplink grant, or an extended control region indicator.02-14-2013
20130039267Method and System for Implementing Single Radio Voice Call Continuity - The present invention discloses a method and a system for implementing single radio voice call continuity (SRVCC), and said method includes: an ALG sending number information and/or identifier information if the ALG to a SCAS via a signaling message; said SCAS judging whether the number information and/or identifier information of the ALG are identical with the last used REFER number information or not, and if not, said SCAS notifying a PS or CS network control entity of the number information and/or identifier information of the ALG; alternatively, said SCAS notifying the PS or CS network control entity of the number and/or identifier information of the ALG. The present invention implements to dynamically select the ALG as a REFER operation entity to implement SRVCC, and solves the problem that a REFER request cannot be sent to an appropriate ALG since this ALG cannot be dynamically determined.02-14-2013
20130039268Method and System for Signaling in a Heterogeneous Network - A method at a network element operating in a wireless network, wherein the network element is configured to transmit a default cell search signal at a default position in one or more subframes, the method comprising transmitting, by the network element, an auxiliary cell search signal in addition to the default cell search signal.02-14-2013
20110199977PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - A system and method for facilitating communication of packets between one or more applications residing on a first computing device and at least one second computing device. The system comprises a connection manager adapted to receive packets from the at least one second computing device, and a packet cache for storing packets received by the connection manager. The connection manager, upon receiving a packet from a second computing device, transmits the packet to the packet cache for storage and notifies each of the applications of receipt of the packet. Subsequently, the packet is retrievable from the packet cache by a notified application, and verification that the packet is intended for communication to the notified application is made.08-18-2011
20110199964METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING A LOCATION OF AN ACCESS POINT BASED ON ASSOCIATION OF THE ACCESS POINT WITH A COMMUNICATION DEVICE HAVING A KNOWN LOCATION - A communication device associated with a wireless access point, namely, a WiFi access point or a Bluetooth access point for example, communicates its location information to the wireless access point. The wireless access point determines its own location utilizing the communicated location information. The communicated location information comprises a device location address and/or a GNSS position of the associated communication device. The device address comprises a network accessible address, a device identifier, a telephone number, an IP address, a url and/or ftp location, an e-mail address, and/or an account number that identifies a corresponding location of the communication device. The wireless access point retrieves corresponding device location addresses and/or GNSS positions from a plurality of associated communication devices. The retrieved device location addresses are converted to determine corresponding locations for self-locating the wireless access point. The determined location of the wireless access point is shared with each associated communication device.08-18-2011
20130028193ACCESS FEEDBACK BY A MULTIMODE TERMINAL - A method for providing access feedback when a User Equipment, UE, with an established a connection over multiple accesses towards a Gateway, GW, initiates a set-up of a new service for a service session. The method comprises a step where the GW or a Policy and Charging Rules Function, PCRF, initiates a Quality of Service, QoS, resource reservation as a response of the set-up of the new service initiated by the UE. The GW or the PCRF in the QoS resource reservation selects a first access as present access.01-31-2013
20130028190MANAGING SERVICE PROVIDER MESSAGING - A system and method for management of service plan modification information between various service providers and telecommunications-based devices are provided. A service management component manages subscriber and service plan information for processing service plan modification requests from a service provider and a mobile device of a subscriber. The service management component processes updated service plan information provided by a service provider component and dynamically offers the updated services to subscribers. The service management component also enables subscribers to modify aspects of their service plans and have the modifications take effect immediately. The service management component maintains various data stores associated with subscriber information and service plan information that facilitate the offer of updated service plans, including service plan features and rule sets, received from a service provider component to subscribers at corresponding mobile devices. The service management component manages a framework that allows management of the updated service plan information.01-31-2013
20090213793Radio base station apparatus - A media access control unit of a radio base station apparatus includes: a resource table for storing resource block numbers in order to reserve resource blocks for the packet data; a system information memory unit for storing a parameter used to determine whether to update information stored in the resource table; and a scheduler. When the parameter indicates update, the scheduler selects resource blocks spaced apart from each other in frequency and having a good radio quality, updates the resource table by using resource block numbers corresponding to the selected resource blocks, and performs persistent scheduling and distributed transmission scheduling on the packet data by using the resource blocks corresponding to the resource block numbers stored in the resource table.08-27-2009
20090213788METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SYSTEMINFO BLOCK IN AN ACTIVE STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a SystemInfo block in an Active state in a wireless communication system is described. The SystemInfo block is transmitted every N08-27-2009
20090213787Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device (08-27-2009
20120201197METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA, AND BASE STATION AND TERMINAL SUPPORTING THE SAME IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method for transmitting uplink data by a terminal in a mobile communication system, the method comprising: when data to be transmitted to uplink is generated in an idle mode, transmitting a ranging request message including at least one of a group identifier allocated to each terminal group to which the terminal belongs, an offline transmission indicator indicating transmission of uplink data in a state in which the terminal is not connected to a network, and uplink data, to a base station; and receiving a ranging response message confirming that the uplink data has been successfully transmitted, from the base station.08-09-2012
20120201195Macro-Network Location Determination, Local-Oscillator Stabilization, and Frame-Start Synchronization Based on Nearby FM Radio Signals - Exemplary methods and systems may generally be implemented to allow a macro-network base station without access to a GPS reference signal to provide some or all of the functionality for which existing macro-network base stations typically rely on GPS. In a first aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may determine its location using a location-determination technique that is based upon the angles of arrival of FM radio signals from nearby FM stations. In a second aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may stabilize its local oscillator by phase-locking its local oscillator to an FM radio signal, and periodically adjusting its local oscillator to account for phase drift of the FM radio signal. And in a third aspect, an exemplary macro-network base station may synchronize its frame-start timing with a nearby base station using a frame-start timing signal that the base station has synchronized to frame transmissions from the nearby base station during a setup routine.08-09-2012
20130028195METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR KEEPING SINGLE RADIO VOICE CALL CONTINUITY SESSION ALIVE - A method and system are provided for keeping a single radio voice call continuity session alive. The method comprises, during switching of a terminal from a packet switch domain to a circuit switch domain, an application layer gateway establishing a new signaling connection with an enhanced mobile switch center after receiving a first transfer request and notifying a service centralization and continuity application server (SCC AS) to establish a new signaling connection with the application layer gateway, and the SCC AS establishing a new signaling connection with the application layer gateway according to the notification. Using the technical scheme of the method and system provided, the problem of call interruption due to a UE being unable to perform IMS re-registration in a destination domain in a single radio voice call continuity process in the prior art is solved.01-31-2013
20130028192Method, User Equipment and Base Station for Transmitting Uplink Control Information - The disclosure discloses a method for transmitting uplink control information. The method includes: receiving, by a user equipment, a carrier activation command or a carrier deactivation command in a downlink subframe n; updating a first downlink activated carrier set according to the received carrier activation command or the carrier deactivation command into a second downlink activated carrier set; taking the second downlink activated carrier set as a current downlink activated carrier set corresponding to a first uplink subframe which belongs to a subframe set of an uplink subframe n+k and uplink subframe(s) after the uplink subframe n+k; sorting X piece(s) of Uplink Control Information (UCI) corresponding to X downlink carrier(s) according to a sorting rule, and transmitting the sorted X pieces of UCI to a base station in the first uplink subframe.01-31-2013
20130028194METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNAL IN A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a signal from a base station to a user equipment in a distributed antenna system (DAS) comprises equally broadcasting DA common broadcast information, which includes information required for initial access, into a cell through a plurality of DA groups of the base station; and independently broadcasting DA specific broadcast information, which includes information on the number of antennas of each DA group, through each DA group of the base station, wherein the DA group includes one or more DAs.01-31-2013
20130028191METHOD AND APPARATUS OF COMMUNICATION - An improved aperiodic downlink channel quality reporting in a radio communication system utilizing carrier aggregation is disclosed. In the radio communication system, a number of downlink component carriers can be aggregated for communication between, a network node and a User Equipment (UE). The invention is characterized in that a set of downlink component carriers is determined from the number of downlink component carriers, a downlink control channel for the UE is arranged to include information being usable for identifying at least one downlink component carrier of the set of downlink component carriers, and a channel quality report is to be provided for each one of the at least one identified downlink component carrier.01-31-2013
20130028189METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING PHYSICAL LAYER ERROR CONTROL TO DIRECT MEDIA ACCESS LAYER ERROR CONTROL - In a system in which both the media access layer and the physical layer use error control, information from the physical layer error control process is used to provide surrogate media access layer error control messaging. In one aspect, the physical layer error control state machine in the transmitting station sends the surrogate message internally to the media access layer error control state machine based on physical layer error control results, thereby eliminating a need to transmit the error control messaging from the media access layer error control state machine of the receiving station over the wireless link.01-31-2013
20130028188PACKET TRANSFERRING METHOD, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION - In a mobile Communication system which includes a base station controller, a plurality of radio base stations connected to the base station controller, and a mobile station simultaneously communicable with the plurality of radio base stations, the base station controller transfers a packet through the plurality of radio base stations to the mobile station. The mobile Station receives the packet as a plurality of reception packets through the plurality of radio base stations. The mobile station includes a controller that selects, among the plurality of reception packets supplied from the plurality of radio base stations, a best quality packet as a selected packet and sends, if the selected packet includes an error portion, a retransmission request to one of the plurality of base stations that sent the selected packet in order to request retransmission of a correct portion corresponding to the error portion.01-31-2013
20130028185Method of Handling Uplink Timing and Related Communication Device - A method of handling an uplink (UL) timing of a timing advance (TA) group for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises maintaining the UL timing of the TA group, if a time alignment timer of the TA group does not expire; and stopping maintaining the UL timing of the TA group, when at least one secondary cell in the TA group is deactivated and the time alignment timer of the TA group does not expire, wherein the at least one secondary cell is configured to the mobile device by a network of the wireless communication system.01-31-2013
20130028184MACHINE TYPE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a machine type communication system. The machine type communication system comprises a machine type communication terminal and a machine type communication server. The machine type communication terminal may be applied to a navigation of a vehicle, a sensor network of a bridge, and the like, to transmit data to the machine type communication server using a wireless network.01-31-2013
20130028186APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR BEAMFORMING IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and a method for generating a frame for communication using beamforming in a wireless communication system are provided. A method for transmitting a signal in a transmitting stage includes determining a beam change time of a region for transmitting information in a frame, and transmitting the information to a receiving stage over the region for transmitting the information by considering the beam change time. The frame includes a plurality of regions divided based on a type of the information transmitted to the receiving stage, and the plurality of the regions includes different beam change times.01-31-2013
20130028182IMPLICITLY LINKING APERIODIC CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION (A-CSI) REPORTS TO CSI-REFERENCE SIGNAL (CSI-RS) RESOURCES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques for implicitly linking aperiodic channel state information (A-CSI) reports to CSI-reference signal (CSI-RS) resources. In an aspect, the UE may be instructed to report on specific CSI-RS resource(s) via explicit signaling in the UE grant. Other aspects disclose techniques for implicit CSI-RS resource selection by the UE that require fewer signaling resources. Instead of explicitly signaling CSI-RS resources to the UE, the UE may implicitly select CSI-RS resource for CSI feedback reporting based on information known to the UE, e.g. a subframe on which a reporting request is received. This may reduce the impact of the additional signaling in the UE grant.01-31-2013
20130028180Method and system for access and uplink power control for a wireless system having multiple transmit points - A method and system for access and uplink power control for a wireless system having multiple transmit points. In one aspect a method operating in a wireless network having a plurality of transmission points (TP) including a macro evolved Node B (eNB) and at least one low power node (LPN) having transmit power lower than that of the macro eNB, the method detecting, by the user equipment, a transmission point having a lowest path loss to the user equipment; and transmitting, by the user equipment, a physical random access channel (PRACH) preamble on a PRACH directed to the transmission points having the lowest path losses.01-31-2013
20130028179Methods and Apparatus for Supporting the Implementation of IMS Service Continuity - According to a first embodiment of the present invention there is provided a method of operating a node of a communications network that is configured to provide an IP Multimedia Subsystem Access Transfer Control Function. The method comprises storing information regarding IMS Service Continuity features that are supported by Mobile Switching Center servers within the network. Upon receipt of a message requesting IMS registration of a user equipment using the information to determine the IMS Service Continuity features that may be available to the user equipment, and, for any IMS Service Continuity features that may be available, including an indication that the IMS Service Continuity feature may be available in the message, and forwarding the message towards a Service Centralization and Continuity Application Server.01-31-2013
20130028181SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING PARALLEL PROCESSING OF NETWORK PACKETS IN A WIRELESS ACCESS DEVICE - A system for managing parallel processing of network packets is also provided. A wireless access device that includes multiple transceivers and multiple processing units receives network packets. A media access controller determines which transceiver a received network packet is associated with. A tagging module determines whether the transceiver associated with the received network packet is bound to one of the processing units. In response to a determination that the transceiver is bound, a scheduler assigns the received packet to the processing unit the transceiver is bound to. In response to a determination that the transceiver is not bound, the tagging module binds the transceiver to a processing unit such that the processing unit processes network packets associated with the transceiver while the transceiver is bound to the processing unit, and the scheduler assigns the received network packet to the processing unit the transceiver is bound to.01-31-2013
20130028178WIRELESS LONG TERM EVOLUTION RADIO ARCHITECTURE SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method for providing a radio architecture for a long term evolution (LTE) communication system is disclosed. According to one aspect, a radio provides power pooling and direct up-conversion of signals to be transmitted. Power pooling is provided by adjusting the gain and phase of each of a plurality of carrier signals in a digital matrix based on feedback signals received from an analog matrix, such that the output signals are coupled to one or more selected radio output ports. Direct up-conversion is achieved by up-sampling and filtering the carrier signals to be transmitted.01-31-2013
20130028177Network Controlled Filtering Over Wireless Device Communications - There is stored in a memory an association between each n01-31-2013
20130028187MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, NETWORK DEVICE, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - During a transition procedure from a first communication system to a second communication system, when the priority of a second communication call, whose setup is requested, is the first priority, the second communication system does not set up the bearer of a first communication call between the second communication system and the mobile communication terminal, and notifies the first communication system that the setup of the first communication is not possible, but the setup of the second communication call is possible. When notified that the setup of the first communication is not possible, but the setup of the second communication call is possible, the first communication system aborts the handover procedure, and instructs the mobile communication terminal to switch to the second communication system by another procedure.01-31-2013
20110182237DIGITAL BROADCASTING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST SIGNAL - The disclosed method of processing a digital broadcast signal comprises generating one RS frame or two RS frames according to the RS frame mode, forming the data group including the mobile service data and signaling data, forming and outputting a plurality of data packets including the mobile service data in the data group, wherein the 118 data packets and K data packets are outputted for the data group, the K being scalable between 0 and 38, interleaving the mobile service data included in the plurality of data packets, wherein the data group includes a scalable data region including data included in the K data packets, wherein the scalable data region carries data included in the first RS frame when the RS frame mode is the single frame mode, or carries data included in the third RS frame when the RS frame mode is the dual frame mode.07-28-2011
20110182236WIRELESS BASE STATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless base station apparatus communicates with first terminal devices belonging to the present cell by means of IDMA. The apparatus receives signals sent from the first terminal devices and at least a signal sent from a second terminal device belonging to another cell; separately extracts each received signal from the first terminal devices and the second terminal device from the signals received by the receiver and computes a channel value for each received signal, by using interference replica signals; sends information for requesting a second wireless base station apparatus which communicates with the second terminal device to send a log-likelihood ratio obtained based on a signal received from the second terminal device; performs decoding using the channel value for each first terminal device, and generates a log-likelihood ratio as a decoding result and the corresponding interference replica signal; and performs decoding using the log-likelihood ratio received from said second wireless base station apparatus and the channel value for the second terminal device, and generates a log-likelihood ratio as a decoding result and the corresponding relevant interference replica signal.07-28-2011
20090103474SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING BLUETOOTH PERFORMANCE IN THE PRESENCE OF A COEXISTENT, NON-BLUETOOTH, WIRELESS DEVICE - The disclosed systems and methods relate to improving the coexistence of Bluetooth devices and devices that use other wireless standards. Aspects of the present invention may enable a higher level of data throughput by reducing the retransmission rate. Aspects of the present invention may minimize design cost by allowing manufactures to use Bluetooth radios from one source and non-Bluetooth radios from another source. Aspects of the present invention may be embodied in a single device or multiple devices that operate in a geographic area.04-23-2009
20120163299WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system base station, and a remote radio head (RRH) and a computer-implemented synchronization method for the wireless communication system base station. The RRH is communicably coupled to a baseband unit (BBU) of the wireless communication system base station through a network, and the BBU processes and transmits downlink data to the RRH. The RRH includes: a time-delay measurement unit for measuring a time-delay for the downlink data to arrive at the RRH from the BBU; and a time-delay notification unit for notifying from the RRH to the BBU of time-delay data on the time-delay measured by the time-delay measurement unit, wherein the time-delay data is used to advance the starting time for the BBU to process and transmit the downlink data by an amount of time obtained based on the time-delay data.06-28-2012
20120163295COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - A mobile terminal in a sensor network selects one of the sensors nodes in the sensor network as an upstream agent, and piggybacks a list of neighboring sensor nodes found in the upstream agent selection process on an upstream packet and transmits the upstream packet to a gateway through the upstream agent. The gateway in the sensor network selects one of the neighboring sensor nodes as a downstream agent using state information of the neighboring sensor nodes in the list, and transmits a downstream packet to the mobile terminal through the selected downstream agent.06-28-2012
20130028176WIRELESS TRANSMISSION OF DATA PACKETS BASED ON CLIENT ASSOCIATIONS - Techniques are provided for wireless transmission of data packets based on client associations. A data packet may be received at a wireless access point. It may be determined if at least one client associated with the wireless access point should receive the data packet. The data packet may be wirelessly transmitted if it is determined that there is a client that is associated with the wireless access point that should receive the data packet.01-31-2013
20110205960CLIENT ROUTING IN A PEER-TO-PEER OVERLAY NETWORK - A method of client routing in a peer-to-peer (“P2P”) overlay network is provided. In one embodiment, the method of client routing in a P2P overlay network comprises requesting communication with a client by a first peer using the P2P overlay network, wherein said first peer is directed to a second peer to which said client is registered in the P2P overlay network; determining that said client is not attached to said second peer in the P2P overlay network and said client has access to another network; providing said second peer with said client's location in the P2P overlay network using said other network, wherein said client's location is associated with a third peer to which said client is attached and not registered in the P2P overlay network; forwarding said client's location from said second peer to said first peer using the P2P overlay network, and using said client's location to communicate with said client by said first peer using the P2P overlay network.08-25-2011
20130028183METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK MESSAGING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A multi-technology wireless communication system is provided that comprises a packet data network and a circuit switched network and that routes circuit switched fallback (CSFB) messages associated with a user equipment operating in the packet data network based on a circuit switched network access network identifier that identifies an Interworking Solutions function (IWS) of the circuit switched network that serves the user equipment. The circuit switched network access network identifier is maintained by a Node B of the packet data network and is provided to a serving Mobility Management Entity (MME) of the packet data network when implementing CSFB for the UE. The MME then selects an IWS of the circuit switched network for a routing of CSFB messaging based on the IWS identified in the circuit switched network access network identifier.01-31-2013
20120170517METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACQUIRING SERVING GENERAL PACKET RADIO SERVICE SUPPORT NODE ADDRESS - The present invention discloses a method and system for acquiring an address of a Serving General Radio Packet Service support node (SGSN). The method comprises: a Policy and Charging Enforcement Function (PCEF) entity providing a SGSN change event trigger to a Policy and Charging Rules Function (PCRF) entity; and the PCRF entity reporting a SGSN change event and a new address of the SGSN to the PCEF entity after receiving the SGSN change event trigger. The method solves the problem that credit control management cannot be carried out for different general radio packet service support nodes during online charging.07-05-2012
20120170515PROCESSING EXTENSION TYPE SYSTEM INFORMATION BLOCKS (SIBS) - A method for determining an extension type of a system information block segment is described. A system information block segment of type extension is received in a system frame number. A byte in a system information block extension type lookup table corresponding to the system frame number of the system information block segment is calculated. A bit position in the system information block extension type lookup table corresponding to the system frame number is calculated. The extension type expected at the system frame number for the system information block segment is determined using the byte and the bit position.07-05-2012
20120170512SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR APPLICATION LAYER GATEWAY ASSISTED LOCAL IP ACCESS AT A FEMTO BASE STATION BY NETWORK ADDRESS TRANSLATION - A method for application layer gateway (ALG) assisted local IP access (LIPA) at a base station by network address translation (NAT) allows IP capable UEs connected via HeNB or other kinds of Femto cell base station to use LIPA to establish multimedia session with other IP capable entities in the same IP network by NAT. The method relays a LIPA request to IMS, determines whether the terminating entity residing in the same IP network or not, and determines if the originating and terminating entities are allowed to use LIPA, and modifies the transport address information accordingly to facilitate signaling and packet routing. The method also provides the capability to apply different charging policies for LIPA and non-LIPA usages.07-05-2012
20100061295TRANSFERRING DATA IN A DUAL TRANSFER MODE BETWEEN A MOBILE NETWORK AND MOBILE STATIONS - A circuit mobility management entity (CMM) is intended a mobile network adapted for transferring data in a dual transfer mode to and from mobile stations. The CMM is arranged, when it has established a circuit-switched (CS) connection between a mobile station and the mobile network and when it receives from a radio resource entity (RR) of the mobile network, a message informing that the CS procedure corresponding to this CS connection is ended, to determine if a GPRS Tunnelling Transport Protocol (GTTP) procedure is running for a packet-switched (PS) signalling procedure which concerns the mobile station, then either i) require release of the CS connection near the RR entity if the GTTP procedure is ended, or ii) maintain the CS connection as long as the GTTP procedure is running, and require release of the CS connection near the RR entity when the GTTP procedure is ended.03-11-2010
20100020746ADVERTISEMENT OF MULTIPLE SECURITY PROFILES IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORKS - A novel and useful apparatus for and method of advertising multiple security profiles in wireless local area networks (WLANs). The security profile advertisement mechanism of the present invention advertises all configured security profiles by sending unsolicited 802.11 management probe response frames to the broadcast MAC address for available security profile. The access points sends these unsolicited probe response frames periodically, such as with the Beacon period. The conventional management application in the stations receives unsolicited advertisements of multiple SSIDs and perform a passive scanning process to obtain a list of BSSs available on the radio channel. The station can then display a list of all detected SSID advertisements to the user. The user of the station thus obtains information on all security profiles available on the access point without requiring any prior knowledge of specific SSIDs.01-28-2010
20130044686CARRIER AGGREGATION WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND BASE STATION, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD THEREOF - A carrier aggregation wireless network system and a base station (BS), a wireless communication device, and a synchronization method thereof are disclosed. The wireless communication device receives a wireless signal from the BS. The wireless signal includes a primary cell (pcell) and a secondary cell (scell). A subframe of the scell includes a first OFDM symbol and a second OFDM symbol. The first OFDM symbol includes an extended primary synchronization signal (PSS). The second OFDM symbol includes a PSS. The scell includes a secondary synchronization signal (SSS). The wireless communication device acquires synchronization according to the extended PSS and/or the PSS. In addition, the wireless communication device may also acquire synchronization according to a cell ID, the PSS, and the SSS.02-21-2013
20130044687LONG RANGE WLAN DATA UNIT FORMAT - In a method for transmitting a data unit in a wireless communication network, a physical layer (PHY) preamble and a media access control layer (MAC) header are generated. In generating the MAC header, a first address field to include a first address and a second address field to include a second address are generated. The first, not globally unique, address indicates a communication device for which the data unit is intended or a communication device that is transmitting the data unit. The second address field indicates the other one of a communication device for which the data unit is intended or a communication device that is transmitting the data unit. The first address field and the second address field are included in the MAC header. The MAC header omits a globally unique address corresponding to the first address of the first address field.02-21-2013
20130044682PMIP PROTOCOL ENHANCEMENT - Example embodiments presented herein are directed towards determining a Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (PIMPv6) control plane used by a network node peer in an Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) transport network. The example embodiments provide a mechanism in PMIP protocol stack, to allow a Mobility Access Gateway/Local Mobility Anchor (MAG/LMA) node such as SGW (which may be supporting both PMIP draft and PMIP RFC) to decide which PMIP protocol stack shall be used to communicate to the peer node, i.e. LMA/MAG.02-21-2013
20130044681MANAGING TRANSMIT POWER FOR BETTER FREQUENCY RE-USE IN TV WHITE SPACE - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for managing transmit power in a television white space (TVWS) network. By managing transmit power as described herein, medium re-use may be improved in such a network, and unfair usage problems may be alleviated. One example method generally includes receiving a request message comprising an indication of a modulation and coding scheme (MCS) for transmitting data frames to be received, determining a link margin based on the MCS, and transmitting a response message with an indication of the link margin. Another example method generally includes determining a MCS for transmitting data frames and transmitting a request message comprising an indication of the MCS.02-21-2013
20130044683METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK MULTIUSER MIMO TRANSMISSION IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A base station transmits to a number of relay stations in a wireless network using a beamforming matrix. The beamforming matrix is generated by first obtaining a column vector from a beamforming matrix associated with each of the relay stations. An intermediate matrix is then generated using these column vectors. A zero-forcing procedure is then utilized to process the intermediate network to generate the final beamforming matrix.02-21-2013
20090196235Method And Apparatus For Setting Gain Factors For Dedicated Physical Channels In A Mobile Telecommunications System - An apparatus and method are provided for setting gain factors for dedicated physical channels in a mobile communication system. The UE receives configuration information indicating uplink dedicated physical channel configuration. The UE sets a gain factor of a dedicated physical control channel (DPCCH) to 1 in the case that no DPDCH is configured. The UE calculates a gain factor of a enhanced dedicated physical control channel (E-DPCCH) using the gain factor of the DPCCH.08-06-2009
20090196233RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO ACCESS METHOD, ACCESS POINT AND GATEWAY - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a radio communication system and a radio access method. In accordance with the embodiments of the present invention, an AP with a PDP forward function unit forwards service traffic accessing an AS to a Packet Radio Service Gateway Support Node, and sends Internet service traffic to the Packet Radio Service Gateway Support Node or directly sends the Internet service data to the Internet via a configured forwarding interface according to the service property of the service traffic. Embodiments of the present invention further disclose an Access Point and a gateway. Therefore, the load of network elements of a mobile network is reduced; meanwhile, the control and the management of the high increment value services by operators can be guaranteed. The investment of the CS network can be protected by the gateway as a concentrator of Access Points and a forwarding node of CS services in the embodiments of the present invention.08-06-2009
20090196231MOBILE IP MULTIPLE REGISTRATIONS AND PCC INTERACTIONS - In a wireless communication system having multiple access nodes, a home agent (HA) maintains home address (HoA) for a mobile node so that an IP session can be established. As the mobile node moves within a coverage area of various access nodes, the mobile node can establish a secure relationship with a local access gateway and thereby register a local IP address, referred to as a care-of-address (CoA), with the HA. Mobile IP protocol can be established so that multiple sessions can be conducted. In maintaining policy and charging control (PCC), HA informs a policy and charging rules function (PCRF), which in turn can then send the appropriate PCC rules (e.g., IP flows and related policies) to a policy and charging enforcement function (PCEF) for a particular access gateway. Coordination necessary to associate CoA and HoA can further include filter information as to application can run on a particular interface.08-06-2009
20090196230METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK LOAD IN CELL_FACH STATE - A method for a user equipment (UE) to perform uplink re-access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes performing an uplink access procedure to establish a data transmission channel, checking whether or not the data transmission channel has been released, and delaying uplink re-access to the data transmission channel by a wait time when the data transmission channel has been released.08-06-2009
20090196227METHOD AND NETWORK NODE FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method routes data packets especially in wireless communication network formed by a plurality of network nodes. In order to transmit data packets from a first network node acting as a data packet source to a second network node acting as a data packet sink according to said method, the data packets are transmitted with the help of at least one additional communication network node that is dissociated from the source node, a first network message is transmitted from the source node at least to the additional network node so as to be successively forwarded to each additional network node until the additional network node corresponds to the sink node, the respective additional network node supplies routing data based on the first message in such a way that first data on a next network node on the way to the source node and the value of a first validity period in the actual additional network node is temporarily stored, and the value of the respective validity period is stored in such a way that all first data remains stored at least until a second network message which is sent by the sink node and confirms the first network message has been received by the source node.08-06-2009
20090196226BROADCAST RECEIVING TERMINAL DEVICE, BROADCAST RECEIVING METHOD, PROGRAM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - Provided is a broadcast receiving terminal (08-06-2009
20090196225DEVICES AND METHOD FOR GUARANTEEING QUALITY OF SERVICE PER SERVICE DATA FLOW THROUGH THE BEARER LAYER - In scenarios where the quality of service is negotiated through a signalling layer whereas the services are actually carried through a bearer layer, application functions at the signalling layer are not always aware of how quality of service is individually accomplished at the bearer layer on a service basis. The invention provides a method and devices whereby events are detected on a service data flow basis at a detection device in the bearer layer and notified towards an application device in the signalling layer via a control device between the signalling and the bearer layer. The list of events to be notified is obtainable at the control device from the application device and is included in Quality of Service related rules, along with service data flow filters. This Quality of Service related rules are provided to the detection device for inspecting individual service data flows in order to detect and notify the indicated events.08-06-2009
20090196223TRANSMIT POWER CONTROLLER - A transmit power control system includes: an output power estimator for estimating a transmit power of a transmitter; and a transmit power controller responsive to the output power estimator and to compare this with a requested power in order to calculate a target power which takes account of errors within the transmit power control system, and to vary a gain of an amplifier in a transmit signal path so as to reduce an error between the transmit power of the amplifier and the requested power.08-06-2009
20090196221METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING SIGNALING ACCESS - Signaling-only access may be established with an access node under certain circumstances such as, for example, upon determining that a node is not authorized for data access at the access node. A node that is not authorized for data access at an access node may still be paged by the access node through the use of signaling-only access. In this way, transmissions by the access node may not interfere with the reception of pages at the node. A first node may be selected for providing paging while a second node is selected for access under certain circumstances such as, for example, upon determining that the second node provides more desirable service than the first node.08-06-2009
20090196220MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - When a browser is started up by a user, a packet call establishment request unit of a cellular phone requests the start of processing for establishing a packet call, and a communication control unit executes a packet all establishment processing. A mobile communication network sends a packet call establishment response message to the cellular phone, then sends packet data. A packet date storage unit of the cellular phone stores the packet data in a memory when packet data is received before the packet call establishment response message. If the packet call establishment response message is received thereafter, the packet data storage unit reads the packet data from the memory, and deletes the packet data from the memory. The packet processing execution unit displays a screen corresponding to the packet data on the display. Thereby, instances when packet data is discarded is decreased.08-06-2009
20090196219METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR QUALITY OF SERVICE-BASED UPLINK POLLING SCHEMES - A method for allocating polling bandwidth may include generating polling tokens corresponding to connections maintained by a base station. The polling tokens may be generated at configurable time intervals. The method may also include assigning priorities to the polling tokens. The priority of a polling token may depend on a scheduling type of a corresponding connection. The method may also include allocating polling bandwidth to the connections that correspond to the highest priority polling tokens when uplink bandwidth is available to allocate for polling.08-06-2009
20090196216Wireless communication device - An object of the present invention is to improve the throughput and reduce the circuit size and power consumption for transmission.08-06-2009
20090196217Signalling the Presence of Extension Frames - Aspects of the invention are directed to signalling extension frames in a telecommunication system. Extension-frame-signalling data may signal whether one or more extension parts are present in one or more gaps in time between data frames, when the one or more extension parts occur, and one or more durations for the one or more extension parts. The one or more extension parts may occur on the same radio frequencies as the data frames. The extension-frame-signalling data may signal when the one or more extension parts occur by signalling after which of one or more data frames in a super frame the extension parts occur. The one or more durations for the extension parts may be expressed in units of time.08-06-2009
20100150062Packet Indicator for RLC Protocol - In a communication terminal implementing a radio link control (RLC) protocol, error propagation to higher layer protocols is mitigated by use of an additional length indicator, referred to herein as a new packet indicator, in the RLC data blocks to indicate the beginning of a new higher layer packet in addition to a conventional length indicator to indicate the last segment of a higher layer packet. The new packet indicator prevents the LLC data segment at the beginning of an RLC data block from being concatenated with an LLC data segment in the previous data block even when length indicators in the previous data block are not received.06-17-2010
20110310796DISPLAY APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONNECTING TO VIDEO CALL THEREOF - Embodiments relates to a display apparatus that can perform a video call and a method of connecting to a video call thereof, in which the method includes: receiving a control signal from an external device where an identification information for a video call is registered when a video call is received; turning on the display apparatus in response to the received control signal; and connecting to the received video call.12-22-2011
20100027473METHOD OF GENERATING LOW PEAK-TO-AVERAGE POWER RATIO (PAPR) BINARY PREAMBLE SEQUENCES FOR OFDM SYSTEMS - A wireless system and method including a medium access control (MAC) layer adapted to generate low peak-to-average power ratio binary preamble sequences for orthogonal frequency division multiplexing systems described.02-04-2010
20100054187METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICES OVER A PACKET SWITCHED NETWORK - A method of determining a domain mode for a mobile station operating in either a circuit-switched domain or a packet-switched domain. A first domain mode is determined, and then a determination is made whether to rove from the first domain mode to a second domain mode. The determination may be made by a Packet Mobile Switching Center (PMSC) when, for example, the mobile station moves between Routing Areas. Alternatively, the mobile station may make the determination based, for example, on pre-provisioned selection criteria. The mobile station derives a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) based on a cell identifier of a current cell and uses the FQDN in a DNS query to obtain the IP address of the PMSC.03-04-2010
20080259850METHOD FOR REALIZING MOBILE IP MANAGEMENT AND THE NETWORK SYSTEM THEREOF - A method for realizing mobile IP management includes: a mobile node (MN) sends a mobility registration signal to a mobility control (MC) entity in a control function entity of the transmission layer of the network; a home mobility control entity of the mobile node registers the mobile node, returns a registration response to the mobile node and transmits a control signal to a mobility forwarding (MF) entity in the transmission layer; the mobility control entity controls the mobility forwarding entity to provide communication services for the mobile node after it receives a request signal from the registered mobile node. A method for realizing mobile IP management in NGN network and a network system for realizing mobile IP management are also disclosed.10-23-2008
20080259849MACRO-DIVERSITY REGION RATE MODIFICATION - A system including a buffer to receive and store a stream of content data. A controller module may be configured to determine the macro-diversity region size based on a set of pre-selected configuration parameters including an incoming rate of the content data and to allocate at least a portion of the content data to a macro-diversity region, to monitor an amount of the content data in the buffer in accordance with the set of pre-selected configuration parameters including an incoming rate of the content data to determine whether the amount of content data falls into or out of a target range defined by a low-end value and a high-end value and to adjust the size of the macro-diversity region by one or more increments in response to changes in the amount of the content data in accordance with the target range.10-23-2008
20080259846Cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device - A circuit includes a first wireless interface circuit that transceives packetized data with a first external device in accordance with a first wireless communication protocol. A second wireless interface circuit transceives packetized data with a second external device in accordance with a second wireless communication protocol and wherein the operation of the second wireless interface circuit interferes with the operation of the first wireless interface circuit. A processing module selectively preempts use of the second frequency spectrum by the second external device using a plurality of preemption modes including a first preemption mode and a second preemption mode.10-23-2008
20080259842Multicast Control Channel Design - A system for providing a multicast control channel (MCCH) including information related to a service is provided. The system includes a processor programmed to promote transmission of a MCCH including a multi-cell information portion that contains information common to a plurality of cells in a wireless telecommunications network, and a cell-specific information portion that contains information specific to one of the cells. A method for providing control information is also provided. The method includes transmitting a multicast control channel (MCCH) including information related to a service, wherein the MCCH has a cell-specific portion that contains information specific to a specific cell in a telecommunications network, and wherein the MCCH has a multi-cell portion that contains information common to a plurality of cells in the telecommunications network.10-23-2008
20100014462METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOGNIZING MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICE REGION IN BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for recognizing a Multicast and Broadcast Service (MBS) region in a broadband wireless communication system are provided. In the method, whether a next MBS MAP message transmission point of a first frame and an MBS data burst transmission point indicated by MBS burst assignment information of a second frame match with each other in a third frame is determined. When matching with each other in the third frame, a control message including information for determining a starting point of an MBS region is generated. The generated control message is transmitted during one of the first and second frames.01-21-2010
20100008298MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS CONTROLLER, AND EXTENSION TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING SERVER DEVICE SELECTING METHOD - An appropriate selection is controlled for selecting an extension transmitting/receiving server device for transmitting or receiving user data, to be transmitted or received between mobile station devices, to or from a radio base station device by employing extension transmission or reception of data, in a radio access network relaying data between a core network having a mobile switch station and the mobile station devices. While referring to a management table for managing statuses of extension transmitting/receiving server devices 01-14-2010
20100008291Cognitive wireless system - A cognitive mobile wireless system is disclosed that enhances connectivity of a mobile device moving among heterogeneous networks, by selecting advantangeous links.01-14-2010
20090196218WIRELESS SYSTEM GATEWAY CACHE - A wireless system gateway cache is presented. The gateway includes a first, wireless interface, a second interface, and a cache controller. The cache controller receives a characteristic of a parameter of a first device. The cache controller also receives a value of the parameter from the first device via the first interface and stores the value according to the characteristic of the parameter. The cache controller further receives a request for the value of the parameter from a second device via the second interface and sends the stored value to the second device in response to the request.08-06-2009
20100085913SYSTEM ACQUISITION WITH INTERFERENCE CANCELLATION IN THE PRESENCE OF FEMTOCELLS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate acquisition of a cell in the presence of interfering cells. An undesired cell in close proximity to a user equipment unit (UE) can inhibit detection of a desired cell. For instance, a femto cell near the UE can interfere with detection and acquisition of a macro cell. The UE can detect the undesired cell and reconstruct an estimate of signals transmitted by the undesired cell. The estimate can be employed to cancel interference from received signals to facilitate acquisition of a desired cell.04-08-2010
20100008296METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ALLOWING DEVICE SUPPORTING MULTIPLE PHY COMMUNICATION MODE TO COMMUNICATE WITH DEVICE IN WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - Provided is an operation method of a wireless personal area network (WPAN) device. In the wireless personal area network (WPAN) device, the WPAN device supporting a plurality of physical layer (PHY) communication modes determines timing for changing a PHY communication mode, with reference to a beacon frame, in order to communicate with devices using various PHY communication modes, and transmits information indicating a PHY communication mode as a parameter of a primitive to a PHY layer, at the determined timing.01-14-2010
20100080171METHOD AND ARRANGEMENTS FOR CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in mobile radio telecommunications for enabling access to Circuit Switched (CS) services for a user equipment (UE) that is connected to a LTE/SAE (Long Term Evolution/System Architecture Evolution) network. The UE's current position is stored in a LTE position format in the LTE network or in the SAE network. The invention provides steps and means for transforming the UE's position in LTE format to position information in CS format for the UE, steps and means for registering the UE in the CS network using said transformed position information, and steps and means for establishing access to CS services provided by said CS network.04-01-2010
20130028196Method and System for Obtaining User Equipment Ability by User Equipment, Home Subscriber Data Server and Core Network Element - The present invention discloses user equipment, a home subscriber data server (HSS) and a method and system for obtaining user equipment ability by a core network element. Wherein, the method for obtaining user equipment ability by the core network element includes: in and/or after the IP multimedia network subsystem (IMS) registration process, the home subscriber data server (HSS) informing the IMS network element of the ability information of user equipment (UE). The HSS is enabled to obtain the user equipment ability information in present invention, and can provide services for various operations of subscribers.01-31-2013
20110299470SENSOR AND SENSOR NETWORK FOR AN AIRCRAFT - The invention relates to a sensor network in an aircraft, which comprises several sensor nodes that communicate with a central data collection and evaluation unit via a radio transmission path. Data transmission can take place in various ways. For example, different frequency ranges are provided, from which the respective frequency range enabling the best data transmission quality is selected.12-08-2011
20110194493Method for Transferring a Base Station of a Wireless Communication Network from a Standby Mode to a Fully Activated Mode - It is described a method for transferring a base station of a wireless communication network from a standby mode to a fully activated mode. The method includes sending an activation signal from a user equipment (UE) to the base station. The method further includes receiving the activation signal by the base station and transferring the base station (BS08-11-2011
20110194492Service Discovery Mechanism in Broadcast Telecommunication Network - Aspects of the invention are directed to service discovery in a digital broadcast network. A service discovery descriptor, which may be electronic service guide-provider and cell specific, provides mapping between a service identifier, a logical channel identifier, and a physical channel, which may be characterized by a frame identifier and a slot identifier, that is, each physical channel may have one or more slots within one or more frames. A neighboring service discovery descriptor provides mapping for the service available within neighboring cells. Aspects of the invention are directed to an encapsulation protocol that encapsulates variable length data, including, but not limited to, the service discovery descriptor and the neighboring service discovery descriptor, into fixed length data stream packets.08-11-2011
20110194491METHOD OF PROCESSING A 2G CALL, DEVICE AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - A method of establishing, maintaining or releasing a call in a 3G mobile communications network, wherein at least one 2G terminal participates in said call. The method comprises the steps of: at a network entity, checking whether an incoming signal from a mobile terminal is a 2G signal or not and, if said signal is a 2G signal: extracting the user information from said signal and checking whether its content is user payload or signalling information, and: if it is signalling information, checking whether it is a channel request or a disconnection request. The method further comprises, if it is user payload instead of signalling information, encapsulating said user payload in a frame of a call established on a radio access bearer and sending said frame to a higher level network entity.08-11-2011
20110194490METHOD FOR TCP ACK CONTAINMENT IN UNIDIRECTIONAL FLOWS WITH CROSS LAYER OPTIMIZATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method that addresses a cross layer optimization technique for TCP in which the need to send ACK frames across wireless links is contained by using the information from the MAC layer acknowledgements is disclosed. More specifically the method significantly reduces bandwidth consumption and improves the performance of TCP on wireless networks. Furthermore, since the number of transmitted and received packets is reduced at the mobile device, the battery life of the device can be improved significantly. The proposed method can also be applied to downlink and uplink ACK frames with a slight variation between the two.08-11-2011
20110194489WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a wireless communication device including a receiving unit that receives, from one or more than one first wireless communication devices, information indicating an order of each of the one or more than one first wireless communication devices in a queue for data communication with a second wireless communication device, an order management unit that manages an order of its own device in the queue based on the information received by the receiving unit from the one or more than one first wireless communication devices, and a transmitting unit that transmits information indicating the order of its own device in the queue managed by the order management unit.08-11-2011
20110194488Telephone System - The present invention discloses a telephone system, for establishing a connection of Internet Protocol (IP) phone with a destination via Internet, comprises a television (TV) set and a smart phone device. The smart phone device transmits a voice signal generated by a microphone and an image signal generated by a camera via a wireless transceiver module, to another wireless transceiver module of the TV set. The TV set transfers the voice signal and the image signal to the destination and outputs a communication content of the destination via a monitor or a speaker.08-11-2011
20110194501COMMUNICATIONS METHOD AND DEVICE IN A MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - A communication method and apparatus using multiple carriers are provided. A primary carrier is configured, and multi-carrier control information for monitoring a control channel of a secondary carrier is transmitted through the primary carrier. A user equipment monitors a control channel of the secondary carrier on the basis of the multi-carrier control information.08-11-2011
20110194499MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus perform communication using a wider system band consists of carrier components, the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus flexibly use all the carrier components to perform efficient HARQ processing. A mobile communication system includes a base station apparatus and a mobile station apparatus, and the base station apparatus and the mobile station apparatus transmit and receive downlink transport block on each of carrier components and perform HARQ (Hybrid Automatic Repeat Request) processing in each of carrier components using a unified HARQ process number in a band consists of multiple carrier components.08-11-2011
20110194498METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING PACKET SWITCHED SERVICES - A method, a device, and a system for transmitting Packet Switched (PS) services are provided. The method includes: receiving an Activate Packet Data Protocol (PDP) Context Request message of PS services sent by a User Equipment (UE), in which the Activate PDP Context Request message carries an Access Point Name (APN) for identifying a first service network or a second service network (s08-11-2011
20110194497NETWORK REQUESTED PACKET DATA PROTOCOL CONTEXT ACTIVATION - A packet switched (PS) core network (CN) supporting several quality of services levels, comprising at least a serving node (SGSN), a gateway node (GGSN), a home location register (HLR), a short message service gateway and interworking unit (SMS-GMSC, SMS-IWMSC), charging gateway functionality (CGF), and a public data network (PDN) comprising an application server (AS). The core network is adapted for carrying out a packet data protocol (PDP) context activation in which a PDP address is assigned to a mobile station and in which a given quality of service is assigned through the network in a communication session between the mobile station and the application processor in question, whereby the application server (AS) initiates a context activation in which the QoS is seeked altered for the mobile station.08-11-2011
20110194496SYSTEM FOR REGISTRATION OF COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a mobile voice over internet protocol communication device, comprising a controller operable to register with a voice over internet protocol call processing system by way of a wireless fidelity access point operating in a cluster of wireless fidelity access points, and re-register with the voice over Internet Protocol call processing system by way of the wireless fidelity access point in response to receiving a re-registration request upon expiration of a timer having a period determined from one or more usage characteristics of the cluster by the mobile voice over Internet Protocol communication device. Additional embodiments are disclosed.08-11-2011
20110194495Method for Managing Radio Resources for Uplink and Downlink in Wireless Communication System - A method for managing radio resources for an uplink and a downlink in a wireless communication system is provided. The method for managing radio resources may be applied to a system based on a heterogeneous cell deployment scenario. The heterogeneous cell deployment scenario implies that a plurality of cells coexist in the wireless communication system, and transmit power, processing capacity, and/or cell coverage are different from one cell to another. In the method for managing radio resources, a mobile station included in the wireless communication system establishes an uplink and a downlink with the same base station. In addition, an asymmetric management scheme is used in which a radio resource management scheme used for the uplink is different from a radio resource management scheme used for the downlink. Accordingly, each mobile station can use a different optimal radio resource management scheme for the uplink and the downlink, each mobile station and link can be effectively controlled, and usage efficiency of radio resources can be improved.08-11-2011
20110194494COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - When communication is performed on communication equipment that is connected to a communication control system to which a mobile communication terminal is connected, and is included in a private network, the communication is performed with reduced traffic. A communication control system 08-11-2011
20110194487ENHANCED RESEQUENCING OF DATA RECEIVED OVER A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for efficiently decoding data received in the form of data packets is provided. The design includes at least one decoding unit configured to receive and decode multiple packet groups, each packet group comprising a plurality of data packets received over at least one wireless transmission channel; a buffer arrangement configured to collect complete and incomplete packet groups received over each wireless transmission channel, and a processor configured to direct data packets from the at least one decoding unit to specific locations in the buffer arrangement. The processor further inserts later received data packets into associated packet groups maintained in the buffer arrangement to minimize sequence gaps in the data packets. The design subsequently provides multiple packet groups and any later received data packets from the buffer arrangement to a resequencer.08-11-2011
20090122750Internet Protocol Version 4 Support for Proxy Mobile Internet Protocol Version 6 Route Optimization Protocol - A network component comprising at least one processor configured to implement a method comprising promoting an optimization of a communications route associated with a mobile node (MN) and a correspondent node (CN) using Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) packets is disclosed. Also disclosed is a network comprising a mobility access gateway (MAG) in communication with a MN, and a CN in communication with the MAG and that desires to communicate with the MN, wherein a communications route between the MN and the CN is optimized using IPv4 signaling. Included is a method comprising promoting an optimization of a communications route between a MN and a CN using IPv4 signaling. Standalone CNs and CNs under a MAG embodiments are supported.05-14-2009
20090122749Method and apparatus for localizing AM/FM/XM radio advertisement - Within a metropolitan area, existing AM/FM radio audience listens to same advertisement message at a time throughout the whole area. Such advertisement could be out of listener's interest if ad sponsor is located geographically far away from the listener. Business owner, such as auto dealer, restaurants or grocery store, may want to reach nearby local customer via radio advertisement. With this invention, radio broadcasting companies can air different advertisements at a time tailored to listeners in a specific sub-areas. They can air multiple advertisements simultaneously each of which is focused on local town or county listeners.05-14-2009
20100157889SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING EFFICIENCY OF BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast transmission in a multi-hop wireless mesh communication network. When an intelligent access point (IAP) receives a broadcast packet (BP), the IAP can determine a list of downlink child mesh nodes (DLCMNs) of the IAP based on route information provided in its routing table. After the IAP knows its DLCMNs, the IAP can determine a first lowest data rate (LDR) between the IAP and each of its DLCMNs, and then re-transmit the BP at the first LDR. The BP is then received by at least one “parent” mesh node, which can then perform similar processing, and can then re-transmit the BP to its DLCMNs. This process repeats until the BP reaches a leaf mesh node. In other words, each mesh node can determine its DLCMNs, determine the LDR between itself and each of its DLCMNs, and can then re-transmit the BP at this LDR.06-24-2010
20100157905APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEARCHING ROUTE OF MOBILE NODE IN SHORT-RANGE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided for searching a route of a mobile node in a short-range communication environment. A first router to which a mobile node belongs acquires a unique address of the mobile node for communication with the mobile node. The first router determines whether the mobile node travels during communication. When the mobile node travels, the first router broadcasts the unique address of the mobile node to one or more neighboring routers and determines whether the one or more neighboring routers include the mobile node. If a second router, which is one of the one or more neighboring routers, includes the mobile node, the second router performs communication using the unique address without an additional address acquisition process.06-24-2010
20100157886PREAMBLE CAPTURE AND MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL - An apparatus and method for wireless communications configured to receive simultaneous transmissions from a plurality of wireless devices, with each of the transmissions having a reference signal, acquire the reference signals and, based on information obtained from the acquisition of the reference signals, select the transmission from one of the wireless devices for timing synchronization and decoding.06-24-2010
20100157903METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EFFICIENT BANDWIDTH UTILIZATION FOR SUBSCRIBER UNIT INITIALIZATION AND SYNCHRONIZATION IN A TIME-SYNCHRONIZED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A bandwidth efficient subscriber unit initialization and synchronization method and apparatus is described. The inventive subscriber unit initialization and synchronization method and apparatus uses a combination of an access burst format and a data transportation technique to efficiently use bandwidth when initializing and synchronizing subscriber units in a time-synchronized communication system. Advantageously, the present invention provides a mechanism for a base station to receive multiple access bursts from multiple subscriber units in a single contiguous time period. In the preferred embodiment of the present invention, bandwidth is efficiently utilized by searching for multiple initial access bursts from multiple mobile stations during a single time period known as a new access opportunity. The preferred embodiment of the present invention initializes and synchronizes subscriber units in a “contention-based” manner.06-24-2010
20090207784RANK FEEDBACK METHOD FOR MULTIPLE-INPUT MULTIPLE-OUTPUT TRANSMISSION - A method for transmitting a plurality of control information through a PUCCH or a PUSCH is disclosed. The method includes transmitting first control information, and transmitting second control information. The transmission of the first control information and the transmission of the second control information are performed in units of one subframe and are performed once per predetermined period, respectively. In a subframe in which the transmission of the second control information is to be simultaneously performed with the transmission of the first control information, the second control information is excluded for transmission or the first and the second information are simultaneously transmitted, according to the configuration of a closed-loop system or an open-loop system.08-20-2009
20100118779RETRANSMISSION REQUEST TRANSMITTING METHOD AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission request transmitting method, an RLC sublayer of a receiving-side apparatus determines whether or not an RLC-PDU-data (or an RLC-data-Sub-PDU) not received yet is under retransmission control processing in a MAC sublayer; and generates and transmits a STATUS-PDU (NACK) including only a RLC-data-PDU which has neither been received yet nor is under the retransmission control processing in the MAC sublayer, on the basis of the determination result, at a timing when the STATUS-PDU is generated.05-13-2010
20100118785WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication device includes: a reception portion that receives a transmission request signal addressed to the wireless communication device that is transmitted from a counterpart communication device; a determination portion that, when the reception portion receives the transmission request signal, determines whether data transmission from the counterpart communication device is possible, based on an availability of a wireless transmission path; a suspension control portion that, when it is determined that the data transmission from the counterpart communication device is not possible, performs transmission control of a suspension request signal that requests suspension of the data transmission; and a response control portion that, when the determination portion determines that the data transmission from the counterpart communication device is possible after the transmission control of the suspension request signal, performs transmission control of a response signal in response to the transmission request signal addressed to the wireless communication device.05-13-2010
20100118783METHOD FOR PROVIDING PRECODING INFORMATION IN A MULTI-USER MIMO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a method for communicating in a network having a primary station and a plurality of secondary stations, said method comprising a step of, at the primary station, (a) configuring at least one downlink channel from the base station to a first secondary station, step (a) comprising (a1) signalling a first set of at least one parameter indicative of precoding applied to a first transmission from the base station to the first secondary station; (a2) signalling a second set of at least one parameter indicative of precoding applied to a second transmission from the base station to at least one second secondary station, wherein said step (a2) is carried out so that the second set of parameters contains less information than the first set of parameters.05-13-2010
20100118782METHOD FOR COMMUNICATING IN A MIMO CONTEXT - The present invention relates to a method for communicating from a primary station with an array of transmit antennas to a secondary station on a downlink channel, said method comprising steps of, at the primary station, (a) configuring the downlink channel, step (a) being subdivided into steps of: (a2) computing a precoding to be applied during a corresponding transmission from the primary station to the secondary station for each of an array of transmit antennas; (a3) applying a reversible transform N to the precoding, thus ascertaining a set of precoding coefficients substantially representative of the precoding in a transform domain; (a4) computing a set of parameters comprising at least one parameter, said parameter being substantially representative of the coefficients obtained at step (a3); (a5) signaling the set of parameters to the secondary station; (b) transmitting data to the secondary station substantially according to the precoding computed at step (a2).05-13-2010
20100118780PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - A packet communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: starting, at a predetermined sublayer of a receiving-side apparatus, a reordering timer, when receiving a second packet before receiving a first packet in a case where a sequence number of the first packet is smaller than a sequence number of the second packet; and transmitting, at the predetermined sublayer of the receiving-side apparatus, a retransmission request for the first packet, when not receiving the first packet until the reordering timer expires.05-13-2010
20100118781Transmission Scheme of Protocol Data Units During a Procedure That Comprises the Reset of the Protocol Layer - The invention relates to a method for transmitting data via a protocol sublayer of the mobile node during e.g. a handover that comprises the re-establishment of the protocol sublayer. The mobile node anticipates the handover, and has therefore more time to empty its transmission buffer of the protocol sublayer. Also, the segmentation of service data units (SDUs) into protocol data units (PDUs) is halted upon detecting the upcoming handover. The remaining unacknowledged PDUs in the buffer are then re-transmitted to the source base station such that the source base station can reassemble the corresponding SDUs. Also, the UE may prioritize the re-transmission of the unacknowledged PDUs depending on the priorities of the respective radio bearers. Therefore, after performing the handover to the target base station, the previously transmitted PDUs do not have to be transmitted again, as would be the case when no retransmission of unacknowledged PDUs takes place.05-13-2010
20100118771METHOD OF TRANSMITTING PROTOCOL MESSAGE FOR MEDIA INDEPENDENT HANDOVER IN WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method of transmitting a media independent handover (MIH) protocol message in a wireless access system. A method for a mobile node to transmit an MIH message in a wireless access system includes receiving a primitive including prescribed information from a first entity, generating the MIH message by mapping a transport address to the primitive, and transmitting the MIH message to one or more network nodes. According to the present invention, transmission defects of the message are effectively reduced by accurately mapping an MIHF ID and a transport address.05-13-2010
20100118777MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATTION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - When a mobile station 05-13-2010
20100118775Wireless mesh network system and control method thereof, and wireless device - A wireless mesh network system includes a plurality of wireless devices adapted to forward a message packet. Each of the wireless devices includes a transmitting unit, receiving unit, a communications controller, and a RAM. Further, the communications controller controls such that an original source address contained in a message packet forwarded by a wireless device, which is an address of the wireless device that has firstly transmitted the message packet, and a packet number that identifies the message packet are stored in the RAM, and controls such that a message packet received is forwarded if information contained in the message packet received is not consistent with information of the original source address and the packet number stored in the RAM.05-13-2010
20100118770System and method for transferring data using variance based messaging - A system and method for providing data transfer from a source node to a destination node in a network using variance based messaging is provided. The method comprises the steps of receiving one or more messages by the source node; selecting a plurality of messages to be grouped from the one or more messages, wherein the plurality of messages comprise data with minimum deviation in content; creating an integrated message from the plurality of messages; sending the integrated message from the source node to the destination node; and recreating each message of the plurality of messages at the destination node.05-13-2010
20130028197Method for Updating and Managing Synchronization Identifier by using Release Messages or Status Request and Response - A method for communicating additional network information using a synchronization identifier is presented. A synchronization identifier is defined. The synchronization identifier is used for the purpose of synchronizing communication between a Mobile Station (MS) and a network. In addition, the synchronization identifier is used to define additional functionality in the wireless network. As such, the synchronization identifier may be used to communicate information about wireless services and/or wireless components between the MS and the network.01-31-2013
20100074186APPARATUS, AND ASSOCIATED METHOD, FOR FACILITATING ROUTING OF DATA IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING A MOBILE NODE CAPABLE OF ROAMING MOVEMENT - Apparatus, and an associated method, for providing routing information to a mobile node operable in a radio communication system. The routing information is used by the mobile node to address data messages that are to be communicated to a relay host, or other, device. The routing information that is provided to the mobile node includes a plurality of separate routing sequences. Different ones of the routing sequences are used by the mobile node, depending upon at what location that the mobile node is positioned when the data message is sent. A registration server is used by which to create the routing information, responsive to indications of a home network associated with the mobile node and a current location of the mobile node.03-25-2010
20100074185MOBILE NETWORK DEVICE MULTI-LINK OPTIMIZATIONS - Methods and apparatus for performing optimizations for a mobile network device such as a Mobile Node or Mobile Router supporting multiple links to a Home Agent (or Correspondent Node in a Mobile IPv6 environment) are disclosed. During the registration process, link characteristics are transmitted in the registration request. From the link characteristics, it is possible to determine whether the mobile network device has roamed from a high to a low bandwidth link, or vice versa. A first set of optimizations may be performed when the mobile network device has roamed from a high to a low bandwidth link, while a second set of optimizations may be performed when the mobile network device has roamed from a low to a high bandwidth link. Some optimizations may be performed during the establishment of a TCP session, while others may be performed during or upon completion of the Mobile IP registration process.03-25-2010
20100074184METHOD OF COMMUNICATION BETWEEN MOBILE STATION AND BASE STATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Method of communication between a mobile station and a base station in a mobile communication system of IMT-2000 communication network basis, which is suitable for effective transmission of various multimedia information within a given channel capacity, the method including the steps of (1) when a mobile station receives a data transmission request, providing one portion of a period of a data frame with regular number and arrangement of down link slots and up link slots and the other portion of the data frame with irregular number and arrangement of down link slots or/and up link slots depending on characteristics and amount of subscriber data to be transmitted, (2) determining a transmission type according to which a communication is executed using a competition period for determining priorities of the subscriber data, a reservation period for making a reservation for time slots for use in transmission of the subscriber data, and an assignment period for assigning a memory period according to an amount of the subscriber data, which periods are selectively and respectively included in the one portion of the data frame and in the other portion of the data frame, and (3) providing the data frame according to the transmission type and transmitting to the base station.03-25-2010
20100074183MODE SWITCHING FOR A DOWNLINK COORDINATED MULTIPOINT COMMUNICATION - A mode-switching network transmitter is for use with a network MIMO super cell and includes a super cell control unit configured to orchestrate a transmission from the network MIMO super cell, wherein the transmission is supplied from a portion of super cell transmission points. The mode-switching network transmitter also includes a transmission unit configured to provide the transmission. Additionally, a transmission mode-switching receiver is for use with user equipment in a network MIMO super cell and includes a reception unit configured to receive a transmission for the user equipment within the network MIMO super cell. The transmission mode-switching receiver also includes a processing unit configured to process the transmission, wherein the transmission is supplied from a portion of super cell transmission points.03-25-2010
20100074182METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SUSPENDING DATA - The present invention relates to telecommunication technologies, and provides a method and a device for suspending data to perform effective data suspension in an Evolved UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (EUTRAN) system. In the method, the lower layer performs re-establishment; the upper layer sends data to the lower layer after completion of the re-establishment; and the upper layer suspends the data of the data link or instructs the lower layer to suspend the data of the data link after a data suspension is triggered. The technical solution under the present invention is widely applicable to the EUTRAN system, in which data suspension can be performed according to characters of different protocol layers, and sending of data control can be effectively.03-25-2010
20100074180SYNCHRONIZING A BASE STATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for synchronizing a wireless communication system is disclosed. A silence duration for a base station is determined based on the time required for a neighbor base station to obtain or maintain synchronization. All transmissions from the base station are ceased for the silence duration. Multiple base stations level may cease transmissions at the same time, thus mitigating interference.03-25-2010
20100074179MOBILITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, MOBILE TERMINAL MANAGEMENT METHOD USED FOR THEM, AND ITS PROGRAM - A mobility management system manages mobility of any one mobile terminal with a different mobility protocol depending on an access method. The system comprises an anchor node haying a function of managing a CMIP (Client Mobile Internet Protocol) SA (Security Association) and a PMIP (Proxy MIP) SA used to authenticate a location registration message of said mobile terminal.03-25-2010
20100074178Method for Indication of Consecutive Data Units in a RAN - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for improving the performance of a radio access network. The object is achieved by a data packet (03-25-2010
20100074177Exchange of Information in a Communication Network - A portable node capable of forming ad hoc networks with other nodes is disclosed, as well as a method of transferring at least a first and a second information entity (e.g. files) from a first node to other nodes in an ad hoc network. At least the first and the second information entities are jointly encoded, in the first node, into a composite information entity) in a manner so that the composite information entity can be decoded by use of at least the first information entity or the second information entity. The composite information entity is subsequently transmitted.03-25-2010
20100074174SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR SWITCHING DATA AT NODES OF WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for switching data at nodes of a wireless networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a node comprises memory, a first port, a second port, a virtual machine, and logic. The memory is configured to store port settings, and the virtual machine is configured to execute a remote procedure call wirelessly transmitted to the node through the wireless network. In executing the remote procedure call, the virtual machine is configured to set the port settings. The logic is configured to receive data from the first port and to transmit the data to the second port based on the port settings without processing of the data by the virtual machine such that the data streams unchanged through the node from the first port to the second port.03-25-2010
20100074173SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR UPDATING SCRIPT IMAGES IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for updating script images in wireless sensor networks. In one exemplary embodiment, a system has logic that is configured to display a list of nodes of a wireless sensor network. The logic is further configured to display a script source of a first script image stored at one of the nodes in response to a selection of the one node from the displayed list of nodes. The logic is also configured to modify the script source based on user input and to convert the modified script source to a second script image. The logic is configured to transmit at least one remote procedure call through the wireless sensor network to the one node. The one node is configured to write the second script image in memory of the one node in response to the at least one remote procedure call.03-25-2010
20100074172METHOD FOR RECEPTION OF DATA PACKETS AND CORRESPPONDING TRANSMISSION METHOD - the method is implemented in a first station, data packets being transmitted by at least two second stations intended for the first station, said second stations belonging to a set comprising more than one second stations, the method comprising a transmission of at least one acknowledgement of each data packet received at least once correctly, said acknowledgement(s) being transmitted to each second station of said set.03-25-2010
20100074171PACKET COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A packet communication method of the present invention includes a step of: receiving, at a mobile station (UE), restriction information for accepting an incoming call and restricting an outgoing call; establishing, at the mobile station (UE), a control path with a packet exchange (SGSN) in response to incoming of paging for the mobile station (UE); sending, the packet exchange (SGSN), a message instructing to establish the data path via the control path; and establishing, at the mobile station (UE), the data path by calling to the packet exchange (SGSN), when the mobile station (UE) receives the message after the mobile station (UE) has received the restriction information.03-25-2010
20100074170APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ALLEVIATING BARRED ACCESS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment for alleviating barred access while reselecting from a first cell to a second cell in a mobile communication system is provided. A wireless module detects receives system information broadcasted in the first cell. A storage unit stores the system information. A controller reselects from the first cell to the second cell, determines whether a first barred access timer is running, and stops the first barred access timer and informs the upper layer of an RRC protocol that the access of the first service is allowed in response of that the first barred access timer is running.03-25-2010
20100074169PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM, PACKET TRANSMISSION METHOD, PACKET UPDATE METHOD, HOST APPARATUS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT THEREOF FOR THE PACKET TRANSMISSION SYSTEM - A packet transmission system, a packet transmission method, a packet update method, a host apparatus, and a computer program product thereof for the packet transmission system are provided. The packet transmission method comprises the following steps: transmitting a first positioning packet that has a first message serial number; receiving the first positioning packet; generating a temporary packet that has a second message serial number; determining that the first message serial number is smaller than the second message serial number; transmitting the temporary packet; receiving the temporary packet and updating the first message serial as the second message serial number; and transmitting a second positioning packet that has the second message serial number. Thereby, the system not only prevents repeat transmission, but also enhances positioning reliability by using two-way transmission.03-25-2010
20100074168METHOD OF GENERATING A BUFFER STATUS FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND RELATED DEVICE - A method of generating a buffer state of a packet data convergence protocol, hereinafter called PDCP, layer for a user equipment in a wireless communication system includes including volume information of packets, which have been submitted to a layer lower than the PDCP layer and have not been confirmed by the layer or by a PDCP status report, in a buffer state report of the PDCP layer, where the packets have not been confirmed by the layer due to buffer clearing of the layer.03-25-2010
20100074181APPARATUS AND MESSAGES FOR INTERWORKING BETWEEN UNLICENSED ACCESS NETWORK AND GPRS NETWORK FOR DATA SERVICES - Methods for performing various operations via unlicensed mobile access (UMA) radio link control (URLC) messages in an unlicensed mobile access network (UMAN). The UMAN comprises a first radio access network that may be employed for accessing data services provided by a core network comprising a second radio access network. URLC messages are exchanged between mobile stations (MSs) and UMA network controllers (UNCs) to perform various operations associated with the UMAN. An MS may access the UMAN via a wireless access point (AP) that is communicatively coupled to a UNC via an IP network. The URLC messages are sent between MSs and UNCs using an Up interface comprising a set of layered protocols over an underlying IP transport.03-25-2010
20130136056DISTRIBUTED CONTENT MANAGEMENT WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A mobile network includes a metro ethernet ring including SPGW-X servers, each of the SPGW-X servers including a processor, a memory, function modules and a Gi interface, the function modules including a Serving Gateway (SGW) module, PDN Gateway (PGW) data plane module, transport layer services module, content management module and application layer services module, a PGW-Y server, the PRW-Y server including a processor, a memory and function modules, the function modules include a PGW control plane module, PGW data plane module, centralized services module and a Gi interface, and a mobility management entity (MME), an ISP/private network linked to the Gi interfaces of the plurality of SPGW-X servers, and a centralized Packet Data Network (PDN) and a central IP backbone linked to the Gi interface of the PGW-Y server.05-30-2013
20090067367Method for configuring a radio terminal through a radio communication network, related network and computer program product therefor - A method for configuring a re-configurable radio terminal through a communication network operating according to a communication system, wherein the radio terminal is configured for exchanging information with at least one node of the communication network by using the communicating system. The method is characterized by the steps of associating with the one node of the communication network a server entity configured for using a protocol layer of the communication system and including a set of operating software modules for configuring the radio terminal with at least one set of elements of protocol stack suitable to reconfigure the radio terminal; associating with the radio terminal a client entity configured for using a respective protocol layer corresponding to the protocol layer of the server entity, establishing an over-the-air connection between the radio terminal and the server entity by using the protocol layer, and downloading at least one module of the set of operating software modules from the server to the radio terminal configuring at least in part the radio terminal.03-12-2009
20130077573METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION VIA A SPATIAL RANK INDEX (SRI) CHANNEL - A method for transmitting feedback information via a Spatial Rank Index (SRI) channel includes determining, at an access terminal, a value of a spatial rank index and transmitting, from the access terminal through the SRI channel, feedback information indicating the determined value of the spatial rank index according to a prescribed coding. The codeword of the prescribed coding is one of: (0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0), (1,0,1,0,1,1,0,1), (0,1,1,1,0,0,1,1), or (1,1,0,1,1,1,1,0).03-28-2013
20130077567WIRELESS TERMINAL, GATEWAY SELECTION METHOD, AND WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A wireless terminal includes a detection section that detects, from a packet received from a plurality of gateways, a control packet broadcast from the plurality of gateways, a candidate specifying section that specifies a plurality of gateways as candidates for connection from a sender gateway that sent the detected control packet, and a selection section that selects one of the specified gateways as a gateway for establishment of connection.03-28-2013
20130077570APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACCESSING LOCAL NETWORK IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING LOCAL NETWORK INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS SCHEME - An apparatus and method for accessing a local network in a mobile communication system supporting a Local Network Internet Protocol Access (LIPA) scheme are provided. In the method, a User Equipment (UE) transmits a radio bearer set up request packet to a router connected to a femto Node B in order to set up a radio bearer with the femto Node B, thereby the router converts the radio bearer set up request packet into a port forward radio bearer set up request packet using a port forward function, and transmits the port forward radio bearer set up request packet to the femto Node B.03-28-2013
20130077569APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for a User Equipment in a wireless network including at least one Base Station (BS) are provided. The method includes receiving an Information Element (IE) for configuring at least one of a PUSCH power control method and a PUSCH DMRS generation method from the BS, determining a state of the IE, and transmitting a PUSCH and a DMRS for the PUSCH according to the state of the IE. A transmission power of the PUSCH is controlled and a base sequence for the PUSCH DMRS is generated according to the state of the IE. When the state of the IE indicates a first state, the transmission power of the PUSCH is determined according to a first power control equation. When the state of the IE indicates a second state, the transmission power of the PUSCH is determined according to a second power control equation.03-28-2013
20130077568TERMINAL DEVICE IDENTIFYING TARGET ACCESS POINT FROM AMONG A PLURALITY OF ACCESS POINTS - A terminal device includes a communication unit, and a first identifying unit. The communication unit is configured to wirelessly communicate with a plurality of access points, receive an output signal from each of the plurality of access points, and send an instruction to an image processing device through one of the plurality of access points. The first identifying unit is configured to identify, from among the plurality of access points, at least one accessible access point from which the communication unit is currently capable of receiving the outputted signal, and identify a target access point through which the communication unit most recently has sent the instruction to the image processing device from among the at least one accessible access point. The communication unit connects to the target access point.03-28-2013
20130077566UNIPOLAR ANTENNA, WIRELESS ACCESS APPARATUS AND WIRELESS ROUTER - The present disclosure discloses a unipolar antenna, a wireless access apparatus and a wireless router. The unipolar antenna of the present disclosure comprises a medium substrate, as well as a power feeding point, a feeder line and a metal structure that are disposed on a surface of the medium substrate. The feeder line is connected to the power feeding point, and the feeder line and the metal structure are coupled with each other. The unipolar antenna, the wireless access apparatus and the wireless router of the present disclosure can transmit or receive electromagnetic signals of two or more different wavebands simultaneously so that they can operate within multiple operation wavebands in a single-frequency mode and operate within different operation wavebands simultaneously in a multi-frequency mode. Thereby, the antenna can be miniaturized on the premise of satisfying the performance requirements of the communication devices.03-28-2013
20130077564METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A WIRELESS PACKET CABLE ENDPOINT - Methods and apparatuses for recognizing a short range wireless protocol enabled device as a packet-cable endpoint are disclosed. A gateway can provide existing and enhanced services to an end-user over a short range wireless protocol network. A user will have a flexible option to use packet-cable services over any short range wireless protocol enabled user equipment. The user equipment, acting as a packet-cable endpoint, works as a phone or fax machine, providing packet-cable services over a short range wireless protocol connection.03-28-2013
20100034141METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIATING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for wireless communications is provided. The method includes receiving measurement gap information and receiving random access procedure information. The method also includes scheduling a random access procedure based on the measurement gap information and the random access procedure information. By scheduling random access procedures in view of the measurement gap information, network bandwidth can be conserved.02-11-2010
20130083725METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ENFORCING A COMMON USER POLICY WITHIN A NETWORK - In some embodiments, an apparatus includes a core network node configured to be operatively coupled to a set of wired network nodes and a set of wireless network nodes. The core network node is configured to receive, at a first time, a first data packet to be sent to a wired device operatively coupled to a wired network node from the set of wired network nodes. The core network node is configured to also receive, at a second time, a second data packet to be sent to a wireless device operatively coupled to a wireless network node from the set of wireless network nodes. The core network node is configured to apply a common policy to the first data packet and the second data packet based on an identifier of a user associated with both the wireless device and the wired device.04-04-2013
20130083727MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR SETTING HOLDING PERIOD OF CONNECTION INFORMATION - In a mobile communication system, a mobile station notifies a first base station of a first holding period when a first mode, in which the mobile station performs wireless communication with one of the first base station and a second base station, is set, and notifies the first base station of a second holding period which is longer than the first holding period when a second mode, in which the mobile station performs wireless communication with the first base station and does not performs wireless communication with the second base station, is set. The first base station discards connection information when the notified holding period has elapsed after the mobile station is unable to perform the wireless communication with the first base station.04-04-2013
20130083726SMALL DATA TRANSMISSION TECHNIQUES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe techniques and configurations for transmitting small data payloads in a wireless communication network. An apparatus may include non-access stratum (NAS) circuitry configured to receive a trigger to send a data payload to a wireless communication network, the data payload having a size that is less than a preconfigured threshold, and generate a NAS message including the data payload and access stratum (AS) circuitry coupled with the NAS circuitry and configured to transmit the NAS message including the data payload to a node comprising a Mobility Management Entity (MME) or a Serving GPRS (General Packet Radio Service) Support Node (SGSN). Other embodiments may be described and/or claimed.04-04-2013
20130039276HOME GATEWAY - In a home gateway including an in-home radio base station and the like, a technique not only has a relay function but also enables information useful for a user to be obtained. A home gateway including an in-home radio base station includes a wireless communication section, a wired communication section, and an application execution section. To perform relaying, the in-home radio base station uses first and second protocol stacks. To transmit and receive data to and from a wireless terminal, the in-home radio base station uses a third protocol stack including the first protocol stack and an application layer. To transmit and receive data to and from a PDN, the in-home radio base station uses a fourth protocol stack including the second protocol stack and an application layer.02-14-2013
20130039271MODULAR WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - In view of the above, a wireless network access device is provided. In an example implementation, the wireless network access device includes a radio interface having a plurality of individually addressable radio paths for providing a connection to corresponding radio modules. Each radio module includes a radio configured to communicate with client devices in a corresponding coverage area. Each radio module is configured to operate independently of the other radio modules. A network interface is included to provide data network access. The wireless network access device includes a processor to manage communication between the client devices that communicate with the radio modules and a data network via the radio interface and the network interface when the wireless local area network device includes at least one connected radio module.02-14-2013
20130039270DATA PACKET TRANSMISSION PROCESS IN A LINK ADAPTATION TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM BASED ON A HARQ PROTOCOL FOR OPTIMISING TRANSMISSION POWER - The invention relates to a data packet transmission process in a communication system comprising at least one terminal (UE) communicating with a base station (BS), the process comprising at least one transmission (S02-14-2013
20130039269Methods, Apparatus and Wireless Device for Transmitting and Receiving Data Blocks - A wireless transmitter transmits a plurality of data blocks defined in a transmission window for receipt by a receiver. The transmitter transmits a status request to the receiver for positive acknowledgement of successful receipt of the status request, the status request identifying a data block. The transmitter updates the transmission window upon receipt of a positive acknowledgement of receipt of a data block or upon receipt of a positive acknowledgement of receipt of a status request relating to a data block. The updating removes the record of the data block from the transmission window and adds a record of at least one different data block to the transmission window.02-14-2013
20130039266SYSTEM AND METHOD TO INCREASE LINK ADAPTATION PERFORMANCE WITH MULTI-LEVEL FEEDBACK - A method and apparatus for explicit adaptive modulation and coding scheme selection, the method receiving, at a mobile device, a transport block targeted to the mobile device, and if a quality of the received transport block exceeds a threshold, providing an acknowledgment or negative acknowledgment to a network element; and if the quality of the received transport block is below the threshold, suppressing the acknowledgment or negative acknowledgement.02-14-2013
20130034060METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING EMPS IN A CSFB MECHANISM - Embodiments of the present invention provide a method, an apparatus, and a system for processing an eMPS in a CSFB mechanism. The method in the embodiment of the present invention mainly includes: receiving a CSFB access request of a user equipment; determining that the user equipment has a CSFB priority service right according to acquired priority service information of the user equipment; and providing a CSFB access service preferentially for the user equipment with the CSFB priority service right.02-07-2013
20130077572MULTIPLE-ANTENNA SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR COMMUNICATION AND BROADCASTING - A reception method and apparatus for use in a multi-cell orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) wireless system. In a unicast receive mode during a first receive time period, a first group of orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols is received by a mobile device from multiple of a plurality of antennas at a serving base station. In a single-frequency-network (SFN) receive mode during a second receive time period, a second group of OFDM symbols is received by the mobile device from one of a plurality of antennas at the serving base station. The transition between the first receive time period and the second receive time period occurs during a cyclic prefix or a cyclic postfix between OFDM symbols, and the plurality of antennas produce a first beam pattern during the unicast receive mode and a second beam pattern during the SFN receive mode.03-28-2013
20130077571METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL FOR A SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNAL - A method and apparatus for transmitting a reference signal from a User Equipment (UE) are provided. The method includes transmitting a first reference signal using a sequence determined from an identity of the at least one transmission point and transmitting a second reference signal with a transmission power having an offset with a first maximum value configured by higher layer signaling from the at least one transmission point; and transmitting a first reference signal using a sequence configured to the UE by higher layer signaling from the at least one transmission point and transmitting a second reference signal with a transmission power having an offset with a second maximum value configured by higher layer signaling from the at least one transmission point, wherein the second maximum value is larger than the first maximum value, and the first reference signal and the second reference signal are either identical or non-identical.03-28-2013
20090316627Uplink modulation and receiver structures for asymmetric OFDMA systems - The present invention centers upon uplink communication protocols for use primarily with orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) communication systems. Aspects of the invention relate to narrow band frequency division multiplexed (NBFDM) modulation protocols primarily for uplink usage in asymmetric OFDMA communication systems. In particular, NBFDM uplinks that use quadrature multiplexed continuous phase modulation are detailed and noncoherent detection schemes are developed to process the uplink channel signals without the need to transmit uplink phase reference signals. Other aspects of the invention relate to burst mode uplink communications in OFDMA systems such as those involving opportunistic beamforming.12-24-2009
20100046438Method and System for Implementing Data Routing of Roaming User - A method and system for implementing data routing of a roaming user are disclosed. The method comprises: configuring a roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; during the registering process of the user in the roaming network, performing an interactive negotiation between the home network and the roaming network, so as to determine one of the home network and the roaming network to allocate IP address according to the roaming protocol between the home network and the roaming network; and establishing the IP access bearer based on the IP address. A corresponding system is also provided. The routing of the roaming user data plane could be optimized under the control of the home network operator, and the IP address of the default IP bearer for the roaming user could be allocated by the roaming network as much as possible, while guaranteeing of the home network operator's interest and dominant position, so as to optimize the routing of the data plane for the roaming user, improve the performance of the data service and bring a better service experience to the roaming user.02-25-2010
20100046437COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication apparatus includes a receiving device configured to receive one physical frame in which a plurality of MAC frames are aggregated. This physical frame includes one acknowledgement request frame for the plurality of MAC frames. The apparatus includes an acknowledgement frame forming device configured to form an acknowledgement frame representing reception statuses of the plurality of MAC frames in response to the acknowledgement request frame. The apparatus also includes a transmitting device configured to transmit the acknowledgement frame. This acknowledgement frame includes a compressed acknowledgement frame representing an acknowledgement bitmap having a size equal to a maximum number of MSDUs (MAC Service Data Units) when one MPDU (MAC Protocol Data Unit) corresponds to one MSDU.02-25-2010
20100046435ROUTING TABLE GENERATION, DATA TRANSMISSION AND ROUTING ROUTE FORMATION METHOD FOR MULTI-HOP SERVICES IN HIGH RATE WIRELESS PERSONAL NETWORKS - Provided are a routing table generating method, a data transmission method, and a routing route formation method for multi-hop communication in high rate wireless personal networks. In a high rate WPAN environment including a plurality of piconets, a piconet controller (PNC), which performs a topology server function to provide the optimal route, collects link state information from the PNCs or DEVs (devices) belonging to a sub-tree that serves as a root and applies a minimum cost algorithm based on the collected link state information to calculate the optimal route for all pairs of originations and destinations existing within the sub-tree in consideration of QoS. The optimal route information is transmitted to the origination PNC via the destination PNC/DEV. During performing this, the optimal route between the pairs of originations and destinations is set.02-25-2010
20100046434NETWORK-BASED AND HOST-BASED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT IN PACKET-BASED COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - The present invention describes a method for signalling to a mobility anchor point a position of a mobile node in a network using a network-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of the mobile node, said method comprising receiving, by a network element, from the mobile node, during or after network authentication of the mobile node, a sequence number used by a process implementing a mobile node-based mobility management scheme for managing the mobility of the mobile node, and transmitting, by the network element, to the mobility anchor point a message on a position of the mobile node in the network, wherein said message comprises the received sequence number. A common sequence number variable for BU and PBU messages is used, so that the HA is able to determine a correct transmission order of PBU/BU messages based on the sequence number in the message.02-25-2010
20100046433LOGICAL INTERFACE ESTABLISHING METHOD, RADIO BASE STATION, AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS - A plug-and-play radio base station autonomously establishes X2 logical interfaces and S1 logical interfaces with existing base stations and upper nodes. A new radio base station which is installed in a network advertises an IP address of the new radio base station over a transport network. An existing radio base station or an upper node which receives the IP address detects the number of hops from the new radio base station to the existing radio base station or the upper node. An initial logical interface with the new radio base station is established when the detected number of hops is below a predetermined threshold.02-25-2010
20100046432METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING SIGNAL AND INFORMATION ON ANTENNA, AND METHOD FOR ESTIMATING THE NUMBER OF ANTENNAS - A base station applies frequency switching transmission diversity and a preceding vector to a synchronization channel and applies a space-frequency block coding and a preceding vector to a broadcast channel. The base station controls the synchronization channel and the broadcast channel to be positioned adjacent each other and then generates and transmits a downlink frame. The base station includes partial information on the number of antennas in the synchronization channel, and other information thereon in the broadcast channel.02-25-2010
20100046431FAST UPLINK RANGING SYSTEM AND METHOD IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a fast uplink ranging system and method in a mobile communication system. According to the present invention, a fast uplink ranging system transmits two pairs of ranging codes having the same value at locations spaced by half of FFT pointers. The fast uplink ranging system calculates a correlation value using the received two pairs of ranging codes. An order in which complex exponential twiddle factors for removing complex exponential terms corresponding to a time delay are searched is determined using the correlation value. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a time required for searching a timing error of a terminal using non-periodic symmetry of complex exponential twiddle factors corresponding to the timing error, compared with a known method of searching a complex exponential twiddle factor.02-25-2010
20100046430WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A wireless communication device includes: a control unit configured to control communication data; and memory configured to store communication data; wherein the control unit performs processing of setting a re-order buffer corresponding to a source address, for storing received data in increments of source address in the memory, storing received packets from a single data source in the re-order buffer corresponding to a source address, and arraying the packet order following sequence numbers set to the received packets.02-25-2010
20100046428Method and apparatus of performing cell re-search between heterogeneous networks - A method and apparatus of performing cell re-search between heterogeneous networks is provided. A mobile terminal (MT) accesses to a high rate packet data (HRPD) network. The MT receives a first message from the HRPD network. The first message includes neighbor radio access technology (RAT) indicator which indicates whether neighbor RAT information used to perform inter-RAT measurement is transmitted from the HRPD network. The MT receives a second message from the HRPD network if the neighbor RAT indicator indicates the transmission of the neighbor RAT information. The second message includes the neighbor RAT information. The MT performs cell re-search on the basis of the neighbor RAT information.02-25-2010
20100046427MULTIPLE ANTENNA MODE CONTROL METHOD BASED ON ACCESS POINT - A multiple antenna mode control method based on an Access Point comprises the following steps: step 1, the Access Point periodically sends out a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Access Point (S02-25-2010
20100046426METHODS FOR PROVIDING AN AD HOC MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYSTEMS THEREOF - A method, computer readable medium, and system for providing a mobile communication network includes dynamically forming a plurality of mobile communication devices into one or more clusters based on one or more parameters, each of the one or more clusters having a tree structure. Each of the one or more clusters are at least partially meshed together. At least one virtual identifier is dynamically assigned to each of the plurality of mobile communication devices based on the tree structure of each of the one or more clusters. The virtual identifier provides address information for routing communications between two or more of the plurality of mobile communication devices.02-25-2010
20100046425RANDOM ACCESS PREAMBLE SELECTION - The present invention relates to methods for establishing a connection between a user equipment and a wireless network. More particularly, the present invention relates to methods for selecting a preamble based on its power back-off metric in order to randomly access a wireless network while avoiding collisions with other user equipments attempting to access the network at the same time.02-25-2010
20100046429Wireless Communications System That Supports Multiple Modes Of Operation - A wireless communications adapts its mode of operation between spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing in response to transmission-specific variables. An embodiment of a wireless communications system for transmitting information between a base transceiver station and a subscriber unit includes mode determination logic. The mode determination logic is in communication with the base transceiver station and the subscriber unit. The mode determination logic determines, in response to a received signal, if a subscriber datastream should be transmitted between the base transceiver station and the subscriber unit utilizing spatial multiplexing or non-spatial multiplexing. In an embodiment, the mode determination logic has an input for receiving a measure of a transmission characteristic related to the received signal. In an embodiment, the mode determination logic includes logic for comparing the measured transmission characteristic to a transmission characteristic threshold and for selecting one of spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing in response to the comparison of the measured transmission characteristic to the transmission characteristic threshold. In an embodiment, the transmission characteristic includes at least one of delay spread, post-processing signal-to-noise ratio, cyclical redundancy check (CRC) failure, residual inter-symbol interference, mean square error, coherence time, and path loss. By adapting the mode of operation in response to transmission-specific variables, the use of spatial multiplexing can be discontinued in unfavorable conditions. Additionally, because the wireless communications system can adapt its mode of operation between spatial multiplexing and non-spatial multiplexing, the communications system is compatible with both subscriber units that support spatial multiplexing and subscriber units that do not support spatial multiplexing.02-25-2010
20100046424METHOD FOR CONTROLLING LOAD MATCHING IN A RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method controls transmission of data packets in a radio communication system, with the radio communication system having at least one central node as well as at least one base station connected to it, and with the base station transmitting data packets, which have been received by the central node and have been provided with encryption by the latter, to at least one subscriber terminal via a radio interface. The base station rejects a first number of data packets, before transmission via the radio interface, as a function of the current or expected load state. A respective first information item is added to a second number of data packets to be transmitted to the subscriber terminal, in the central node after encryption, and the base station rejects or does not reject a respective data packet as a function of the first information item.02-25-2010
20100046423METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING SELECTED INTERLACE MODE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for requesting selected interlace mode with a particular sector is provided, comprising generating a SelectedInterlaceRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field, a 12 bit PilotPN field wherein the PilotPN field indicates a value of PilotPN of the sector to which the message is directed and a 4 bit InterlacesRequested field wherein the InterlacesRequested field indicates a value of requested number of interlaces and transmitting the SelectedInterlaceRequest message over a communication link. A method and apparatus for receiving and processing the SelectedInterlaceRequest message is further provided.02-25-2010
20130077565System and Method for Multiple Access Sensor Networks - A method enables a radio receiver to distinguish sensor probes supplying data to the receiver over a long period of time. The method includes each probe generating a random number sent to the receiver to identify the probe. Each probe and the receiver also uses a pseudo-random process to identify a time of transmission for each probe. The pseudo-random process helps keep the transmission times for the probes separate in the presence of oscillator drift. If a transmission collision occurs, the receiver ignores all probes in the collision and waits until the pseudo-random process separates the probe transmissions.03-28-2013
20130034058Method and system for selecting and establishing a direct interface - A method for selecting and establishing a direct interface is provided. The method includes: when a target network element accesses a network element of a core network (CN) via a target gateway, a source side or a target side selects to establish a direct interface with the target gateway and/or the target network element. A system for selecting and establishing a direct interface is also provided. The system includes a selection and establishment unit for, when the target network element accesses the network element of the CN via the target gateway, selecting to establish the direct interface with the target gateway and/or the target network element by the source side or the target side. Use of the method and system in the present invention can realize establishment of an optional direct interface, so that a plurality of direct interface schemes can be selected.02-07-2013
20130034059METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURES IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a method and apparatus in which user equipment performs random access procedures in a wireless communication system. More particularly, an embodiment is provided in which a first type backoff parameter and a second type backoff parameter are provided from a base station. The backoff parameter is transmitted from the base station before the user equipment transmits a first random access preamble to the base station. The first type backoff parameter and the second type backoff parameter are included in a random access response.02-07-2013
20130034054METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FORMATTING CYCLIC PREFIX/POSTFIX IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and transmitter, the method generating a burst containing a first data portion and a second data portion surrounding a training sequence; and appending to the burst a cyclic prefix and a cyclic postfix. Further a receiver on a network element, the receiver configured to: receive a burst containing a cyclic prefix, a cyclic postfix and a data portion; remove at least one of the cyclic prefix or the cyclic postfix; transform the data portion with a discrete Fourier transform; estimate the channel frequency response and modulation of the burst; undo an effect of a channel on the data portion by using the estimated channel frequency response of the channel on the transformed data; use an inverse discrete Fourier transform on the result of the equalizing step; and further process the output of the equalization step to decode the transmitted bits.02-07-2013
20130034056MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION SIGNAL - The present invention is provided to, when there is a PUSCH signal to transmit in the same subframe as a UCI signal, make the method of transmitting uplink control information in the LTE system adaptable to a broader system band and increase in transmission layers only by minor changes. A UCI signal is generated to a base station apparatus (02-07-2013
20130034055INTERWORKING FUNCTION BETWEEN IN AND HLR/HSS - A Core Network for data transmission in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) includes: one or more node(s) serving as a Home Location Register (HLR) according to a GSM/UMTS mobile communication network standard; a node serving as a Home Subscriber Server (HSS) according to 3GPP standards; and an Interworking Function (IWF) for the handling of messages exchanged between a signalling layer of the Core Network and the one or more node(s) serving as the Home Location Register (HLR) as well as the node serving as the Home Subscriber Server (HSS). The Core Network is arranged such that for an exchange of information between the signalling layer and the Interworking Function (IWF), an Intelligent Network (IN) or an Advanced Intelligent Network (AIN) is used.02-07-2013
20130034057POSITION MANAGING APPARATUS, PACKET GATEWAY APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - When a connecting destination base station apparatus included in a message including an identifier of a base station apparatus serving as a connecting destination of a mobile station apparatus is different from a connecting source base station apparatus stored in an EPS bearer context, rearrangement of local PDN connection is requested to an L-PGW unit of the connecting destination base station apparatus and local PDN connection is deleted. After establishment of a wireless bearer is completed between the mobile station apparatus and the connecting destination base station apparatus, the connecting destination base station apparatus is instructed to start proxy transmission of neighbor advertisement instead of the mobile station apparatus. In base stations that support local IP access, when UE performs service request processing or handover processing between home base stations, it is possible to continue communication session using local IP access while suppressing alterations to existing system to the minimum.02-07-2013
20130034053METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SCALABLE INFORMATION PACKETIZATION AND AGGREGATION FOR INFORMATION TRANSMISSION IN COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Information communication in a communication network comprises organizing information based on importance levels of the information. The information is aggregated in a packet based on said organization for transmission over a communication medium. Aggregating the information includes placing the information in the packet utilizing a scalable packet structure based on said organization. Information for a packet is partitioned based on information type, and organized in an aggregated packet in a pyramid format. Information in a packet can be organized/coded in a two-dimensional pyramid format for forwarding information from one or more communication devices. A first dimension includes information importance level and a second dimension includes device priorities based on a distance calculation.02-07-2013
20130034051METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION PAGING OF A MOBILE TERMINAL IN AN IDLE STATE - A method and apparatus are provided for reliably paging a mobile terminal in the idle mode, even in an instance in which the mobile terminal is subjected to interference from a CSG cell. In this regard, a method is provided that includes causing an indication of an inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) paging period to be provided to the mobile terminal. The indication of the ICIC paging period includes an ICIC paging period T02-07-2013
20130034052MOBILE COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - A mobile communication apparatus can perform data communication by the use of a first radio access network and a second radio access network. When a receiving section detects during time for which a processor is in a suspend state that the mobile communication apparatus moves out of a coverage area of the first radio access network, the receiving section releases the suspend state of the processor. When the suspend state of the processor is released as a result of detecting that the mobile communication apparatus moves out of the coverage area of the first radio access network, the control section establishes a connection to the second radio access network by the use of the processor.02-07-2013
20090268667Header compression mechanism for transmitting RTP packets over wireless links - This disclosure describes a new a header compression method for a MAC protocol that combines contention-free and contention-based MAC protocols into a heterogeneous MAC protocol used for forwarding VoIP traffic in VoIP systems on wireless networks using multiple base stations that reduces packet overhead thus allowing for transmission of high bit-rate data to multiple users over wired and wireless means.10-29-2009
20090175222SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING STALL USING TIMER FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - At least one timer is used to prevent a stall condition. If a timer is not active, the timer is started for a data block that is correctly received. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. When the timer is stopped or expires, all correctly received data blocks among data blocks up to and including a data block having a sequence number that is immediately before the sequence number of the data block for which the timer was started is delivered to a higher layer. Further, all correctly received data blocks up to a first missing data block, including the data block for which the timer was started, is delivered to the higher layer.07-09-2009
20090175218DIGITAL BROADCAST SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DIGITAL BROADCAST DATA, AND DATA PROCESSING METHOD FOR USE IN THE SAME - A digital broadcast system having storing resistance to errors generated during the transmission of mobile service data, and a data processing method are disclosed. The digital broadcast system additionally encodes mobile service data. As a result, the mobile service data has strong resistance to a channel variation and noise, and at the same time the system can quickly cope with the channel variation.07-09-2009
20090175217METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING ACCESS CHANNEL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for establishing an access channel in a wireless communication system is provided, comprising receiving an AccessGrant on a carrier on which the last probe was transmitted and ending an access probe transmission upon receiving the AccessGrant. A method and apparatus is further provided, comprising determining expiration of an access grant timer and ending an access probe transmission upon the expiration of the timer. A method and apparatus is further provided comprising receiving an IdleState.IdleHO indication and ending an access probe transmission upon receiving the IdleState.IdleHO indication. A method and apparatus is further provided receiving a new AttemptAccess command, wherein the AttemptAccess command is processed after a current probe transmission ends and ending an access probe transmission on receiving the new AttemptAccess command.07-09-2009
20130083731METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL AND TIMING IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION SCHEMES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus of a first cell communicates with a second cell in relation to a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission of control information by the first cell and data by the second cell to a user equipment (UE) in a range expanded region of the second cell, receives a desired transmission power level for the UE from the second cell, generates control information based on the desired transmission power level, and transmits the control information to the UE.04-04-2013
20120207090INITIALIZING A COMMUNICATION BETWEEN A MOBILE HOST AND A CORRESPONDENT NODE - Embodiments of the present invention relate to a router able to cooperate with a mobile host of a home network for initializing a communication between said mobile host and a correspondent node over at least a first and a second networks, said mobile host comprising at least a first and a second network interfaces able to connect respectively to said first and second networks, said router being further able to:08-16-2012
20120207088METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPDATING METADATA - A method and apparatus are described for updating metadata, (e.g., media presentation descriptions (MPDs)). A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) may transmit a hypertext transport protocol (HTTP) request message and receive an HTTP response message including metadata requested by the HTTP request message. The WTRU may then register with at least one server to establish a metadata update service based on information included in the metadata. The WTRU may fetch updated metadata in response to receiving a metadata update signal provided by the metadata update service. The information may identify a uniform resource identifier (URI) or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) associated with an event server used to provide the metadata update service.08-16-2012
20100103881METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL CHANNEL IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system using both a discontinuous transmission scheme and a compressed mode transmission scheme, if a preamble and/or a postamble of a channel including control information for transmitting a specific channel overlaps a compressed mode (CM) gap, an overall transmission unit is not transmitted or remaining signals of the transmission unit excluding the preamble and/or the postamble overlapping the CM gap are transmitted.04-29-2010
20100103875Establishing Parallel Tunnels for Higher Bit Rate - An object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for an improved network capacity when using fixed wireless terminal. The object is achieved by a method in a radio access network node for establishing at least two packet data tunnels for packet transmission, from a fixed wireless terminal in a local area network through a set of cells in a radio access network. The set of cells comprises at least two cells. The fixed wireless terminal is a radio access network node comprised in the radio access network. The radio access network comprises a plurality of potential cells to which the packet data tunnels may be established, whereof said set of cells are part of the potential cells. The method comprising the steps of: Selecting the set of cells to use for a packet transmission, based on radio link quality between the fixed wireless terminal and each of the respective potential cells and establishing the at least two packet data tunnels, one individual packet data tunnel from the fixed wireless terminal through each of the respective cells in the selected set of cells.04-29-2010
20100103880DATA TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION DEVICE - The embodiments relate to the wireless communication field, and a data transmission control method and a data transmission device are provided. The method includes: receiving from a sender and buffering data in a buffer, and then forwarding the buffered data to a receiver; receiving an acknowledgement (ACK) returned by the receiver, where the ACK indicates that the data is received; adding or reducing the ACK returned by the receiver according to a volume of data unsent in the buffer; and sending the processed ACK to the sender. The data sending rate of the sender is controlled by the processed ACK. This makes the data transmission be reliable and highly efficient.04-29-2010
20100103879Systems and Methods for Providing Wireless Communications for Data and Voice Communications - A wireless communications system that provides communication for a plurality of communication devices. The wireless communications system includes an interface including a local exchange carrier (LEC) connection port, a subscriber connection port and a wireless connection port. The wireless communications system includes a wireless terminal connected to the interface that provides wireless data and voice connectivity over a wireless network.04-29-2010
20100103878WIRELESS SENSOR-NETWORK SYSTEM, SENSING TERMINAL NODE, AND BASE STATION - To correct a sensor data acquisition time with a simple hardware configuration, provided is a wireless sensor-network system including: a base station; and a plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the base station transmitting a beacon at predetermined intervals to the plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the plurality of sensing terminal nodes measuring data and transmitting, based on a reception of the beacon transmitted from the base station, the sensor data thus obtained to the base station, in which the plurality of sensing terminal nodes obtain, based on an internal clock, a time at which the beacon is received and transmit the time to the base station, and the base station corrects, based on the reception time transmitted from each of the plurality of sensing terminal nodes, the sensor data acquisition time.04-29-2010
20100103872Method and system of managing QOS-guarenteed multimode fast mobility in wireless networks - Disclosed herein is a method and system for managing QoS-guaranteed multimode fast mobility in wireless networks. The method includes the steps of (a) in response to a request for call establishment, registering a user ID, the unique IP address of a user, a currently used temporary IP address and the current location of the mobile host; (b) completing the call establishment; (c) establishing a tunnel between the OMS and the mobile host; (d) in response to the provision of a new temporary IP address and the wireless network information of a newly activated wireless communication interface, establishing a new tunnel using the unique IP address of the OMS and the new temporary IP address of the mobile host, and then transmitting data packets in parallel; and (e) in response to a request for the removal of a tunnel, removing the corresponding tunnel.04-29-2010
20100103873METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ENABLING CONNECTION OF A MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL TO A RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for enabling connection of a mobile communication terminal (04-29-2010
20100103874METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT, NODE AND ARTICLE FOR OPTIMIZED PS DOMAIN IN GAN - A method and arrangement for optimizing a packet-switched (PS) domain of a Generic Access Network (GAN) that communicates with a Serving GPRS Support Node (SGSN) in the PS domain. The SGSN detects that a GAN access is being attempted by a mobile station. In response, communications between the mobile station and the SGSN are conducted using a light-weight version of a communication protocol in which functionality that is unnecessary in the GAN mode of operation is decreased.04-29-2010
20100103868METHOD FOR MODELING WIRELESS NETWORK COVERAGE UNDER LINE-OF-SIGHT CONDITIONS - A line-of-sight (LOS) wireless communications network uses an initial coverage map to indicate expected performance of at least a portion of the network. Man-made structures, terrain and vegetative barriers may degrade system performance. The initial coverage map is updated using techniques, such as the automatic searching of construction database information, satellite imaging, actual system performance measurements, and failed installation attempts to generate a revised coverage map. The measurement techniques may be used alone or in combination to generate the revised coverage map. Other information regarding additions to the LOS wireless network or the introduction of other wireless networks within the area may be used to generate the revised coverage map.04-29-2010
20100103871Methods and systems for providing user information in telecommunications networks - Example embodiments and methods are directed to providing and otherwise handling user information within telecommunications networks, including wireless telecommunications networks. Example embodiments may include wireless networks having a Correlation Data Records Store (CDRS) that may store and update all user data needed by applications and services operating in example networks. Example methods may provide for collection and handling in the CDRS of all user information relied upon by applications and services operating in wireless networks, so as to reduce resource consumption by such applications and services.04-29-2010
20100097998BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - In order to reduce interference between cells through hopping and use frequencies in a good propagation situation, a scheduler section 04-22-2010
20130155950Terminal Device and Data Transmission/Reception Method - An application execution unit executes an application, and a communication ID acquisition unit acquires a communication identifier set for the application. When a packet generation unit generates a packet including a communication identifier and data, a transmission unit transmits the packet in an IBSS identified by an SSID stored in a SSID storing unit. When a reception unit receives a packet from another terminal device, a determination unit determines whether the communication identifier acquired by the communication ID acquisition unit matches a communication identifier included in the received packet. When the determination unit determines that the acquired communication identifier matches the communication identifier included in the received packet, a data supply unit provides data included in the received packet to the application.06-20-2013
20100110991USER EQUIPMENT FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - A user equipment for physical layer automatic repeat request is disclosed. The user equipment comprises a higher layer automatic repeat request (ARQ) mechanism, a physical layer transmitter, a physical layer receiver, an acknowledgment (ACK) transmitter and an adaptive modulation and control unit (AMC). A higher layer ARQ mechanism generates data for transmission. A physical layer transmitter receives the data for transmission from the higher layer ARQ mechanism, to format the received data into packets for transmission. A physical layer receiver receives and demodulates received packets and retransmission statistics. An ACK transmitter transmits a corresponding acknowledgment for a given packet at the physical layer receiver. An AMC unit adjusts a particular encoding/data modulation of each packet using collected retransmission statistics.05-06-2010
20100110986BASE STATION DEVICE, TERMINAL DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A base station device performs communication with terminal devices, and includes a load information acquisition section which acquires load information which shows a load on the base station device, a reporting method selection section which selects a reporting method for the terminal devices to report reception state information to the base station device based on load information acquired by the load information acquisition section, and a reporting section which reports the reporting method selected by the reporting method selection section to the terminal devices.05-06-2010
20100110990METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORWARDING DATA TRANSPORT FRAMES - In a data communication system according to the invention the functionality of the gateway device is distributed in a data communication network thereby reducing the need to direct the data traffic from and to terminals (05-06-2010
20100110989Transport Protocol Performance Using Network Bit Rate Information - A method for communicating in a telecommunications system is provided. The method comprises conveying a downlink bit rate and an uplink bit rate associated with an access point name to a user agent.05-06-2010
20100110988METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING MULTIPLE CARRIERS IN HIGH SPEED PACKET ACCESS COMMUNICATIONS - A method and an apparatus for utilizing multiple carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) capable of receiving on a single downlink carrier at a time may tune the receiver to one downlink carrier and switch the downlink carrier in accordance with a configured pattern. The WTRU may switch the carrier from an anchor carrier to a non-anchor carrier at a high speed shared control channel (HS-SCCH) sub-frame boundary, and switches back at an end of a subsequent high speed physical downlink shared channel (HS-PDSCH) subframe. The WTRU may switch the carrier at an HS-PDSCH sub-frame boundary. A WTRU capable of receiving on multiple downlink carriers simultaneously may tune the receiver to an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier, and switch the supplementary carrier to another carrier based on a carrier switching order. The carrier switching order may be received via an HS-SCCH or via layer 2 signaling.05-06-2010
20100110983Downlink network synchronization mechanism for femtocell in cellular OFDM systems - A method of downlink synchronization for a femto base station in a cellular orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) system is provided. The femto base station first scans one or more received reference signals transmitted from a plurality of neighboring macro base stations. The femto base station then determines a desired reference signal from the received one or more reference signals based on the scanning result. Finally, the femto base station configures its downlink radio signal transmission time based on the desired reference signal such that the femto base station is synchronized with the plurality of neighboring macro base stations.05-06-2010
20100110984RETRANSMISSION REQUEST TRANSMISSION METHOD, TRANSMITTING- SIDE APPARATUS AND RECEIVING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission request transmission method, a receiving-side apparatus notifies identification information of an RLC-data-PDU and a retransmission start position and a retransmission end position in the RLC-data-PDU, through a STATUS-PDU; and a transmitting-side apparatus retransmits a portion from the retransmission start position to the last portion in the RLC-data-PDU, when a predetermined value is notified as the retransmission end position by the STATUS-PDU (NACK).05-06-2010
20100110982Method for transmitting channel quality information based on differential scheme - A method for transmitting channel quality information based on a differential scheme is disclosed. When channel quality information of a predetermined number of sub-bands selected by a receiver in a frequency selective channel is transmitted, total average channel information is transmitted. Channel information of the selected sub-bands is transmitted as sub-band differential information associated with average channel information. In this case, the sub-band differential information may be denoted by a specific value contained positive (+) values. If at least two channel quality information is transmitted by a MIMO system, channel quality information of one channel is transmitted, then channel quality information of the other channel is transmitted as spatial differential information. In this case, the spatial differential information is denoted by a specific value contained in a differential-value range asymmetrical on the basis of “05-06-2010
20100110981METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR STATION-TO-STATION DIRECTIONAL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Method and system for directional wireless communication, is provided. One implementation involves directionally transmitting a request for access to a shared wireless communication medium, for directional communication between two wireless stations, and receiving a broadcast response indicating a time period during which the wireless stations may perform directional communication therebetween via the wireless communication medium by setting their antenna directions to each other.05-06-2010
20100110980Technique for controlling establishment of a tandem-free transcoder operation - The invention relates to a technique for controlling establishment of a tandem free operation (TFO) for transfer of TFO frames including content frames between a first and a second transcoder unit without transcoding of the content frames. A method aspect of the technique comprises the steps of transmitting, in case a remotely used codec does not meet a codec compatibility condition, a first transparent mode message indicating to in-path equipment a transparent mode for subsequent transparent TFO negotiation, and transmitting, in the transparent mode, a TFO configuration frame indicating a local TFO codec list.05-06-2010
20100110978IMS Device Reconfiguration - A method and arrangement in a telecommunication system for facilitating communications between a first terminal A configured to use a first session model and a second terminal B configured to use a second session model for media transportation. The first terminal A initiates a service capability check and in response, receives capability features of the second terminal B. Upon determining that the second terminal B uses the second session model, the first terminal A is reconfigured to use the second session model.05-06-2010
20100110977MANAGEMENT UNIT NETWORK FOR MANAGING A PLURALITY OF MULTISERVICE COMMUNICATION DEVICES - A management unit network manages a plurality of multiservice communication devices capable of communicating via a plurality of networks. The management unit includes a plurality of local management units, each of the plurality of local management units engaging in bidirectional data communication with at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices via a wireless control channel, the bidirectional data communication including outbound control data sent to the at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices and inbound control data received from at least one of the plurality of multiservice communication devices. A first regional management unit processes the inbound data to produce the outbound data and for sending the outbound data to the at least one of the plurality of local management units and on to the multiservice communication devices.05-06-2010
20100110975MAPPING AN ORIGINAL MAC ADDRESS OF A TERMINAL TO A UNIQUE LOCALLY ADMINISTRATED VIRTUAL MAC ADDRESS - In a network terminals communicate wirelessly through gateway devices with an access node. In the access node an original media access control (MAC) address of a terminal is mapped to a unique, locally administered virtual MAC address for the terminal. This virtual MAC address has a particular portion indicating a unit-specific use including fields that indicate a port index for the gateway device through which the respective terminal communicates with the access node, and an MAC index for the original media access control address of the terminal.05-06-2010
20100110979System And Method For Incorporating A Low Power Mode In Wireless Communication - According to one embodiment, a method for wireless communication comprises providing, at a base station, a plurality of endpoints with access to a wireless network. The method also comprises the base station entering a low power mode, wherein the base station ceases to provide the plurality of endpoints with access to the wireless network while in the low power mode. In addition, the method comprises the base station transitioning to an active mode from the low power mode during a first predetermined time, wherein the first predetermined time is identified by the base station and at least one endpoint before the base station transitions to the active mode. Further, if the base station receives a request to access the wireless network from at least one endpoint after transitioning to the active mode during a second predetermined time, the method comprises the base station remaining in the active mode. If the base station does not receive a request to access the wireless network from at least one endpoint after transitioning to the active mode during the second predetermined time, the method comprises the base station transitioning to the low power mode.05-06-2010
20120263115METHOD FOR RANDOM ACCESS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL, AND BASE STATION UNIT - A wireless communication system including a base station and a wireless terminal, the method includes at the wireless terminal, selecting first information used for first random access or second information used for second random access; and transmitting, during or after the completion of random access using selected information, third information to be transmitted to the base station during random access using information which is not selected, the third information being used by the wireless terminal until the random access using information which is not selected is finished.10-18-2012
20120263108ADAPTIVELY CONTROLLING PREFIX LENGTH - Provided are apparatus and method for setting a cyclic prefix length according to a type of a base station. The apparatus may include a memory, a receiver, a selector, and an inserter. The receiver may be configured to store and to manage a plurality of prefix lengths associated with base station types. The receiver may be configured to receive base station information from a base station. The selector may be configured to select a prefix length from the plurality of prefix length based on the received base station information. The inserter may be configured to insert a cyclic prefix having the determined prefix length in a guard interval of a transmission frame.10-18-2012
20100027476METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DOWNLINK MACRO-DIVERSITY IN CELLULAR NETWORKS - The invention described herein enables a form of downlink macro-diversity in packet-switched cellular networks. It allows packets to be selectively delivered from a network/internetwork to an end node, e.g., a wireless communication device or terminal, over a set of available link-layer connections to/from the end node, through one or more access nodes, e.g., base stations. Downlink macro-diversity is particularly important when the link-layer connections between the end node and the corresponding access node, e.g., the access links, are subject to independent or partially correlated time variations in signal strength and interference. In accordance with the invention, the end node dynamically selects the downlink to be used out of a set of available access links on a per packet basis subject to prevailing channel conditions, availability of air-link resources and other constraints. The invention improves the robustness and efficiency of communication, overall utilization of air-link resources, and quality of service experienced by the end node.02-04-2010
20090154397SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING QUALITY OF SERVICE ENABLERS FOR THIRD PARTY APPLICATIONS - System and method for providing quality of service enablers for third party applications are described. In one embodiment, the method comprises user equipment (“UE”) establishing a communications session with a third party application server hosting a selected third party application and receiving from the third party application server QoS information comprising at least one of a plurality of QoS attributes and configuring a QoS of a radio access network (“RAN”) in accordance with the received QoS information. The method further comprises activating the RAN QoS for the selected application; and establishing an application session with the third party application server via the RAN.06-18-2009
20090154395WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK HAVING HIERARCHICAL STRUCTURE AND ROUTING METHOD THEREOF - A network having a hierarchical structure includes a plurality of clusters. Each of the clusters includes a plurality of nodes and a cluster head connected to the nodes in a mesh format. Each of the nodes is connected to other clusters via the cluster head.06-18-2009
20090154394CALL CONTROL METHOD FOR SEAMLESS MOBILITY SERVICE - A call control method for an Internet Protocol (IP)-based mobility service is provided. The call control method for ensuring service continuity in a mobile communication service environment, includes: receiving a call signal message including permanent IP addresses and transport IP addresses from a transmitter terminal and a receiver terminal, and acquiring the permanent IP addresses and the transport IP addresses of the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal; and performing call control between the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal on the basis of the transport IP addresses and the permanent IP addresses of the transmitter terminal and the receiver terminal. Therefore, by interfacing with an IP multimedia subsystem (IMS) for controlling a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP)-based service, an IP mobility control apparatus for controlling mobility of a terminal when a call is controlled, and a network control apparatus for controlling a network, it is possible to prevent data transmission from being interrupted while the terminal is moving, thereby providing an IP-based seamless, high-quality service.06-18-2009
20090154392CODING BLOCK BASED HARQ COMBINING SCHEME FOR OFDMA SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for combining retransmitted hybrid automatic repeat-request (HARQ) messages divided into coding blocks in an orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM)/orthogonal frequency-division multiple access (OFDMA) receiver are provided. According to such a coding-block-based HARQ combining scheme, the quality of each coding block may be compared to a threshold to determine whether the decoded bits or the HARQ combined signal should be saved for each coding block for subsequent HARQ iterations. In addition to reducing the required HARQ buffer size while preserving the combining gain, coding-block-based HARQ combining may also provide fast decoding and reduced power consumption when compared to conventional HARQ combining techniques.06-18-2009
20080310347Mobile communications system PDIF and method for peer detection of mobile terminal - With a system having no paging function, dead peer detection control and cutoff of a session are implemented as is the case with a system having a paging function. There is provided a method for dead peer detection of a mobile terminal, to be executed in a mobile communications system including a mobile terminal connected to plural wireless systems, a first connection device terminating a first wireless system with access points managing a connection status between the mobile terminal and a wireless link, and a second connection device terminating a second wireless system with access points not managing a connection status between the mobile terminal and a wireless link, said method comprising the steps of the second connection device acquiring the connection status of the mobile terminal in the first wireless system from the first connection device, and the second connection device changing a dead peer detection control process on the basis of the connection status of the mobile terminal, as acquired.12-18-2008
20100020744METHOD FOR MANAGING VOICE CALLS DURING PACKET-SWITCHED SESSIONS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK IMPLEMENTING THE METHOD - A method of managing circuit-switched calls in a mobile communications network supporting packet-switched sessions is performed as follows: upon reception by the mobile communications network of a circuit-switched call for a user of the mobile communication network, the network ascertains whether the user is engaged in a packet-switched session. In the affirmative case, the network closes the packet-switched data exchange session prior to attempting to route the call to the user.01-28-2010
20100039992ACQUISITION OF ACCESS POINT INFORMATION WITH ASSISTANCE FROM OTHER ACCESS POINTS - An access point acquires information about another access point from at least one other access point. For example, the access point may send a query to one or more neighbor access points to obtain information about the other access point. In some aspects these operations may be employed in conjunction with establishing neighbor relations in a network. For example, in the event a neighbor list of a given access point does not have certain information about another access point (e.g., an IP address), the given access point may query its neighbor access points to see whether those access points have information about the other access point in their neighbor lists. Upon receipt of this information, the given access point may use the information to establish neighbor relations with the other access point.02-18-2010
20100039990Method and Arrangement in a Wireless Communications System - A method for assisting the adaptation of a signal from a first node (02-18-2010
20100039996BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSMISSION METHOD AND REORDERING METHOD - A reordering method of sending packets, to which numbers indicating the packet order are added, to a mobile station from a base station, and rearranging the order of the packets at the mobile station, this includes forwarding from a source base station to a target base station, packets, not sent to the mobile station before a handover sequence, or packets, a confirmation response of proper reception has not been received from the mobile station, transmitting preferentially those packets from the target base station to the mobile base station and then transmitting packets received from a host station to the mobile station, giving packets information indicating that the packets are jump packets when transmitting the packets to the mobile station, received from the host station with the order jumped, deciding jump packets are not objects of reordering, and performing the reordering process for packets that are objects of reordering.02-18-2010
20100039995Method for operating a mobile wireless network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer.02-18-2010
20100039989METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING A PLURALITY OF NETWORK ADDRESSES IN A MOBILE TERMINAL - Provided is a method and apparatus for processing a plurality of network addresses in a mobile terminal. The method for processing a plurality of network addresses in the mobile terminal includes: storing combinations of an HoA (home address), a plurality of CoAs (care-of addresses) and a plurality of network interfaces of the mobile terminal, through which the mobile terminal may be connected to a plurality of networks; when the mobile terminal transmits packets to a target node, selecting a network interface combination for connecting the mobile terminal to the target node from among the combinations, and setting a corresponding path; and transmitting the packets through the set path.02-18-2010
20100039987METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ROUTING A BEARER PATH IN AN INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM BASED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system is provided that routes a bearer path of a communication session between an originating Node B and a terminating Node B via an X2 interface, bypassing an IMS core network, while continuing to route the signaling path to an IMS network, thereby allowing the IMS network to retain control of the bearer path while avoiding delay, potential for data loss and jitter to the bearer stream, and additional backhaul capacity requirements that result from routing the bearer path between the originating and terminating Node Bs via the IMS core network. In determining whether the bearer path may bypass the IMS core network, the communication system determines whether IMS core network bearer associated services are required for the communication session such that a bearer path of the call will need to be routed to the IMS core network in order to provide such services.02-18-2010
20100039986WIRELESS RADIO AND NETWORK - In one aspect, a wireless radio may be used to connect to a wireless network, including a mesh network. For enhanced security, the radio may operate in silent mode whereby it does not advertise its presence until after it has detected another node. The radio may also provide its own subnetwork and provide network address translation to further enhance security and simplify network traffic.02-18-2010
20100039991METHOD FOR AUTOMATICALLY CONFIGURING ADDRESSES AND/OR SECURITY DATA BETWEEN ENBS OF AN LTE ACCESS NETWORK, AND ASSOCIATED MME AND ENB - A method is intended for automatically configuring address(es) between eNBs (NBi) of an LTE access network. This method comprises i) transmitting a chosen message to at least one Mobility Management Entity (MME) of a core network connected to the LTE access network, this chosen message including at least one transport layer address of a first eNB (NB02-18-2010
20100039993COMBINED GATEWAY FOR NETWORK COMMUNICATIONS - The functionalities of one or more of a mobility management entity (MME), serving gateway (SGW), and packet data network gateway (PGW) can be provided in a single device on the network. In the access gateway different functional elements are implemented as services and they can be configured on the same device. For example, the SGW and PGW can be configured on the same device. When user equipment UE connects from a home network, it is possible for the MME to choose the same SGW and PGW. This combined SGW and PGW can implement a single session for the UE, thereby capable of providing a savings in resources, allowing additional capacity, and allowing reduced latency and increased throughput because fewer hops are made on the network. This session acts as a SGW on the ingress side and a PGW on the egress side of the access gateway.02-18-2010
20120213153METHODS AND APPARATUS TO REPORT LINK QUALITY MEASUREMENTS FOR DOWNLINK DUAL CARRIER OPERATION - Methods and apparatus to report link quality measurements for downlink dual carrier operation are disclosed. Example methods and apparatus disclosed herein implement one or more example techniques for reporting link quality measurements involving, for example, modifying measurement reporting messages to increase the number and/or types of link quality measurements that can be reported, permitting mobile stations, when appropriate, to use different reporting messages capable of supporting more link quality measurements, and/or prioritizing certain link quality measurements to be reported when the reporting messages do not contain sufficient space to report all requested and/or specified link quality measurements.08-23-2012
20130208656METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHANNEL ACCESS IN WIRELESS LOCAL AREA NETWORK AND APPARATUS FOR THE SAME - A method for controlling channel access performed by an access point (AP) in a wireless system is provided. The method includes: receiving at least one frame from at least one station (STA), respectively, for a specific time period, each frame including information on a contention window (CW) used when the frame is transmitted; processing information one at least one CW for each STA; determining whether to control the channel access based on the processed information on the CW; selecting an abnormal STA candidate group if it is determined that the channel access control is performed; and controlling the channel access to each STA included in the abnormal candidate STA group.08-15-2013
20120033617WIRELESS DATAGRAM TRANSACTION PROTOCOL SYSTEM - Systems are provided for sequencing, delivery acknowledgement, and throttling of data packets over a network layer, such as UDP and SMS. To support devices with limited battery resources, the invention incorporates asymmetric retry logic and/or acknowledgements with overlapping ranges, to minimize the transmissions required for the device. The sender of a data-bearing frame does not need to wait for a frame to be acknowledged before sending the next, such that many frames can be “in flight” at once.02-09-2012
20100091712WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHODS UTILIZING A SINGLE ANTENNA WITH MULTIPLE CHANNELS AND THE DEVICES THEREOF - The present invention provides wireless communication methods utilizing a single antenna with multiple channels and the devices thereof. The method includes providing a plurality of communication channels within the single antenna. The plurality of communication channels may include a probe channel and a data channel. The single antenna may selectively switch between the probe channel and the data channel based on a probe signal transmitted in the probe channel so as to facilitate data transmission.04-15-2010
20100091701METHOD FOR COGNITIVE RADIO BASED COMMUNICATION AND METHOD FOR BROADCASTING POLICY INFORMATION FOR THE SAME - A method of broadcasting frequency policy information in a cognitive radio based communication system, apparatus therefore and a communication method using the same are disclosed. In particular, a policy broadcaster is provided as a subject performing a broadcast of frequency policy information in cognitive radio communication. A method of broadcasting frequency policy information using the same and a method of performing cognitive radio communication by obtaining frequency policy information using the same are provided. Moreover, an enhanced superframe structure, which is capable of providing a seamless service in case that a narrowband terminal is introduced in the middle of a superframe, is provided.04-15-2010
20130083733METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING MEDIA ACCORDING TO IMPORTANCE OF MEDIA BURST - Provided is a method and system for transmitting media to a receiving PoC user without filtering according to importance indication information of a PoC user trying to transmit the media in a PoC system. If media transmitted by the PoC user is important, in order to inform the receiving PoC user of this, the PoC user transmits an MBCP Request message containing importance indication information to a PoC server, and the PoC server, which has received the MBCP Request message, transmits an MBCP Taken message containing importance indication information to the receiving PoC user. If media corresponding to an important message is filtered since media of a primary or locking-in session among a plurality of sessions or other media is being transmitted, the PoC server temporarily stores the media in a local memory or a PoC box and transmits the stored media after the preceding media is completely transmitted.04-04-2013
20130083735TERMINAL DEVICE, BASE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A terminal communicating with a base station includes: a switching partswitching between a first feedback mode in which one precoder information specifying a preferred precoder and a reception quality indicator specifying a preferred transmission rate are reported periodically and a second feedback mode in which first partial precoder information among first and second partial precoder information specifying the preferred precoder and a set of the second partial precoder information and the reception quality indicator are reported periodically. A report part uses, in the second feedback mode, a periodic resource for reporting the precoder information and reception quality indicator in the first feedback mode, reporting one of the first partial precoder information and the set of the second partial precoder information and the reception quality indicator alternately and in a period two times a report period of the precoder information and reception quality indicator in the first feedback mode.04-04-2013
20130083734DYNAMIC DISCOVERY OF HOME AGENT WITH SPECIFIC BINDING - The invention relates to a method for obtaining a home node address in a packet switched network comprising nodes. The method comprises the steps of a first node sending to a first home node of a home network a request containing information about a home address of a mobile node to determine whether a binding with said home address indicating a registration of said mobile node at the first home node exists; the first home node receiving the request, said first home node comprising a stored binding table; determining whether the binding with said home address exists in any home node of the home network; and if the home address of the mobile node is in the binding table of any of the home nodes in the home network, the first node receiving a reply comprising the address of the home node with said binding.04-04-2013
20130083729SRS OPTIMIZATION FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for power control and SRS multiplexing for coordinated multi-point (CoMP) transmission and reception in heterogeneous networks (HetNet). Multiple SRS processes are supported with different physical and/or virtual cell ID. Different power control offsets and processes are associated with the different SRS processes.04-04-2013
20130083730METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UPLINK TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL AND TIMING IN COORDINATED MULTIPOINT TRANSMISSION SCHEMES - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus of a first cell communicates with a second cell in relation to a coordinated multipoint (CoMP) transmission of control information by the second cell and data by the first cell to a user equipment (UE) in a range expanded region of the first cell, determines a desired transmission power level for an uplink transmission to the first cell by the UE, and provides the desired transmission power level for the uplink transmission to the second cell.04-04-2013
20130083728METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING PAGING MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting a paging message in a wireless communication system is provided. A base station receives a paging announcement from a paging controller. The paging announcement includes a machine-to-machine (M2M) group identity (ID) allocated by a first network entity. The base station transmits the paging message to an M2M device. The paging message includes a M2M zone ID of the first M2M zone, managed by the first network entity, allocated by the first network entity or a network entity ID of the first network entity. An M2M group ID allocated to the M2M device by a second network entity is the same as the M2M group ID included in the paging announcement.04-04-2013
20130083732Method of Handling Service Rejection for Circuit Switch Service - A method of handling service rejection for circuit switch service for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises receiving a service reject message with not available circuit switch service cause and a non zero timer value for a timer whose running state indicates that the mobile device is not allowed to send a extended service request message for a circuit switch service, from a network of the wireless communication system, starting the timer with the non zero timer value, and sending the extended service request message for a packet service to the network even when the timer is running.04-04-2013
20130083724METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR A CONVERGED WIRED/WIRELESS ENTERPRISE NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - In some embodiments, an apparatus comprises a core network node and a control module within an enterprise network architecture. The core network node is configured to be operatively coupled to a set of wired network nodes and a set of wireless network nodes. The core network node is configured to receive a first tunneled packet associated with a first session from a wired network node from the set of wired network nodes. The core network node is configured to also receive a second tunneled packet associated with a second session from a wireless network node from the set of wireless network nodes through intervening wired network nodes from the set of wired network nodes. The control module is operatively coupled to the core network node. The control module is configured to manage the first session and the second session.04-04-2013
20100067443WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS WITH FEMTO NODES - Systems and methods for performing a handoff of an access terminal from a macro node to a femto node are disclosed. In one embodiment, the femto node is configured to transmit a predetermined signal for determining signal quality and an identifier that uniquely identifies the femto node to the access terminal. The access terminal is configured to transmit the identifier to the macro node. The femto node is identified as a hand in target based on the transmitted identifier and the macro node is configured to hand in the access terminal to the femto node.03-18-2010
20100067441METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING FRAME IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system and, more particularly, to a method of transmitting and receiving frame in a wireless communication system.03-18-2010
20100067440METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROL CHANNEL OPERATION IN GERAN - A method and apparatus to improve the quality of control signaling based on signaling messages controlling speech or data transmission over an air interface between at least two Multi-User-Reusing-One-Slot/Voice Services Over Adaptive Multiuser Channels On One Slot (MUROS/VAMOS) capable wireless transmit/receive units (WTRUs). The WTRUs communicate with each other at the physical layer via signaling messages transmitted in control channels such as Slow Associated Control Channel (SACCH) and Fast Associated Control Channel (FACCH). Speech services are provided simultaneously over the same physical channel, and the Timing Advance (TA) and Power Command (PC) parameters of a WTRU are multiplexed in several occurrences of the SACCH or FACCH to increase the number of channel bits available for channel coding.03-18-2010
20100329189BASE STATION DEVICE, MOBILE STATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION PROGRAM - A synchronization channel control unit halts generation of a synchronization channel signal. A signal control unit halts generation of signals other than the synchronization channel signal after the synchronization channel control unit halts generation of the synchronization channel signal.12-30-2010
20100329184METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION - The present application relates to network mobility (e.g., mobility in an IPv6 network). More specifically, the present application discloses systems and methods for enabling mobile nodes to switch to a routing optimization mode using a minimum of mobility messages.12-30-2010
20100329182Apparatus, Methods, Computer Program Products And Systems Providing RACH Parameters In A Broadcast Channel For A Random Access Procedure - In one non-limiting, exemplary embodiment, a method includes: receiving at least one parameter from a broadcast channel (12-30-2010
20090213799METHOD FOR SETTING USER EQUIPMENT IDENTIFIER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is directed to a method for setting a user equipment identifier as user equipment identification information used when data received through a dedicated logical channel is transmitted through a common transport channel. The method includes transmitting data and a message type indicator as user equipment identification information from a RRC layer to an RLC layer; setting a user equipment identifier indicator according to the received message type indicator in the RLC layer and transmitting it with the data to a MAC layer; and selecting a user equipment identifier type and a user equipment identifier according to the set user equipment indication identifier, adding it to a header of a MAC SDU in the MAC layer and transmitting it to a corresponding MAC layer in a receiving device.08-27-2009
20090109899COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, PARAMETER SETTING CONTROL APPARATUS AND CONTROL METHOD - This invention has as its object to implement dynamic processing according to processing loads on access points in a wireless communication local network system including a plurality of independent wireless cells. According to this invention, a communication control method for a communication control apparatus, which controls a wireless communication in a wireless communication local network system including a plurality of independent wireless cells, includes: a step of determining the processing loads of respective APs; a step of selecting an STA, which is to associate with another independent wireless cell built using an AP with a low processing load by switching processing, of STAs, which associate with an independent wireless cell built using an AP with a high processing load; and a step of requesting to transmit parameter information required to associate with the other independent wireless cell.04-30-2009
20120182943Method for Establishing a Bidirectional Communication Path in a Wireless Network - A method for establishing a bidirectional communication path in a wireless network, where the network includes nodes comprising a sink node and a plurality of subscriber nodes, and where the communication path for the bidirectional transmission of data packets is to be established between the sink node and at least one queried node of the subscriber nodes. An uplink path from a particular subscriber node to the sink node is determined by periodically exchanging path messages between adjacent nodes of the network, where a particular path message signals the respectively shortest distance to the sink node, i.e., as a metric. A downlink path from the sink node to the at least one queried node is determined by inserting an address list into at least one of the path messages sent by the sink node, which list comprises the address of a respectively queried node.07-19-2012
20120182942METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMISSION OF UPLINK CONTROL SIGNALING AND USER DATA IN A SINGLE CARRIER ORTHOGONAL FREQUENCY DIVISION MULTIPLEXING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A user equipment (UE) operating in an Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing communication system transmits Layer 1 and Layer 2 user data non-associated and user data associated control signaling on an uplink by puncturing user data information with the user data non-associated and user data associated control signaling to produce a data stream wherein the control signaling and user data information are multiplexed. The UE then conveys the punctured data stream to a radio access network via an air interface. The communication system further provides for a selection of a coding and modulation for the control signaling based on a modulation and coding scheme of the user data and a transmission scheme that is applied for transmission of the user data information over the air-interface.07-19-2012
20120182941METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZING POWER RESOURCES IN WIRELESS DEVICES - A method and system is disclosed for a device to quickly determine if data is being sent to it. If no data is being sent to the device, the device may return to a sleep mode so as to conserve energy. The present invention includes organizing and transmitting, one at a time, all device destination identifiers. If a message listing search indicates that no message is being sent for a device, the device can continue with any other activity that needs servicing, or if no other activity is pending, it may shut down to conserve power until the next wake up period arrives. If the search returns a positive indication, the count value when the identifier is found can be used to determine the location of the pointer to the message.07-19-2012
20120182940METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE TRAFFIC WITHIN A NETWORK STRUCTURE AND A NETWORK STRUCTURE - A reliable and flexible method for controlling traffic within a network structure without the addition of remarkable complexity to the core network is provided, the structure including a PDN (Packet Data Network), an operator core network with a DNS (Domain Name System) server, a HeNB (Home evolved Node B) or HNB (Home Node B) and/or eNB (Evolved Node B) or NB (Node B) and a UE (User Equipment) that is associated with the HeNB or HNB and/or eNB or NB. On the basis of a predefinable routing policy the DNS server is controlling whether a traffic from a UE to a destination address within a local network associated to the HeNB or HNB or eNB or NB or within a PDN and/or vice versa will be routed via the core network or directly via the local network in support of local network protocol access or selected network protocol traffic offload.07-19-2012
20120182939TELEHEALTH WIRELESS COMMUNICATION HUB AND SERVICE PLATFORM SYSTEM - Methods and devices provide a wireless communications hub device and services enabling remote access to electronic medical or fitness devices in a manner that simplifies device networking A wireless communication hub device may include a processor and wireless communication transceivers configured to connect to cellular and/or WiFi networks to access a remote server, and wired and/or wireless local networks for connecting to electronic medical or fitness devices. The wireless communication hub device may plug into a power source, connect to an electronic medical or fitness device, and communicate via a second wireless network with an associated server-based service. The system enables discovery of the wireless communication hub device and connected electronic medical or fitness devices. The associated remote server based service platform services may provide drivers for various electronic medical or fitness devices, store and forward data, and provide remote access to the various electronic medical or fitness devices.07-19-2012
20120182938WIRELESS ELECTRONIC DEVICES WITH DUAL CIRCUIT ARCHITECTURE - Electronic devices may have multiple wireless integrated circuits such as first and second baseband processor integrated circuits. The first baseband processors may be used exclusively for handling packet switched traffic, whereas the second baseband processor may be used exclusively for handling circuit switched traffic. Radio-frequency front end circuitry may be used to couple multiple antennas to the baseband processors and associated radio-frequency transceivers. The first baseband processor may be coupled to a first universal integrated circuit card (UICC) storing a first subscriber profile, whereas the second baseband processor may be coupled to a second UICC storing a second subscriber profile. The first baseband processor may be used to support any desired circuit switched radio access technology, whereas the second baseband processor may be used to support any desired packet switched radio access technology.07-19-2012
20120182937METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A MOBILE SYSTEM - A method is provided for bi-casting real time data packets in a mobile system that includes a first Node-B and a second Node-B for communication with a user equipment. The method includes associating a first sequence number with a first real time data packet when sending the first real time data packet to the first Node-B and transmitting the first real time data packet associated with the first sequence number to the first Node-B. The method also includes associating a second sequence number with a second real time data packet when sending the first real time data packet to the second Node-B, wherein the second sequence number is different from the first sequence number and transmitting the first real time data packet associated with the second sequence number to the second Node-B.07-19-2012
20120182936METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING THE MOBILITY OF MOBILE NETWORKS - In response to a Mobile Access Router (MAR) initially attaching to a Multi-Protocol Label Switching (MPLS) domain through a first Access Router (AR) in the domain, a Mobility Anchor Point (MAP) in the MPLS domain establishes a plurality of Label Switched Paths (LSPs) for the MAR. For example, the MAP establishes an active LSP to the MAR through the AR to which the MAR has initially attached, and further establishes an inactive LSP for the MAR to each of one or more other ARs in the MPLS domain. An inactive LSP established at a given AR for a given MAR is activated when/if that MAR attaches to the AR. Correspondingly, the present invention includes method and apparatus teachings related to the MAP, ARs and the MAR, as regards establishing inactive LSPs, activating inactive LSPs, and extending an activated LSP to the MAR.07-19-2012
20120182935SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PACKET DISTRIBUTION IN A VEHICULAR NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - A method is provided in one example embodiment that includes receiving a request for data from a source device, such as an on-board unit of vehicle or a mobile device coupled to an on-board unit, over a vehicular network. Location data, such as GPS coordinates, speed, and heading associated with the source device may also be received. A travel path for the source device can be predicted based on the location data, and an access point to the network can be located within range of the travel path. Packets associated with the requested data may be sent to the access point and then forwarded to the source device when the source device is in range.07-19-2012
20120182934APPLICATION LAYER COMMUNICATION VIA AN INTERMEDIATE NODE - An intermediate node in a wireless communication system transmits application layer messages between first and second nodes. To do so, the intermediate node receives a request to activate a packet data protocol (PDP) context for the first node. The request, as generated by the first node, indicates the first node is capable of using a first protocol stack that excludes one or more particular layers included in a second protocol stack used by the second node. The intermediate node activates a PDP context for the first node in accordance with the request. The intermediate node thereafter forwards application layer messages supported by the activated PDP context between the first node and the second node, forwarding application layer messages destined for the first node in accordance with the first protocol stack and forwarding application layer messages destined for the second node in accordance with the second protocol stack.07-19-2012
20120182933CLUSTERING CROWD-SOURCED DATA FOR DETERMINING BEACON POSITIONS - Embodiments analyze crowd-sourced data to identify a moved or moving beacon. The crowd-sourced data for the beacon is grouped into a plurality of clusters based on spatial distance. Timestamps associated with the crowd-sourced data in the clusters are compared to select one of the clusters. The crowd-sourced data associated with the selected cluster is used to determine position information for the beacon.07-19-2012
20130070676ASCERTAINING PRESENCE IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - One of many aspects of the invention relates to an ad hoc network in which inbound messages are communicated from an originating node to a gateway node via a plurality of intermediate nodes. In this respect, a method performed by an intermediate node in communicating the inbound message to the gateway node includes: maintaining a routing table; and using the routing table, selecting a node for use as the next hop by determining whether a maximum number of allowable hops for an inbound message is exceeded by using such node, and comparing a preference of using such node to preferences of using other known nodes by which the maximum number of allowable hops would not be exceeded. Another aspect includes sending a “leave” message when an intermediate node leaves the ad hoc network, whereby the intermediate node is removed from similar routing tables maintained by other intermediate nodes.03-21-2013
20110002271SERVICE PROVIDING APPARATUS FOR DIGITAL PROCESSING SERVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A service providing apparatus that provides a digital processing service and performs wireless communication with a service use apparatus that uses the service includes: a wireless communication unit that performs wireless communication; an interface unit that enables the attachment of a portable wireless communication device that performs wireless communication for the apparatus to which the wireless communication device is attached when the wireless communication device is attached; a generation unit that generates configuration information for wireless communication; and a configuration unit that executes, on the wireless communication device attached to the interface unit, based on the configuration information generated by the generation unit, a configuration process that enables wireless communication between the service use apparatus to which the wireless communication device has been attached and the wireless communication unit.01-06-2011
20110002262MAC RESET AND RECONFIGURATION - A method and apparatus for reconfiguring a medium access control (MAC) entity in a wireless transmit receive unit (WTRU). The method and apparatus includes the WTRU transmitting a MAC reconfiguration request, the WTRU receiving a MAC reconfiguration command including new MAC parameter values and the WTRU reconfiguring a MAC entity based on the new MAC parameter values in the MAC reconfiguration command.01-06-2011
20130051329RADIO EQUIPMENT AND RADIO BASE STATION - A useful technique for configuring radio equipment as networking radio equipment is provided. Networking radio equipment 02-28-2013
20130051328METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING A MULTI-BAND ACCESS POINT TO ASSOCIATE WITH A MULTI-BAND MOBILE STATION - A method and apparatus may be used for selecting one of a plurality of multi-band APs to associate with a multi-band WTRU. The multi-band APs may broadcast frequency band information regarding multiple frequency bands on which the multi-band AP is configured to operate. The multi-band WTRU may select a multi-band AP to associate with and a frequency band to use to communicate with the selected multi-band AP based on the frequency band information. The multi-band AP may transmit frequency band information from the that indicates that a characteristic, (e.g., throughput, path loss, load, capacity, backhaul), of the selected frequency band and disassociate with the multi-band WTRU or to continue to associate with the multi-band WTRU via a different frequency band.02-28-2013
20130051327Server in Charge of Control Plane Within Mobile Communication Network and Method for Controlling Service in Server - According to the present description, data of a user can be detoured (offloaded) to a wired network such as a public communication network even through a Home (e)NodeB. In addition, when the data of the user is detoured (offloaded) to the wired network such as the public communication network even through the Home (e)NodeB, a local IP access (LIPA) service can be selectively supported according to the user or a UE.02-28-2013
20130051322MULTI-POINT PUCCH ATTACHMENT - Various aspects of the present disclosure are directed to periodic over-the-air channel state information (CSI) reporting to serving cells and one or more non-serving cells via a control channel multi-point attachment. The channel state information report may be transmitted based on information indicating how to transmit the channel state information report to the non-serving cell. The information indicating how to transmit the channel state information report may be provided by the serving eNodeB. The information may include a periodicity, offset parameters, timing advance commands, power control commands, and/or an aperiodic report request.02-28-2013
20130051321MULTIPLE DESCRIPTION CODING (MDC) FOR CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION REFERENCE SIGNALS (CSI-RS) - Aspects of the present disclosure include a wireless system to reduce quantization error due to codebook-based PMI reporting by precoding channel state information reference signals (CSI-RSs) via a base station. The eNodeB varies the properties for a CSI-RS transmission in a known pattern and receives varying reports from the UE. The eNodeB can reconstruct the PMI with improved accuracy by combining multiple consecutive reports.02-28-2013
20130051314DATA GATHERING FOR A NODE - Methods and systems are disclosed including a mobile device configured for initiating a communication session with a transceiver interface of a node that comprises a network interface. The node may be queried via the communication session for a status report associated with an error, and an instruction may be communicated to the node via the communication session instructing the node to perform an operation. Communication may be established with the wireless access point via the wireless network after communication of the instruction. The transceiver interface may be configured to communicate via a second network to address issues in the wide area network.02-28-2013
20130051313MULTIPLEXING MULTIPLE MOBILE SERVICES ON A SINGLE MOBILE ACCESS POINT NAME - Methods and apparatus, including computer program products, for multiplexing multiple mobile services on a single mobile access point name (APN). A method includes, in a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) network, examining Internet Protocol (IP) packets that traverse a mobile GN link of a Gateway GPRS Support Node (GGSN), and applying a combination of packet protocols coupled with a carrier defined set of work flow rules to route the IP packets to their next destination and earmark billing CDRs for mediation and correlation by back office IT systems residing with a carrier in the mobile network.02-28-2013
20130089025NETWORK ARCHITECTURE - A telecommunications system is provided comprising a mobile device and an IP Multi-media Sub-system (IMS), the mobile device being connected to a Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN. The mobile device is adapted to: identify if the PLMN supports Customised Applications for Mobile network Enhanced Logic, CAMEL; and, upon receiving an attempt to initiate a call to a dialled number, if the PLMN supports CAMEL, allow the call to proceed. The PLMN is adapted to: receive a request to connect a call from the mobile device; invoke a CAMEL service trigger indicating that the call should be routed to the IMS; and, route the call to the IMS. The IMS is adapted to: control the call; and, refer the call to a call storage system for call storage. A mobile device, IP Multi-media Sub-system and method in a mobile device are also provided.04-11-2013
20130089032METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INITIAL ACCESS TO A NETWORK IN A FEMTO SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a wireless access system to which a femto cell is applied. In addition, the present invention relates to an initial access method in a femto cell environment, a method for handover to a femto cell and apparatus for supporting the methods.04-11-2013
20130089027MULTI-NETWORK ACCESS METHOD AND COMMUNICATION DEVICE THEREOF - In a multiple network access method in a communication device including at least one protocol stack having a physical layer and a medium access control (MAC) layer, and at least one application unit for performing communication through the protocol stack, the method includes applying a first parameter to the protocol stack and a first attribute to the application unit, accessing a first network for a first hour after the applications, switching the first parameter into a second parameter and the first attribute into a second attribute, and accessing a second network for a second hour after the switching.04-11-2013
20130089029METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING NEIGHBOR CELLS IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A neighbor cell search method and apparatus of a User Equipment (UE) is provided for performing the cell search procedure with the utilization of a Physical Cell Identity (PCI) list of PCIs used by evolved Node Bs (eNBs) for a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) which is from an eNB in a Long Term Evolution (LTE) system. The cell search method includes selecting a cell of a base station, receiving system information including a Physical Cell Identity (PCI) list used by neighbor Closed Subscribed Group (CSG) cells of the base station, determining whether the terminal is in an any cell selection state for selecting any cell, and searching, when the terminal is in the any cell selection state, neighbor cells without application of the PCI list. The cell search method and apparatus are capable of performing the cell search procedure to appropriate eNBs, resulting in improvement of network attachment efficiency.04-11-2013
20130089026Wireless Audio Transmission - Approaches for the wireless transmission of audio data are provided, wherein an example approach operates to convert live audio signals, from instruments, microphones, amplifiers, mixers, speakers, MIDI devices, and other similar devices, into wireless signals by utilizing electrical plug devices (“jacks”), whereby the jacks transmit multiple channels of audio/video signals via a standard wireless network to a software application running on a host recording device on the same network.04-11-2013
20130089028WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD USING DIRECTIONAL COMMUNICATION - A wireless communication system and a wireless communication method using directional communication are provided. The wireless communication method includes a communication request device transmitting a communication request message to a communication target device using directional communication, the communication request device receiving a response message that includes wireless communication connection information of the communication target device generated in response to the communication request message from the communication target device, the communication request device determining a wireless communication technology based on the wireless communication connection information, and the communication request device performing wireless connection with the communication target device according to the determined wireless communication technology.04-11-2013
20100002634Mobile IP Communication System, Mobile IP Communication Apparatus, And Mobile IP Communication Method - A communication system includes mobile IP communication apparatuses in an access service network and having proxy mobile IP client functioning units, foreign agent functioning units, and DHCP proxy functioning units, which have a common IP address. The DHCP proxy functioning unit of a first mobile IP communication apparatus, connected with a mobile station before movement, reports information about the mobile station to a second mobile IP communication apparatus connected with the mobile station after movement. The DHCP proxy functioning unit of the second mobile IP communication apparatus receives the information about the mobile station and further receives from the mobile station, an update message addressed to the common IP address, executes an IP address update process based on the information about the mobile station, and reports an update result to the proxy mobile IP client functioning unit and the foreign agent functioning unit in the second mobile IP communication apparatus.01-07-2010
20100135215METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR BEARING CIRCUIT SWITCHED DOMAIN SERVICE DATA OVER RADIO BEARER - A method for bearing CS-domain service data over radio bearer is disclosed. The method includes: letting CS-domain service data be borne over a radio high-speed packet data access channel according to a channel mapping relation between CS-domain service data and the radio high-speed packet data access channel. An apparatus and a system are also provided herein.06-03-2010
20090323584Method and Apparatus for Parallel Processing Protocol Data Units - An apparatus for processing a protocol data unit (PDU) includes a transmit (TX) module, a physical layer controller (PHY), and a reception (RX) module. The TX module is configured to receive a transmit descriptor that comprises a plurality of fields, wherein the fields contain information for preparing a first PDU. The PHY is configured to receive at least a portion of a second PDU into a reception (RX) physical-layer queue, the second PDU having a header. The RX module is configured to receive a receive descriptor, wherein the receive descriptor includes a plurality of fields having information for processing the second PDU. The RX module is further configured to process the second PDU according to the receive descriptor in parallel with the TX module processing the first PDU based on the transmit descriptor.12-31-2009
20130089031ASSIST ENGINE FOR TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE FUNCTIONS IN A MODULAR WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS DEVICE - A wireless network access device comprising a radio interface with a serial communication line, a switch, and M serial connections to M connectors for connecting up to M corresponding detachable radio modules. The radio interface forms up to M individually addressable radio communications paths. Each radio module includes a radio configured to communicate with client devices in a coverage area and a radio processor configured to manage at least one radio receiving buffer. The radio receiving buffers store receiver buffer identifiers to corresponding received data space. A processor manages communication between the client devices that communicate with the radio modules and a data network via the radio interface and a network interface when N 04-11-2013
20130089030APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TIME SYNCHRONIZATION - An apparatus for time synchronization of a femtocell base station receives, via neighboring macrocell base stations adjacent to a femtocell base station, timing packets generated by timing servers directly connected to the neighboring macrocell base stations, and if time synchronization using a GPS satellite is impossible, obtains system time information from a timing packet received via one corresponding to a master base station, among the neighboring macrocell base stations, and performs time synchronization.04-11-2013
20090303936MOBILE TERMINAL, CONTROL APPARATUS, HOME AGENT AND PACKET COMMUNICATIONS METHOD - In a packet communications system, a control apparatus implements routing control of a received packet directed for the mobile terminal. The mobile terminal includes a plurality of network interface cards; a communication manager configured to select at least one network interface card among from the plurality of network interface cards, in accordance with information regarding the network interface card; and an upper layer manager configured to receive the packet transmitted from the control apparatus, with using a selected network interface card.12-10-2009
20090303934DIRECT WIRELESS CLIENT TO CLIENT COMMUNICATION - A wireless station is connected to a wireless network through an access point and can establish a direct client-to-client connection to a second wireless station. The wireless station can communicate directly with the second wireless station without involving the access point. The wireless station communicates with the wired network and with other wireless stations through the access point. The second wireless station may have an infrastructure connection to the access point or may be independent.12-10-2009
20090303933METHOD AND A TRANSCEIVER FOR TRANSMITTING DATA - The present invention provides a method for transmitting data and a transceiver. In one embodiment, the method includes: (1) generating data blocks of a data package in a first transceiver to transmit to a second transceiver, the first transceiver including a micro-controller coupled to a digital signal processor, (2) generating identification data in the first transceiver for the data blocks, wherein the identification data is an index of a list of the data blocks to be transmitted and each of the data blocks is transmitted with the index and (3) identifying the data blocks to be transmitted to the second transceiver based on the identification data, wherein the microcontroller employs the index to manage transmission of the data blocks.12-10-2009
20090303932METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING NETWORK-BASED CONTROL OF A FORWARDING POLICY USED BY A MOBILE NODE - A mobile node receives access network-specific signaling that is related to an Internet Protocol (IP) flow. The mobile node decides which of multiple access networks to use to send the IP flow based on the access network-specific signaling. The access network-specific signaling may be received from an access network, and the mobile node may interpret the access network-specific signaling as a command to send the IP flow over that access network. The mobile node may update a forwarding policy at the mobile node to indicate that the IP flow should be sent over that access network.12-10-2009
20090303931Wireless communications connection control method - A wireless communications connection control method that enables flexible reconstruction of a wireless communications network system structure. The wireless communications connection control method comprising the steps of retaining in advance a node registration table in which the inter-node distance and node types are associated with each node; issuing a joining notification, together with the inter-node distance, in response to when a new node joins the wireless communications system; refreshing the node registration table according to the joining notification, determining whether it is necessary to change the node type based on the inter-node distance stored in the node registration table, and changing the node type stored in the node registration table when it is determined that the type needs to be refreshed.12-10-2009
20090303930WIRELESS NETWORKING SYSTEM AND METHOD - In a system comprising a first access point serving a first wireless network; and a neighbouring access point serving a neighbouring wireless network having coverage overlapping with the first wireless network, where the first access point and the neighbouring access point transmit beacon messages at beacon times that are temporally separated by predetermined beacon periods, a method of operating the system is disclosed, the method comprising: the first access point sending a first offer to the neighbouring access point, the first offer offering a period of silent time to the neighbouring access point during which period of silent time the first access point silences the first wireless network, the period of silent time being independent of the beacon times and the beacon periods.12-10-2009
20090303929Wireless Terminal Apparatus and Wireless Base Station Apparatus - Both a wireless terminal apparatus and wireless base station apparatus are provided that can, in an operation of encoding the control signals of the upstream link transmitted from the multiple terminal stations while encoding with regard to each of the terminal stations, increase a number of the terminal stations to which different codes are respectively assigned. A wireless terminal apparatus includes: an encoding information receiving portion receiving encoding information which is used at the wireless terminal apparatus from the base station; a phase-shifting unit which conducts a phase-shifting operation on a predetermined first code based on the encoding information; a code selection unit which, based on the received encoding information, selects a second code from multiple codes orthogonally crossing each other; and a control signal encoding portion which conducts an encoding operation on the control signal that is going to be transmitted to the base station by using both the first code on which the phase-shifting operation has been conducted and the second code.12-10-2009
20090303928Method for transmitting channel information in wireless communication system - A method for transmitting uplink channel information in a wireless communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting an adaptive modulation and coding (AMC) band bitmap indicating at least one AMC band selected from a plurality of AMC bands with a first transmission period through a plurality of uplink control channels and transmitting a channel quality indicator (CQI) based on transmission of the AMC band bitmap with a second transmission period through any one of the plurality of uplink control channels.12-10-2009
20090303927Method and System for Controlling Discontinuous Reception/Transmission - A method, a network element, an apparatus and a system for controlling discontinuous reception/transmission during a discontinuous reception/transmission on-period in communication between a transmitter and a receiver, are provided. The control is based on certain well-defined measurements including at least one of the following: the number of bits that are currently in the buffer of the transmitter, the currently supported transport block set for the receiver and the average supported transport block set for the receiver. The measurements are performed at the transmitter in each predefined time interval.12-10-2009
20090303926Proxy-bridge for connecting different types of devices - A proxy-bridge for connecting Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) compliant devices with Bluetooth (BT) compliant devices, and includes SSDP support for discovery of available UPnP compliant devices and services; a Bluetooth SDP client for discovery of available Bluetooth devices and available Bluetooth services and a Bluetooth SDP server for communicating with Bluetooth SDP clients in the available Bluetooth devices. The proxy-bridge has a converter for converting the discovered Bluetooth devices and services into associated UPnP device and service information, and the discovered UPnP compliant devices and services into associated Bluetooth device, service, and/or profile information. A device and service announcer advertises device availability at regular intervals. A UPnP adapter represents the Bluetooth devices towards the UPnP devices and a Bluetooth adapter represents the UPnP compliant devices towards the Bluetooth compliant devices.12-10-2009
20090303925Method and Node for Providing a Quality of Service Support in Multihop Communication Systems - A method and apparatus according to the technique wherein support of a quality of service is provided for transmissions between at least one node (N) and at least one mobile station (MS12-10-2009
20090303924PACKET DATA NETWORK SELECTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include sending, by a mobile station in a wireless network, a dynamic service addition (DSA) message to a base station, the DSA message identifying a packet data network (PDN) by access point name (APN). The method may further include exchanging data with the indicated packet data network via the base station.12-10-2009
20090303923SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR INTERRUPTING A TRANSMITTING DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A system and method for interrupting a transmitting device during a call. In the system, calls are transmitted from a first device on a communication channel as a series of channel frames. At predetermined times during the transmission, the transmitting device is configured to drop channel frames, resulting in open channel frame periods where the transmitting device is not transmitting on the communication channel. During these open channel frame periods, the transmitting device is also configured to switch to a receiving mode. Other devices in the system are capable of switching into a transmitting mode during the open channel frame periods and, when applicable, sending an interrupt request on the communication channel to the transmitting device in order to request access to the channel.12-10-2009
20090303922METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING A PLURALITY OF PACKETS IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and apparatus for communicating a plurality of packets in a communication network is provided. The method includes suppressing one or more portions of the plurality of packets based on a suppression rule in a central controller. Thereafter, each packet is transmitted from the central controller to one or more Mobile Stations (MSs) through one or more Base Stations (BSs).12-10-2009
20100272010APPARATUS FOR EXCHANGING MEDIA CONTENT - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, a media gateway having a controller to establish communications with a media processor over a wireline network according to a next generation home network (G.hn) protocol, establish communications with the media processor over a wireless network according to a Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) protocol, determine a first measure of communication according to the WiFi protocol, determine a second measure of communication according to the G.hn protocol, and coordinate with the media processor to select one of the wireline network and the wireless network according to the first and second measures of communication for delivery of the media services to the media processor. Other embodiments are disclosed.10-28-2010
20120218942DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM - The present invention provides a data transmission method, apparatus and system, which relate to the field of the wireless network technology. The data transmission method provided in the embodiment of the present invention includes: acquiring a downlink data packet sent to a terminal, in which the downlink data packet does not have a high layer protocol stack header; sending the downlink data packet to the terminal through an air interface; Through the present invention, the data amount in the air interface transmission is reduced to a great extent, the efficiency of air interface transmission is substantially enhanced, and the air interface resource is saved, thereby facilitating the enrichment and development of wireless services and satisfying the demands of users. The present invention is applicable to a scenario of air interface transmission in a wireless network.08-30-2012
20120218941BASE STATION APPARATUS, WIRELESS TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A base station apparatus that wirelessly communicates with a wireless terminal, including: a determination portion that determines a mode of the wireless terminal that exists in a service area of the base station apparatus; and a setting portion that sets a first mode in which a first period in which the base station apparatus is communicable with the wireless terminal and a second period in which the base station apparatus is incommunicable with the wireless terminal are provided alternately, based on a result of the determination of the determination portion, and sets a length of the second period based on the result of the determination of the determination portion.08-30-2012
20120218946MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND RE-CONNECTION METHOD - It is possible to complete a re-connection in a short time and prevent instantaneous interruption of communication by including a plurality of base station apparatuses and a mobile station apparatus; the mobile station apparatus includes: a delay difference detecting unit that detects a difference in reception timing between a signal from the base station apparatus with which the mobile station apparatus currently communicates and a signal from the base station apparatus that is a re-connection destination candidate; a transmission timing calculating unit that calculates, based on the difference in reception timing, a transmission timing to the base station apparatus that is the re-connection destination candidate; and a re-connection processing unit that, having detected a disconnection of the communication with the base station apparatus with which the mobile station apparatus currently communicates, uses the transmission timing to start a communication with the base station apparatus that is the re-connection destination candidate.08-30-2012
20120218945Method and Arrangement for Random Access Diversity - Methods and arrangements for enablement of transmission of a network node assisted random access request using transmit diversity. The methods and arrangements relate to providing information related to a non-transparent diversity scheme to a mobile terminal, which diversity scheme then is used by the mobile terminal when transmitting a network node assisted random access request.08-30-2012
20120218944RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD - Disclosed is a radio base station (08-30-2012
20120218943CONTROL RESOURCE MAPPING FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for sending control information in a wireless communication system are described. A control segment may include L≧1 tiles, and each tile may include a number of transmission units. A number of control resources may be defined and mapped to the transmission units for the control segment. For symmetric mapping, multiple sets of S≧1 control resources may be formed, and each batch of L consecutive sets of S control resources may be mapped to S transmission units at the same location in the L tiles. For localized mapping, S>1, and each set of S control resources may be mapped to a cluster of S adjacent transmission units in one tile. For distributed mapping, S=1, and each control resource may be mapped to one transmission unit in one tile. For diversity, each control resource may be mapped to multiple (e.g., three) transmission units in at least one tile.08-30-2012
20120218940Method and apparatus for determining a slot format of a fractional dedicated physical control channel - A method for determining a slot format of an F-DPCH is disclosed in the present disclosure, including: a Node B using No.0 slot format of the F-DPCH as the slot format for transmitting information over the F-DPCH when detecting that a UE in CELL_FACH state or idle mode is using an E-DCH. An apparatus for determining a slot format of an F-DPCH is also disclosed. The present disclosure ensures that the slot format of the F-DPCH transmitted by the Node B is identical with that of the F-DPCH received by the UE, so that the UE can correctly receive the TPC bits carried on the F-DPCH, and thus the UE can use the TPC bits to implement inner loop power control. Therefore, the Node B can correctly receive the data information transmitted over an E-DPDCH.08-30-2012
20120218939Dynamic selection among algorithms for generating fillers for security of data communications - To reduce the effectiveness of eavesdropping attacks, a filler such as one utilized in a data frame for link-layer LAPDm signaling may be dynamically selected to utilize a first bit pattern (first filler) generated utilizing a first algorithm when the transmissions are unencrypted, and to utilize a second bit pattern (second filler) generated utilizing a second algorithm different from the first algorithm when the transmissions are encrypted.08-30-2012
20120218938WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD - According to one embodiment, a wireless communication apparatus includes a receiving unit, a transmitting unit and a control unit. The receiving unit is configured to receive a first connection request frame indicating a connection request from another apparatus. The transmitting unit is configured to transmit a connection acceptance frame indicating a response to the first connection request frame. The control unit is configured to control the transmitting unit to retransmit the connection acceptance frame until a first acknowledgement frame addressed to the apparatus as a response to the connection acceptance frame is received from the another apparatus, and control the transmitting unit to stop from transmitting the connection acceptance frame if a second acknowledgement frame addressed to the another apparatus as a destination is received or if a second connection request frame addressed to the another apparatus is received.08-30-2012
20120218937User Equipment Feedback In Support of Multiple Input Multiple Output Operations - A method of feedback in wireless telephony includes a hybrid of implicit and explicit feedback. The implicit and explicit feedback are transmitted in distinct subframes. These distinct set of subframes may have the same periodicity but differing offsets. The distinct set of subframes may have periodicities related by an integral factor. Either set of subframes may include aperiodic subframes.08-30-2012
20130058280PAGING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR E-MBS TERMINAL IN MULTI-CARRIER SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method for receiving a paging message of an idle-mode terminal in a multi-carrier system, comprising the steps of: receiving, from a network, a paging message through a first carrier corresponding to a predetermined condition in a paging listening interval; transmitting, to the network, a first ranging request message that includes control information indicative of a location updating procedure for notifying a start of E-MBS service reception; determining, as a paging carrier, a second carrier from which an E-MBS service is transmitted; and receiving the paging message from the network through the determined second carrier.03-07-2013
20130070672Anonymous Messaging Conversation - An anonymous communication module that provides full conversational anonymous messaging and voice/video communication between two or more parties interacting over a wireless/landline network. An anonymous messaging module accepts an anonymous initiation message to a public address to trigger the start of an anonymous voice/video conversation between a message originator and a message recipient. An anonymous communication module performs intercept and address substitution on a message and/or voice/video call transmitted between two or more parties via an anonymous communication service. The anonymous communication module substitutes a real address in the source field of an intercepted message and/or voice/video call, with an anonymous address mapped to that real address, and substitutes an anonymous address in the destination field of an intercepted message and/or voice/video call with a real address mapped to that anonymous address. The anonymous communication module then forwards the newly formatted message and/or voice/video call to an intended message/call destination.03-21-2013
20090092078AUTOMATIC PROVISIONING OF ADMISSION POLICY FOR FEMTOCELL - Automatic provisioning of an access point base station or femtocell. The method may include the femtocell transmitting first information (e.g., location information, signal measurement information, capability information, etc.) to a service provider (e.g., over an IP network). The femtocell may receive second information from the service provider, where the second information includes one or more operational parameters. The operational parameters may include hand-off parameters, admission policy parameters, PN or scrambling codes, power parameters, and/or other parameters. The femtocell may operate according to the received parameters to provide access for a plurality of access terminals in a local area.04-09-2009
20090092077SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING REORDERING FUNCTIONALITY IN RADIO COMMUNICATIONS - The definition and use of an additional timer for the MAC-hs reordering function in a user equipment. The timer counts transmission time intervals and is reset each time that the user equipment receives a data packet. If the timer reaches a set value, indicating a sufficiently long period of inactivity, then the transmission sequence number is reset to zero or another predefined value. A base station can run a similar timer and, after the timer reaches a set value, can consider the user equipment as no longer being active.04-09-2009
20090092076Method and apparatus to reduce system overhead - System throughput is improved by decreasing the system overhead by reducing the size of control packets and data packet headers. A connection identifier (CID) is divided into a CID part 04-09-2009
20090092083MULTI-HOP WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM - A source terminal measures characteristics of the path at the source terminal itself, produces a characteristics-measurement packet, and transmits the produced characteristics-measurement packet to a relay terminal. Upon receiving the characteristics-measurement packet, the relay terminal measures characteristics of the path at the relay terminal itself, renews the characteristics of the path included in the characteristics-measurement packet using the measured characteristics of the path, and transmits the characteristics of the wireless communication path to the destination terminal. The source terminal produces an admission-request packet and transmits the packet to the destination terminal. Upon receiving the admission-request packet, the destination terminal allows or rejects the traffic quality maintenance request according to the characteristics of the wireless communication path. The allowance or rejection of the quality maintenance request is transmitted to the source terminal with the admission-reply packet by the destination terminal.04-09-2009
20090092082MAINTAINING INFORMATION FACILITATING DETERMINISTIC NETWORK ROUTING - In a wireless network that includes a plurality of nodes, a method of maintaining, by a first node, information regarding communications links between nodes in the wireless network includes: for each communications link that is established with another node, recording an identification of the other node; and for each message received by the first node from the other node through the communications link with the other node, recording a network pathway by which the message has been sent in the wireless network, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent. Another method includes recording, by a server, for each message that is received by the server from the wireless network, a network pathway by which the message has been sent, the network pathway identifying the nodes and the communications links therebetween by which the message has been sent.04-09-2009
20090092080CENTRALIZED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for centralized access management to diverse types of mobile network access points is described herein. By way of example, network components can generate a system determination list (SDL) for a user terminal (UT) that is customized to access capabilities of the UT and/or current position of the UT. The SDL can be employed by the UT to determine which network access points to camp on, handoff to, or the like. The network components can include a network database that maintains UT subscriber and related home Femto cell information, or such information can be maintained at a network operator's home location register. In some aspects, the information can be obtained over the air from the UT or from a base station serving the UT.04-09-2009
20090092079METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING UPLINK PROTOCOL CHANGES - A method and apparatus for supporting uplink (UL) protocol changes includes reconfiguring a medium access control (MAC) protocol. A hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) process is flushed, and a MAC-e/es reset is performed.04-09-2009
20090092075Methods and apparatus for establishing communications between devices with differing capabilities - Methods and apparatus for establishing communications between devices, e.g., mobile communications devices in an ad hoc network, with differing capabilities are described. A device which is capable of supporting multiple protocols in addition to a protocol used to communicate device capability information forms communications links with first and second devices which do not have the ability to form communications links directly between one another, e.g., because of they do not support the same protocols. Once the links are established the first and second devices can communicate via the third communications device. In some embodiments, each of the first, second and third devices support a first communications protocol which is suitable for communicating device capability information but is unsuitable for exchanging user data. The ability to discover other devices and there capabilities facilitates the creation of an ad hoc network.04-09-2009
20130136057Base Station Aided Synchronization - An apparatus, method and computer program product include requesting a physical identifier of a communication base station having a preset hierarchical distance to a communication core network from a first communication base station having a higher hierarchical distance than the preset hierarchical distance, based on a connection on one of an interface between a communication base station having a higher hierarchical distance than the preset hierarchical distance and the communication core network and an interface between two communication base stations both having a higher hierarchical distance than the preset hierarchical distance. Prior to the requesting, an initial synchronization with a neighbor base station can be established. After the requesting, an accurate synchronization with the overly base station based on the obtained physical identifier can be established.05-30-2013
20130070685METHOD FOR ALLOWING TERMINAL TO TRANSMIT POWER HEADROOM INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system, and more specifically, to a method for allowing a terminal to transmit power headroom information in a wireless communication system and a device therefor. According to one aspect of the present invention, a method for allowing a terminal, in which at least one serving cell is set, to transmit power headroom information comprises the steps of: generating said power headroom information; and transmitting the power headroom information to a base station. In this case, said power headroom information includes a first field that includes a plurality of indicators, and at least one second field that indicates a power headroom level, wherein each of the plurality of indicators is capable of indicating whether at least one said second field for at least one of each of the serving cell exists.03-21-2013
20130070681TRANSMITTING DATA IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - According to one embodiment, a method for retransmitting a protocol data unit (PDU) in a mobile communication system includes: segmenting a first PDU to form one or more second PDUs if the first PDU does not fit within a PDU size indicated by a lower layer; and transmitting the one or more second PDUs to a receiving side. Segmenting the first PDU includes: mapping only a data field of the first PDU to a data field of the one or more second PDUs; and setting a header of each of the one or more second PDUs. The header of each of the one or more second PDUs includes a field indicating a sequence number of the first PDU.03-21-2013
20130070684SYSTEM, TERMINAL AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING 1X MESSAGES - The disclosure provides a system, end and method for transmitting 1x messages. The method comprises: when a sending terminal needs to send a plurality of 1x messages to a receiving terminal through a non-1x network, carrying the plurality of 1x messages in one message. With the technical solution of the disclosure, the problem that it is unable to ensure that a plurality of 1x Layer3 messages is transmitted synchronously under the related inter-working situation and the problem of the processing time sequence of messages are solved.03-21-2013
20130070682MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND PACKET CONTROL METHOD IN THE MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a protocol structure and packet segmentation and NACK information feedback mechanism for efficient data transmission in a mobile communication in which a terminal receives data on the multiple carriers from multiple base stations. The present invention proposes a protocol structure appropriate for a mobile communication system supporting inter-eNB carrier aggregation and the terminal and base station operations for packet efficient segmentation and efficient NACK information feedback in association with the protocol structure.03-21-2013
20130070683Method And A Device For Increased Bit Rate - In a method and a device for setting the Transport Format Combination size step in a scheduler of a cellular radio system to be used by a user equipment transmitting data to a radio base station of the cellular radio system, the Transport Format Combination size step is set as a function of a number of pre-defined cell and/or user conditions. This will increase the user bit Crate at low load. Specifically, the time to reach a high bitrate in low load situations is reduced. This leads to enhanced user experience for bursty services such as World Wide Web (WWW) services.03-21-2013
20130070679Method and Device for Data Processing in a Wireless Network - A method and a device for data processing in a wireless network including several base stations are provided, wherein a mobility information is conveyed between at least two base stations. Furthermore, a communication system is suggested including at least one such device.03-21-2013
20130070680MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MOBILE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: (A) transmitting, from a mobile station (UE) to a radio base station (eNB), a “Measurement Report” including a measurement result of a “MeasObject”, when the mobile station (UE) links and manages a “MeasID”, the “MeasObject”, and a “ReportConfig”, and when the mobile station (UE) determines that the “ReportConfig” is satisfied; and (B) determining, at the mobile station (UE), whether or not to release the “MeasID” according to a type of a carrier designated by the “MeasObject”, when a change has occurred in a combination of the primary carrier and the secondary carriers.03-21-2013
20130070678ADAPTIVE PILOT STRUCTURE TO ASSIST CHANNEL ESTIMATION IN SPREAD SPECTRUM SYSTEMS - The present invention relates generally to methods for generating a dynamic pilot symbol structure in spread spectrum communication systems, and in particular to the use of pilot symbols by user equipment in channel estimation. In one form, the method includes, allocating basic pilot symbols at the beginning of each data chunk and spread over the plurality of sub-carrier frequencies; and selectively replacing data symbols in each data chunk with adaptive pilot symbols according to the speed of the user equipment.03-21-2013
20130070675WIRELESS DATAGRAM TRANSACTION PROTOCOL SYSTEM - Systems are provided for sequencing, delivery acknowledgement, and throttling of data packets over a network layer, such as UDP and SMS. To support devices with limited battery resources, the invention incorporates asymmetric retry logic and/or acknowledgements with overlapping ranges, to minimize the transmissions required for the device. The sender of a data-bearing frame does not need to wait for a frame to be acknowledged before sending the next, such that many frames can be “in flight” at once.03-21-2013
20130070677CONCURRENT AIRBORNE COMMUNICATION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Aircrafts or unmanned air vehicles flying near Earth are used as airborne communications towers or relays. Using techniques of ground based beam forming and wavefront multiplexing enhance the ability to coherently combine the power of the communication signals, and improve the signal-to-noise ratio.03-21-2013
20130070674MOBILE STATION, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND ABNORMAL POWER DOWN REPORTING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile station, a base station, a communication system and an abnormal power down reporting method thereof are provided. The communication system includes the mobile station and the base station. The mobile station is located within a wireless communication range of the base station. The mobile station transmits a notification message to the base station after detecting abnormal power down of the mobile station. The base station determines that abnormal power down occurred in the mobile station according to the notification message, and notifies a backhaul network to deregister the mobile station.03-21-2013
20130070673System and Method for Cross-Layer Encapsulation Messaging - A method for mobile node operations includes communicating with a first point of attachment in a first radio network through a radio interface tuned to the first radio network, and encapsulating a first frame in a second radio network format within a media independent control frame. The method also includes transmitting the media independent control frame with the first frame in the second radio network format encapsulated therein to a second point of attachment in a second radio network using the radio interface tuned to the first radio network.03-21-2013
20130070671PATH CONTROL METHOD FOR MULTIHOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A multihop wireless network includes a plurality of wireless nodes. Each wireless node calculates a metric value indicating a quantity of providing a guideline for selecting a superordinate destination node with each candidate for the superordinate destination node when carrying out a multihop wireless communication with a specific wireless node based on peripheral node information about node information received from the peripheral wireless nodes and determines the superordinate destination node based on the calculated metric value. The network system selects a superordinate wireless node as a target wireless node expected to change the number of the wireless nodes existing in a subordinate hierarchy, and intentionally changes a value of the node information sent from the target wireless node to the peripheral wireless nodes.03-21-2013
20130070668APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMISSION AND RECOVERY MODES FOR AN RTS/CTS SYSTEM THAT UTILIZES MULTICHANNELS - A method, apparatus and computer readable medium for an RTS/CTS system that utilizes a plurality of channels for data transfer, includes sending, by a first device, an RTS frame over the plurality of channels; receiving, by a second device, the RTS frame and outputting a CTS frame to the first device based on receipt of the RTS frame, the CTS frame being output over at least one of the plurality of channels; setting, by each device within a network that receives the RTS frame, a network allocation vector (NAV) to a time duration that is based in part on information included in the RTS frame; and transmitting, by the first device, data to the second device within the time duration set by the NAV using the at least one of the plurality of channels.03-21-2013
20130070670EFFICIENT MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for combining the data (e.g., the channel station information (CSI) and the block acknowledgment (BA)) from one or more stations (STAs) capable of multi-user (MU) transmission in an effort to reduce the number of frames involved in a MU frame exchange. For certain aspects, the BA frames may be moved before a MU transmission and combined with the CSI frames, thereby effectively acknowledging a prior MU transmission. By reducing the number of frames involved, the efficiency of MU exchanges may be increased.03-21-2013
20130070669LATENCY-INSENSITIVE RAN - HIGH-CAPACITY/LATENCY-TOLERANT SESSION MANAGEMENT - A telecommunications network receives an indication that a user device, communicatively coupled to the telecommunications network, is a latency-insensitive device; receives connection information associated with a connection between the user device and the telecommunications network; stores, based on the indication that the user device is a latency-insensitive device, at least a portion of the connection information, associated with the connection between the user device and the telecommunications network, in a virtual memory of the server device; receives an indication that the connection is to become active; and places, based on receiving the indication that the connection is to become active, at least the portion of the connection information, associated with the connection between the user device and the telecommunications network, in a physical memory of the server device.03-21-2013
20130070667METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING CALLS - A system that incorporates teachings of the present disclosure may include, for example, receiving a request for a voice call at an interrogating call session control function server of an internet protocol multimedia subsystem where the call is associated with an originating communication device, transmitting a mapping query from the interrogating call session control function server to a database to obtain an internet protocol address for establishing the call with a recipient communication device in response to the request for the call, and routing the request to a server of the internet protocol multimedia subsystem or a second server based on a response to the mapping query provided by the database. Other embodiments are disclosed.03-21-2013
20100091711WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication method is provided which includes the steps of selecting, by a wireless communication device belonging to a communication system operating on a certain communication protocol, a communication protocol among a plurality of communication protocols, exchanging, among a plurality of wireless communication devices including the wireless communication device, information including peripheral communication status of each wireless communication device by using the selected communication protocol, and changing the communication protocol to be used for exchanging the information.04-15-2010
20110058516Accessory Based Data Distribution - In some aspects, a telecommunications device obtains an identifier from an accessory token. The telecommunications device may transmit the identifier to a server to request content associated with the identifier. The telecommunications device may receive the content from the server when the identifier is valid and/or the content is available. In various aspects, the accessory token is communicatively coupled to the telecommunications device, which enables the telecommunications device to obtain the identifier.03-10-2011
20110038322METHOD AND DEVICE TO SUPPORT INTERWORKING BETWEEN 3G SYSTEM SAE SYSTEM - The present invention provides a method and device to support interworking between 3G system and SAE system, and the method includes steps of detecting by PDN-GW if any NON-GBR packet data protocol context exists in all packet data protocol contexts corresponding to a terminal or not; triggering by PDN-GW a packet data protocol context establishment process to ensure that the NON-GBR packet data protocol context is always well established in the network, if there is no NON-GBR packet data protocol context. With the method of the present invention, an LTE terminal accessing through the 3G network can still enjoy services provided by a default bearer after it moves from the 3G network to the SAE network.02-17-2011
20110038321METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING REFERENCE SIGNALS FOR RELAY NODE - A method for transmitting reference signals for a relay node is disclosed. The method includes transmitting a first reference signals for a base station in a first transmission region of a subframe and a second reference signals for a relay node in a second transmission region of the subframe. The first transmission region and the second transmission region in the subframe are regions for transmitting data and the first transmission region and the second transmission regions are different sub-bands of Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH). Accordingly, it is possible to transmit wideband reference signals by the relay node, to maximally support a Long Term Evolution (LTE) user equipment while operating the relay node, and to perform cooperative multipoint transmission and reception between the base station and the relay node.02-17-2011
20110038320METHOD FOR ACQUIRING MULTI-CELL SPECIFIC MESSAGE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for acquiring a multi-cell specific message in a wireless communication system includes receiving a downlink preamble, receiving the multi-cell specific message weighted with the downlink preamble, and decoding the weighted multi-cell specific message by using the received downlink preamble. Accordingly, since a preamble is used to transmit a multi-cell specific message, there is no need to transmit an additional signal in order to estimate a channel of the multi-cell specific message. In addition, a user equipment can acquire the multi-cell specific message by simply performing decoding.02-17-2011
20110038318UBIQUITOUS ACCESS TO FEMTO-CONNECTED NETWORK - A system and method of enabling a mobile device to communicate with a local IP network host and an external IP network host using a femto cellular access point on a femto cellular access network. A local gateway is coupled to the femto cellular access network for receiving data packets transmitted on the femto cellular access network and for routing the data packets to one of a local IP network and an external IP network, based on a destination address associated with the data packets. The femto cellular access network includes an LTE network, an EVDO network connected to an EPC, or a WiMax 802.16e/m network connected to the EPC.02-17-2011
20110038315MINI-SLOT COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL - Mesh communications based on a plurality of time-slots in which every time slot is associated with communications between a pair of nodes, in which at least one time-slot is associated with communications between a first node and a second node, and in which at least a second time-slot is associated with communications between the first node and a third node. The first node and the second node communicate during the at least one time-slot, while the third node awaits communications with the first node during the second time-slot. If the first node is still communicating with the second node during the second time-slot the first node does not communication with the third node.02-17-2011
20110038308FORMING SPATIAL BEAMS WITHIN A CELL SEGMENT - To perform wireless communications in a wireless network, at least two spatial beams are formed within a cell segment, where the at least two spatial beams are associated with different power levels. The at least two spatial beams are swept across the cell segment according to a sweep pattern. In some implementations, multiple antenna assemblies can be used, where each antenna assembly has plural antenna elements. A lower one of the antenna assemblies can be used to form high and lower power beams, and an upper one of the antenna assemblies can be used to communicate backhaul information, for example.02-17-2011
20130058284METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING UPLINK RANGING IN A WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The present description relates to a method in which a terminal in an idle mode performs network reentry in a wireless access system, wherein the method comprises: a step of receiving, from a base station, control information containing a first parameter and a second parameter for determining a frame in which uplink ranging is to be performed; and a step of performing uplink ranging for network reentry with the base station on the basis of the control information, wherein the first parameter indicates the location of a superframe in which uplink ranging is to be performed, and the second parameter indicates the frame duration in the superframe which is indicated by the first parameter and in which uplink ranging is performed.03-07-2013
20130058283APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITING AND RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus for transmitting and receiving system information in a wireless communication system and method thereof are disclosed. In method of receiving system information at a mobile station (MS) in a wireless communication system, the present invention includes the steps of transmitting a version of a broadcast message stored in the mobile station to a base station when failing to receive a broadcast message at a transmission time of the broadcast message or in a transmission interval of the broadcast message, and receiving a response message including the system information contained in the broadcast message being transmitted by the base station from the base station when the version of the broadcast message stored in the mobile station is different from that of the broadcast message being transmitted by the base station.03-07-2013
20130058279DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - The data rate in MIMO transmission is increased to a maximum even when a number of transmitting antennas of a base station apparatus is different from the number of transmitting antennas of the base station apparatus supported by a mobile station apparatus. The base station apparatus (eNodeB) reports the number of transmitting antennas provided for the base station apparatus to the mobile station apparatus UE (ST03-07-2013
20130058282MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND METHOD - A communication apparatus in a mobile communication system includes a first control information generation unit configured to generate first control information including retransmission information on a previously received data channel, a second control information generation unit configured to generate second control information including scheduling information on radio resources and a transmission signal generation unit configured to generate a transmission signal including a lower layer control channel including at least one of the first control information and the second control information. The transmission signal generation unit generates the transmission signal to transmit the first control information in any of subframes arriving at a first cycle and to transmit the second control information in any of subframes arriving at a second cycle longer than the first cycle.03-07-2013
20130058278MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes a step in which the gateway apparatus P-GW transmits “Proxy Binding Acknowledgement containing “O Flag setting information” indicating whether or not a DNSv6 address is allocated to the mobile station UE to the gateway apparatus S-GW in response to the reception of the “Proxy Binding Update”, and a step in which the gateway apparatus S-GW instructs the mobile station UE that there is no need to acquire a DNSv6 address using a DHCP request signal with “O Flag” in RA when the received “O Flag setting information” indicates that a DNSv6 address is allocated to the mobile station UE.03-07-2013
20130058281METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REAL TIME CONTROL OF AN ACTIVE ANTENNA OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and system suitable for supporting various wireless services on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). The DAS can provide wireless services including voice and data services using the same equipment. The DAS can include one or more active antenna units controlled by an access point, and includes control channels for transferring control and status information between the access point and the antenna. The control channels can be transferred over a separate cable, or transferred using one or more intermediate frequency signals transferred over existing cables. The control channels can be used to configure and control and receive status from the managed components of the DAS including active antennas, control the amplifiers used to process TDD signals, and control the switching of diversity antenna systems.03-07-2013
20130058273STATION-CENTRIC MULTI-USER MULTIPLE INPUT MULTIPLE OUTPUT (MU-MIMO) - Certain aspects of the present disclosure provide techniques and apparatus for using a Media Access Control (MAC) address of a station (STA) sending a direct link multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (MU-MIMO) transmission such that one or more STAs receiving the transmission may interpret a group identifier (ID) indicating a group to which the STAs belong. Using the group ID and the MAC address allows a STA to independently manage its group IDs, independent of an access point (AP) or other STAs in a Basic Service Set (BSS).03-07-2013
20130058275TRANSPORT OF MULTIHOMING SERVICE RELATED INFORMATION BETWEEN USER EQUIPMENT AND 3GPP EVOLVED PACKET CORE - In an embodiment, there is provided a method for the transport of multihoming service related information between User Equipment UE and 3GPP Evolved Packet Core EPC through untrusted non 3GPP Access Network, said method comprising a step of: 03-07-2013
20130058277COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Communication transmission methods and systems are provided. Firstly, a base station is configured to set an indicator for determining whether a first wireless communication technology and a second communication technology are allowed simultaneously for transmissions by the base station. Then, a user equipment, is configured to receive a voice call by a user equipment from the base station and determine whether to answer the voice call using the first wireless communication technology or the second communication technology, when the first wireless communication technology and the second communication technology are not allowed simultaneously shown by the indicator.03-07-2013
20130058274METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for distributing network access information by wireless network owner includes using information associated with the user of a mobile terminal to identify potential friends and colleagues that may need access to wireless networks owned or managed by friends and colleagues. The distribution process can be initiated by the candidate user or by the network operator. The information associated with the user can include the user's contacts list or information available from other sources, such as a social networking website. When a candidate is identified, the user's terminal or a server, on behalf the user, can send a communication to network operator requesting access to their wireless network access point. The friend or colleague can verify the pre-existing relationship by searching for the operator in a private database, such the friend or colleague's contacts list or by searching another database, such as a social networking website.03-07-2013
20130058276METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING SIDE INFORMATION FOR NETWORK CODING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for efficiently sending side information to support network coding in a wireless network are disclosed. A node may send a subset of packet identifiers (IDs) for received packets in order to reduce signaling overhead in support of network coding operations. In one design, a node obtains a plurality of received packets, with each received packet being generated based on at least one base packet in a set of base packets. The node determines a reduced set of base packet IDs for the received packets. The reduced set may be a subset of an overall set including base packet IDs of all base packets for each of the received packets. The node sends information conveying the reduced set of base packet IDs, receives a network-coded packet generated based on the sent information, and recovers a base packet intended for the node based on the network-coded packet.03-07-2013
20120307731Primary Channel Estimation - Some example embodiments may be directed towards a method in a network node, which may be comprised in a Radio Network, for transmitting a combined wireless communication signal. The combined wireless communication signal may comprise a primary and a secondary signal component. The method may comprise transmitting to an user equipment the secondary signal component according to a secondary transmission scheme such that the secondary signal component at least partially overlaps with the primary signal component with respect to a signal domain. The method may also comprise simultaneously, suppressing at least one portion of the secondary signal component during a transmission of the primary signal component.12-06-2012
20120307724RADIO LINK FAILURE DETECTION PROCEDURES IN LONG TERM EVOLUTION UPLINK AND DOWNLINK AND APPARATUS THEREFOR - A method and apparatus for detecting a radio link (RL) failure for uplink (UL) and downlink (DL) in a long term evolution (LTE) wireless communication system including at least one wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) and at least one evolved Node-B (eNodeB) are disclosed. A determination is made as to whether an RL has an in-synchronization status or an out-of-synchronization status. An RL failure is declared if an out-of-synchronization status is detected.12-06-2012
20110013567Method and a Transceiver for Reducing Retransmissions in a Telecommunications System - The present invention relates to a method and to a transceiver (01-20-2011
20110013566COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE NODE, ACCESS ROUTER - Disclosed is a technique to reduce the number of messages to register mobile node position information with a home agent when a mobile node roams into a foreign network domain having a roaming relationship with a home network domain. Upon reception of network information 01-20-2011
20110013565COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MOBILE STATION, RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, AND RETRANSMISSION PROGRAM - A communication system which can immediately retransmit data under a condition that it cannot specify number of retransmissions, characterizing in that a mobile station comprises a first transmission unit for transmitting the data through a first physical channel, a first reception unit for receiving a decoded result through a second physical channel from a base station, and a second transmission unit for generating a first control information based on a decoded result and transmitting a first control information through a third physical channel, and a base station comprises a second reception unit for receiving the data, a third transmission unit for decoding the data in the physical layer and transmitting the decoded result through the second physical channel, and a third reception unit for receiving the first control information through the third physical channel, wherein the third transmission unit transmits the second control information through the second physical channel to the mobile station in order to retransmit the data from the beginning in a case when it cannot specify number of the retransmissions from the first control information.01-20-2011
20110013564MOBILE STATION AND METHOD FOR INTERWORKING WITH BASE STATION COMPATIBLE WITH FIRST AND SECOND PROTOCOLS - This invention provides a Mobile Station (MS) interworking with a Base Station (BS) which is compatible with a first protocol and a second protocol, the MS comprising: a synchronizing unit for synchronizing with the BS; a broadcast information obtaining unit for obtaining first protocol broadcast information from the BS; an operation mode selecting unit for selecting a first operation mode or a second operation mode according to whether the MS supports the first protocol or the second protocol, wherein when the MS supports the second protocol, second protocol MAP information is obtained according to the first protocol broadcast information, and data are transmitted via a prescribed channel to the BS according to the second protocol MAP information. Also, the present invention provides a method of MS network entry to communicate with a BS and a method of forming an IEEE 802.16m frame compatible with IEEE 802.16e frame. According to this invention, an IEEE 802.16e MS can access an IEEE 802.16m BS, and an IEEE 802.16m MS can also access an IEEE 802.16m BS. Even if an MS and a BS operate under different protocols, the MS can enter a network to perform communication with the BS.01-20-2011
20110013562METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING MOBILITY TO A MOBILE NODE - The present invention relates to a method for providing mobility to a mobile node capable packet based communication within a communications system via an access point. The method uses a signed session information package for allowing the mobile node to provide a further access point with information relating to the routing of a communications session so that the first access point can be used as an anchor point for the communications session even if the mobile node has changed its point of access to a further access point, wherein the communications session is a communications session between the mobile node and a corresponding node within a communications system. The signed session information package comprises routing information relating to the communications session and is signed by the first access point which is the access point via which the mobile node was communicating at the time of initiation of the communications session.01-20-2011
20110013560BROADCAST SIGNALING L1 OVERLOAD INDICATION - Devices and methods are provided for implementing an over-the-air (OTA) broadcast of an overload indication to reduce interference levels at neighboring node(s). In one embodiment, the method involves receiving the OTA broadcast of the overload indication from a neighboring node. The method further involves performing transmit power control based upon the received overload indication to reduce Interference over Thermal (IoT) noise at the neighboring node (e.g., by adjusting the transmit power spectral density). Such a method may be performed, for example, by an access terminal or a small base node.01-20-2011
20110013559WIRELESS COMMUNICATION VIA A TUNNEL THROUGH A SERVING ACCESS NETWORK - Disclosed are an apparatus and a method for wireless communication with a non-serving access network via a tunnel through a serving access network. The method includes establishing a tunnel through a serving network to a target network independent of a handoff. The method then provides for communicating via the tunnel between a mobile station and the target network.01-20-2011
20110013558Reducing processing resources incurred by a user interface - A method, program and apparatus for limiting processing resources incurred due to refreshing a user interface of a first terminal. The method comprises: at a first terminal, receiving a plurality of event indications which indicate respective events, each of the event indications being received at a different time; and based on the event indications, refreshing the user interface of the first terminal to reflect each of the respective events. Refreshing comprises determining a plurality of time periods, and during each of those time periods postponing the user interface from being refreshed to reflect any outstanding ones of the event indications until that time period has elapsed. The time periods are each determined having a length set in dependence on a timing of the receipt of one or more of the event indications, wherein the length of a later time period is set to an increased value relative to an earlier time period in response to the receipt of one or more of said event indications within a time limit.01-20-2011
20110013557MOBILITY PLANE ARCHITECTURE FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - In a telecommunications system (01-20-2011
20110013556INTERFERER REGION IDENTIFICATION USING IMAGE PROCESSING - Demodulation and interference parameter estimation in an OFDM receiver is improved by identifying regions, in a two-dimensional array of time-frequency transmission positions, having related interference parameters, such as resulting from the same pre-coding scheme, transmission rank, transmitting antennas, and the like. An interference measure is estimated for each of a plurality of time-frequency positions. The interference measures are analyzed by considering them as pixels, or picture elements, in a two-dimensional image, and applying image processing algorithms to identify the regions having related interference parameters. The image processing algorithms may include operations such as edge detection, segmentation, and/or clustering. The receiver may perform interference suppression or cancellation such as interference rejection combining of data extracted from signals received within an identified time-frequency region having related interference parameters.01-20-2011
20110013555USE OF A WIRELESS CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CONNECTIONS FOR TRANSFERRING INFORMATION REQUIRING REAL-TIME OPERATION OF PACKET-SWITCHED MULTIMEDIA SERVICES - A system includes a terminal, a wireless access network, a multimedia core network and a network device, which connects the wireless access network to the multimedia core network, expanded location updating to the registration procedure of the multimedia core network, and performs double registration of the user to the multimedia core network. The terminal performs expanded location updating relaying the registration point identity of the multimedia core network, the user's phone number and the private user identity to the network device in connection with normal location updating signaling. In the double registration performed by the network device, two addresses are registered for the user of the terminal, one of which is associated with the domain name of the terminal in question or a numeric IP address, and the other to a domain name of the network device or a numeric IP address.01-20-2011
20120188944HOME AGENT ON A HOME LINK - In node management in a packet-switched network, a first node acts as a proxy for a second node. Both nodes have network-layer addresses at the network layer and link-layer addresses at the link layer. The first node receives a request to receive and forward packets addressed to the second node's network-layer address. The same network-layer address is associated with the first and the second node, and the first and the second node have distinct link-layer addresses. The first node advertises to nodes attached to the packet-switched network the first node's link-layer address as a destination address for the second node's network-layer address; the second node does not advertise. The first node receives in response to advertising, packets destined to the second node's network-layer address having the first node's link-layer address and forwards packets addressed to the second node's network-layer address to the second node using its link-layer address.07-26-2012
20090285160INCREASING RELIABILITY OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST PROTOCOL - In a communication system using HARQ, the problem of false ACK detection when no ACK/NACK feedback is transmitted is solved sent by varying the reliability of the scheduling information transmitted to the user terminal on a downlink control channel depending on whether the user terminal is expected to use a first or second uplink channel for sending ACK/NACK feedback. When the user terminal is expected to use the first channel to send ACK/NACK feedback, the base station transmits scheduling information to the user terminal with normal reliability. When the user terminal is expected to send ACK/NACK feedback on the second uplink channel, the base station transmits the signaling information to the user terminal with enhanced reliability. The reliability of the signaling information can be increased, for example, by increasing the transmit power on the downlink control channel, increasing the aggregation level, or a combination thereof.11-19-2009
20090274091SYSTEM FOR INTERCONNECTING BROADBAND WIRELESS NETWORK WITH WIRED NETWORK - A system for interconnecting a broadband wireless network with a wired network comprises: as for a broadband wireless network required to be interconnected with a wired network, in equipment selected in the corresponding broadband wireless access (BWA) network, setting an interface communicating with at least one kind of wired network; through communicating with equipment of the at least one kind of wired network by the interface, transmitting information required to be transferred between the BWA network and the wired network; and then implementing the interconnection between the broadband wireless network and the wired network. For example, it can implement the interconnection between the worldwide interoperability for microwave access (WiMAX) network and the multi-service operator (MSO) network and/or the digital subscriber line (DSL) network as the wired network. Therefore, the implementation of the present invention enables subscribers of the broadband wireless network and subscribers of the wired network to inter-utilize the corresponding access network and to acquire the corresponding access services, and thus the services are developed for the subscribers more smartly and conveniently.11-05-2009
20130094440METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CENTRALIZED OR DISTRIBUTED RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A DISTRIBUTED TRANSCEIVER NETWORK - A master application device comprises a plurality of distributed transceivers, a central baseband processor, and a network management engine that manages operation of the master application device and end-user application devices. The master application device communicates data streams to the end-user devices utilizing one or more distributed transceivers selected from the plurality of distributed transceivers. The selected distributed transceivers and the end-user devices are concurrently configured by the network management engine based on corresponding link quality and propagation environment. The network management engine allocates resources to the selected distributed transceivers and the end-user devices during the data communication. The network management engine continuously monitors communication environment information to configure beamforming settings and/or antenna arrangement for the selected distributed transceivers. Beam patterns are selected for the selected distributed transceivers so as to minimize power consumption and/or based on the location and orientation information of the end-user application devices.04-18-2013
20090268672System and Method for Pushing Data to a Mobile Device - A system for handling information requests from mobile devices includes a memory, a state prediction module, and a push module. The memory is operable to store data requests received from the mobile devices. The state prediction module is operable to access the memory to predict forecasted data requests for a mobile device based on the stored data requests. The push module is operable to receive the forecasted data requests from the state prediction module and in response request and receive response data related to the forecasted data requests and prepare the response data for transmission to the mobile device over a wireless network.10-29-2009
20090268671WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING ACCESS POINT STARTUP AND INITIAL CHANNEL SELECTION PROCESSES - A startup process of an access point (AP) includes a discovery phase and an announcement phase. During the discovery phase, the AP detects neighboring APs from its own extended service set (ESS), neighboring APs from different ESSs, and external sources of interference. During the announcement phase, the AP transmits its beacon signals at maximum power in order to accelerate recognition by neighboring APs running the discovery phase. An automatic initialization channel selection process of an AP scans channels the AP will use to communicate. Information of each scanned channel is recorded and a best performance channel is determined for use by the AP.10-29-2009
20090268670METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CONTROL INFORMATION AND PACKET DATA IN DOWNLINK - Provided are a method and apparatus for transmitting control information and packet data. The method includes generating control channels which transmit the control information; generating control indication channel which indicates whether the control channels are transmitted or not; generating data channels in order to transmit the packet data based on the control information; multiplexing the control channels, the control indication channels, and the data channels; and transmitting the control channels, the control indication channels, and the data channels. According to the present invention, when control information and packet data are transmitted in downlink, by transmitting additional information indicating whether control channels are transmitted or not, resources not actually allocated to control channels can be allocated to data channel and the mobile station can receive data channel using the control indication information.10-29-2009
20090268669BASE STATION DEVICE AND TERMINAL DEVICE - Disclosed are a base station device and a terminal device. The base station device includes a signal generator to generate a synchronization channel signal based on the cell type of a cell that the base station device manages, and a transmitter to transmit the synchronization channel signal via a synchronization channel established between at least one terminal device and the base station device, wherein the cell type is classified based on the information of the scale of the cell and whether the cell selectively allows access. The terminal may quickly recognize the cell type in a cellular wireless communication system having a hierarchical cell structure.10-29-2009
20090268668LOCAL IP ACCESS SCHEME - Local IP access is provided in a wireless network to facilitate access to one or more local services. In some implementations, different IP interfaces are used for accessing different services (e.g., local services and operator network services). A list that maps packet destinations to IP interfaces may be employed to determine which IP interface is to be used for sending a given packet. In some implementations an access point provides a proxy function (e.g., a proxy ARP function) for an access terminal. In some implementations an access point provides an agent function (e.g., a DHCP function) for an access terminal. NAT operations may be performed at an access point to enable the access terminal to access local services. In some aspects, an access point may determine whether to send a packet from an access terminal via a protocol tunnel based on the destination of the packet.10-29-2009
20090268666RANDOM ACCESS CHANNEL PREAMBLE SELECTION - The present invention provides a method of selecting a random access preamble in a radio communication system operable at least on a physical layer and a medium access control layer. Random access preambles are divided into at least two groups, the groups depending on at least one of the following: radio conditions and a size of a message to be transmitted by user equipment. The method comprising: (a) the medium access control layer selecting one of the preamble groups; (b) the medium access control layer randomly selecting one random access preamble within the selected group; (c) the medium access control layer signaling the selected random access preamble to the physical layer; and (d) the physical layer generating and transmitting the generated random access preamble.10-29-2009
20090268663WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus is provided. The wireless communication apparatus includes: detection means that detects that there is another wireless communication apparatus around the wireless communication apparatus; comparison means that compares a first reference value managed in the wireless communication apparatus with a second reference value managed in the another wireless communication apparatus; means that corrects the first reference value based on the comparison result; and means that announces the first reference value to the another wireless communication apparatus. Frequencies are set such that a frequency of the wireless communication apparatus becomes same as a frequency of still another wireless communication apparatus to which a radio wave of the wireless communication apparatus does not reach but a radio wave of the another wireless communication apparatus reaches.10-29-2009
20090268662Method and Arrangement for Bi-Directional Relating in Wireless Communication Systems - The present invention relates to methods and arrangements in a relaying radio node and/or in a sending/receiving radio node, adapted for use in a relaying communication system. The relaying node is in bidirectional communication with at least a first and a second sending/receiving radio node, and the relaying radio node receives at least a first signal carrying at least first data and a second signal carrying at least second data. The relaying node generates a reduced representation of at least the first and second signal, with a reduced information content as compared to the first and second data, by a joint non-linearly encoding operation, and transmits the reduced representation to at least the first and the second communication node. The first and second sending/receiving node can extract data from the reduced representation by a non-linear decoding operation using stored a priori information.10-29-2009
20090268661MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL APPARATUS, CONTROL METHOD THEREOF, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND ROAMING METHOD THEREOF - A mobile communication terminal apparatus and a control method thereof wherein a smooth handoff can be quickly achieved in a seamless manner during a roaming between data communication networks of different packet exchange systems. A mobile communication terminal apparatus (10-29-2009
20090067373Deep sleep mode for mesh points - Disclosed herein is an apparatus, method and computer program embodied in a computer-readable memory medium. The method includes transmitting a beacon or a directed transmission from a first device to inform at least one second device in a wireless communication network that the first device will be active only during an active time interval that comprises a beacon transmission period and an additional period near to the beacon transmission period and, at the completion of the active time interval, operating in a lower power mode of operation until a next active time interval. The wireless communication network may be embodied as a mesh network that includes a plurality of mesh points, and the first device and the at least one second device may each be a mesh point.03-12-2009
20120224539DEVICES FOR VARIABLE TRAFFIC FLOW TEMPLATES - The invention discloses a user terminal (09-06-2012
20120224538RESET FUNCTIONS - The invention discloses a node (09-06-2012
20120224537Method for Transmitting a Beacon in a Star Network (Master-Slave Ad Hoc Network) and a Sensor Node in a Star Network - A method for transmitting a beacon for a star network in manufacturing automation, for use in a communications protocol, such as IEEE Standard 802.15.4e, for manufacturing automation, using at least one gateway and at least one sensor node, wherein the beacon comprises a field including information about a number of base time slots in a superframe.09-06-2012
20120224536NETWORK DEVICE IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC BREAKOUT - According to an exemplary embodiment of the invention a network device may be provided which may comprise a receiving unit, a sending unit and an evaluating unit. It may be foreseen that the receiving unit may be adapted to receive a trigger signal for preparing a breakout of a plurality of packets, wherein the plurality of packets may comprise at least one packet from a first source and at least one packet from a second source and wherein the evaluating unit may be adapted to evaluate the trigger signal. Moreover, the evaluation unit may be adapted to evaluate packets from a first source and packets from a second source and the evaluation unit may be adapted to distinguish packets from the first source from packets from the second source.09-06-2012
20120224535TERMINAL DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING A POWER HEADROOM REPORT IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR SAME - Disclosed is a terminal device for transmitting a power headroom report (PHR) in a multi-carrier communication system, and a method for same. The terminal device for transmitting a power headroom report (PHR) in a multi-carrier communication system comprises a transmitter and a processor. The transmitter transmits, to a base station, a power headroom report for one or more active component carriers allocated to user equipment from among multiple carriers. The processor controls the transmitter such that the transmitter transmits the power headroom report including a first type of power headroom information calculated using the power value of a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) of the main component carrier among the active component carriers, and a second type of power headroom information calculated using the power value of the PUSCH and the power value of a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) of the main component carrier.09-06-2012
20120224534COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMPUTER PROGRAM AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication apparatus to transmit a plurality of frames in a network, where each frame includes one or more symbols having a symbol length, includes a data processing unit. The data processing unit acquires an inter-frame space between two consecutive frames from the plurality of frames. The data processing unit further adjusts the inter-frame space between the two consecutive frames upon determination that the inter-frame space is not an integral multiple of the symbol length. The communication apparatus also includes a transmitter unit to transmit the adjusted consecutive frames. 09-06-2012
20120224533HENB Blind Detection for Hierarchy Configuration - It is provided an apparatus, comprising including deciding means configured to decide whether or not a predefined condition is met; receiving means configured to receive a first signal at predefined places; inhibiting means configured to inhibit sending a second signal at the predefined places, if the deciding means decides that the predefined condition is met; monitoring means configured to monitor, if the deciding means decides that the predefined condition is met, for at least two of the predefined places whether or not a first signal is received at the predefined places; defining means configured to define a first mute place based on the monitoring result of the monitoring means and a predefined rule, wherein the first mute place is one of the predefined places at which a first signal is received; wherein the inhibiting means is configured to inhibit sending the second signal at the first mute place.09-06-2012
20120224532METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DYNAMIC ACK/NACK REPETITION FOR ROBUST DOWNLINK MAC PDU TRANSMISSION IN LTE - A method and apparatus for dynamic acknowledgement repetition for a downlink medium access control packet data unit transmission ‘MAC PDU’ requiring multiple acknowledgements, the method having the steps of: receiving the downlink MAC PDU requiring multiple acknowledgements; and utilizing a differentiating factor and acknowledgement scheme, sending the multiple acknowledgements.09-06-2012
20120224531METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER READABLE MEDIA FOR HYBRID SESSION BASED DIAMETER ROUTING - Methods, systems, and computer readable media for hybrid session based Diameter routing are disclosed. According to one method, the method comprises receiving, at a first Diameter signaling router (DSR), a first Diameter message for processing by a Diameter server. The method also includes selecting, using a Diameter node selection algorithm that operates on at least one parameter in the first Diameter message without requiring use of stored Diameter binding information, a first Diameter server to which the first Diameter message is to be routed. The method further includes determining whether the first Diameter server is available. The method also includes, in response to determining that the first Diameter server is not available, selecting a second Diameter server to which the first Diameter message is to be routed and creating an exception binding record that associates the second Diameter server and information in the first Diameter message.09-06-2012
20120224530METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RAPID GROUP SYNCHRONIZATION - A first device of a network may decide to transmit a flood of packets that is longer in duration than the maximum amount of time that the first device can continuously transmit. The first device may coordinate with one or more second devices of the network such that each of the one or more second devices transmits a respective second portion of the flood of packets following transmission of a first portion of the flood of packets by the first network device. The packets may advertise a pending network event that is to occur at a time indicated by the contents of the packets. The first device may select the one or more second devices from a plurality of devices based on a location of the one or more second devices and/or how many third devices are in the network.09-06-2012
20120224529USER EQUIPMENT AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A user equipment 09-06-2012
20130064186Method and System for Synchronizing Access Stratum Security Algorithm - The disclosure discloses a method and a system for synchronizing an Access Stratum (AS) security algorithm. The method comprises: a control plane notifying a user plane to start a decryption exception detection when sending an Radio Resource Control (RRC) connection re-establishment message (03-14-2013
20130064181CLOSED LOOP TRANSMIT DIVERSITY IN CONTINUOUS PACKET CONNECTIVITY - Apparatus and methods for communicating in a wireless network include receiving a weight vector in a slot for providing closed loop transmit diversity to signals in a next slot, holding the weight vector over a plurality of slots following a transmission burst, and applying the weight vector to signals in at least one slot of a subsequent transmission burst in discontinuous transmit. Additional apparatus and methods for communicating in a wireless network include determining a weight vector based on signals received from a device to provide closed loop transmit diversity feedback to the device, holding the weight vector over a plurality of slots following receiving a transmission burst, and applying the weight vector for signals received in at least one slot of a subsequent transmission burst from the device.03-14-2013
20130064184RECEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA OBTAINING METHOD - A receiving apparatus for communication area evaluation includes a receiving unit configured to receive a first signal transmitted from a base station; a delay profile calculation unit configured to calculate a downlink delay profile based on the first signal; and an estimated value calculation unit configured to calculate an estimated cyclic prefix length based on the calculated downlink delay profile.03-14-2013
20130064185METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR BULK ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION OF COMPONENT CARRIERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK ENVIRONMENT - Method and apparatus are provided for communicating availability and removal of one or more CCs in a cell. The one or more CCs that are available in the cell of a wireless communication network are determined, or a need to release one or more CCs that are active in the cell of a wireless communication network is detected. Availability of or the need to release the one or more CCs in the cell is communicated to a plurality of mobile stations. Each of the plurality of mobile stations is allowed to use or de-activate the one or more CCs in the cell.03-14-2013
20130064183POWER CONTROL METHOD AND RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - A power control method performing a power control operation between a radio network controller and a node B is provided. The method includes steps of: calculating a packet error rate threshold and a base received packet count according to a target block error rate (BLER) and a precision of the target BLER; obtaining an accumulated received packet count and an accumulated packet error count; increasing a target signal-to-interference ratio (SIR) of the node B when the accumulated packet error count is greater than a product of the accumulated received packet count and the packet error rate threshold; decreasing the target SIR when the accumulated received packet count is greater than or equal to a product of the base received packet count and a threshold parameter; and resetting the accumulated received packet count and the accumulated packet error count after the target SIR is adjusted.03-14-2013
20130064182METHOD FOR CONFIGURING NEIGHBOR LIST AND FEMTOCELL CORE PROCESSOR USING THE SAME - A method for configuring a neighbor list is provided. The method is applied to a femtocell to establish a neighbor list. The method includes steps of: accessing a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) list in the femtocell, the PLMN list recording a circuit-switched (CS)/packet-switched (PS) service weighting; determining a weighting parameter with reference to history CS/PS amount information and the CS/PS service weighting of the femtocell; selecting n macrocells from the PLMN list according to the weighting parameter, n being a natural number; and filling the n macrocells into the neighbor list.03-14-2013
20130064180HARQ-ACK FEEDBACK DETECTION FOR AN I/Q-MULTIPLEXED CONTROL CHANNEL - In a network that provides high-speed packet access, a mobile terminal is served by multiple activated serving cells which are grouped into cell groups. The mobile terminal monitors control channel transmissions to detect whether there are any transmissions for the mobile terminal from the activated serving cells for each cell group and provides feedback to a primary serving cell. When no transmission is detected from serving cells of a particular cell group, the mobile terminal may transmit feedback information explicitly indicating that no transmission is detected for that cell group. Alternatively, the mobile terminal may withhold transmitting feedback for that cell group and increases the power for transmitting the feedback information for cell groups in which transmissions were detected.03-14-2013
20130064176APPARATUSES AND METHODS FOR ENHANCING DATA RATE FOR PACKET-SWITCHED (PS) DATA SERVICE - A wireless communication device for enhancing a data rate for a packet-switched (PS) data service is provided. The device comprises a processor configured to reference cell information corresponding to a first subscriber identity card to maintain mobility for a second subscriber identity card by using the referenced cell information when performing the PS data service with a first service network for the first subscriber identity card.03-14-2013
20130064179MANAGEMENT OF TCP/IP MESSAGING IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Some implementations of the present invention provide mechanisms for gating the transmission of FIN and other short overhead messages of the like in order to improve spectral efficiency. In some implementations spectral efficiency is improved by reducing the number of air-link connections established to merely transmit FIN and other short overhead messages of the like. In one implementation FIN messages are buffered in a queue and transmitted when an air-link connection is established to transmit higher value messages. In one implementation FIN messages are buffered and transmitted when the contents of the buffer breach a threshold that justifies the establishment of an air-link connection to transmit the contents of the buffer.03-14-2013
20130064178System For Monitoring Electrical Power Distribution Lines In A Power Grid Using A Wireless Sensor Network - A system is disclosed for monitoring electrical power distribution lines comprising a plurality of mesh networks. Each mesh network monitors electrical power distribution lines at a select location of the power grid. Each mesh network comprises a plurality of wireless sensors adapted for wireless communications therebetween. Each wireless sensor measures attributes of line voltage for an associated electrical power distribution line at the select location. A master sensor collects data from the other sensors in the mesh network and determining voltage in phase attribute data of the electrical power distribution lines at the select location. The master sensor comprises a gateway device for communication outside of the mesh network. A monitor device for communication with master sensors receives voltage and phase attribute data from the master sensors for monitoring operation of the electrical power distribution line power grid.03-14-2013
20130064177PAYLOAD HEADER REDUCTION CLASSIFICATION FOR MULTIPROTOCOL CONVERGENCE SUBLAYER - Embodiments of the present disclosure describe methods, apparatuses, and systems for payload header reduction classification for multiprotocol convergence sublayer.03-14-2013
20130064175Access Point Assisted Direct Client Discovery - A wireless access point device configured to serve wireless client devices in a wireless network monitors transmissions sent by direct clients capable of forming ad hoc networks with one or more other direct clients. Profile data is stored for each detected direct client. The profile data indicates device type and services of the direct client, as well as potentially other information. The wireless access point receives from a direct client a request for information concerning one or more other direct clients, and sends a response to the direct client containing information for other direct clients based on the stored profile data.03-14-2013
20130163514WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, A COMPUTER-READABLE RECORDING MEDIUM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - When receiving a hello packet, a node registers information on a control header of the hello packet in a work table. The information on the control header of the hello packet includes a plurality of sets of an address, a destination, and ΣPav of a node. The node stores information, in which a set of an address, a destination, and ΣPav of the own node from the own node to the destination is added to the information on the control header, in the control header of the hello packet and transmits the hello packet. These processes are performed by each node included in an ad-hoc network.06-27-2013
20120195257METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN CABLE NETWORK - Disclosed herein are a method and an apparatus for transmitting data in a cable network. The transmitter generates upper layer data including multiplexed data of a plurality of subscriber terminals, dividing the upper layer data into a plurality of segment data, performs channel coding on each segment data, extracts information on at least one subscriber terminal included in each segment data to generate subscriber identification signals, inserts the subscriber identification signals into each channel-coded segment data, and modulates and transmits each segment data into which the subscriber identification signals are inserted.08-02-2012
20090238119WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM HAVING MOBILITY-BASED CONTENT DELIVERY - A portable subscriber access unit includes a wireless transceiver and a processor. The processor controls the transceiver, determines a mobility state of the access unit, and determines a data packet content type. The transceiver transmits the mobility state, receives service rights based on the mobility state, and transmits the data packet on a condition that the content type is allowed by the service rights.09-24-2009
20090238118REDUCING COST OF CELLULAR BACKHAUL - Methods and systems for reducing the cost of cellular backhaul are disclosed.09-24-2009
20090238117CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION FOR CLOSED SUBSCRIBER GROUP CELLS - A method for applying a priority of a closed subscriber group (CSG) cell, including receiving priority information for each of a plurality of communication frequencies over which the CSG cell can communicate; storing the priority information at a wireless transmit/receive unit; and applying the priority information to at least one of: taking measurements on a communication frequency, selecting to a CSG cell in the communication frequency, or reselecting to a CSG cell in the communication frequency.09-24-2009
20090238116METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL -BASED FAST CELL SWITCHING FOR HIGH-SPEED PACKET ACCESS - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating switching HSPA (high speed packet access) serving cells from each of an RNC (radio network controller), base station, and access terminal are provided. The RNC pre-configures an access terminal and each base station in an active set for HS-DSCH operation by providing identification codes identifying each of the base stations. The RNC transmits data packets tagged with sequence numbers to each base station where they are synchronously buffered. The access terminal initiates a handover by transmitting a PDU (protocol data unit) to each of the base stations. The PDU is encoded with the identification code of a target base station and a sequence number of a subsequent packet. The target receives the PDU and directly completes the handover with the access terminal.09-24-2009
20090238115COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A communication apparatus provides a first transfer unit for transferring a first packet received from a base station to a second home agent, the first packet to be sent from a first mobile station to a second mobile station as a destination, the first terminal and the second terminal being managed by a first home agent and the second home agent respectively, a second transfer unit for transferring the first packet sent back from the second home agent to the base station, and a return instruction unit for issuing to the base station an instruction for directly transferring a second packet to the second mobile station when a predetermined condition is satisfied.09-24-2009
20090238114CELL SELECTION AND RESELECTION IN DEPLOYMENTS WITH HOME NODEBS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate cell search, selection, and reselection within a wireless communication network that includes a home node base station (home nodeB). A user equipment (UE) can detect a home nodeB and communicate such identification to a macro network that includes at least one node base station (nodeB). The detected home nodeB and nodeB can be hierarchically structured in order to prioritize connectivity with the home nodeB over the nodeB. Such prioritization can be implemented by broadcasting home nodeB parameters and macro nodeB parameters having identification information therewith.09-24-2009
20090238113WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS APPARATUS - A preamble for use in a packet based communication system is defined on the basis of a preamble for use in a legacy packet based communication system. The preamble is constructed by extracting from the legacy preamble a pilot symbol sequence in frequency of the legacy preamble, replicating the pilot symbol sequence, and concatenating the pilot symbol sequence and the replicated pilot symbol sequence.09-24-2009
20090238112Apparatus and method for location information service of terminal in broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and a method for a location information service of a terminal in a broadband wireless communication system re provided. The method includes receiving a first location information request message requesting location information of the MS from an Internet Service Provider (ISP) server; forwarding the first location information request message to a DataBase (DB) which stores the location information of the MS; receiving a first location information response message comprising the location information of the MS from the DB; and forwarding the received first location information response message to the ISP server. Hence, the location information service of various requirements based on the accuracy or the time can be provided. Further, new services or various values added can be created.09-24-2009
20090238111APPARATUS FOR FLOW CONTROL - Disclosed is a technique which enables a mobile node (MN) connected to a mobile router (MR) to carry out flow filtering in a mobile network. This technique allows an MN 09-24-2009
20090238110Base Station Apparatus and Method for Controlling Base Station Apparatus - In a base station apparatus (09-24-2009
20090238109METHOD FOR QUALIFIED ROUTE BUILDING IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method of establishing a qualified route in a mesh network includes transmitting a route-discovery request from a source node such that transmitting includes transmitting the route-discovery request from the source node to at least one intermediate node that is a neighbor node to the source node, receiving the route-discovery request from an intermediate node at the destination node, and updating a route-discovery table for the intermediate node such that the route between the source node and the destination node is the only qualified route.09-24-2009
20130114509OFDM/OFDMA FRAME STRUCTURE FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology for communication systems is disclosed. The OFDM/OFDMA frame structure technology comprises a variable length sub-frame structure with efficiently sized cyclic prefixes and efficient transition gap durations operable to effectively utilize OFDM/OFDMA bandwidth. Furthermore, the frame structure provides compatibility with multiple wireless communication systems. An uplink frame structure and a downlink frame structure are provided.05-09-2013
20130100890INTEGRATED CIRCUIT FOR SEQUENCE REPORTING AND SEQUENCE GENERATION - Disclosed are a sequence report method and a sequence report device for reducing a signaling amount for reporting a Zadoff-Chu sequence or a GCL sequence allocated for a cell. Indexes starting at 1 are correlated to different ZC sequences and are allocated for cells so that the indexes are continuous. When such ZC sequences are reported from BS to UE, a start index indicating the start of the continuous indexes is combined with the number of allocated sequences and they are reported as allocation sequence information by a report channel. The UE and the BS share the correlation between the ZC sequences and the indexes and the UE identifies a usable sequence number according to the correlation and the allocation sequence information reported from the BS.04-25-2013
20080205329Method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink enhanced dedicated transport channel (E-DCH) and method for enabling use of a log-map turbo decoding algorithm for processing the E-DCH - A method of scaling soft symbols of an uplink E-DCH is provided, where the E-DCH is received from a user in a network for processing in a base station receiver in the network employing a log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm to process the E-DCH. The E-DCH includes an E-DPDCH from which the soft symbols are generated at the base station receiver, and an E-DPCCH used to transmit control information associated with the E-DPDCH, which along with configuration information from a radio network controller (RNC) of the network enables the base station receiver to determine a reference amplitude ratio linked to the actual power offset of the E-DPDCH from the legacy DPCCH. In the method, an estimated E-DPDCH to DPCCH amplitude ratio that represents a scaling factor for the soft symbols is determined, and the soft symbols are scaled by the scaling factor to enable the soft symbols to be processed by the log-MAP turbo decoding algorithm in the base station receiver.08-28-2008
20090232058METHOD FOR SIGNALING BACK-OFF INFORMATION IN RANDOM ACCESS - A method for performing random access in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes transmitting a preamble for random access in uplink, receiving a random access response message including back-off information as a response to the preamble, and performing back-off using the back-off information when the random access has failed.09-17-2009
20090232057RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A beacon slot position control section of a radio communication apparatus constituting a radio network system which detects whether empty beacon slots are present in a beacon period. When an empty beacon slot is present before the period in which the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon, a movable counter starts counting a specified number of super frames. When the count is completed, the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon of the radio communication apparatus at the earlier empty beacon slot. Consequently, since the empty beacon slots are eliminated and the beacon period is compacted, even if the number of radio communication apparatuses joining the radio network system fluctuates dynamically, the radio communication apparatus can perform radio communication with high efficiency and less waste of consumed electricity.09-17-2009
20090232056RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A beacon slot position control section of a radio communication apparatus constituting a radio network system which detects whether empty beacon slots are present in a beacon period. When an empty beacon slot is present before the period in which the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon, a movable counter starts counting a specified number of super frames. When the count is completed, the radio communication apparatus transmits a beacon of the radio communication apparatus at the earlier empty beacon slot. Consequently, since the empty beacon slots are eliminated and the beacon period is compacted, even if the number of radio communication apparatuses joining the radio network system fluctuates dynamically, the radio communication apparatus can perform radio communication with high efficiency and less waste of consumed electricity.09-17-2009
20090232054BEHAVIOR FOR WIRELESS TRANSMIT/RECEIVE UNIT AND MAC CONTROL ELEMENTS FOR LTE DRX OPERATIONS - A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) stops discontinuous reception (DRX) timers that are running and that are related to uplink and/or downlink transmissions during a DRX time period. The WTRU stops the DRX timers in response to receiving a medium access control (MAC) control element signal from an eNode-B.09-17-2009
20090232053WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS HAVING ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FUNCTION AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication apparatus includes a reception unit, an information management unit, and a transmission unit. The reception unit receives data including a plurality of data frames. The data frames are transmitted from an identical data source and managed by an identical traffic identifier. The information management unit retains acknowledgement information to perform an acknowledgement. The information management unit discards an already-retaining acknowledgement information when the data is newly received. The transmission unit performs the acknowledgement to the data source of the data using the acknowledgement information. The transmission unit performs the acknowledgement to the data corresponding to the acknowledgement information irrespective of a request of the acknowledgement from the data source when the information management unit discards the acknowledgement information or when a prediction on the discard of the acknowledgement information is made.09-17-2009
20090232052FRAME TERMINATION - Techniques to increase capacity in a wireless communications system. In an aspect, systematic non-transmission, or “blanking,” of minimal-rate frames transmitted in a communications system is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, eighth rate frames in a cdma2000 voice communications system are systematically substituted with null-rate frames carrying zero traffic bits. Provisions are nevertheless made for the transmission of certain designated as “critical” by, e.g., a vocoder. The receiver detects the presence of null rate or non-null rate transmissions and processes the received frames accordingly, including updating an outer loop power control only in response to non-null rate frames. Further techniques for changing the pilot transmission gating pattern to assist the receiver in detecting null rate frames are provided. In another aspect, early termination of a signal transmission over a wireless communications link is provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a base station (BS) transmits power control groups (PCG's) for a frame over a forward link (FL) to a mobile station (MS) until accurate reception of the frame is acknowledged by the MS over a reverse link (RL), possibly before all PCG's of the frame are received over the FL. Possible ACK signaling methods are defined for channels associated with a cdma2000 wireless communications system. In another exemplary embodiment, techniques for reverse link early termination are also provided.09-17-2009
20090232051METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR THE EXTENSION OF FREQUENCY OFFSET ESTIMATION RANGE BASED ON CORRELATION OF COMPLEX SEQUENCES - Aspects of a method and system for the extension of frequency offset estimation range based on correlation of complex sequences may include partitioning each of a received sample sequence and a local replica sample sequence into three or more similar length contiguous sample sub-sequences. For each of the three or more similar length contiguous sample sub-sequences, a correlation coefficient may be determined between corresponding sample sub-sequences of the partitioned received sample sequence and the local replica sample sequence. A plurality of phase differences may be determined based on adjacent ones of the determined correlation coefficients, and the determined plurality of phase differences may be averaged to generate a phase increment estimate. The communication system may be compliant with a wireless standard, comprising UMTS EUTRA (LTE), WiMAX (IEEE 802.16), and/or WLAN (IEEE 802.11).09-17-2009
20090232049SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR A MULTIPLE HOP WIRELESS NETWORK - A system and method for wireless communication over a multi-hop network are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes an access point and a plurality of wireless devices. Each of the access point and the plurality of wireless devices includes a high-rate module to send or receive data over a high-rate wireless channel having a first frequency; and a low-rate module to send or receive one or more control signals over a low-rate wireless channel having a second frequency lower than the first frequency. The low-rate modules of the wireless devices are configured to send information for establishing a multi-hop data route to the access point via the low-rate wireless channel. The access point is further configured to broadcast the information over the multi-hop wireless network via the low-rate wireless channel. This configuration efficiently disseminates the information over the network.09-17-2009
20090232048Computer Program Products for Connecting Ad Hoc Piconets to Wide Area Networks - A hyper-scatternet includes a first ad hoc piconet, a second ad hoc piconet and a wide area network, wherein the first and second ad hoc piconets are configured to communicate with one another via the wide area network. Each ad hoc piconet can include an application server that includes an ad hoc piconet interface that is configured to communicate with an ad hoc piconet using an ad hoc piconet protocol, and a wide area network interface that is configured to communicate with a wide area network using a wide area network protocol. The application server also includes a service manifest that is configured to determine ad hoc piconet services that are available from the ad hoc piconet via the ad hoc piconet interface, and to advertise the ad hoc piconet services to the wide area network as wide area network services via the wide area network interface.09-17-2009
20090232047SYSTEMS FOR CONNECTING AD HOC PICONETS TO WIDE AREA NETWORKS - A hyper-scatternet includes a first ad hoc piconet, a second ad hoc piconet and a wide area network, wherein the first and second ad hoc piconets are configured to communicate with one another via the wide area network. Each ad hoc piconet can include an application server that includes an ad hoc piconet interface that is configured to communicate with an ad hoc piconet using an ad hoc piconet protocol, and a wide area network interface that is configured to communicate with a wide area network using a wide area network protocol. The application server also includes a service manifest that is configured to determine ad hoc piconet services that are available from the ad hoc piconet via the ad hoc piconet interface, and to advertise the ad hoc piconet services to the wide area network as wide area network services via the wide area network interface.09-17-2009
20090290542METHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING A BEARER FOR A GSM NETWORK - A method for establishing a bearer for a GSM network is disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. The method includes: receiving, by a Media Gateway, a message for adding a wireless side end point, assigning an IP address and a port number for a call and transmitting a response message containing the IP address and the port number assigned for the call; acquiring, by the Media Gateway, the IP address and the port number assigned for the call by the Base Station Controller via the Mobile Switching Center Server and establishing an IP bearer with the Base Station Controller. A device and a system for establishing a bearer for a GSM network are also disclosed in embodiments of the present invention. With the present invention, a full or part path transcoder-free operation may be realized, which can avoid quality reduction and transmission delay.11-26-2009
20090046636ROUTING APPRATUS AND SESSION CONTROL METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided are a routing apparatus and session control method. The routing apparatus includes: a first processor for performing session control of portable subscriber stations (PSSs); and a second processor for independently performing at least one additional function separated from session control.02-19-2009
20090046632METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INTERFERENCE MANAGEMENT - In some aspect restricted access nodes are assigned to a designated common channel while access terminals that are in active communication with a macro access node may selectively be assigned to the designated channel. In some aspect an access terminal associated with macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier when the access terminal is in the vicinity of a coverage area of a restricted access node. In some aspect an access terminal associated with a macro access node may perform a handoff to a different carrier based on location information. In some aspect access to a restricted access node is controlled based on policy and/or based on operation of an access terminal associated with the restricted access node.02-19-2009
20090046631TRANSPORT OF PDCP CONTROL PDUs WITHIN MAC FRAMES - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate efficiently communicating a data packet related to a protocol layer within a wireless communication system. The systems and/or methods can provide cross-layer optimization by directly transporting or communicating data to a particular protocol layer. In general, a MAC header can include data that indicates a protocol layer to which such data is directed or targeted. The MAC header can allow a portion of data (e.g., PDUs, SDUs, etc.) to bypass at least one protocol layer above the MAC protocol layer for efficient and optimized processing of such data.02-19-2009
20090046629Signaling of Random Access Preamble Sequences in Wireless Networks - Transmission of random access preamble structures within a cellular wireless network is based on the use of cyclic shifted constant amplitude zero autocorrelation (“CAZAC”) sequences to generate the random access preamble signal. A pre-defined set of sequences is arranged in a specific order. Within the predefined set of sequences is an ordered group of sequences that is a proper subset of the pre-defined set of sequences. Within a given cell, up to 64 sequences may need to be signaled. In order to minimize the associated overhead due to signaling multiple sequences, only one logical index is transmitted by a base station serving the cell and a user equipment within the cell derives the subsequent indexes according to the pre-defined ordering. Each sequence has a unique logical index. The ordering of sequences is identified by the logical indexes of the sequences, with each logical index uniquely mapped to a generating index. When a UE needs to transmit, it produces a second sequence using the received indication of the logical index of the first sequence and an auxiliary parameter and then produces a transmission signal by modulating the second sequence.02-19-2009
20090046628System and method for geocasting in a mobile ad hoc network - Disclosed is a wireless terminal that determines whether to retransmit a received packet. The wireless terminal is configured to determine a first distance from the wireless terminal to a point (e.g., the center point) in a geocast region. The wireless terminal is also configured to determine a plurality of distances between the point and each of a plurality of wireless terminals from which the wireless terminal has previously received a packet having an identifier that is the same as an identifier of the received packet. The wireless terminal is configured to retransmit the received packet if the first distance is less than each of the plurality of distances.02-19-2009
20130121242LAYER 2 PROCESSING AND CREATION OF PROTOCOL DATA UNITS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Enhanced MAC-es PDUs are created by concatenating enhanced MAC-es service data units (SDUs) based on higher layer PDUs and segments thereof, where segmentation information is included in the enhanced MAC-es headers. An enhanced MAC-e header is generated for each enhanced MAC-es PDU to describe information about the enhanced MAC-es PDU. An enhanced MAC-e PDU is created by concatenating enhanced MAC-es PDUs and enhanced MAC-e headers. An enhanced MAC-es header may include a Transmit Sequence Number (TSN) field, a Segmentation Description (SD) field, length (L) fields to indicate the length of each enhanced MAC-es SDU and/or logical channel indicator (LCH-ID) fields. An enhanced MAC-e header may include one or more logical channel indicator (LCH-ID) fields for corresponding enhanced MAC-es PDUs or MAC-s SDUs and length (L) fields.05-16-2013
20090016272METHODS FOR SENDING SMALL PACKETS IN A PEER-TO-PEER (P2P) NETWORK - An improved mechanism is provided that facilitates transmission of small packets within an ad hoc peer-to-peer network. A small packet is identified to a receiver within a control channel so that its lower power can be considered in an interference management protocol implemented among local peer devices. In a traffic slot, a transmitter voluntarily backs down on the transmitter power as a smaller packet will require much lower signal-to-noise ratio. This will improve the signal energy per bit per noise power density for the transmission as well as minimize the interference caused to other wireless communications happening in the same spectrum.01-15-2009
20090161605COOPERATIVE MIMO IN MULTICELL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method and system for cooperative multiple-input multiple output (MIMO) transmission operations in a multicell wireless network. Under the method, antenna elements from two or more base stations are used to from an augmented MIMO antenna array that is used to transmit and receive MIMO transmissions to and from one or more terminals. The cooperative MIMO transmission scheme supports higher dimension space-time-frequency processing for increased capacity and system performance.06-25-2009
20090010209NOTIFICATION EQUIPMENT, TERMINAL EQUIPMENT, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - A notification equipment comprises a transmission data determination unit configured to determine whether transmission data to be transmitted to a terminal equipment is first transmission data or repeated transmission data, an instruction data generator configured to generate identification instruction data indicating that the transmission data is the first transmission data or the repeated transmission data based on a transmission data determination result by the transmission data determination unit, and an instruction data transmitter configured to transmit the identification instruction data to the terminal equipment.01-08-2009
20090010208APPARATUS AND METHOD DETERMINING TBS - In a TBS (Transport Block Size) determination apparatus, a CQI (Channel Quality Indicator) value setting section sets a CQI value which is transmitted from a UE (User Equipment) which communicates based on a packet transmission standard HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access). A TBS acquiring section acquires a TBS by referring to a CQI mapping table based on the set CQI value. A BLER (BLock Error Rate) setting section sets a BLER before, simultaneously, or after the setting a CQI value, and before, simultaneously, or after the acquiring a TBS. A TBS changing section changes the TBS based on the BLER.01-08-2009
20090010207METHOD AND SYSTEM TO AUGMENT LEGACY TELEMETRY SYSTEMS AND SENSORS - A method and system to extend the reach and improve the reliability of legacy telemetry systems. A first node transmits a plurality of data to a base station directly or by using a second node and a plurality of transmission nodes. A consolidation node collects transmissions of the plurality of data from the plurality of transmission nodes, thereby extending the reach of the network.01-08-2009
20090010205Priority-Based Scheduling and Routing in a Wireless Network - A method of routing data in a mesh communication network including a plurality of network devices and operating in a process control environment, including assigning one of a plurality of priority levels associated with the communication network to a data packet, sending the data packet from a source network device included in the plurality of network devices to a destination network device included in the plurality of network devices, and routing the data packet to a destination network device via at least one intermediate network device included in the plurality of network devices. The act of routing includes comparing, at each intermediate network device, the priority level of the data packet to a priority mask of the intermediate network device, and modifying at least one of scheduling or routing of the data packet if the priority level of the data packet is not associated with the priority mask of the intermediate network device.01-08-2009
20090010204Support for Network Management and Device Communications in a Wireless Network - A method of efficiently operating a wireless communication network in a process control environment, such that the wireless communication network includes a plurality of field devices, includes defining a communication protocol for supporting wireless communications between pairs of the plurality of field devices, including providing a set of protocol commands, transferring process control data from at least some of the plurality of field devices using a first subset of the set of protocol commands of the communication protocol, and transferring network management data to at least some of the plurality of field devices using a second subset of the set of protocol commands of the communication protocol.01-08-2009
20090010202Wireless base station - A wireless base station for mobile stations, includes a queue distributor for distributing packets among queues for a real-time system service and queues for a non-real-time system service and storing the packets; a scheduler for performing control of transmission sequence of the packets based on the queues for the real-time system service and the non-real-time system service separately; a buffer for storing the packets therein in the transmission sequence determined by the scheduler; and a mapper for allocating the packets stored at the buffer among ratio frames. Further, the scheduler uses, for the queues for the real-time system service and for the queues for the non-real-time system service, a same type of algorithm determining the transmission sequence according to priority values determined based on QoS requests and employs different equations to compute the priority values for the real time and the non-real-time system service01-08-2009
20120113896Skip Ahead Routing in Wireless Ad Hoc Networks - A wireless ad hoc network may be composed of several nodes that are coupled by communication links and configured dynamically. As the packet is transmitted from one node to the next node or hop in a predetermined route, a neighboring node, within the same transmission range, may hear the broadcasted transmission. If the neighboring node determines that a future hop on the route includes the neighboring node, the neighboring node may receive the packet at that time thereby skipping one or more hops along the route. The neighboring node may then forward the packet to the next node in the route.05-10-2012
20120113895SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING INFORMATION INDICATING THE PRIORITY LEVEL OF A NON ACCESS STRATUM SIGNALING MESSAGE AND FOR USING THE PRIORITY LEVEL INFORMATION TO SELECT A RESPONSE - A system and method for providing an indication of a priority level of a non access stratum (NAS) message. In one aspect, a wireless communication device transmits a NAS signaling message together with a Packet Flow Identifier (PFI) information element that includes information indicating a priority level of the NAS signaling message. If the NAS signaling message has a low priority, the wireless communication device may receive a response message indicating that the ongoing NAS signaling message scenario can be performed less frequently in the future, thereby mitigating network congestion and radio interference.05-10-2012
20120113894METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COMMUNICATION - A method and device for providing post idle mobility procedure. The method and device providing an indication of a Radio Access Technology (RAT) type after an Idle Mode Signaling Reduction (ISR).05-10-2012
20120113892Intelligent Wireless Access Point Notification - In one or more embodiments, one or more methods and/or systems described can perform determining identification information associated with the first wireless access point from at least a first signal; determining that a first instance of encountering the first wireless access point has concluded; storing information associated with the first instance of encountering the first wireless access point; determining the identification information associated with the first wireless access point from at least a second signal; determining that a second instance of encountering the first wireless access point has concluded; storing information associated with the second instance of encountering the first wireless access point; determining that the first wireless access point has been encountered at least a number of times; and displaying, in a menu usable by a user, at least a portion of the identification information associated with the first wireless access point.05-10-2012
20120113891Vogarwit access system - The Vogarwit functions like a cell phone but relying on Wireless, VOIP and Broadband. The wireless uses open unsecured networks or those for sell. Security bypass technology for wireless access on the remote unit becomes a functional part of the unit later. VOIP gateways will include a Host Service Application that functions over IP using TCP as the transport protocol announcing an available service with a name set by the user and a unique MAC statically coded in the host application obtained from the MAC of the second MC located on the VOIP gateway. The VOIP gateway will be plugged into a local IP network twice; the local network will have a broadband connection with a configured router. The remote handheld will access the internet then connect to its unique service host. The host will provide the dial tone virtually connecting the remote handheld to the users home phone system.05-10-2012
20100085911Base Station Device and Signal Processing Method - A base station device of the present invention includes a base-station main body and multiple antenna units connected in series to the base-station main body. Each of the antenna units includes: a wireless communication unit that includes an antenna for wirelessly transmitting and receiving a signal to and from a mobile terminal; a multiplexer that multiplexes a reception signal received by another antenna unit and a reception signal received by the wireless communication unit, and outputs the multiplexed reception signals to the base-station main body; and a demultiplexer that separates a transmission signal to be transmitted by the wireless communication unit from among multiplexed transmission signals input from the base-station main body, and outputs a transmission signal to be transmitted from the other antenna unit thereto. The base-station main body includes: a demultiplexer that demultiplexes the multiplexed reception signals into reception signals received by wireless communication units of the antenna units; and a multiplexer that multiplexes transmission signals output from the network and to be transmitted from the antenna units and outputs the multiplexed transmission signals to the antenna units.04-08-2010
20100085912METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING FEEDBACK INFORMATION - There is provided a method for enabling a user equipment to transmit feedback information. The method includes generating feedback data representing the feedback information, the feedback data expressed by a binary number having N bits, where N is an integer, the N bits comprising 2 levels, the feedback information represented by one of the 2 levels, wherein different types of the feedback information are assigned to different levels and transmitting the feedback data. Overheads incurred by transmission of feedback information can be reduced.04-08-2010
20100085914METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING IMS SESSION CONTINUITY TO A USER EQUIPMENT ACROSS A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A method and system for providing IP Multi-media Subsystem (IMS) session continuity to a User Equipment (UE) across a plurality of communication networks is provided. The UE traverses from a first communication network to a second communication network. A public user identity associated with a private user identity of the UE is registered with the first communication network by using a first address. The method includes generating (04-08-2010
20100085918Method and Apparatus Pertaining to Updating a High-Bandwidth Hardware-Based Packet-Processing Platform Local Session Context State Database - These various embodiments comprise or are suitable for implementation by a high-bandwidth hardware-based packet-processing platform that is configured to be installed at a traffic-aggregation point for a communications network having a plurality of attachment points at its edge. These teachings provide for receiving (via, for example, a packet-receiving interface) at least substantially all data packets as pass through the traffic-aggregation point and then extracting session context state data from at least a majority of these data packets. By one approach, this session context state data comprises, at least in part, information pertaining to a location as pertains to a calling party (such as the point of network attachment for that calling party). This session context state data is then used to update a local session context state database.04-08-2010
20130215826Robust Channel Estimation of OFDM Systems - A system and method for estimating a channel in wireless communication systems using Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM). From the received OFDM symbols, Maximum Likelihood (ML) estimate of the channel frequency response is obtained at the pilot locations. A hypothesis test is performed on the ML estimates and the outcome of the hypothesis test is used to decide a shrinkage target. Biased estimation methods are used to shrink the ML estimates towards the shrinkage target to obtain better estimates of the channel frequency response at the pilot locations and these estimates are interpolated using a Filter to get a set of complete estimates of the channel over the resource block. The Filter is an Empirical Weiner Filter or a robust 2D-MMSE filter and the biased estimation is done using either a James-Stein (JS) estimator or a shrinkage estimator or an empirical Bayes estimator.08-22-2013
20130163512MULTI-BAND CREST FACTOR REDUCTION - Clipping a widely-separated, multi-carrier signal is effectively performed without having to use a high sampling speed. Clipping is performed in a first stage at a combined signal level, but with a predetermined carrier separation of at least twice the channel bandwidth (2CBW), followed by repositioning the carriers at baseband zero frequency. After clipping, carriers are placed at their respective center frequencies with full carrier separation reintroduced in a second stage. Iterative clipping stages smooth out signal reshaping and re-settled amplitudes for combined carriers.06-27-2013
20120236799Method and Device for Transmitting Uplink Transmission Power Control Information - A method and an apparatus for transmitting uplink transmission power control information are disclosed. The method includes: transmitting uplink transmission power control information of all uplink component carriers allocated to a user equipment (UE) to the UE by one downlink component carrier. By adopting the above technical scheme, it is implemented that the uplink transmission power control information is transmitted in a carrier aggregation system.09-20-2012
20120236798Method and Apparatus for Transmitting Physical Signals - Transmitting physical signals precoded at the physical layer, and transmitting via a physical channel precoded at the physical layer decoding information for use in physical layer decoding of said physical signals; wherein said decoding information is incorporated into one or more data units at a layer higher than the physical layer. Transmitting in a single sub-frame one or more physical reference signals for use in physical layer decoding of a physical channel in a plurality of sub-frames.09-20-2012
20120236797Method for Enabling Delivery of a Message Between an IMS Domain and a CS Domain - A method and apparatus for enabling delivery of a message in a communication system comprising an IMS domain and a circuit switched domain. Upon receiving a registration message in the IMS domain from a user equipment operated by a user, wherein the message comprises an Equipment Identifier valid for the user equipment and an IMPI valid for the user, the Equipment Identifier and the IMPI are extracted from the received message. Then a creation or an update of a mapping of the Equipment Identifier to the IMPI and a C-MSISDN is initiated. Upon receiving a message, relating to the user, which is to be communicate between the IMS and circuit switched domains in the communication system, a use of the mapping for translating between the Equipment Identifier, IMPI and the C-MSISDN is initiated.09-20-2012
20120236796SYSTEM AND METHOD OF EXCHANGING IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION FOR MOBILE STATIONS - A system is provided for allowing mobile stations to exchange identification information using a predetermined communication path for the purpose of obtaining identification information to use in establishing a different communication path for communicating.09-20-2012
20120236795Method and Apparatus for Routing a Call to a Dual Mode Wireless Device - Disclosed is a system and method for routing a call to a dual mode wireless device. In accordance with an embodiment of the invention, a network node receives a call. The network node determines that the call is associated with a dual mode wireless device. Once this determination is made, the network node then selects one of a plurality of networks (e.g., cellular network or packet-based network, such as a VoIP network) for use in connecting the call to the dual mode wireless device. The network node then routes the call to the dual mode wireless device via the selected network. During the call, the network node re-routes the call to another network if the network node determines that this other network is now better suited for the call.09-20-2012
20120236794Creating a Globally Unique Identifier of a Subscriber Device - To register a mobile device located in a first network with a packet-switched services network, a registration request is received from an aggregation device in the first network. The registration request contains an identifier of the aggregation device and identification information of the mobile device, where the identification information is previously unknown to the packet-switched services network. A globally unique identifier of the mobile device is dynamically created based on the identifier of the aggregation device and the identification information of the mobile device, wherein the globally unique identifier is used for uniquely identifying the mobile device in the packet-switched services network.09-20-2012
20120236793Transmission of Acknowledge/Not-Acknowledge With Repetition - In ACK/NAK responses with repetition, the ACK/NAK response from the user equipment to a Physical Downlink Shared CHannel (PDSCH) transmission is repeated in consecutive frames a predetermined number of frames following receipt. This repeat ACK/NAK causes a problem when a PSCCH transmission directed to the same user equipment occurs in consecutive subframes. In a first embodiment, the first ACK/NAK response repeats preempting any ACK/NAK response to the later PDSCH transmission. In a second embodiment, the first ACK/NAK response does not repeat and the ACK/NAK response to the later PDSCH transmission occurs.09-20-2012
20120236792WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING SAME - A wireless network, which includes a wireless router client operable to broadcast data packets to at least one wireless server and one additional wireless client. Each client and server includes programs for determining optimum routes between them. The client also includes a program for determining if a received data packet is not addressed to it and if the packet has been sent via a new optimal route unknown to the client, and for notifying the respective server of such a new optimal route.09-20-2012
20120236791TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND METHOD - A mobile communications session is provided to a mobile node using an internet protocol. A home packet data network communicates with an affiliated mobile node. The home packet data network includes a home agent of the mobile node. A visited packet data network communicates with an affiliated mobile node. A packet data gateway controls communication between the home and visited packet data networks. Following a change of affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network, the packet data gateway and the home agent establish a route to the mobile node via the packet data gateway, which controls communication between the home packet data network and the mobile node affiliated with the visited packet data network. If the mobile node roams between a 3GPP network and a non-3GPP network; the packet data gateway controls communication, using resources on the 3GPP network by the mobile node.09-20-2012
20120236789MEMORY MANAGEMENT FOR HIGH SPEED MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL - Aspects disclosed herein address the need in the art for memory management for high speed media access control. A packet buffer may store packets with a first data structure, comprising the packet length, sequence number, and a pointer to a second data structure. Packet data may be stored in a linked list of one or more second data structures. Transmit and receive queues may be formed using linked lists or arrays of the first data structures. Memory locations for storing first and second data structures may be kept in lists indicating free locations for the respective data structure types. A flexible memory architecture is disclosed in which two configurations may be selected. Various other aspects are also presented.09-20-2012
20120236787METHOD FOR ENABLING A WIRLESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, CONNECTED TO A FIRST DOMAIN OF A NETWORK, TO ACCESS A SERVICE IN A SECOND DOMAIN, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for enabling a wireless communication device (09-20-2012
20120236786HIGH PERFORMANCE MOBILITY NETWORK WITH AUTOCONFIGURATION - A high performance wireless mesh architecture which has been optimized for mobile end points is described. The mesh architecture is intended for Navy applications, where the wireless mesh network extends between mobile ships and includes ship-to-shore links, but it is equally applicable to other mobile elements on, in, or under land, air, sea, or space.09-20-2012
20130163515SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE IDENTIFIERS IN A SINGLE ACCESS POINT - A system and method for providing multiple service set identifiers (SSIDs) in a single access point is disclosed. The system within the single access point comprises a network management module, a virtual access point creation module and a data traffic handling module. The virtual access point creation module creates multiple virtual access points each represented by a unique SSID. The network management module provides at least one tunnel to accommodate the multiple virtual access points. The data traffic handling module receives and redirects data from the multiple virtual access points to and from the at least one tunnel.06-27-2013
20130163516MARITIME COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD - Provided is a maritime communication system and method. A ship station of the maritime communication system may receive, from a maritime broadcast base station, maritime configuration information that includes setting information of shore base stations and setting information of maritime ship stations, may establish a radio link when a radio link configurable shore base station is present, may set the radio link through a radio link configurable neighbor ship station when the radio link configurable shore base station is absent, and may establish the radio link with an internal maritime satellite (INMARSAT) or a maritime very small aperture terminal (MVSAT) when the radio link configurable shore base station is absent and when the radio link configurable neighbor ship station is absent.06-27-2013
20130163517METHODS FOR OPTIMAL COLLABORATIVE MIMO-SDMA - A system and method for collaboratively designing optimized beamforming vectors is disclosed for a wireless multiple input, multiple output (MIMO) space division multiple access (SDMA) communication system to optimize an aggregate SNR performance metric across the different users, thereby permitting the flexibility to trade off computational requirements and size of control information exchanged with performance. Using adaptive vector space search methods, the space of all receive beamformers is searched to find the set which maximizes either the sum or product of SNRs of the users.06-27-2013
20130163518WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE STATION - A method for performing wireless communication includes performing a precoding process beforehand on a plurality of symbols at a base station; performing space block coding on the plurality of symbols at the base station after the precoding process; sending signals from a plurality of antennas of the base station; performing space block decoding on the signals received by a plurality of antennas at a mobile station; performing antenna combination and a deprecoding process on the signals at the mobile station after the signals have undergone the space block decoding; and estimating the plurality of symbols at the mobile station from the signals that have undergone the deprecoding process.06-27-2013
20130163519REDUCED CELL ID REASSIGNMENTS IN MULTI-BAND LOCAL AREA - A method, apparatus, and computer program is provided which allows an access point that is operating in multiple bands to be able to have a conflict-free cell identity when hopping to different bands. A first message is received, at an access point, indicating that a reassignment of cell identities has been triggered in a first band. A second message is transmitted, at the access point, indicating if the access point will participate in the reassignment.06-27-2013
20130163520COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a communication device within a communication network including a plurality of communication nodes, including: a reception unit that receives a data packet transmitted from a terminal device or transmitted to the terminal device; a communication control unit that selects a forwarding destination node of the data packet from a plurality of forwarding destination node candidates when the terminal device is a machine-type communication (MTC) terminal; and a transmission unit that transmits the data packet to the forwarding destination node selected by the communication control unit.06-27-2013
20130163521METHOD AND USER EQUIPMENT FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - A user equipment (UE) transmits uplink control information (UCI) of 3 bits or more to a base station (BS) after modulating the UCI into 1-bit or 2-bit sub-UCI units. Here, the UE maps each 1-bit or 2-bit sub-UCI unit to one of a plurality of corner constellation points regardless of modulation order of data which is multiplexed with the UCI. The corner constellation points are points having a maximum Euclidean distance from among a plurality of constellation points corresponding to the modulation order.06-27-2013
20130163510SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR IMPROVED RECOVERY FOR THE DOWNLINK - Systems, methods, and devices for an improved recovery for the downlink are described herein. In some aspects, delay and overhead associated with retransmission of data lost due to an interruption can be reduced and/or eliminated by configuring a receiver to generate and transmit status information following resumption from the interruption. The receiver can be configured to generate and transmit status information immediately upon resuming from the interruption. In some aspects, the receiver can be configured to automatically generate and transmit status information independent of receiving a polling request from the sender. Status information can indentify at least last received user data prior to the interruption. In some aspects, status information further identifies lost data due to the interruption.06-27-2013
20130163511METHOD OF WIRELESSLY COMMUNICATING DATA BETWEEN VEHICLES AND CENTRAL FACILITIES - A method of wirelessly communicating packetized data between a vehicle and a central facility includes receiving a request at a vehicle telematics unit to transmit packetized data; determining whether the vehicle telematics unit is communicating through a roaming wireless carrier system; and delaying the transmission of packetized data between the vehicle telematics unit and a central facility until the vehicle telematics unit is no longer communicating through the roaming wireless carrier system.06-27-2013
20120269133Method and system for high speed wireless data transmission between communication devices - Herein described are at least a method and a system for transmitting high speed wireless data from a first communication device to a second communication device. The method comprises using a first physical layer for transmitting management data or control signals between the first and second devices. In one embodiment, the management data may be used to authenticate and assign an appropriate wireless communication channel between the first and second device. The wireless communication channel is established by implementing a second physical layer in each of the first and second devices. The wireless communication channel may be used to transmit the high speed wireless data. The system comprises a first communication device and a second communication device wherein each of the first communication device and the second communication device utilizes a first physical layer and a second physical layer.10-25-2012
20110044253ACCESS NETWORK DISCOVERY AND SELECTION IN A MULTI-ACCESS TECHNOLOGY CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication unit (02-24-2011
20110032880GATEWAY APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus that interconnects a mobile circuit switched network and a mobile IMS network to implement the video phone includes a conversion unit. The conversion unit demultiplexes a multiplexed bit stream signal output from a mobile terminal connected to the mobile circuit switched network to take out one or more of a control signal, a compression-encoded speech signal, and a compression-encoded video signal. The conversion unit converts the control signal into one or more of a MEGACO signal, a SIP signal and a SDP signal, while converting the speech signal and the video signal, if necessary. The conversion unit also packetizes the speech signal and the video signal to transmit resulting packets to the IMS network.02-10-2011
20110032877METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING AMD RE-SEGMENTATION - A method and apparatus for acknowledge mode data (AMD) re-segmentation are disclosed. An AMD protocol data unit (PDU) is generated from at least one RLC SDU. The AMD PDU size is within a flexible maximum AMD PDU size. The original AMD PDU is stored in a retransmission buffer, and transmitted. If transmission of the original AMD PDU fails and the original AMD PDU size is larger than an updated maximum AMD PDU size, the original AMD PDU is segmented to segmented AMD PDUs. If transmission of one of the segmented AMD PDUs fails, the original AMD PDU may be re-segmented to smaller size AMD PDUs.02-10-2011
20110032872Apparatus and method for overhead reduction of feedback in closed loop MIMO system - A method and apparatus reduce overhead of feedback in a closed loop Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) system. A controller feeds back the long-term Precoder Matrix Index (PMI) to a serving base station under direction of the serving base station when the long term PMI feedback transmission is required, generates a new codebook using the long term PMI, and determines a short term PMI from the new codebook. A feedback transmitter feeds back the short-term PMI to the serving base station.02-10-2011
20090086667Method, Apparatus and Computer Program Product for Preserving A Signalling Connection - A method, apparatus, and computer program product are provided for preserving a signaling connection after a network has indicated that the signaling connection can be closed, such as by selection of a no follow on proceed mode during routing area updates or attach procedures. By preserving the signaling connection, subsequent communications between the network and the user equipment can be completed without closing and then subsequently reopening the signaling connection.04-02-2009
20100195572DISTRIBUTED PRIORITIZED CONTENTION FOR SPECTRUM SHARING - Techniques for use in contending for a portion of a television channel spectrum are disclosed. In some instances, a back-off value is used to decide whether a contender's contention number will be transmitted when the contention channel is free, and the back-off value is determined based on the contention number. In some instances, a contender monitors the contention channel and withdraws from contention if it detects from the contention channel that a higher priority contender is in contention.08-05-2010
20100278116Method and Device for Information Transfer - A method for information transfer includes: determining, by a source Mobility Management Network Element (MMNE) of a source Access Network (AN), version number of GPRS Tunneling Protocol (GTP) used between the source MMNE and a destination MMNE of a destination AN; and transmitting, by the source MMNE, user information corresponding to the version number of the GTP used between the source MMNE and the destination MMNE to the destination MMNE. The embodiment of the invention also provides a device for information transfer. With the embodiment of present invention, corresponding user information transfer may be realized.11-04-2010
20090073919Telecommunications apparatus and method - A telecommunications system comprises a user equipment operable to request a bearer for communicating internet protocol data according to the second internet protocol (IPv4) to and from a gateway support node of a packet radio network. The gateway support node is operable to establish a tunnelling protocol bearer for communicating the internet packet data to and from the user equipment across the packet data network. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to form a link local address. The link local address comprises an interface identifier including a tunnelling end identifier of the tunnelling protocol bearer which ends at a gateway support node of the core network part of the packet radio network. An internet protocol address according to the first internet protocol is requested from an address allocation server using the link local address. The user equipment is operable in combination with the gateway support node to receive an allocated internet protocol address according to the first internet protocol, and to communicate with the user equipment using the allocated internet protocol address.03-19-2009
20110149849WIRELESS BLACK BOX COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND METHODS - Embodiments of the present invention provide wireless black box communication systems and methods. According to some embodiments, a wireless black-box flight recorder network system can generally comprise an earth-station server and a plurality of aircraft based clients. The earth-station server can be configured to transmit and receive wireless data messages. The earth-station server can be coupled to or comprise a storage medium for storing data recorded about an aircraft. The plurality of aircraft based clients can each comprise a device to receive aircraft data. The clients can also each comprise a client controller configured to implement a client process. The client process of at least one of the aircraft based client can select a transmission path to the earth-station server that is an indirect link to the earth-station server through at least one of the other aircraft based clients. The indirect link can be used to transmit aircraft data to the earth-station server for storing said data in the storage medium. Other aspects, embodiments, and features are also claimed and described.06-23-2011
20100020748COMMUNICATION METHOD AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - A communication method in a gateway apparatus includes a transmission step of transmitting and receiving packets to and from a mobile station device, and transmitting and receiving packets to and from a home agent; and a setting step of establishing settings such that the packets from the mobile station device can be transmitted to at least a first and a second home agent, and the packets from at least the first and second home agents can be received.01-28-2010
20120008552Power Headroom Reporting for Carrier Aggregation - Power headroom reporting and report handling are discussed in the context of a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), on which a user equipment (UE) has no valid uplink grant, and a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) on which a UE has no transmission. Under these circumstances, it is not possible to directly calculate one or more parameters which are used to calculate power headroom. Accordingly, exemplary embodiments provide for predetermined, known values to be used by the UE to calculate the power headroom, and by the eNodeB to understand the meaning of a received power headroom report.01-12-2012
20120120874WIRELESS ACCESS POINT CLOCK SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM - In an ultra-wideband (“UWB”) network, a central location engine (“CLE”) coordinates operation of an anchor access point (“AP”), AP[0], and a plurality of non-anchor AP[x]s. A clock calibration packet (“CCP”) transmission method and related apparatus facilitate normalization of CCP time references reported to the CLE by all APs. Implementing a digital phase locked loop (“DPLL”) in the CLE facilitates clock normalization. Implementing a DPLL in at least the non-anchor AP[x]s facilitates local clock synchronization, and may improve network efficiency by reducing clock synchronization traffic.05-17-2012
20120314658Station Operation Method and Apparatus in TV Whitespace - The present invention relates to a station (hereinafter, ‘STA’) operation method and apparatus in a TV whitespace. In a TVWS band, when an STA operating as an unlicensed device with permission to operate in an available channel not used by a licensed device needs to operate in the TVWS band by acquiring information on the available channel, the STA transmits an available channel information request message to a device having database information; receives, from the device having database information, an ACK message for the available channel information that includes (a) identification information on an available channel, (b) information on the maximum allowable power level in the available channel, and (c) information on valid time of the available channel; and transmits/receives a signal using the information of (a), (b) and (c), i.e., using the maximum allowable power level within the valid time in the available channel.12-13-2012
20120257567SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR COMMUNICATION OF CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for communicating Channel State Information (CSI) feedback. In some aspects, the CSI feedback is communicated in a very high throughput (VHT) wireless communications system.10-11-2012
20090196234Method And Apparatus For Persistent Communications, Interoperability And Situational Awareness In The Aftermath Of A Disaster - A system for providing situational awareness outside a temporary incident area network includes a prioritized connection module for connecting a mesh network at the incident area to one of a plurality of available communications channels, with the selection based not only on the availability of a communications channel but also on the associated expense, speed, reliability or bandwidth, so that high bandwidth traffic such as video and pictures can be reliably sent from the incident area to a location outside of the incident area. In one embodiment switching to a satellite phone network bypasses problems with terrestrial networks such as cell phone networks and landlines which may be down.08-06-2009
20090196228METHOD OF CONNECTING TO NETWORK IN BROADBAND WIRELESS ACCESS SYSTEM - The primitives between an upper management layer and the MAC layer within a mobile station and a base station are defined in order to specify and clarify the operations within the protocol stack layers in a broadband wireless access system to allow a mobile station to perform a method of connecting to the network. Media Independent Handover (MIH) procedures can be achieved because the NCMS and MIH layer can communicate through use of these primitives.08-06-2009
20100014456Method and Apparatus for Use in a Communications Network - A method and apparatus in a gateway node of a telecommunications network for receiving frames from a source node such as a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and forwarding the frames with correct sequencing and timing to a destination node in an IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) network. Upon determining that a potential or actual discontinuity in frame numbering has occurred, the apparatus sends a discontinuity indication toward the destination node. The indication may be included in the first frame subsequent to the discontinuity. The destination node is thus made aware that the frame numbering may not be reliable.01-21-2010
20100014457METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS WITH COLLSION AVOIDANCE (CSMA/CA) WITH DIRECTIONAL TRANSMISSION - Aspects of a method and system for carrier sense multiple access with collision avoidance (CSMA/CA) with directional transmission are presented. Aspects of the system may include a communicating device (DEV), which transmits a portion of a PDU utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals and a subsequent portion of the PDU utilizing directionally transmitted signals. In an exemplary system the communicating DEV may transmit a frame, which represents a physical layer PDU. The frame may comprise a physical layer convergence procedure (PLCP) preamble that is transmitting utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals (omni preamble), a PLCP header that is transmitted utilizing omnidirectionally transmitted signals (omni header), a PLCP preamble that is transmitted utilizing directionally transmitted signals (directional preamble) and a physical layer service data unit (PSDU) field, or data, field, which is transmitted utilizing directionally transmitted signals (directional data). In another exemplary system, the communicating DEV may transmit PDUs utilizing directional signal transmission.01-21-2010
20100014454Method of Cell Reselection in a Wireless Telecommunications Device Operative With a Plurality of Radio Access Networks - Apparatus and a method of cell reselection in a wireless telecommunications device operative with a plurality of radio access networks are disclosed. The method comprises, when the device is camped on a first radio access network: ranking cells in a neighbouring list according to cell reselection criteria; considering for cell reselection a cell in the neighbouring list; when the cell in the list is a cell of a second radio access network different from the first radio access network, applying an algorithm for cell reselection from the second radio access network to the first radio access network; and when the algorithm as applied would result in reselection to the first radio access network, considering for cell reselection another cell in the list.01-21-2010
20100014466Method and a Device for Improved Status Reports - The invention discloses a method (01-21-2010
20100014465MOBILITY MANAGEMENT METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE - A mobility management method includes: notifying, at a mobile terminal, an edge node of a terminal function indicating that the mobile terminal has a Mobile IP client function; instructing, at the edge node, the mobile terminal to perform an operation for mobility management by using not an MIP function but an IP function when the edge node has a PMIP client function; performing, at the mobile terminal, the operation for mobility management by using the IP function in response to the instruction from the edge node; and performing, the edge node, the operation for mobility management by using the PMIP client function.01-21-2010
20100014464COMMUNICATION METHOD, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, HOME AGENT, AND MOBILE NODE - The present invention provides a technique to prevent the generation of a large number of binding update messages in an overlay network when a mobile node changes connection points. According to this technique, in a communication system where a home agent HA 01-21-2010
20100014458SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING A DIRECT LINK ON THE HIGH THROUGHPUT CHANNEL OF A MULTI-RATE CHANNEL WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A system and method for wireless communication over multi-rate channels are disclosed. One embodiment of the system includes a first wireless device; a second wireless device; and an access point that can communicate over high-rate and low-rate channels. One or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point can include neighbor information on the wireless stations in the wireless network. One or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point may be configured to transmit a frame in an attempt to establish a direct link over the first channel between the first and second stations. Before transmitting the frame, the one or more of the first and second wireless devices and the access point may determine whether a direct link can be established over the first channel between the first and second stations, based at least partly on the neighbor information. This scheme can significantly reduce time wasted for unsuccessful direct link setup attempts for the high-rate channel transmissions.01-21-2010
20100014455ACCESS NETWORK SELECTION - A network, computer readable medium, and method for ranking a plurality of available access networks by a provider, the provider serving a user equipment and the user equipment being configured to connect to at least one of the plurality of available access networks. The method includes receiving a selection request at a selection entity of the provider, where the selection request includes a vector parameter P that includes required characteristics of a data flow for the user equipment, sending from the selection entity a capability request, including the vector parameter P, to the plurality of available access networks, receiving at the selection entity a capability response from the plurality of available access networks, wherein each capability response includes a normalized value expressing a capability of a corresponding available access network to provide the required characteristics of the data flow, and generating a ranking list of the available access networks based on the received normalized values.01-21-2010
20110280191METHOD OF ESTABLISHING AN HRPD SIGNAL LINK11-17-2011
20130188555MME Restoration - A method for a mobility management entity (MME) is disclosed. In some embodiments the method includes: establishing a UE context for a UE; selecting a back-up MME for holding a duplicate context of the user entity; informing a SGW of the selected back-up MME; and transmitting a the duplicate context to the selected back-up MME.07-25-2013
20110280192METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHARGING OF PACKET DATA SERVICE - A method for controlling the charging of packet data service is disclosed, which includes: monitoring a number of event triggers; and when one of the event triggers is met, a Traffic Plane Function (TPF) requesting charging rules from a Charging Rule Function (CRF). In the preferred embodiments of the preferred embodiments of the present invention, the event triggers, which the TPF is required for request charging rules from the CRF according to are set by the CRF and then are provided to the TPF. Charging-relevant input information is provided in the request, based on which the CRF determines proper charging rules and sends the determined charging rules to the TPF. In this way, the timing that the TPF requests charging rules from the CRF becomes controllable, and redundant information caused by the unnecessary charging rule from the TPF becomes avoidable, which enables interaction between the TPF and the CRF more effective and the charging control of packet data service reasonable and perfect.11-17-2011
20110280190WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Broadcast data is divided into a plurality of broadcast channels. Any of the plurality of broadcast channels is placed on a predetermined subcarrier in each of a plurality of main bands such that the placed broadcast channels differ from each other in a same frame and are consecutive in a predetermined order in a frame direction. The subcarriers are converted into a transmit RF signal and the transmit RF signal is transmitted.11-17-2011
20110280188PRE-CODING METHOD FOR SPATIAL MULTIPLEXING IN MULTIPLE INPUT AND OUTPUT SYSTEM - The present invention relates to a pre-coding method for spatial multiplexing, comprising the steps of: performing a beam search for beam forming with a receiver device equipped with multiple antennas to perform pre-coding for spatial multiplexing in a transmitter device equipped with multiple antennas; transmitting a first packet including at least one or more training sequences to the receiver device after completion of said beam search; receiving, from the receiver device, a second packet including feedback information for pre-coding, determined in the receiver device by using the training sequences; and performing pre-coding for spatial multiplexing, onto the data stream to be transmitted to the receiver device, by using the pre-coding matrix calculated on the basis of the feedback information.11-17-2011
20110280189BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To keep PAPR low even when the same physical cell ID is used in each component carrier, a base station apparatus 11-17-2011
20110280184MTC SERVICE ACTIVATION - An MTC device activates an MTC service by first performing an MTC device attachment procedure to attach to a mobile communication network. After the MTC device is attached to the mobile communication network, the MTC device activates a packet data protocol context for the MTC device with the mobile communication network. After the packet data protocol context is activated, the MTC device activates an MTC service with an MTC server.11-17-2011
20110280187Provision of an end-to-end connection from a terminal unit to a network - There is provided a method for providing at least one packet-oriented end-to-end connection from a terminal unit to another network via at least one connection in a mobile telecommunications network. A set-up of the connection includes an assignment of an address for addressing data packets to the terminal unit. The method comprises transferring, via a modem that is connected to the mobile telecommunications network via an air interface, the address to the terminal unit. The method also comprises forwarding data packets of the end-to-end connection that have been received from the mobile telecommunications network to the terminal unit, the data packets being forwarded in an association with the connection.11-17-2011
20110280185METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PARALLEL DE-INTERLEAVING OF LTE INTERLEAVED DATA - A wireless communication signal in Long Term Evolution (LTE) may be interleaved in a manner which permits a partitioning of a received inter-column bit-reversed interleaved code block for improved de-interleaving. The code block may be divided into equal subportions which may be simultaneously de-interleaved both forward and backward, and in parallel with other subportions. An even number of subportions may be provided. Dividing a received code block in this manner may improve de-interleaving performance.11-17-2011
20110280183METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SETTING REVERSE LINK CQI REPORTING MODES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for setting Reverse Link CQI Reporting Modes in an access terminal is provided, comprising determining a value for CQIReportingMode received as a parameter in a transmitted message and setting the reverse link CQI reporting mode of the access terminal based on CQIReportingMode value. The CQIReportingMode value is indicative of a reporting mode selected from a plurality of reporting modes.11-17-2011
20110280181CYCLIC PREFIX FOR NON-CONTIGUOUS SIGNAL TRANSMISSION - Transmitted signals are modified to facilitate the emulation of circular convolution in non-contiguous transmission environments. These modified signals may be derived from well-known signature sequences. In an exemplary method, a tail portion of a final segment of a base signal is prefixed to an initial segment of the base signal, to form a first transmit segment. One or more additional transmit segments are formed by prefixing, to each of the one or more segments of the base signal other than the initial segment, a tail portion of the immediately preceding segment of the base signal. The transmit segments so formed are transmitted in respective ones of the plurality of non-contiguous transmit-time intervals. Corresponding methods for receiving the transmitted segments and reconstructing the base signal are also described, as are corresponding transmitting and receiving apparatuses.11-17-2011
20110280179Method And Apparatus For Access Selection In A Communication Network - The invention relates to a method for selecting (11-17-2011
20110280180METHODS AND APPARATUS TO AUTHENTICATE REQUESTS FOR NETWORK CAPABILITIES FOR CONNECTING TO AN ACCESS NETWORK - Example methods and apparatus to authenticate requests for network capabilities for connecting to an access network are disclosed. A disclosed example method involves receiving a request at a first access network. The request requests network connectivity information for connecting a wireless terminal to a second access network. The example method also involves encapsulating the request in an authentication frame. The authentication frame indicates the request as a white space protocol frame. The authentication frame is sent to a database addressed in the request.11-17-2011
20090190528METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION PERIODICALLY OR APERIODICALLY - A method for transmitting and receiving channel state information (CSI) periodically and aperiodically is disclosed. The method for aperiodically transmitting channel state information (CSI) by a terminal includes receiving an indicator requesting a channel state information report of a downlink channel from a base station over a downlink control channel, and aperiodically transmitting the channel state information (CSI) to the base station over a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) upon receiving the indicator from the base station.07-30-2009
20100303007Technique for Performing GSM/WCDMA Circuit Switched Services Over a Long Term Evolution Radio Access - A method of performing CS (Circuit Switched) services over a LTE (Long Term Evolution) access comprises: performing CM (Connection Management) procedures via an AGW (Access Gateway); and performing MM (Mobility Management) procedures via a MME (Mobility Management Entity).12-02-2010
20130163513METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING INFORMATION - A method of receiving information includes executing an external device link application on a device to be automatically connected to an external device, receiving summary information of information stored in the external device, displaying the received summary information, transmitting a request signal for at least one piece of information stored in the external device based on the displayed summary information to the external device, receiving information corresponding to the request signal from the external device, and storing the received information.06-27-2013
20100214988METHOD FOR DYNAMICALLY SETTING THE NUMBER OF HS-SCCH CHANNELS TO BE USED ON A CELL - Embodiments of the invention relate to methods for dynamically setting the number N of HS-SCCH channels to be used as signalling channels of the HS-DSCH traffic channel in a cell served by a Node B, which comprises, at predefined periods of time: 08-26-2010
20100189039DERIVATION OF LTE SYSTEM INFORMATION RETRANSMISSION REDUNDANCY VERSIONS - A method and apparatus for transmitting system information in an e Node B includes a processor configured to map system information to a plurality of subframes, determine that at least one of the plurality of subframes includes non-SI information, and assign a redundancy version to all of the plurality of subframes except the at least one subframe including non-SI information such that the redundancy versions are assigned in a particular pattern and the at least one subframe including non-SI information does not effect the particular pattern.07-29-2010
20090168700SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR AVOIDING STALL USING TIMER FOR HIGH-SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS SYSTEM - At least one timer is used to prevent a stall condition. If a timer is not active, the timer is started for a data block that is correctly received. The data block has a sequence number higher than a sequence number of another data block that was first expected to be received. When the timer is stopped or expires, all correctly received data blocks among data blocks up to and including a data block having a sequence number that is immediately before the sequence number of the data block for which the timer was started is delivered to a higher layer. Further, all correctly received data blocks up to a first missing data block, including the data block for which the timer was started, is delivered to the higher layer.07-02-2009
20090168698METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIMULTANEOUS LOCATION PRIVACY AND ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR COMMUNICATION SESSIONS - The invention relates to a method for routing packets in a system of packet-switched networks comprising a plurality of home agents, at least one mobile node and at least one correspondent node, the mobile node having at least a first home address and communicating with the correspondent node over a first of the plurality of home agents. The method comprises the following steps carried out by the mobile node: receiving an application layer request message from the correspondent node; looking up a correspondent node address in a part of the application layer request message; locating a second of the plurality of home agents in proximity to a direct path between the mobile node and the correspondent node using the correspondent node address; bootstrapping with the second home agent to obtain a second home address; including the second home address in a part of an application layer response message to the correspondent node to enable the correspondent node to use the second home address for data communications with the mobile node.07-02-2009
20110069656METHOD FOR WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK USING SYNCHRONOUS MAC PROTOCOL - Technology for a wireless multi-hop network is provided. A method by which a source node operates in a wireless multi-hop network includes selecting one of first to M-th frame structures (M is a natural number greater than or equal to 2), based on a data packet generation interval, when the source node is in an active state, synchronizing with neighboring nodes in a first synchronization period of the selected frame structure, and when the source node is in the active state, transmitting a control packet to a next hop in a data period of the selected frame structure, and waiting for a response from the next hop, the control packet indicating that the source node will transmit a data packet in a sleep period subsequent to the data period and including information on the selected frame structure. Here, each of the first to M-th frame structures defines a frame including at least one synchronization period, at least one data period, and at least one sleep period, and having a different duty cycle.03-24-2011
20100303016System and Method for Transport Block Size Design for Multiple-Input, Multiple-Output (MIMO) in a Wireless Communications System - In one embodiment, a method for transmitting information includes processing a downlink transport channel to generate a transport block (TB) having a TB size. The TB size is selected by selecting a modulation and coding scheme index (I12-02-2010
20090129317ACK/NACK DTX detection - In a first aspect of the invention there is a method, apparatus, and executable software product for receiving scheduling information, determining that at least one downlink allocation of the scheduling information was not received, sending a reply to the received scheduling that comprises an indication of discontinuous transmission in response to the determining. In another aspect of the invention there is a method an apparatus to send scheduling information, and receive a reply to the scheduling information comprising an indication of discontinuous transmission that at least one downlink allocation of the scheduling information was not received.05-21-2009
20090080374METHOD OF CREATING AND DELETING SERVICE FLOW FOR ROBUST HEADER COMPRESSION, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM SUPPORTING THE SAME - A method of creating a service flow for ROHC in a control station is disclosed, which can establishes a ROHC channel between ROHC entities, the method comprising obtaining a first ROHC parameter from a ROHC entity of the control station, upon receiving a subscriber profile to which ROHC is applied; and transmitting a first message including the first ROHC parameter for requesting the creation of service flow to a mobile station related with the subscriber profile and a base station performing a dynamic service addition (DSA) procedure through the use of a second message including the first ROHC parameter.03-26-2009
20100027467METHODS FOR HANDLING PACKET-SWITCHED DATA TRANSMISSIONS BY MOBILE STATION WITH SUBSCRIBER IDENTITY CARDS AND SYSTEMS UTILIZING THE SAME - A method for handling packet-switched data transmissions by a mobile station with a first subscriber identity card coupled to a first radio frequency (RF) module and a second subscriber identity card coupled to a second RF module, executed by an adapter of the mobile station, is provided. An uplink Internet protocol (IP) packet is received. Information regarding at least one of the received packet and hardware status of the mobile station is collected. One subscriber identity card is determined from the first and second subscriber identity cards according to the collected information. The received packet is transmitted to an IP network via the RF module corresponding to the determined subscriber identity card.02-04-2010
20090040969Method and Apparatus for Non-Scheduled Transmission for Packet Service in a Mobile Communication System - A method and apparatus for non-scheduled transmission for a packet service in a mobile communication system are provided. A plurality of allowed maximum packet sizes are defined for the non-scheduled transmission and a UE selects one of the maximum packet sizes under circumstances and sends packets according to the selected maximum packet size in a non-scheduled transmission mode.02-12-2009
20100150078WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DECODING ENHANCED DEDICATED CHANNEL ABSOLUTE GRANT CHANNEL TRANSMISSIONS - A method of decoding enhanced uplink absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) transmissions in a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). E-AGCH data is received, the E-AGCH data including a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) part and a data part, the CRC part having been masked with a WTRU identity (ID). The CRC part and the data part are demultiplexed and the CRC part is demasked with a first WTRU ID. A first CRC is performed with the data part and the CRC part demasked with the first WTRU ID. The data part is decoded on a condition that the first CRC passes.06-17-2010
20100128665Method for providing signaling between a core network and a radio access network - Example embodiments provide methods for providing signaling between a core network and a radio access network (RAN). One example embodiment includes receiving an IP packet at the core network; inserting information into a destination options extension header of the IP packet at the core network; and sending the IP packet from the core network to the RAN. Another example embodiment includes receiving an IP packet at the RAN from the core network; extracting information from a destination options extension header of the IP packet at the RAN; and sending the IP packet from the RAN to a terminal.05-27-2010
20110075607Multi-user null data packet (MU-NDP) sounding within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Multi-user null data packet (MU-NDP) sounding within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. Within communication systems including multiple wireless communication devices (e.g., one or more APs, STAs, etc.), channel sounding of the selected communication links between the various wireless communication devices is performed. A MU-NDP announcement frame is transmitted to and received by various wireless communication devices indicating which of those wireless communication devices (e.g., one, some, or all) are being sounded. Then, respective NDP sounding frames are transmitted via the communication links corresponding to those wireless communication devices (e.g., one, some, or all) are being sounded, and sounding feedback signals are subsequently sent back to the original transmitting wireless communication device. In some instances, after transmission of the MU-NDP announcement frame, a clear to send (CTS) is sent from at least one of the wireless communication devices thereby precipitating the transmission of the NDP sounding frames.03-31-2011
20090310541COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RELAY DEVICE - A communication system, including: a first mobile station; a first node; a first QoS server; a second mobile station; and a second QoS server, wherein the first node includes a first transfer unit which receives a QoS request for requesting to set a QoS channel from the first mobile station and transfers the QoS request to the first QoS server; and a management unit which instructs the first QoS server to transfer the QoS request if it is judged that the second mobile station is accommodated, the first transfer unit transfers the QoS request to the second QoS server based on the instruction from the management unit, and the second QoS server includes a QoS setting message output unit which outputs a QoS setting message to instruct setting of a QoS channel to said second mobile station based on the QoS request.12-17-2009
20100303010CIRCUIT-SWITCHED CALL CONTROL VIA AN IP USER CHANNEL CONNECTION IN THE ACCESS NETWORK - The invention relates to a method for implementing call control in packet-switched networks, wherein a connection is established between two communications partners by means of static multiplexing in a network and the use of the network for telephone services on an application level, causing signaling between two participating terminal devices. In the course of the general development of the internet, it seems reasonable for operators of conventional telecommunications networks to operate their telephone services via packet-switched networks. However, the establishment of a completely new SIP-based protocol world is disadvantageous for an operator that wishes only to continue its known telephone services. As a result, the operator has the aim of enhancing the transfer of protocols such that the protocols known from circuit-switched technology may be transferred in a simplified fashion to packet-switched networks. Said aim is achieved in that a user channel is configured in the packet-switched access network, wherein call control occurs by means of a circuit-switched signaling via the IP user channel.12-02-2010
20100165914BEAM DIVISION MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The present invention is related to a beam division multiple access system and a method thereof. The base station according to the present invention comprises a initial mobile station information receiver for receiving initial mobile station information that a mobile station omnidirectionally transmits in an initial communication step, a mobile station location and speed detector for detecting a location and a moving speed of the mobile station from the initial mobile station information, a downlink beam generator for generating a downlink beam based on the location and the moving speed of the mobile station transferred from the mobile station location and speed detector, and adjusting at least one of a width and a direction of each the downlink beam, and a downlink beam transmitter for transmitting the downlink beam generated by the downlink beam generator to the mobile station through a phase array antenna.07-01-2010
20100091706SCP-CONTROLLED OVERLAY BETWEEN GSM AND IMS - The invention relates to method of executing a service in a Media Gateway Control Function (04-15-2010
20110064021TARGETING COMMUNICATIONS IN A FEMTOCELL NETWORK - The disclosed subject matter relates to an architecture that can leverage Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (UMTS) Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) features to facilitate more efficient or more robust communication with a femtocell network. In particular, features such as a UMTS localized common pilot channel along with various UTRAN features can enable communications to be directed to specific targets such as to a specific home nodeB (HNB) or to a specific mobile device served by the HNB, while also reducing macro network load.03-17-2011
20090310534Medium Access Control Discard Notification - A method is provided for a base station set (NODE B) adapted for RLC and MAC-hs signaling in acknowledged mode (AM), the base station set at least forwarding protocol data units (MAC-d PDU) from a Radio Network controller (RNC) to a user entity (UE), the method comprising the steps of monitoring (12-17-2009
20090310535Unifying Virtualizations in a Core Network and a Wireless Access Network - To unify virtualizations in a core network and a wireless access network a virtual wireless network is mapped to a virtual network in the core network. Based on the mapping, data associated with a communications session can be communicated through the virtual wireless network and core virtual network.12-17-2009
20110090848METHOD FOR DETERMINING ISR ACTIVATION IN MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for determining Idle mode Signaling Reduction (ISR) activation in a mobile communications system.04-21-2011
20100329181APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DUAL-MODE WIMAX/CDMA OPERATION - A system, computer-readable medium, and method of operating a dual-mode WiMAX and CDMA communications device capable of operating in a CDMA mode or a WiMAX mode includes receiving a first base station (BS) location message from the BS and storing the received location as a current BS location. The BS location is compared to stored region coordinates for the different regions, and the comparison is used to determine a particular region in which the dual-mode device is currently located. Analysis determines whether a WiMAX market is located within the particular region. If no WiMAX markets are located, the dual-mode device is operated in the CDMA mode. If one or more WiMAX markets are located within the particular region, a determination is made as to whether the BS location is within a WiMAX market and, if so, the dual-mode device is placed in a WiMAX mode of operation. Battery power is conserved by avoiding WiMAX transmission when WiMAX service is not available at the current BS location.12-30-2010
20090213783Roaming Network Stations Using A Mac Address Identifier To Select New Access Point - There is disclosed a method of helping mobile stations such as voice over IP devices to roam between wireless access points, by each access point transmitting the MAC address of a spanning tree algorithm root switch of the local network domain. This MAC address is used by mobile stations to detect if two access points are in a common network domain.08-27-2009
20090232050Method And System For Determining Limited Soft Buffer Size On Transport Blocks For Rate Matching - Aspects of a method and system for determining a limited soft buffer size on transport blocks for rate matching are provided. A data stream may be processed for transmission between a base station (eNodeB) and a UE via HARQ procedures. A two-stage rate-matching algorithm may be used in the HARQ procedures. A limited virtual soft buffer size at the UE in the two-stage rate-matching algorithm may be calculated on site based on channel condition information, available channel bandwidth, number of layers in spatial multiplexing, and the capacity of the UE, respectively. The data stream may be first rate-matched to the calculated limited soft buffer size available at the UE, and forwarded for second stage rate-matching to an actual physical channel size determined by the base station. The amount of bits forwarded for second stage rate-matching may equal to the calculated limited virtual soft buffer size of the virtual soft buffer.09-17-2009
20110274042REDUCING PROTOCOL OVERHEAD IN SINGLE-BLOCK PACKET ACCESS PROCEDURES - Methods and techniques for reducing both signaling and data traffic related to machine-type communication devices (MTC) in a GPRS communication network are disclosed. Optimized MTC messages from an MTC device are transmitted using Single-Block Packet Access procedures and restored by SGSNs based on a PDP context established during the mobile station's GPRS attach procedure.11-10-2011
20110274038METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR AVOIDING UNNECESSARY BEARER ESTABLISHMENT IN CIRCUIT SWITCHED FALLBACK - Methods and apparatuses are provided that facilitate avoiding establishment of unnecessary radio bearers in circuit switched fallback (CSFB). A CSFB procedure related to a device can be detected from receiving an extended service request or a forward relocation request, or from determining that an evolved packet system (EPS) is insufficient to handle a circuit switched voice call, and/or the like. Based at least in part on detecting the CSFB, establishment of radio bearers for inactive EPS bearers can be avoided. Where the device is in idle mode before CSFB, avoiding establishment of radio bearers can include avoiding establishment of all data radio bearers for the device.11-10-2011
20090207780COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION CONTROL DEVICE, AND BASE STATION DEVICE - There are provided a communication system, a base station control device, and a base station device capable of improving communication quality. In the communication system (08-20-2009
20110019623WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE FOR PROCESSING PACKET INCLUDING AT LEAST ONE OF VIDEO OUTPUT FORMAT OF VIDEO DATA AND AUDIO OUTPUT FORMAT OF AUDIO DATA - A wireless node device receives data island packets from an HDMI device with a time cycle, and prohibits wireless transmission of a data island notification message when a video output format and an audio output format included in the data island packet are the same as a video output format and an audio output format included in the data island packet, respectively.01-27-2011
20110299466RADIO BASE STATION - A radio base station (eNB) according to the present invention includes: an RI acquisition unit (12-08-2011
20110299463OPTIMIZED HOME LINK DETECTION - The invention relates to a method for establishing by a mobile node an additional session via a connection to a packet data network in a mobile communication network and a mobile node and a packet data network gateway adapted to perform this method. In order to suggest optimized home link detection by a mobile node one aspect of the invention is to delay the decision on whether the mobile node is located on the home link or not. In conventional home link detection, the mobile node checks before sending any binding update on an access interface whether its prefix of the local IP address configured on that access interface is matching a home address prefix received during bootstrapping. According to one aspect of the invention, this home link detection is delayed in that home link detection is based on comparing a home address prefix received during bootstrapping and the advertised local prefix of a router advertisement received after bootstrapping.12-08-2011
20100128677SERVICE CONTINUITY DURING LOCAL BREAKOUT IN A FEMTOCELL - A system and methodology that facilitates service continuity when a user equipment (UE), employing local breakout mechanisms at a femto access point (FAP) for a communication session, moves out of the femto coverage area is provided. In particular, a network change detection component can be employed to detect when the UE, attached to the FAP, changes its connection from the femto network to the macro network. Further, an active communication session can exist between the UE and a device/service/application on a local Area network (LAN) connected to a FAP, and/or the Internet, which utilizes local breakout at the FAP. When the UE moves out of the femto network, a context management component can be employed to seamlessly resume the communication session, via the macro network.05-27-2010
20110286399DEVICE AND METHOD FOR CONTROLLING UPLINK DATA TRANSMISSION - Device and method to recognize and report the source of interference relate to data transmission between a user terminal and a base station, wherein a pilot signal is transmitted from all antenna assemblies of the user terminal simultaneously, said pilot signals from the user terminal are received by the base station, wherein the base station sends a power control command to the user terminal, corresponding to each of the pilot signals, and wherein the user terminal chooses on receipt of the power control commands, which antenna assembly of the user terminal is used to transmit the next uplink data.11-24-2011
20110286400METHOD FOR SENDING AND RECEIVING CLOCK, APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CLOCK - A method for sending and receiving a clock and an apparatus for transmitting the clock. Several kinds of clocks are encoded and framed at a sending port so that the clocks needed by all modes of base stations are transmitted in one pair of interconnecting lines. A receiving port can precisely recover the needed clock out. This not only reduces the number of interconnecting lines on the backboard and improves flexibility, but also avoids that the clock decoded out by the receiving port might be imprecise.11-24-2011
20110286394PROTECTION AGAINST UNSOLICITED COMMUNICATION FOR INTERNET PROTOCOL MULTIMEDIA SUBSYSTEM - A protection against an unsolicited communication for an IMS (PUCI) system includes a call session control function (CSCF), and a plurality of PUCE application servers. The PUCI application servers make an evaluation as to whether a communication received from the user equipment is an unsolicited communication; the CSCF makes a decision on routing toward the PUCI application servers based on the evaluation; then, the PUCI application servers execute the routing based on the decision.11-24-2011
20110286397WIRELESS DEVICE IN MULTICARRIER SYSTEM - A wireless device and method for a multiple carrier system are provided. The wireless device comprises a carrier management unit for determining at least one of a plurality of carriers as a reference carrier for monitoring a control channel and a control channel unit for monitoring the control channel over the reference carrier, wherein the carrier management unit switches the reference carrier to at least one of remaining carriers of the plurality of carriers. Accordingly, control channel traffic can be prevented from concentrating on a particular carrier, and a diversity gain can be achieved.11-24-2011
20110286396Proxy Mobile IPv6 Support in Residential Networks - Apparatus for providing a gateway between a residential network and a Wide Area Network including a packet core network of a cellular telecommunication system. The apparatus comprises an IP router for routing IP packets between a user equipment attached to the residential network, and said Wide Area Network. A detector is employed to detect attachment of user equipment to said packet core network, whilst a tunnel establishment unit is configured, upon detection of attachment of a user equipment to said packet core network by said detector, to establish an IP packet tunnel between itself and a Broadband Network Gateway of said packet core network. Thereafter, said IP router is configured to route IP packets to and from the attached user equipment via said IP tunnel.11-24-2011
20110286393COMMUNICATIONS DEVICE - A communications device includes a first circuit and a second circuit. The first circuit includes a wired medium interface circuit that is configured to, in use, communicate data over a wired medium. The second circuit includes a wireless medium interface circuit that is configured to, in use, communicate data over a wireless medium. A destination address controller is included in the first circuit and is operative to determine to which of a plurality of destination addresses at a communications device data is to be communicated from the second circuit. The communications device can have individual visibility of a plurality of destination addresses (e.g. for respective devices) when data is received or transmitted by the wireless medium interface circuit (second circuit).11-24-2011
20110286395RADIO NETWORK AND A METHOD FOR OPERATING A RADIO NETWORK - A radio network allows a flexible distribution of data flows between a mobile station and a mobility anchor of the network over different interfaces. Data flows are routed between at least one mobile station and a mobility anchor of the network. The mobile station can connect to the mobility anchor using multiple network interfaces simultaneously, the radio network including an application function capable of processing and/or analyzing information about routing policies contained in a signalling received from a mobile station, which is able to push or signal the processed and/or analyzed information from the application function to an entity that can enforce routing policies to forward the data flows to one or more selected interfaces and which is able to signal routing policies received from the network to the mobile station. Further, an according method for operating a radio network, especially for routing data flows within the network, is disclosed.11-24-2011
20110286389NETWORK REGISTRATION PROCEDURES - A method of communication involves sending a request from a first network entity (e.g., a femto convergence server) to a second network entity (e.g., a home subscriber server) for user data relating to an access point, receiving a response to the request, wherein the response identifies at least one application server, and sending registration status information to the identified at least one application server.11-24-2011
20110286391QOS-BASED POWER CONTROL IN AGGREGATED CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A user equipment (UE) is configured for carrier aggregation in a wireless communication system. The UE selects control information to be transmitted in an uplink control channel format in a component carrier of two or more component carriers, where the control information includes information types associated with different information reliability requirements. The UE generates an open-loop power control parameter and/or a closed-loop power control parameter based on the information types. The UE transmits the control information in the uplink control channel format at a power level determined by the open-loop power control parameter and/or the closed-loop power control parameter.11-24-2011
20110286390WIRELESS IMAGE TRANSMITTING APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA THEREOF - A wireless image transmitting apparatus includes an image processing unit, a wireless bridging module, and a wireless local area network module. The wireless bridging module includes a network switch and a network port. The network switch is in signal communication with the network port and the image processing unit. The WLAN module is in signal communication with the network switch. The WLAN module uses a first type of packet and a first band to transmit a signal from the image processing unit and uses a second type of packet and a second band to transmit a signal from the network port. A method for transmitting data in a wireless image transmitting apparatus is also disclosed.11-24-2011
20110286387METHOD TO CONTROL MULTIPLE RADIO ACCESS BEARERS IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method to control multiple radio access bearers is performed at a mobile wireless communication device when the mobile wireless communication device is connected to a radio network subsystem in a wireless communication network by first and second bidirectional radio access bearers. The mobile wireless communication device transmits a data packet on an uplink of the first bidirectional radio access bearer to the radio network subsystem. When the data packet is not correctly received by the radio network subsystem, the mobile wireless communication device retransmits the data packet repeatedly. After N retransmissions of the data packet, the mobile wireless communication device releases the first bidirectional radio access bearer while maintaining the second bidirectional radio access bearer. The first bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport packet switched data, and the second bidirectional radio access bearer provides a channel to transport circuit switched data.11-24-2011
20110286392Providing Access to Information of Multiple Types Via Coordination of Distinct Information Services - Techniques are described for providing users of client devices with coordinated access to information and/or functionality of multiple types, such as by using multiple types of connections to multiple information services of distinct types that exchange context information related to activities of the users and/or clients. The client devices can be, for example, wireless devices with multiple distinct modes (e.g., voice and data modes) for different types of connections with different types of servers (e.g., voice servers and data servers). In some situations, coordination between different servers allows multiple distinct interaction sessions of different types with different servers to remain synchronized or otherwise coordinated over time as the user performs interactions via the different sessions. This abstract is provided to comply with rules requiring an abstract, and is not intended to be used to interpret or limit the scope or meaning of the claims.11-24-2011
20110286385Methods and Systems for Communications - There is provided a method and system for making a call from a first communications device at any location to a recipient with a second communications device by inputting a contact number of the recipient into the first communications device, selecting a communications mode on the first device, wherein at least one of the first communications device and the second communications device operate using at least one data channel, and wherein a caller makes the call in a manner similar to “dial-and-connect” phone calls. There is also provided a method and system for sending at least one message from a first communications device at any location to a recipient with a second communication device by inputting a contact number of the recipient into the first communications device when sending the at least one message, transmitting the contact number and the at least one message to a server through at least one data channel: storing the at least one message at the server; the server contacting the second communications device; and either the second communications device drawing the at least one message from the server through at least one data channel, or the server transmitting the at least one message to the second communications device, wherein the messenger sends the at least one message in a manner similar to “compose-and-send” messaging.11-24-2011
20110286388Method for Operating a Mobile Wireless Network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer.11-24-2011
20110286386Reliable Transfer of Time Stamped Multichannel Data Over A Lossy Mesh Network - System and method for transmitting data over a wireless medium. A wireless sensor node receives data from at least one sensor, where the data include a plurality of data sets. For each data set: the wireless sensor node compares the size of the data set with a specified packet size, and if the size of the data set exceeds the specified packet size, transmits a plurality of packets containing respective portions of the data set to a gateway device over a wireless medium. If the size of the data set does not exceed the specified packet size, then a packet containing the data set is transmitted to the gateway device over the wireless medium.11-24-2011
20110286384Method and apparatus for providing local breakout in a mobile network - There is provided a Local Breakout Gateway node for use in a hierarchical mobile network. The node comprises a database, which stores a plurality of Local Breakout Policy rules. The node further comprises a receiver for receiving an IP packet from a Mobile Node attached to the network at which the node is located, the network being a visited network for the Mobile Node. The node further comprises means for selecting a Local Breakout Policy from the plurality of Local Breakout Policy rules, and means to apply the selected Local Breakout Policy to the received IP packet. The node further comprises a Network Address translation function to apply a Network Address Translation to the received IP packet, and a transmitter for sending the IP packet to a destination according to the applied Local Breakout Policy.11-24-2011
20120087301ASSET MANAGEMENT FOR INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY RESOURCES - A method to identify information technology resources whereby a locator device is inserted into a communication port of each information technology resource, such as a computers, router, cable endpoints, etc. When activated, the device passively receives wireless RF transmissions from broadcast units in the vicinity while actively receiving and storing configuration and other predetermined information from the resource. The device can calculate the exact position of the information technology resource and store the location in memory. The location and the identifying data of the information technology resource can be used in an asset management database, to locate a lost or missing resource, or can be used for billing for service level agreements. The method and device herein is particularly useful in secure facilities.04-12-2012
20100027469POINT OF SALES AND CUSTOMER SUPPORT FOR FEMTOCELL SERVICE AND EQUIPMENT - System(s) and method(s) are provided for a femto cell service framework for purchase of femtocell equipment and service and customer support thereof. A point of sale (POS) platform enables purchase of femtocell equipment based on a set of eligibility criteria. POS also allows purchase of add-on services. Direct fulfillment and post-sale transactions such as returns and equipment replacement are also provided. An account management service enables femtocell equipment and service self-care or through customer representatives. Configuration of service account and monitoring of account status is provided. Customer care architecture also enables remote troubleshooting of purchased equipment. Remote troubleshooting includes diagnosis and related manipulation of purchased equipment.02-04-2010
20110141975METHOD AND A SYSTEM FOR TIME SYNCHRONISATION BETWEEN A CONTROL CENTRE AND SEVERAL TRANSMITTERS - A central station and several transmitters in a single-frequency network are synchronised. A first reference time signal is generated with a high degree of time and frequency accuracy on the short and long time horizon and a second reference time signal is generated and supplied to the central station with a low degree of time and frequency accuracy on the short time horizon and a high degree of accuracy on the long time horizon. A transport data stream with a temporally variable data rate that corresponds to the frequency of the second reference time signal is generated by means of the central station, said stream being supplied to several transmitters and comprising distributed data packets that contain the transmission instant of the data packet, referenced to the second reference time signal, for the transmitters. The time accuracy of the transmission instant of each data packet is optimised by averaging the time and frequency accuracy of the second reference signal over time. The system temporally offsets the transport data stream received by each transmitter from the central station until the data packets of the transport data stream that each contain a transmission instant are transmitted at the correct transmission instant with regard to the first reference time signal supplied to each transmitter.06-16-2011
20110141978APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MOVING A RECEIVE WINDOW IN A RADIO ACCESS NETWORK - A method of moving a receiving window in a wireless mobile communication system, wherein the AM RLC of the transmitting side sends information of the last discarded SDU regardless of continuity of the discarded SDUs. The AM RLC of the receiving side checks whether all SDUs from the start point of the receiving window up to the last discarded SDU are successfully received, delivers the SDUs that are successfully received to an upper layer, and discard only those SDUs that are not successfully received.06-16-2011
20110317627COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INTERMITTENT RECEPTION METHOD - An efficient discontinuous reception operation is provided for a mobile station device in Advanced-EUTRA. In a mobile station device connected to a base station device using a plurality of component carriers, during discontinuous reception, one discontinuous reception parameter is applied to all the component carriers used by the mobile station device to thereby perform the operation of monitoring a control channel in all the component carriers, and when the control channel addressed to the mobile station device is received in one or more component carriers during a reception ON period, the reception ON period is extended in all the component carriers.12-29-2011
20120002605WIRELESS FIELD DEVICE - There is provided a wireless field device that performs a wireless communication with other filed devices in a wireless network through a gateway. The device includes: a battery incorporated in the field device to activate the field device; and a wireless communication module configured to exchange radio signals with the gateway to perform the wireless communication with said other field devices. When the filed device starts procedure for joining in the wireless network, firstly, the wireless communication module continuously accesses the gateway in a first period to receive an advertisement signal from the gateway, and when the wireless communication module fails to receive the advertisement signal in the first period, the wireless communication module intermittently accesses the gateway until receiving the advertisement signal from the gateway.01-05-2012
20120099534COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, TRANSMITTING METHOD AND RECEIVING METHOD - A receiving method and apparatus that performs receiving processing of data transmitted at timings of a predetermined interval. The method and apparatus includes transmitting a signal indicating that a data is successfully received when the data transmitted at M04-26-2012
20120099533Content Caching in the Radio Access Network (RAN) - A system and method to intercept traffic at standard interface points as defined by Cellular/Wireless networks (GSM/GPRS, 3G/UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA, CDMA, WIMAX, LTE), emulate the respective protocols on either side of the interception point, extract user/application payloads within the intercepted packets, perform optimizations, and re-encapsulate with the same protocol, and deliver the content transparently is disclosed. The optimizations include but are not limited to Content Caching, prediction & pre-fetching of frequently used content, performance of content-aware transport optimizations (TCP, UDP, RTP etc.) for reducing back-haul bandwidth, and improvement of user experience. An additional embodiment of the current invention includes injecting opportunistic content (location based, profile based or advertisement content) based on the information derived while monitoring control plane protocols.04-26-2012
20120099526DECODING DEVICE - A decoding device includes a decoder that conducts decoding on transmission data sent a predetermined number of transmissions from respective communication partners; and a scheduler that identifies transmission data to be decoded by the decoder at a certain decoding timing among decoding timings that occur periodically and that determines whether to decode the identified transmission data at the certain decoding timing, based on a number of transmissions in which the identified transmission data has been sent.04-26-2012
20120099525COUNTER CHECK PROCEDURE FOR PACKET DATA TRANSMISSION - A counter synchronization process is described that is event driven rather than conducted on a periodic basis. A receiving device, which may be a user equipment (UE) or a base station, monitors received data packets to detect a rollover of a packet data sequence number in successive data packets. When the sequence number rollover is detected, the receiving device increments the variable data portion of the deciphering key stored in memory. Also in response to this detected rollover event, the receiving device transmits a synchronization message to the source device.04-26-2012
20120099524DELIVERY REPORT FOR TEXT MESSAGES IN SIP COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methods are disclosed for providing a delivery status of a text message in a SIP response. In one embodiment, a text message system receives a SIP request from an entity in a packet-switched network, where the SIP request encapsulates a text message. The text message system determines a status for delivering the text message to a recipient, and generates a SIP response that includes a delivery status parameter for text messages. The text message system inserts the determined delivery status for the text message in the delivery status parameter of the SIP response, and transmits the SIP response to the entity over the packet-switched network.04-26-2012
20120099523ENSURING CONTENT FILTERING THROUGH A SPECIALIZED TIER OF PROXY CACHES AT THE BASE STATION - Embodiments of the invention provide a method, system and computer program product for content caching with remote filtering services in a radio access network (RAN). In an embodiment of the invention, a method for content caching with remote filtering services in a RAN can include receiving a response to a request from an end user device wirelessly coupled to a base station of the RAN, marking the response as uncacheable, and routing the response to the base station over a data communications network. In one aspect of the embodiment, the response can be received in an RNC of the RAN. Of note, the process of marking the response as uncacheable can depend upon the evaluation of a policy with respect to the response. Finally, in another aspect of the embodiment, marking the response as uncacheable, can include annotating a hypertext transfer protocol (HTTP) header of the response to indicate that the response is not to be cached in the base station.04-26-2012
20120099522CELL SELECTING APPARATUS AND CELL SELECTING METHOD - A cell selection apparatus is used in the environment in which multiple communication systems coexists and at least one of the communication systems use guard intervals inserted in the transmission signal. The apparatus includes delay profile creation means (04-26-2012
20120294238Method for automated VIN acquisition and close proximity VIN verification - A new method for transmitting and receiving automated Vehicle Identification Numbers (VIN) and used for the verification of Vehicle Identification Numbers within close proximity of one or more vehicles simultaneously. Provides a new method for real time, on scene vehicle to vehicle information which are located within close proximity to each other for the purpose of transmitting and receiving Vehicle Identification Numbers, vehicle license plate information and owner information during vehicle to vehicle crashes, vehicle to pedestrian crashes, locating stolen vehicles, missing vehicles, crashed vehicles and stranded vehicles. The new inventive method comprises of Wireless Fidelity (WiFi) equipped vehicles for transmitting the vehicles 17 digit VIN and comprises of Computer Modem equipped vehicles or persons for receiving the vehicles 17 digit VIN.11-22-2012
20110299455COMPRESSING DATA IN A WIRELESS MULTI-HOP NETWORK - A first node receives aggregated compressed data and unaggregated data from a second node in a wireless multi-hop network. The first node compresses its own collected data based on the received unaggregated data. The first node aggregates its own compressed data with the aggregated compressed data received from the second node. The first node forwards an unaggregated version of its own collected data along with aggregated compressed data to a next hop in the wireless multi-hop network.12-08-2011
20110002267VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example method in a User Equipment (UE) with a first indicator related to voice services in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) comprises receiving a Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with a second indicator and responsive to at least one of the first indicator or the second indicator, determining availability of voice services over IP Multimedia Subsystem (IMS) in at least one of long term evolution (LTE) or global system for mobile communications edge radio access network (GERAN)/universal mobile telecommunications system terrestrial radio access network(UTRAN).01-06-2011
20110299454APPLICATION-PROXY SUPPORT OVER A WIRELESS LINK - Application proxy support over a wireless link between a mobile device and a wireless node is disclosed. Application proxy support is configured to conserve energy and resources and is configured to mitigate delays in a communication environment. Application proxy support can be associated with a wireless node, such as a femto cell, which can provide a coarse-grain wireless application proxy support that can utilize various criteria to buffer data and determine how long to delay delivery of data. Femto cell can provide a fine-grain wireless application proxy that runs application proxies for each mobile device for one or more applications associated with mobile device. The proxy can determine whether to buffer and forward received data to mobile device. The wireless application proxy can respond to network on behalf of mobile device. The proxy can wake up mobile device upon arrival of a significant event associated with a proxied application.12-08-2011
20120106459GATEWAY APPARATUS, METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A femtocell gateway apparatus arranged on a mobile IMS network comprises a conversion unit that when receiving a request from a terminal via a mobile network, transfers the request to a femtocell access point located in a home, reads a stream or file including at least one of video and audio, from at least one of devices connected to the femtocell access point and devices connected thereto via a home network, subjects the read stream or file to a conversion suitable for at least one of the capability of the terminal and the characteristics of the network, and outputs the stream or file converted. The output packet is then sent through a packet forwarding apparatus on the mobile network to the terminal.05-03-2012
20120106452WIRELESS STATION CONNECTIVITY INFORMATION DISTRIBUTION - According to an example embodiment, a method may include receiving, by a broker station in a wireless network, a broker activation request message from a first client station, the broker activation request message comprising wireless networking capabilities of the first client station. The method may also include sending a networking capability message to at least one other client station, the network capability message comprising identifier and wireless network capabilities of the first client station, the networking capability message being based at least partly on the broker activation request message.05-03-2012
20120106450CHANNEL QUALITY FEEDBACK SIGNALING IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - The invention relates to a message for reporting a channel quality of a communication system, a corresponding method and apparatuses performing such method. The invention is inter alia applicable to a 3GPP LTE and LTE-A system as standardized by the 305-03-2012
20120106449WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - A wireless communication terminal may include a recognition unit that recognizes terminals that are located in its own vicinity and that are capable of performing wireless communication, an authentication unit that performs authentication at a data link level for the recognized terminals that are capable of performing wireless communication, a communication unit that receives authentication requests from the recognized terminals that are capable of performing wireless communication, and performs data communication with the recognized terminals, a selection unit that selects any one of the recognized terminals that are capable of performing wireless communication, and an authentication control unit that, if the authentication request is received from a terminal that has not been recognized, causes the authentication unit to perform the authentication for the selected terminal, and at the same time prohibits the authentication unit from performing the authentication for terminals other than the selected terminal.05-03-2012
20120106441SUPPORTING A WIRELESS NETWORK PROTOCOL ON A MOBILE DEVICE USING A WIRED INTERFACE - The disclosed mobile communication device, system and method permit the process of integration and/or testing of one or more new and/or evolving wireless technologies on a mobile device without complete hardware integration. To achieve this, the mobile communication device includes a wired interface configured to communicate with a separate device via a wired connection using a wired network protocol. The mobile device also includes a data plane bridge that translates data packets between the wired network protocol of the wired interface and a wireless network protocol. The wireless network protocol is used by a mobile application executing on the mobile communication device to transfer the data packets over a wireless link. The data plane bridge and wired interface permit the data packet to be transferred over the wired interface, instead of the wireless link.05-03-2012
20090016264PACKET TRANSFER METHOD IN COMMUNICATION NETWORK SYSTEM AND PACKET PROCESSING METHOD IN COMMUNICATION DEVICE CONSTITUTING THE SYSTEM - There is disclosed a technology in which a packet to be sent to a mobile terminal (an MN), distributed from a correspondent node (a CN), can surely reach the MN even in a situation in which the MN is moving. According to the technology, identification information of a plurality of access routers (ARs) 01-15-2009
20120008560WIRELESS ROUTER SYSTEM AND METHOD - A wireless router employing a technique to couple a plurality a host services or host systems and a plurality of wireless networks. A method to route data items between a plurality of mobile devices and a plurality of host systems through a common wireless router. A point-to-point communication connection is preferably established between a first host system and a common wireless router, a mobile network message at a mobile device is generated, the mobile network message is transmitted via a wireless network to the common wireless router which in turn routes a data item component of the mobile network message to the appropriate host service.01-12-2012
20110299471SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SUPPORTING VOIP AND CS TELEPHONE - The present invention discloses a system for supporting Voice over Internet Protocol (VOIP) and Circuit Switch (CS) telephone. The system includes a terminal gateway device, a wireless broadband module, a Subscriber Line Interface Circuit (SLIC), a SWITCH and a telephone. The present invention also discloses a method for supporting VOIP and CS telephone. By adopting the system and the method of the present invention, a subscriber can enjoy different voice services on the same telephone according to different service scenes, and a mobile operator can deploy a corresponding service in accordance with specific conditions; the present invention enhances the value-adding capability and saves communication cost.12-08-2011
20110299474METHOD AND APPARATUS USING CELL-SPECIFIC AND COMMON PILOT SUBCARRIERS IN MULTI-CARRIER, MULTI-CELL WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A multi-carrier cellular wireless network (12-08-2011
20110299472Adaptive Synchronization scheme for wireless communication systems - A method and system for synchronization in a wireless communication network using a plurality of synchronization frames (SF) and ciao frames (CF) distributed across a configurable period, termed as synchronization activity period (SAP) is disclosed. The periodicity of the SAP could be configured, to align with the data exchange periodicity. The length of the SAP is configurable; it is directly proportional to its periodicity and inversely proportional to the number of attempts and duration the unsynchronized nodes will make to listen to the synchronization information. This method provides a mechanism in which the network can configure the synchronization periodicity based on the data exchange periodicity and also it distributes the synchronization load among all its associated nodes to optimize the power efficiency.12-08-2011
20110299469METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING PAGING MESSAGE USING BAND INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving a paging message in a wireless communication system are provided. A Base Station (BS) transmits, to a Mobile Station (MS) in an idle mode, a Paging Group IDentification Information (PGID_Info) message including paging group information for a paging group to which the BS belongs, and frequency band-specific paging carrier information for indicating at least one of paging carriers included in each of a plurality of frequency bands operated by the BS. The BS determines a paging carrier for transmitting the paging message among paging carriers included in a frequency band supported by the MS, and transmits the paging message to the MS using the determined paging carrier. By doing so, reception of the paging message in the frequency band supported by the MS is guaranteed, thereby preventing the unnecessary location update procedure.12-08-2011
20110299468FORMAT OF VHT-SIG-B AND SERVICE FIELDS IN IEEE 802.11AC - Methods and apparatus for transmitting and receiving frames with various Very High Throughput Signal B (VHT-SIG-B) and Service field formats are provided. Some of these formats may be in accordance with the IEEE 802.11ac amendment to the wireless local area network (WLAN) standard.12-08-2011
20110299467METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CHANNEL QUALITY INFORMATION OF DOWNLINK MULTI CARRIERS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting channel quality information in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of transmitting channel quality information from a mobile station in a wireless communication system includes generating channel quality information of a downlink multi carrier including N number of downlink component carriers; and transmitting the generated channel quality information to a base station through at least one of a physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) a physical uplink shared channel (PUSCH) on a single uplink component carrier.12-08-2011
20110299465MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RADIO BASE STATION - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes performing, at a mobile station UE which establishes a first connection in a first cell, a cell selection process at the time of detecting a failure in the first connection and transmitting, from the mobile station UE to a second cell selected in the cell selection process, a connection re-establishment request signal. The method includes determining, at a radio base station that manages the second cell, whether or not to store context information of the mobile station UE in response to the connection re-establishment request signal and acquiring, at the radio base station, the context information of the mobile station UE from a radio base station that manages the first cell, and establishing a second connection in the second cell for the mobile station UE, based on the context information of the mobile station UE.12-08-2011
20110299464Radio communication method and radio base transmission station - An antenna pattern assigning method capable of avoiding interference between a plurality of base transmission stations constituting a radio system in a cellular type broad band communication. In the radio system, when assigning a fixed beam pattern different for each frequency, each of the radio base transmission station devices transmits a radio wave having a directivity pattern having a peak in the same direction in two or more different frequencies, and between adjacent radio base transmission station devices, radio transmission is performed by using different directivity patterns in the two or more frequencies.12-08-2011
20110299462Mobile Radio Access Information Validation - A validation method for validating IP information header in data packets from user equipment connected to a mobile telecommunications network (12-08-2011
20110299458VoIP CALL OVER WIRELESS SYSTEMS USING ANY PREFERRED DIALING NUMBER - A method of establishing a communication connection, by a communication unit. A telephone number of a destination is received through a human interface of the communication unit and transmitted over a data connection to a number translation server. Responsive thereto an identifier of the destination for VoIP communications is used to establish a real time communication connection between the communication unit and the destination over a data connection, using the identifier.12-08-2011
20110299456ACTIVE ANTENNA ARRAY AND METHOD FOR RELAYING RADIO SIGNALS - The present disclosure teaches an active antenna array for a mobile communications network. The active antenna array comprises a base band unit, a plurality of transceiver units terminated by at least one antenna element; and at least one link. The link couples the individual ones of the plurality of transceiver units to the base band unit. The link is a digital link and is adapted to relay a payload signal at a selectable payload rate. The digital link is further adapted to relay a timing signal at a fixed timing rate, when the timing signal is embedded in the payload at a selectable payload rate. The present disclosure further teaches a method for relaying radio signals and a computer program for manufacturing the active antenna array and for executing the method.12-08-2011
20110299460Complementary Beamforming Methods and Apparatuses - Improved methods and apparatuses are provided to address a potential “hidden beam problem” in wireless communication systems employing smart antennas. The improved methods and apparatuses utilize complementary beamforming (CBF) techniques, such as, for example, Subspace Complementary Beamforming (SCBF), Complementary Superposition Beamforming (CSBF) and/or Single Beam Complementary Beamforming (SBCBF) techniques.12-08-2011
20110299459SAW-LESS RECEIVER WITH OFFSET RF FREQUENCY TRANSLATED BPF - A SAW-less receiver includes a front end module (FEM) interface module, an RF to IF section, and an IF to baseband section. The RF to IF section includes a frequency translated bandpass filter (FTBPF), an LNA, and a mixing section. The FTBPF includes a switching network and a complex baseband filter having an offset baseband filter response. The switching network is operable to frequency translate the offset baseband filter response to an RF frequency response such that the FTBPF filters the inbound RF signal by passing, substantially unattenuated, a desired RF signal component and by attenuating an image signal component and/or an undesired signal component. The LNA amplifies the filtered inbound RF signal and the mixing section mixes the amplified inbound RF signal with a local oscillation to produce an inbound IF signal. The IF to baseband section converts the inbound IF signal into an inbound symbol stream(s).12-08-2011
20110299457DISTRIBUTED RECEPTION WIRELESS MICROPHONE SYSTEM - An apparatus is provided that includes a plurality of portable wireless transmitter units, a plurality of digital receiver modules that alternate transmitting wireless synchronization pulses and that receive information from the plurality of transmitter units synchronized to the synchronization pulses, a receiver control unit in communication with each of the receiver modules that coordinates transmission of synchronization pulses among the plurality of digital receiver modules in accordance with a predetermined transmission sequence and a system that receives the information from at least some of the microphone transmitter units through the receiver modules and delivers the information exclusively to a geographic area proximate a source of the audio information.12-08-2011
20110286398METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING CONTROL INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM THAT SUPPORTS COORDINATED MULTI-POINT (COMP) INCLUDING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION POINTS - The present system relates to a method for transmitting control information in a wireless communications system that supports coordinated multi-point (CoMP) including N (N>1) transmission points. The method comprises: generating control information for downlink transmission of the N transmission points; and transmitting the generated control information to a user device, wherein the control information contains a control information region for transmission of intrinsic control information on a reference transmission point among the N transmission points, and N−1 control information regions for transmission of intrinsic control information on the N−1 transmission points.11-24-2011
20090116426SDU DISCARD MECHANISMS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate packet discard restriction in a wireless communication system. As described herein, a discard prohibit counter and/or other similar mechanism can be employed to limit the number of consecutive packets that are discarded by a transmitter, even in the event that the delay bounds of those packets have been exceeded. A discard prohibit counter as described herein can be updated upon a packet transmission and reset upon a packet discard to ensure that an acceptable number of packets are transmitted before a packet can be discarded. An acceptable number of packets can be selected based on device specifications, requirements of a data packet flow and/or traffic associated with the flow, or other suitable factors, and can be constant or adaptable to changes in network conditions. As further described herein, multiple counters can be separately maintained and utilized for a plurality of corresponding packet flows.05-07-2009
20090201857UMA/GAN KEEP-ALIVE MECHANISIM IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS - A wireless communication terminal (08-13-2009
20090201859Communication Device And Method - A base station unit of a communication device generates control information identical with those generated by other communication devices. The control information includes information defining regions in a radio frame that are used by the communication device and the other communication devices to transmit data. A terminal unit receives data in accordance with the control information. A switching unit changes the connection among the base station unit, the terminal unit and an antenna. When the control information is output from the base station unit, a switch controller operates the switching unit so that the base station unit may be connected to the terminal unit to output the control information to the terminal unit.08-13-2009
20090201852Telecommunications System and Method - A telecommunications system is arranged to provide a mobile communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. The telecommunications system comprises a home packet data network which includes a home agent of the mobile node and a visited packet data network. One of the home packet data network or the visited packet data network includes a packet data gateway for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and from the home packet data network from and to the visited packet data network. The mobile node is arranged to communicate a correspondent node binding update internet packet to the correspondent node via the packet date gateway, when the mobile node changes affiliation from the home packet data network to the visited packet data network. The correspondent node binding update internet packet provides a care of address of the mobile node within the visited packet data network and a home address of the mobile node. The packet data network is arranged to store the home address of the mobile node in association with the care of address of the mobile node, to adapt the correspondent node binding update internet packet by replacing the care of address in the received correspondent binding update packet with the address of the packet data gateway, and to communicate the adapted correspondent binding update packet to the correspondent node. The correspondent node therefore receives a correspondent binding update with the packet data gateway as the care of address. Thus, when the correspondent node communicates with the mobile node using the care of address of the packet data gateway, the packet data gateway can adapt the received internet packets, replacing the packet data gateway's address as the destination address with the care of address of the mobile node. Therefore, although a route optimisation process has taken place the internet packets are still routed via the packet data gateway.08-13-2009
20090279478METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING DYNAMIC COOPERATIVE INTERFERENCE REDUCTION - Various embodiments are described for potentially improving coverage and/or the cell-edge outage rate and thereby the system capacity. Logic flow diagrams 11-12-2009
20110002268VOICE SERVICE IN EVOLVED PACKET SYSTEM - Methods and apparatus to manage voice service in evolved packet systems are disclosed. An example in a UE with a first indicator related to voice services in an Evolved Packet System (EPS) includes receiving a first Non Access Stratum (NAS) protocol response message with a second indicator and responsive to at least one of the first indicator or the second indicator, cause the UE to select to another radio access technology (RAT).01-06-2011
20110134830Telecommunication network transmission divergence system and method - A telecommunication network transmission divergence system and method is disclosed. A first multi-service-packet-control-unit and a second multi-service-packet-control-unit are disposed between a base station and a radio network controller. Packets are diverged to one or more low-stability & long-delay routes based on priorities of the packets. The system and method reduce transmission load of a frame exchange protocol interface (Iub) while maintaining a stable quality of service for divergent packet transmissions. As a result, transmission load and cost are significantly reduced and transmission efficiency is improved.06-09-2011
20110134839User plane location based service using message tunneling to support roaming - An improved User Plane location based service (LBS) architecture and message flow, enabling seamless User Plane location based services even when a mobile or wireless device has roamed among different carrier networks. The present invention overcomes constraints inherent in the current protocol for roaming support defined by the Secure User Plane Location Service specification. A location system is enabled to automatically fall back to a message tunneling mechanism to ensure the security of a communication path between the location service system and the target wireless device, ensuring that the communication path is uninterrupted as the wireless device travels.06-09-2011
20110134840LOCATION BASED VEHICLE MULTIHOP PROTOCOL UNICAST APPARATUS AND ROUTING METHOD USING THE APPARATUS - In order for a source node including a vehicle multihop protocol unicast apparatus to route data to a destination node, the source node broadcasts a location request message to neighbor node and receives a location response message from the neighbor nodes in response to the location request message. Therefore, the source node routs unicast data on the basis of the location information of the destination node included in the location response message. At this time, the source node uses a location based forwarder selecting algorithm in order to select a forwarder.06-09-2011
20110134837FEMTOCELL ACCESS CONTROL - Access by a mobile station to a femto access point (FAP) of a wireless communication system is controlled by an enforcement point in response to mobile station authorization data provided from a storage point that is remote from the FAP. The authorization data is provided in response to FAP authentication data. The authentication data may include a FAP identifier and a message authenticator that the FAP generates by hashing shared secret information. The storage point may provide the authorization data in response to determining that the message authenticator is a hash of the shared secret information.06-09-2011
20110292876DYNAMIC MESH NETWORKS - In an embodiment, a wireless data exchange network includes a wireless device (WD) operating under a wireless network communications protocol, a wireless access point (AP), operatively linked to the WD and a wired network, and operating under the wireless network communications protocol, and a wireless mobile device (WMD) capable of operatively linking with the WD and the AP, and operating under the network communications protocol. In another embodiment, a method for dynamically establishing a wireless data link between the WD and the AP wherein the WMD functions as a bridge there between, where the method may include determining the state of the data exchange link between the WD and the AP, selectively receiving and retransmitting data, by the WMD, from the WD to the AP and from the AP to the WD; and maintaining the wireless network communications protocol of the WMD during reception and retransmission of data between itself and the WD or the AP.12-01-2011
20110134833CONTROLLING ACCESS POINT FUNCTIONALITY - Wireless transmission and/or other functions of an access point (e.g., a femto access point) are controlled based on whether an access terminal is in the vicinity of the access point. For example, wireless transmission may be enabled or disabled based on whether an authorized access terminal is inside or outside a perimeter associated with the access point. An access terminal may send a message to control wireless transmission and/or other functions of the access point based on signals (e.g., pilot signals) the access terminal receives from other access points. For example, the access terminal may determine whether it is inside or outside the perimeter based on comparison of phase information derived from received macro pilot signals with phase information maintained at the access terminal.06-09-2011
20110134836ANNOUNCING A COMMUNICATION SESSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - An access network (AN) receives a call announcement message for transmission to an access terminal (AT). The AN initiates, in response to the received call announcement message, a physical-layer synchronization procedure for at least one channel between the AN and the AT, the physical-layer synchronization procedure associated with a transition of the access terminal to a dedicated channel state. The AN performs the initiation by sending a message to the AT. In response to the message, the AT monitors a downlink channel for receipt of the call announcement message. The AN then transmits the call announcement message on the downlink channel to the access terminal, and the AT receives the call announcement message due to the monitoring. The call announcement message is transmitted either (i) before the physical layer synchronization procedure completes or (ii) before a transmission of a reconfiguration complete message indicating completion of dedicated channel state transition.06-09-2011
20110134835METHOD FOR DISPLAYING INFORMATION - The invention relates to a method for displaying information, using a mobile identification provider (06-09-2011
20110134832METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COOPERATIVE MULTIFUNCITIONAL COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - The described apparatus and methods may include a controller configured to determine capabilities of at least one remote access terminal, and delegate at least one task to the at least one remote access terminal based on the capabilities.06-09-2011
20110134831Architecture Providing Multi-System Carrier Aggregation - Disclosed is a method for enabling interoperability between different types of wireless communication systems operating with different types of air interfaces to provide at least downlink radio resource aggregation for a user equipment. The method includes providing a common set of upper radio layer functionalities for one or more radio bearers assigned to the user equipment, the one or more radio bearers being associated with a first wireless communication system and a second wireless communication system. The method further includes performing wireless communications with the user equipment via one or more of the radio bearers via the first and second wireless communication systems.06-09-2011
20110134829REPEAT CONTROL METHOD IN ENHANCED UPLINK ASYNCHRONOUS HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST - A repeat control method in the enhanced uplink asynchronous hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) includes the following steps: (1) the network side adding a parameter of retransmission timer in the HARQ Profile of each dedicated media access control (MAC-d) entity flow in the user equipment, and the user equipment configures the value of the retransmission timer of the enhanced media access control entity (MAC-e) protocol data unit (PDU) according to the parameter of the retransmission timer; (2) the user equipment uses the value of the retransmission timer and the maximum number of retransmissions to control the retransmission. The radio bearer QoS delay requirement and the cooperation work between the sender and the receiver are implemented.06-09-2011
20120014318MULTIPLEXING DEMODULATION REFERENCE SIGNALS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Methods and apparatuses are provided for determining cyclic shift (CS) values and/or orthogonal cover codes (OCC) for a plurality of demodulation reference signals (DM-RS) transmitted over multiple layers in multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) communications. A CS index can be received from a base station in downlink control information (DCI) or similar signaling. Based at least in part on the CS index, CS values for the plurality of DM-RSs can be determined. In addition, OCC can be explicitly signaled or similarly determined from the CS index and/or a configured CS value received from a higher layer. In addition, controlling assignment of CS indices and/or OCC can facilitate providing orthogonality for communications from paired devices in multiuser MIMO.01-19-2012
20110292880APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR GATING TRANSMISSION OF A DATA RATE CONTROL CHANNEL IN AN HDR MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for communicating with a network by a terminal in a wireless communication system, wherein the terminal receives, from the network, signaling information representing a transmission period and a time offset for uplink transmission of a feedback information, and determines a time to transmit the feedback information based on the transmission period and the time offset. The terminal transmits the feedback information to the network based on the determined time.12-01-2011
20110292882METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TO A MOBILE DEVICE USING PLURAL ACCESS POINTS - A system and method for providing connectivity between mobile devices and access points of a network without redundant solicitation of communication by the mobile device at each access point is described. The method involves receiving a data packet at a first access point in a control group; transmitting the data packet from the first access point to the mobile device; determining if the mobile device acknowledges receipt of the data packet; responsive to determining that the mobile device failed to acknowledge receipt of the data packet, forwarding the data packet to a second access point; and transmitting the data packet from the second access point to the mobile device.12-01-2011
20110292874POWER HEADROOM REPORTING FOR MULTICARRIER LTE SYSTEMS - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided. The apparatus maintains at least one PHR trigger for triggering communication of a PHR for a plurality of component carriers. In addition, the apparatus communicates the PHR for at least one of the component carriers upon the at least one PHR trigger being triggered. The communicated PHR may be an aggregated PHR that includes power headroom information on the PCC and activated SCCs. The communicated PHR may further include an index associating information in the PHR to a corresponding component carrier. The communicated PHR may further include information indicating use of a PUSCH reference for computing the PHR for the at least one of the component carriers on which there is no PUSCH transmission.12-01-2011
20110292879PREFIX ALLOCATION METHOD, NETWORK SYSTEM, AND LOCAL MOBILITY ANCHOR - The present disclosure relates to the mobile communication field and discloses a prefix allocation method, a network system, and a Local Mobility Anchor (LMA). With the prefix allocation method, the network system and the LMA provided in the present disclosure, the problem that a shared prefix cannot be allocated to a multi-interface (IF) Mobile Node (MN) is solved. The prefix allocation method includes: receiving a registration request for a second IF of the MN from a Mobile Access Gateway (MAG); obtaining a first Home Network Prefix (HNP) that is already allocated to a first interface (IF) of the MN; and allocating the first HNP shared with the first IF to the second IF. The LMA obtains the first HNP that is already allocated to the first IF and allocates the first HNP to the second IF. In this way, a shared prefix is allocated to the multi-IF enabled MN.12-01-2011
20110292875APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PHYSICAL BROADCAST CHANNEL (PBCH) DECODING FOR MULTIPLE CELLS - A method of wireless communication includes generating a list of cells for physical broadcast channel (PBCH) decoding. The method also includes allocating memory for decoding and cancelling a subset of cells from the generated cell list. The method further includes storing information related to subsets of cells from the generated list in the allocated memory during different time periods. The allocated memory is sufficient for attempting, at each time period, decoding of each subset of cells and cancelling of decoded cells in each subset. The method further includes cycling through the generated cell list by processing each subset of the cell list during the different time periods.12-01-2011
20110292868Method and Apparatus for Increasing the Capacity and Coverage of a Multi-Sector, Omni Site - A base station unit of a multi-sector omni-radio base station sends different transmit signals to first and second splitters, via first and second feeders, respectively, according to transmit diversity, spatial multiplexing, or both. The first splitter splits the transmit signal sent thereto amongst sector antennas in a first set of sector antennas, and the second splitter splits the transmit signal sent thereto among sector antennas in a second set of sector antennas. These first and second sets provide coverage for some of the same sectors of a geographic area. Finally, first and second combiners combine signals received by the sector antennas in the first or second set, respectively, at least one of those signals having first been converted to a different frequency, and send the resulting composite signal to the base station unit, via the first or second feeder, respectively.12-01-2011
20110292873METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING BUFFER STATUS REPORTING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for handling buffer status reporting in a wireless communication system includes providing a first buffer size level table having a first maximum buffer size value, and providing a second buffer size level table having a second maximum buffer size value greater than the first maximum buffer size value. The method includes using the second buffer size level table when carrier aggregation (CA) is configured with more than one UL carrier component (CC) or when more than one UL CC is activated. To indicate whether to use the second buffer size level table or the first buffer size level table, an indication can be used in one of a Radio Resource Control (RRC) message, a Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element or a corresponding subheader of the MAC Control Element.12-01-2011
20110292872Method for Operating a Mobile Wireless Network - A method of operating a mobile wireless network is described to ensure proper function of protocol entities during the transmission of data units between two wireless stations of the mobile wireless network. In this case, user data is assembled by a first convergence protocol layer of the first wireless station into at least one first data unit, particularly a packet data unit, before transmission to a second convergence protocol layer of a second wireless station, particularly on the same protocol level, with the user data being supplied to the first convergence protocol layer by at least one user in a network layer. At least one protocol entity of the first convergence protocol layer is configured as a function of a configuration request received by the second wireless station, in order to form the at least one first data unit from the data received from the at least one user and to transmit it through a carrier to a link control layer.12-01-2011
20110292871Wireless Attachment To Multiple Radio Access Networks At The Same Time - Wireless communication within an area covered by multiple radio access networks may be accomplished where a user equipment (UE) is configured for first and second radio access networks. The UE attaches to the first radio access network, and, while maintaining the attachment to the first radio access network, also attaches to the second radio access network.12-01-2011
20110292870Utilizing Emergency Procedures to Determine Location Information of a Voice Over Internet Protocol Device - Described are methods and apparatuses, including computer program products for utilizing emergency procedures to determine location information for a Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) device. A wireless access gateway (WAG) determines location information of the VOIP device and stores the location information. A request for a location of the VOIP device from a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) is received by the WAG. The WAG translates the stored location information into a format used by the MSC to receive location information from a Radio Access Network (RAN). The WAG provides the translated location information to the MSC.12-01-2011
20110292869SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MONITORING AND CONTROL POWER - An improved system for power monitoring and control is an aftermarket method for improving power monitoring and control in end-user environments such as offices and homes. The disclosed is a wirelessly connected panel that monitors and/or controls power passed through a power interface and is intrinsically paired with that interface. The system uses an ultra low power panel that is associated with its power interface. The system can be detached and located at a distant remote location. The radio link is used to maintain control automatically paired with the power interface connection it is physically associated with. The panel and system use a hopping meshed radio network to insure full range of coverage within a building.12-01-2011
20110170494SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD OF FEMTOCELL BASE STATION AND FEMTOCELL BASE STATION USING THE SAME - The exemplary embodiment of the present invention provides a method of synchronizing a femtocell base station securing time synchronization of a femtocell base station by allowing the femtocell base station to transmit a symbol to a terminal belonging to the femtocell by performing the time synchronization with a preamble signal when the femtocell base station receives the preamble signal from the macrocell base station in an orthogonal frequency division multiple access (OFDMA) communication system in which a femtocell is present in a macrocell.07-14-2011
20090034452SYSTEM LEVEL INFORMATION FOR DISCONTINUOUS RECEPTION, CELL RESELECTION AND RACH - A wireless transmit/receive unit is configured to receive system level information, including discontinuous reception (DRX) information, cell selection information, and RACH information. The system level information is received as defined parameters assigned to system information blocks or signaled through dedicated RRC signaling.02-05-2009
20090296635METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BASE STATIONS AND THEIR PROVISIONING, MANAGEMENT, AND NETWORKING - In wireless system, a group of Base station (BTSs) with smaller footprints have the capability to communicate with each other as well as with the BTSs with relatively larger footprints via wireless air-interfaces. One of such example is coordinated cell systems. A coordinated cell system comprises a group of coordinated cell base stations that have the capability to communicate with each other as well as with relevant macro cell or Pico cell base stations via wireless air-interfaces. Each coordinated cell BTS consists of an over the air control unit in addition to the conventional coordinated cell BTS system. A set of protocols in the form of messages and database are also defined to enable the networking capability. This enables enhancement in performing a variety of tasks by coordinated cell systems, including interference management and coordination, registration and authentication, quality of service coordination, installation and maintenance, location services, etc.12-03-2009
20100142440WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication method and a wireless communication apparatus capable of efficiently improving communication throughput of a second wireless communication system while securing a capturing capability of informative information in a first wireless communication system are provided. A transmitting/receiving unit (06-10-2010
20130182649APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ACTIVATING A COMPONENT CARRIER IN A MULTIPLE COMPONENT CARRIER SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for activating a component carrier in a multiple component carrier system including the steps of: receiving component carrier setting information about a first uplink component carrier, which is connected with a first downlink component carrier corresponding to a secondary serving cell of a UE, from a base station; setting the first uplink component carrier on the basis of the component carrier setting information; and activating the initial state of the set first uplink component carrier according to the activation state of the first downlink component carrier. Accordingly, the ambiguity of the initial state of an uplink component carrier additionally set between the UE and the base station can be removed.07-18-2013
20110019619Method and Apparatus for Handling Physical Downlink Control Channel Orders in Wireless Communication System - A method for handling physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) orders in a user equipment (UE) of a wireless communication system is disclosed. The wireless communication system supports Carrier Aggregation, which enables the UE to perform transmission and/or reception through multiple carriers. The method includes steps of configuring a plurality of carriers, receiving a PDCCH order, and using a specific carrier within the plurality of carriers to trigger a random access procedure according to the PDCCH order.01-27-2011
20090290543Transmit and Receive Method for a Data Service - A method includes receiving a plurality of radio frequency (RF) channels in parallel at a receive site, and demodulating the RF channels using a plurality of demodulators of the receive site to generate a plurality of streams of packets, each stream of packets having a first address space. The method also includes combining the plurality of streams of packets at a tunneling destination of the receive site to generate a first stream of packets having a second address space.11-26-2009
20090262682Method and Apparatus for Transport of RANAP Messages over the Iuh Interface in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method covers communication from the user equipment to an access point or from the core network to a network controller. The method sends of a radio access network application part (RANAP) message by identifying the RANAP message with a first header and encapsulating that message with a second header. The method passes the encapsulated message to its destination using information from the second header.10-22-2009
20090103478METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PCDP DISCARD - A method and apparatus for discarding a packet data convergence protocol (PDCP) service data unit (SDU) are disclosed. A PDCP layer sets a timer and discards a PDCP SDU upon expiration of the timer. The timer may be set upon receiving the PDCP SDU from an upper layer or upon submitting the PDCP SDU to a lower layer for transmission. The timer and a radio link control (RLC) discard timer may be coordinated. Alternatively, the PDCP layer may discard the PDCP SDU based on a notification from an RLC layer or based on a PDCP status report.04-23-2009
20110299461WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE, PROGRAM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - There is provided a wireless communication device including a determination unit that determines a location region of the wireless communication device, a communication unit that wirelessly communicates with another wireless communication device, and a setting unit that sets a frequency in accordance with the location region of the wireless communication device determined by the determination unit to the communication unit. The determination unit determines a location region of the wireless communication device based on a plurality of pieces of location region information of the wireless communication device acquired by a plurality of different methods.12-08-2011
20090003268CLIENT RESOURCE RESERVATION IN ACCESS NETWORKS FOR ROAMING - A method, apparatus, and system are disclosed. In one embodiment, the method includes granting a mobile device access to a network. The method also includes maintaining the mobile device state information on a network access device that is broadcasting the network, when the mobile device leaves the network, and also maintaining the network state information on the mobile device, when the mobile device leaves the network. Additionally, the method includes restoring the mobile device access to the network using the mobile device state information and the network state information.01-01-2009
20090003263NETWORK FOR A CELLULAR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND A METHOD OF OPERATION THEREFOR - A network for a cellular communication system comprises access points (01-01-2009
20080310349MULTIPLE BINDINGS HAVING INDEPENDENT FORWARD AND REVERSE LINK BINDINGS FOR MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOLS - Methods, apparatus, systems and computer program products are defined that provide multiple bindings in a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP) network environment. The multiple bindings that are established are independent of one another, such that a forward link binding is decoupled from, or otherwise does not affect, a reverse link binding and vice versa. Multiple reverse link-only bindings may be established within an active route set for an access terminal. Additionally a single primary binding may be established that provides a forward link binding and reverse link binding. At any point in time, the access terminal may maintain only one primary binding.12-18-2008
20080310348Wireless Systems and Methods Including Cooperative Communication Medium Access Control - A complementary medium access control (CMAC) method and apparatus are described.12-18-2008
20080310346Communication protocol for a wireless mesh architecture - A wireless mesh communication protocol that dynamically assigns communication time-slots and frequencies to mesh nodes. A first node is established as a PC that sequentially polls other nodes. A second node responds at a predetermined time with information that includes database records, and then a third node responds similarly. The second node is then established as the PC and the first node is polled during dynamically allocated time-slots and on a frequency that depend on the second node's database records. The third node is then established as a PC and acts similarly. In both cases the first node responds by sending information and data records. The first node is then re-established as the PC. The first node then polls the second and third nodes at times and frequencies that depend on the first node's database records.12-18-2008
20080310343Methods of jointly assigning resources in a multi-carrier, multi-hop wireless communication system - Methods for jointly determining tones, power, scheduling and routing of links in a multi-carrier, multi-hop network to achieve certain desired throughput objectives between source and destination nodes. The methods effectively enhance or optimize throughput received by each destination router under node traffic constraints such as power, scheduling and flow constraints that apply to each link between each of a plurality of nodes within the mesh network.12-18-2008
20080310340Communication System, Communication Method, Communication Terminal Device, Control Method Thereof, and Program - The present invention proposes a highly reliable communication system and communication method, a communication terminal device used for the communication system, a control method thereof, and a program installed on the communication terminal device. In communication system and communication method, the communication terminal device used for the communication system, the control method thereof, and the program installed on the communication terminal device, a first communication terminal originates a first message. In response to the first message, a third communication terminal originates a second message. Based on these messages, the first through third communication terminals create routes to the first or third communication terminal. The first communication terminal transmits a route request composed of a request for a route used for communication with the third communication terminal. The second and third communication terminals create multiple routes to the first or third communication terminal. A communication route is established between the first and third communication terminals using a route that belongs to the created routes and satisfies the route request transmitted from the first communication terminal.12-18-2008
20090190532MOBILE COMMUNICATION DEVICE PROVIDING N-WAY COMMUNICATION THROUGH A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION SERVICES - A system and method, in a mobile communication device, providing N-way communication through a plurality of communication services. Various aspects of the present invention provide a mobile communication device comprising a user interface and at least one communication interface module adapted to perform a first communication with a first communication device through a first communication service and perform a second communication with a second communication device through a second communication service. At least one module may be adapted to receive outgoing information from the user interface and to receive first information from the first communication device through the first communication service. The at least one module may also combine at least the received outgoing information and the received first information and transmit such combined information to the second communication device through the second communication service.07-30-2009
20130182648SIGNALING METHOD, BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE TERMINAL APPARATUS AND RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - To provide a signaling method for enabling position information of muting resources to be signaled with a simplified configuration, base station apparatus and mobile terminal apparatus, the signaling method is characterized by having the steps of setting blank resources for a CSI-RS (Channel State Information-Reference Signal) that is a reference signal for downlink channel estimation, and transmitting a bitmap indicative of a position of the blank resources to a mobile terminal apparatus.07-18-2013
20090028094Information Communication Terminal, Radio Communication Apparatus and Radio Communication Network System Capable of Performing Communication Corresponding to Purpose - In an information communication terminal, a receiving unit receives a frame for notifying of network identification information for specifying a radio network from a different information communication terminal, and a filter unit checks a preset filter condition and mode information indicating a communication mode of the different information communication terminal in the frame received by the receiving unit, and abandons the received frame based on a result of the checking.01-29-2009
20080310351Preamble Formats for MIMO Wireless Communications - A method for generating a preamble of a frame for a multiple input multiple output (MIMO) wireless communication begins by, for each transmit antenna of the MIMO wireless communication, generating a carrier detect field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna, the carrier detect field is cyclically shifted. The method continues by, for a first grouping of the transmit antennas of the MIMO wireless communication: generating a first guard interval following the carrier detect field; and generating at least one channel sounding field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna in the first grouping, the at least one channel sounding field is cyclically shifted, and wherein the at least one channel sounding field follows the first guard interval. The method continues by, when the MIMO wireless communication includes more than the first grouping of the transmit antennas, for another grouping of the transmit antennas: generating at least one other channel sounding field, wherein, from transmit antenna to transmit antenna in the another grouping, the at least one other channel sounding field is cyclically shifted, and wherein the at least one other channel sounding field follows the at least one channel sounding field; and generating the first guard interval prior to the at least one other channel sounding field.12-18-2008
20100034146METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING MULTI-USER AND SINGLE-USER MIMO IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for supporting distributed multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) transmissions are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) determines channel estimates for multiple cells and reports the channel estimates. The UE thereafter receives a data transmission sent by the multiple cells to the UE based on the channel estimates. The data transmission may include at least one data stream, and each data stream may be sent by one cell or the multiple cells to the UE. In another design, a UE determines first and second channel estimates for first and second cells, respectively, and reports the channel estimates. The UE then receives a first data transmission sent by the first cell to the UE based on the first channel estimate. The UE also receives a second data transmission sent by the second cell to another UE and steered away from the UE based on the second channel estimate.02-11-2010
20100034147SYSTEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR FACILITATING BUFFER STATUS REPORT ROBUSTNESS - Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating buffer status report robustness are provided. A method can include: transmitting a buffer status report, tracking an amount of time elapsed since transmitting the buffer status report; and determining, after a selected amount of time has elapsed, whether authorization to transmit buffered data has been received. The method can also include re-transmitting the buffer status report if the selected amount of time has elapsed and a data condition has been met. In some embodiments, the data condition is that information indicative of the authorization has not been received. In some embodiments, the method also includes determining, after the selected amount of time has elapsed, whether data is buffered for transmission, and the data condition is that information indicative of the authorization has not been received, and a determination has been made that data is buffered for transmission.02-11-2010
20100034142METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ADJUSTING AN ON DURATION IN A DISCONTINUOUS RECEIVE TRANSMISSION MODE - A method and an apparatus that includes establishing a link (02-11-2010
20100034140METHOD FOR MAPPING SIGNALING INFORMATION TO ANNOUNCEMENT INFORMATION AND BROADCAST RECEIVER - A method of providing a Non-Real-Time (NRT) service includes receiving a file configuring the NRT service, first signaling information, and second signaling information in a state of being IP-packetized and contained in a single ensemble, configuring and displaying a service guide using the first signaling information acquired from the ensemble, acquiring a first content identifier of content selected from the displayed service guide, accessing a FLUTE session using the second signaling information acquired from the ensemble and acquiring a second content identifier matched with the first content identifier from the accessed FLUTE session, and receiving and storing at least one file configuring the content based on the acquired second content identifier.02-11-2010
20100034138Method and system for using dynamic throughput graphs for ensuring QoS in converged networks - Our invention is a method and system for a method of providing Quality of Service (QoS) over networks that do not provide any information and only serve to carry packets. Specifically, as Traffic traverses between various user networks via an opaque network, gateways at the edge of the user networks keep a record of the packets traversing into the opaque networks and packets traversing out of the opaque network. These gateways also know about the traffic classes that each of these packets belong to. The gateways at the ingress points (the user network where the packets originate) and the gateways at the egress points (the user network where the packets terminate) coordinate amongst themselves to exchange information about the number and latency of packets exchanged between the two. This information is used by the gateway at the ingress to estimate the state of the opaque network using dynamic throughput graphs. Admission control and02-11-2010
20100054190MOBILE IP ADDRESSING - A system and method are provided for mobile Internet Protocol (IP) addressing, in a multi-mode wireless communications access terminal (AT). The method provides an AT with an IP address (ATA), and a care-of-address (CoA) in each of a plurality of networks. In one aspect, the AT selects a first network for transmission, from the plurality of networks. The AT sends an IP packet to a correspondent node (CN) via a first mobile node (MN) external device. Regardless of the network selected, the AT is able to use the ATA as a source address. Sending the IP packet to the CN may include creating a tunnel between the first MN and the HA. The IP packet is sent to the HA using the first CoA as a tunnel source address, and the HA sends the IP packet to the CN using the ATA as the source address.03-04-2010
20100135216Method for transmitting packet data in communication system - A method and apparatus for a transmitter having a radio protocol with an upper layer and a lower layer therein used for management of full header packet transmission when transmitting data packets to a receiver are provided. If the upper layer receives from the lower layer, information of a successful transmission of a full header packet, the upper layer decides to stop sending any additional full header packet that contains the same full header as the previously successfully transmitted full header packet.06-03-2010
20090196229ACKNAK and CQI Channel Mapping Schemes in Wireless Networks - A transmission of information from a secondary to a primary node occurs in a plurality of N logical time durations. The transmission from the secondary to primary node in a wireless network is obtained using an orthogonal covering sequence and a second sequence. Embodiments of the present invention mitigate interference by calculating a first orthogonal covering (OC) index and a second OC index from an indicator received from a serving base station (NodeB). A first index n08-06-2009
20090196232METHOD AND APPARATUS TO EXCHANGE CHANNEL INFORMATION - A method and apparatus to exchange channel state information between two or more stations is provided, The channel state information may be used to adapt a power, a transmission rate and a modulation scheme of a transmitted signal. Other embodiments are described and claimed.08-06-2009
20090196224Base station and scheduling method used in base station - Disclosed in the present invention are base stations and scheduling methods used in base stations. The base station uses a multi-user multi-input and multi-output method, and is characterized in comprising: a storing means for storing codebook vector group information relevant to a combination of codebook vectors capable of being used as a pre-coding group, the codebook vector group information comprising an index of the combination of codebook vectors capable of being used as a pre-coding group; a pre-coding matrix element selecting means for selecting codebook vectors to be taken as elements of a pre-coding matrix; a pre-coding matrix index determining means for determining an index, to which a combination of the codebook vectors selected by the pre-coding matrix element selecting means corresponds, in accordance with the codebook vectors to be taken as elements of a pre-coding matrix as selected by the pre-coding matrix element selecting means and with reference to the codebook vector group information; and a pre-coding matrix index transmitting means for transmitting the index of the combination of the codebook vectors determined by the pre-coding matrix index determining means.08-06-2009
20090196222Method and apparatus for interfacing synchronous core network with asynchronous radio network - A method and apparatus for interfacing a synchronous core network with an asynchronous radio network in a next-generation mobile telecommunications system is disclosed. The method for mapping a message in order to interface a synchronous core network with an asynchronous radio network, the radio network having a base station (BS), the base station having a radio resource controller, a radio link controller, a medium access controller and a physical controller, the method comprising the steps of: a) selecting a function necessary to map a synchronous message to an asynchronous message; b) determining whether the synchronous message is to be transmitted to the mobile station or not; c) storing information necessary to map the synchronous message to the asynchronous message if the synchronous message is to transmitted to the mobile station, d) mapping parameters in the synchronous message to those in the asynchronous message, thereby generating the asynchronous message; e) discarding the message not to be transmitted to the mobile station after storing parameters included in the message not to be transmitted onto a predetermined device; and f) transmitting the asynchronous message to the radio resource controller.08-06-2009
20100014461System and Method for Creating Multiple Mobility Profiles per Subscriber in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for creating multiple mobility profiles per subscriber in wireless communications systems is provided. A method includes receiving a request for service from a terminal, sending a request for authorization of the terminal to a server, receiving, in response to the request for authorization, an indication that the terminal is authorized, and granting access to the terminal. The indication includes a mobility classification associated with the terminal. The mobility classification is based on the terminal's operating conditions.01-21-2010
20100014459METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING DATA SERVICES IN A MULTI-PROCESSOR COMPUTING ENVIRONMENT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate enhanced data service functionality for data services operating in a multi-processor computing environment. As described herein, respective processors and/or other components can be utilized to form a Smart Peripheral Subsystem (SPS). As further described herein, the SPS can operate in association with a modem processor and an application processor at a mobile computing device in order to reduce loading at the application processor and improve memory usage efficiency. In the case of a mobile computing device sharing a network connection with a tethered computing device, the SPS can couple a modem interface associated with the mobile computing device and an interface through which the disparate computing device is tethered to the mobile computing device such that operations such as Layer 2 (L2) framing and/or de-framing, Network Address Translation (NAT), or the like can be offloaded to the SPS under various circumstances.01-21-2010
20100034145METHOD FOR RECEIVING PACKET IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a method of receiving a packet in a mobile communication system. According to a type of service provided in the present invention and activity of packet service, a mobile station operates in an operation level among DRX (discontinuous reception) operation levels that are based on operation parameters of different values and receives a packet. This results in performing efficient power consumption such that it is possible to minimize power consumption.02-11-2010
20100034144Wireless Communication Apparatus and Control Method Thereof - A wireless communication apparatus capable of using a plurality of different wireless communication systems includes a receiving unit (02-11-2010
20100034143INTER-CHANNEL COMMUNICATION METHODS IN MULTI-CHANNEL WIRELESS NETWORKS - A network information apparatus (02-11-2010
20100034139Scheduling Grant Information Signaling in Wireless Communication System - A wireless communication infrastructure entity including a transceiver coupled to a controller configured to generate parity bits based on scheduling grant information and to encode the parity bits based on additional scheduling grant information not used to generate the parity bits, wherein the encoded parity bits combined with the scheduling grant information. The additional scheduling grant information may be transport block size or redundancy version information.02-11-2010
20130182647SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF UNCOMPRESSED VIDEO HAVING BEACON DESIGN - A system and method for efficiently communicating messages over a low-rate channel between multiple devices in a system for wireless communication of uncompressed video is disclosed. The method includes various control bits in a beacon control field of a beacon frame to improve the efficiency of the beacon processing, thereby reducing beacon processing time and size of the beacon frame itself. The transmitting device can use one or more of the various control bits to indicate whether there are changes in various MAC payload information fields. The receiving station can use one or more of the control bits to eliminate the need to parse one or more MAC payload information fields whose values have not changed from the previous beacon frame.07-18-2013
20130182646WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system including a transmitting and receiving device that performs communications with the transmitting device, using a radio frame containing control information and data, wherein the transmitting device includes: a first generating unit that generates first control information able to be estimated by the receiving device; a second generating unit that generates second control information used for control of communication from the receiving device to the transmitting device and unable to be estimated by the receiving device; a multiplexing unit that multiplexes the control and data information so that the first control information is allocated in the control information and the second control information is allocated in the data in the radio frame; a transmitting unit a signal multiplexed by the multiplexing unit; the receiving device includes a receiving unit that receives the signal wherein the second control information is allocated in the data from the transmitting device.07-18-2013
20090296630Packet radio network and method - A packet radio network provides a facility for communicating internet packets to and/or from a mobile user equipment. The packet radio network comprises a gateway support node, a serving support node and a radio network part. The gateway support node is operable to provide a packet data protocol context for controlling the communication of the internet packets to and/or from the packet radio network from and/or to the mobile user equipment via a packet communications bearer. The serving support node is connected to the gateway support node and is operable to control communications of the internet packets to and from the gateway support node to and/or from mobile user equipment to form the packet communications bearer. The radio network part is operable to provide a radio access bearer for communicating the internet packets via a radio access interface to and/or from the mobile user equipment. In response to a packet data protocol activation request message requesting a common packet data protocol context, the serving support node is operable in combination with the gateway support node to establish a common packet data protocol context in association with a packet communications bearer. The common packet data protocol context is established to communicate internet protocol packets via the packet communications bearer according to an internet protocol version specified by the mobile user equipment for one or more communications sessions. The common packet data protocol context therefore provides more flexibility, because a mobile user equipment can send both IPv4 internet packets and IPv6 internet packets as specified by the mobile user equipment. Furthermore a packet radio network according to example embodiments is provided with an arrangement for sharing the same GPRS/UMTS session, using a common packet communications bearer including the high-speed broadband radio bearers.12-03-2009
20120236790METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REAL TIME CONTROL OF AN ACTIVE ANTENNA OVER A DISTRIBUTED ANTENNA SYSTEM - A method and system suitable for supporting wireless medical telemetry services (WMTS) on a Distributed Antenna System (DAS). A DAS can provide wireless services including voice and data services using the same equipment. WMTS systems can include one or more active antenna units controlled by the MTS access point. The DAS includes control channels for transferring the MTS control and status information between the MTS access point and the antenna. The control channels can be transferred over a separate cable, or transferred using one or more intermediate frequency signals transferred over existing cables DAS between the MTS access point and the antenna. The control channels can be used to configure and control and receive status from the managed components of the DAS including active antennas, control the amplifiers used to process TDD signals, and control the switching of the diversity antenna systems.09-20-2012
20120236788METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ACCESSING STORAGE DEVICES - An approach for enabling wireless communication devices to mount and/or unmount one or more storage devices to facilitate data sharing is described. A processor of a user device generates a request message according to a storage access protocol that is operating system agnostic. The processor then initiates transmission of the request message over a wireless link of an ad-hoc network to a system that includes one or more storage devices, wherein the request message requests storage device information relating to the one or more storage devices.09-20-2012
20090092081DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ACCESS POINT ACQUISITION - Providing for distributed access point management for access to a mobile network is described herein. By way of example, an interface application maintained at a Femto cell base station (BS) can facilitate initial power up and/or acquisition for a Femto user terminal (UT). Upon start-up, a bootstrap process is utilized by the Femto cell to provision the UT with an SDL establishing at least one BS as high priority within a particular geographic area (GEO). Thus, when the Femto UT is within the GEO, the UT is more likely to acquire, camp on and/or handoff to the preferred BS. When outside the GEO, a serving access point can provision the Femto UT OTA with a custom SDL suited to another GEO having a different high priority access point. By implementing access point management at distributed access points, expensive network equipment can be mitigated or avoided.04-09-2009
20090274095MOBILE WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - A mobile wireless communication system includes: a wireless base station that controls, for each timing, a transmission state of a radio wave repeatedly transmitted at timings that respectively differ; and a plurality of wireless mobile devices that are respectively allocated one of the timings, receive the radio wave at the timing allocated, and based on the radio wave received, respectively detect a connection destination. The wireless base station controls the transmission state of the radio wave transmitted at an arbitrary timing to be any one of a complete suspension state of continuously suspending transmission, a discontinuous suspension state of discontinuously suspending transmission, and an invalid information transmission state of transmitting invalid information.11-05-2009
20110268041LINK ADAPTATION AND ANTENNA SELECTION IN COOPERATIVE MULTIPLE ACCESS SYSTEMS - Embodiments of the present invention provide techniques for applying link adaptation and antenna selection in cooperative multiple access systems where multiple user devices act cooperatively to communicate with a network access station through a MIMO channel.11-03-2011
20130182645SYSTEM AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTENT FROM A MOBILE DEVICE TO A WIRELESS DISPLAY - A method of transmitting content to a wireless display device is disclosed. The method may include receiving multimedia data, encoding the multimedia data, and writing encoded multimedia data into a first predetermined memory location of a shared memory. Further, the method may include encapsulating the encoded multimedia data and writing encapsulation data into a second predetermined memory location of the shared memory. The method may also include calculating error control encoding and writing the error control encoding into a third predetermined memory location of the shared memory. Further, the method may include transmitting the encoded multimedia data, the encapsulation data, and the error control encoding to the wireless display device.07-18-2013
20110261754METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SWITCHING TRAFFIC STREAMS AMONG MULTIPLE FREQUENCY BANDS - Devices, systems and methods may provide control of traffic streams before transition to another frequency band, during a transition and after a transition is completed and the devices are active in the other frequency band or in multiple frequency bands. The provided solution cover the transparent mode when the devices have the same Medium Access Control (MAC) addresses in both frequency bands and the non-transparent mode when at least one of the communicating devices has different MAC addresses in the different frequency bands.10-27-2011
20110261761EXTENDED CALL HANDLING FUNCTIONALITY USING MULTI-NETWORK SIMULCASTING - A method and apparatus supporting the handling of calls using simulcasting of multimedia information via a broadband access gateway are disclosed. A broadband access gateway supporting both a personal area network and a broadband network may receive multimedia information simultaneously exchanged by an associated access device via a wide area network. The broadband access gateway may store the received multimedia information locally, within the broadband access gateway, or may communicate the multimedia information to storage accessible from the broadband access gateway. The broadband access gateway may cause a user of the access device to be notified of the availability of multimedia information for a recorded call, and may communicate the multimedia information to the access device for playback. A user may be notified if storage and bandwidth for the recording of a call is not available.10-27-2011
20130182644CONTROL METHOD AND DEVICE BASED ON MULTIPLE PRIORITIES IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A wireless communication system is disclosed. More particularly, a control method and device based on multiple priorities in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method of controlling a back-off timer in a terminal configured with multiple priorities, which includes transmitting a first non-access stratum (NAS) request message set to a first priority level, starting the back-off timer configured by a network, and transmitting a second NAS request message, which is not set to the first priority level, while the back-off timer runs.07-18-2013
20100091702Cell search based on beacon in a wireless communication system - Techniques for transmitting beacon signals to assist user equipments (UEs) perform cell search and techniques for detecting for beacon signals are described. In an aspect, cells may be assigned beacon patterns defined based on orthogonal grouping of subcarriers. U subcarriers usable for beacon may be arranged into G orthogonal groups, with each group including S subcarriers. different beacon patterns may be defined based on the G groups of S subcarriers. In another aspect, the cells may transmit their beacon signals at configurable transmit power levels, which may be determined based on target beacon detection performance. In yet another aspect, a UE may perform overlapping DFTs in order to capture more received power when symbol timing at the UE is not aligned with symbol timing of cells being detected. In yet another aspect, the UE may perform beacon detection with maximal likelihood decoding.04-15-2010
20100091703BINDING UPDATE METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL, HOME AGENT, AND BINDING UPDATE SYSTEM - Disclosed in a technique for providing a binding update method and the like capable of resolving such a situation that a BA message keeps reciprocating between HAs. According to the technique, there is provided a binding update method, in which a mobile terminal transmits, to a home agent of the mobile terminal, a first message containing an address that is the destination to that the home agent forwards, and the home agent of the mobile terminal updates, based on the first message, a cache in which a home address of the mobile terminal is associated with an address that is the destination to that the home agent forwards, and transmits a second message as a reply to the first message to the mobile terminal, wherein when receiving the second message, the mobile terminal transmits, to the home agent of the mobile terminal, a third message notifying that the second message has been received, and after receiving the third message, the home agent of the mobile terminal updates the cache.04-15-2010
20100091705METHOD AND DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING TCP DATA OVER ASYMMETRIC LINKS - In a method and device the TCP load offered in the uplink is manipulated such that an offered load asymmetry is achieved. Using such an arrangement it is possible to compensate for a link asymmetry when uplink and downlink connections are sharing the same uplink buffer in order to increase performance of the downlink. The method and device are capable of increasing the download performance both in the case when TCP connections are terminated in a different device than the terminal where the link layer is terminated, as well as when the TCP connections are terminated in the same device as the link-layer.04-15-2010
20100091707METHOD FOR ROUTE OPTIMIZATION BETWEEN MOBILE ENTITIES - A communication network (04-15-2010
20100091709METHOD FOR PROCESSING RADIO PROTOCOL IN MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM AND TRANSMITTER OF MOBILE TELECOMMUNICATIONS - An apparatus and method for performing procedures (protocols) of a PDCP (Packet Data Convergence Protocol) layer and an RLC (Radio layer in an E-UMTS (Evolved Universal Mobile Telecommunications System) which has evolved from UMTS, among radio protocols of a mobile communication system. The PDCP layer performs ciphering on data (i.e., PDCP SDU) received from an upper layer, generates an indicator discriminating ciphered data and non-ciphered data (i.e., an ROHC feedback packet directly generated by the PDCP layer), and transmits the same to a lower layer (i.e., MAC layer). A PDCP SN (Sequence Number) is defined as an algorithm for ciphering the data in the PDCP layer to perform ciphering in the PDCP layer.04-15-2010
20090046634QOS SERVER IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A QoS server comprises a receiving unit that receives a QoS setting request for the communication flow of a mobile terminal; and a transmitting unit that simultaneously transmits a QoS setting instruction based on the QoS setting request to both of a wireless system mobile management node that accommodates the mobile terminal and a core network mobile management node that manages the wireless access system mobile management node.02-19-2009
20100091710METHOD OF PROVIDING IP MOBILITY USING SCTP SIGNALING IN 3GPP BASED NEXT GENERATION MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Provided is a method of providing IP mobility using SCTP (Stream Control Transmission Protocol) signaling in a 3GPP (304-15-2010
20100091714ACCESS POINT MULTI-LEVEL TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL SUPPORTING PERIODIC HIGH POWER LEVEL TRANSMISSIONS - A wireless access point selects its own transmission power for different types of the transmissions. The access point transmits to client devices at reduced power levels, however, periodic beacons and other selected non-beacon transmissions can be transmitted at a high power level to facilitate association by other client devices04-15-2010
20090316623METHODS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS AND MOBILE ROUTERS FOR ROUTING DATA PACKETS FROM A MOVING NETWORK TO A HOME NETWORK OF THE MOVING NETWORK - The present invention aims at making it possible for a data packet originating from a mobile network node (12-24-2009
20100272018WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION APPARATUS - The present invention pertains to the technology for avoiding interference between adjacent frequencies occurring on cell boundaries or sector boundaries in a mobile wireless communication system using an OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) scheme. There are a single sector mode of no collaboration between sectors; a sector selection mode of collaborating between sectors to transmit with a specified frequency resource from only one sector, and a collaboration mode of collaborating between sectors to transmit signals from both sectors. Any of the three modes is selected on the basis of measurement results of RSRP (Reference Signal Received Power) reported from a mobile station.10-28-2010
20090154393DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A data transmission method suitable for a communication system is provided. The communication system includes a plurality of first stations which uses an 802.11 protocol and a plurality of second stations which uses an 802.11e protocol and supports Quality of Service (QoS). The data transmission method includes following steps. One of the second stations is used as a Contention AssisTance (CAT) station to obtain a medium access right with a first access category (AC). The second station broadcasts a CAT packet to all the first stations and the other second stations. The other second stations stop contending for the medium access right for a first predetermined time according to the CAT packet, and the first stations transmit a packet with a QoS requirement according to the CAT packet.06-18-2009
20090073924METHOD OF DISCOVERING AN AD-HOC ON-DEMAND DISTANCE VECTOR ROUTE HAVING AT LEAST A MINIMUM SET OF AVAILABLE RESOURCES IN A DISTRIBUTED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - In a wireless communication network (03-19-2009
20100074176MESHED NETWORKING OF ACCESS POINTS IN A UTILITY NETWORK - A meshed networking of access points in a utility network provides a more efficient and cost effective arrangement for communicating data between meters and the utility by linking the access points of multiple subnetworks for purposes of communicating with the utility. As a result, each individual subnetwork is not required to directly communicate with the utility. For those access points that are relieved of the need to directly communicate with the utility, the communication mechanism, e.g., cellular modem, can be eliminated, or deactivated, to thereby reduce capital expenditures and/or operational costs. Additionally, links to a WAN can be selectively activated or disabled to provision bandwidth, for example, on demand, to react to changing conditions in the subnetworks.03-25-2010
20090168696METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR ESTABLISHING A COMMUNICATION SESSION FOR MULTIMEDIA - A method and arrangement for establishing a packet-switched multimedia session for a mobile terminal (A) in communication with another party (B), wherein a primary PDP (Packet Data Protocol) context has been activated in a mobile network for the mobile terminal. Information on the forthcoming session is received which has been negotiated and agreed between the communicating parties. It is then determined whether any network resources providing a required QoS are needed for the session, and whether a secondary PDP context is to be activated for the mobile terminal and the forthcoming session. If network resources are needed and a secondary PDP context is to be activated, the activation of said secondary PDP context is triggered.07-02-2009
20090168701MULTI-ACCESS TERMINAL WITH CAPABILITY FOR SIMULTANEOUS CONNECTIVITY TO MULTIPLE COMMUNICATION CHANNELS - An apparatus is disclosed for permitting a mobile terminal having multiple, heterogeneous network connections (e.g., multiple wired or wireless transceivers of various types) to set up and maintain virtual connections over multiple networks to either the same or to multiple destinations. The mobile terminal can “load-share” traffic, i.e., it can distribute segments of traffic over a full set of heterogeneous networks, significantly improving the reliability and availability of communications. In a first embodiment, a mobile terminal is configured with multiple radio frequency (RF) transceivers. Operating system software is provided for dynamically establishing and maintaining traffic flow for user applications over multiple communications paths, and for automatically adapting to variations in the networking environment, application traffic flow requirements, end user preferences, or mobility. In a second embodiment, a software-defined radio is used to implement the physical layer protocols for each desired network, eliminating the need for multiple transceivers.07-02-2009
20090168694Breakout connection apparatus, system, and method - A system includes a local mobile network and user equipment, where the user equipment is configured to detect a local network identity of a local mobile network, determine whether a selected condition involving the local network identity is satisfied, and indicate whether a breakout connection is appropriate based on whether the selected condition is satisfied. The breakout connection is appropriate when the selected condition is unsatisfied. A non-breakout connection is appropriate regardless of whether the selected condition is satisfied or unsatisfied In some embodiments, the selected condition is satisfied when the local network identity corresponds to a network identity of a home public land mobile network or an equivalent home public land mobile network.07-02-2009
20090168693TECHNIQUES FOR THE OPERATION OF MULTIPLE CLASSES OF DEVICES IN A WIRELESS PERSONAL AREA NETWORK - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method, comprising communicating and coexisting in a wireless personal area network (WPAN) by a at least one device operating as an advanced device (AD) and at least one device operating as a simple device (SD) by using the at least one AD as a proxy for the at least one SD to control the communication of the at least one SD.07-02-2009
20090147731Enhancement of Path Quality of Service in Multi-Hop Packet Communication Networks - Techniques and systems for enhancing quality of service (QoS) in communication networks, including wired and wireless communication networks. Implementations of described techniques and systems can be used to provide path-based QoS with distributed per-hop scheduling for carrying traffic over a multi-hop packet communication network.06-11-2009
20090147729METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING OPEN STATE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for processing Open state is provided, the method comprising receiving a Control Channel and a Forward Traffic Channel, requesting a MultipleInputMultipleOutput(MIMO) mode on the Forward Traffic Channel by sending a MIMORequest message, monitoring overhead messages and determining if the access terminal receives a ConnectionClose messages.06-11-2009
20100272025METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR PROCESSING CIRCUIT SWITCHED SERVICES IN AN EVOLVED PACKET NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method, system and device for processing circuit switched (CS) services in an evolved packet network. The method includes: by a mobility management entity (MME), receiving a mobile terminated (MT) service indication from a mobile switching center (MSC); sending the MT service indication to user equipment (UE); and receiving an MT service response returned by the UE and performing subsequent operations according to the MT service response. In the method of the present invention, when an MT service arrives, the MME does not trigger the evolved NodeB (eNodeB) to hand over the packet switched (PS) services of the UE but notifies the UE of the MT service and performs subsequent operations according to the MT service response returned by the UE, thus avoiding the waste of network resources caused by a meaningless handover of PS services.10-28-2010
20090310539ESTABLISHING A SESSION IN A PACKET SWITCHED WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A packet-switched wireless communications network includes a mobile station and a radio network controller that are able to establish a radio connection therebetween. Messages are exchanges over one or more traffic channels to establish a packet-switched services session between the mobile station and the radio network controller. The radio connection is not closed until all messages for establishing the packet-switched services session have been exchanged between the mobile station and the radio network controller.12-17-2009
20100118789COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND INDIVIDUAL CONTROL INFORMATION TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION METHOD - A communication system that transmits individual control information to a plurality of respective user terminals using a shared control channel, wherein when transmitting individual control information and prescribed control information to the user terminals, a base station device divides user terminals into groups according to the contents of the prescribed control information for the respective user terminals, arranges the individual control information for each user terminal in a specified group order, creates number-in-group information wherein the number of user terminals belonging to each group is arranged in the group order, and transmits the number-in-group information together with the individual control information for each user terminal in the group order.05-13-2010
20100097992NETWORK CONTROLLED OVERHEAD REDUCTION OF DATA PACKETS BY ROUTE OPTIMIZATION PROCEDURE - The invention relates to a method for reducing the header size of data packets exchanged between a Mobile Node (MN) and a gateway that is located between the MN and a Corresponding Node (CN). Different sort of headers are utilized between the MN and the gateway, and between the gateway and the CN. The sort of header, obtained by an optimizing procedure, allows to reduce the header size of exchanged packets on said data path section. To achieve this, a modified route optimization (RO) process is performed between the MN and the gateway, wherein the gateway acts on behalf of the CN. After completing the first RO process, the MN initiates and performs a second RO process with the gateway acting as CN. After completing both route optimization processes, data packet transmission is performed between the CN and the gateway after switching from IPsec tunnel mode to IPsec transport mode.04-22-2010
20130182643METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSITIONS OF BROADCAST DASH SERVICE RECEPTIONS BETWEEN UNICAST AND BROADCAST - Techniques are provided for receiving one or more representations of content wirelessly. The method may involve receiving a media presentation description (MPD) that includes parameters for reception of data segments for multiple representations of content via broadcast transmission and unicast transmission. The method may involve determining whether the broadcast transmission or the unicast transmission is appropriate for reception of the data segments, and selecting a given representation from among the multiple representations of the content based on a criteria of the mobile entity. The method may involve receiving the data segments for the given representation based at least in part on the parameters for the determined one of the broadcast transmission and the unicast transmission.07-18-2013
20100124190METHOD FOR OPERATING A WIRELESS INTERCONNECTED DATA NETWORK WITH A PLURALITY OF NETWORK NODES, AND NETWORK NODES - A method is described for operating a wireless interconnected data network with a plurality of network nodes (MP05-20-2010
20100124192SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR ENABLING RADIO OPERATIONS ON A WIRELESS COMPUTING DEVICE - Embodiments of the invention provide for a wireless computing device that comprises a set of one or more radio components to transmit and receive wireless communications on the device. Additionally, the wireless computing device includes processing and memory resources that individually or in combination provide multiple wireless applications, a radio object, and an arbitration component. The multiple wireless applications are each capable of generating a user-interface for enabling user-input in connection with wireless activities performed with that wireless application. The radio object interfaces the multiple applications with the set of one or more radio components. The arbitration component is configured to arbitrate at least one of (i) requests made by each of the wireless applications to the radio object for access to one or more of the radio components in the set, or (ii) responses from the radio object to requests made by each of the wireless applications.05-20-2010
20090190523Router unit, server unit and home agent function transfer control method - An HA function can be stopped and restarted without having an influence on MN performing registration and other nodes.07-30-2009
20130182642COMMUNICATION TRANSMISSION METHODS AND SYSTEMS - Communication transmission methods and systems are provided. Firstly, a base station broadcasts a message to a user equipment, wherein the message includes a priority threshold value. Then, the user equipment compares a priority value of the user equipment with the priority threshold value. Then, an initiation of an access procedure of the user equipment is disabled when the priority value of the user equipment is below the priority threshold value.07-18-2013
20090028093METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING DATA WITH TRANSFER OBLIGATION DELEGATED IN WSN - A method for transmitting/receiving data with transfer obligation delegated in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) reduces the time and power spent by a transmitting apparatus to wait for acknowledgment that a data transfer was successful. The method for transmitting data from a transmitting end to a receiving end through a set transfer route by multiple data transmit/receive apparatuses provided in a Wireless Sensor Network (WSN), typically includes the steps of: performing temporary storage of data to be transmitted on receiving a request to transmit data; requesting a data transmit/receive apparatus, existing on a next route, to transmit data while transmitting data to a data transmit/receive apparatus which is set as a transfer route; and confirming the delivery of the data to the data transmit/receive apparatus set as the transfer route, and then deleting the temporarily stored data frame.01-29-2009
20110170493METHOD FOR SEARCHING PILOT SIGNALS TO SYNCHRONIZE A CDMA RECEIVER WITH AN ASSOCIATED TRANSMITTER - A method for synchronizing a CDMA receiver to a transmitter when an adaptive antenna is utilized to receive transmitted data, wherein a receiving antenna system is adapted between a 360° reception angle pattern (i.e., an omni-directional pattern) and a fixed reception angle (i.e., a directional pattern) by permitting the receiver to identify a pilot signal having the largest magnitude. The receiver minimizes interference from other pilot signals by steering antenna pattern nulls toward other transmitters. As a result, the time required for the receiver to acquire a valid pilot signal is significantly reduced.07-14-2011
20100128674Method of Responding DeletePersonalityRequest Message in Ultra Mobile Broadband - A method of responding a Delete Personality Request message in Ultra Mobile Broadband is disclosed. The Delete Personality Request message is sent to the access terminal by the access network through an air interface in Ultra Mobile Broadband. When the access network requests to delete one or more personalities, the access terminal sends a Delete Personality Accept message to the access network with the following information: Message ID, Transaction ID, Personality Count and Personality Index, wherein, Personality Count is determined by the access terminal according to the number of the personalities which the access terminal agrees to delete, and the information of Personality Index is one or more personalities that the access terminal agrees to delete. Compared with the prior art, the present invention enhances the personality management mechanism in the UMB system and saves the signaling interaction overhead of the air interface and the air interface resource.05-27-2010
20100128673Communication Control Method, Communication System, Communication Control Apparatus and Wireless Base Station - A communication control method for a communication system including a plurality of wireless base stations 05-27-2010
20110170483BASE STATION APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A base station apparatus includes a measurement gap assignment unit configured to assign a user equipment a measurement gap for measuring received quality for a frequency different from a frequency assigned to the user equipment and a DRX duration assignment unit configured to assign a DRX controlled user equipment a DRX duration. The measurement gap assignment unit sets the measurement gap to except the DRX duration and a duration for retransmitting a downlink signal.07-14-2011
20130182641System and Method for Distance-Dependent Data Exchange Between Wireless Communication Devices - In one embodiment, a method includes identifying a plurality of data types; identifying a plurality of communication ranges for data transmission, wherein a first communication range of the plurality of communication ranges is less than a second communication range of the plurality of communication ranges, and wherein the first communication range corresponds to a first data type of the plurality of data types and the second communication range corresponds to a second data type of the plurality of data types; transmitting data in the first data type to a first wireless communication device located within the first communication range; and transmitting data in the second data type to a second wireless communication device located within the second communication range.07-18-2013
20130182640FEEDBACK METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HEADER COMPRESSION FEEDBACK INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a feedback method and device for header compression feedback information: After RN is introduced in LTE-A system, user data transmitted at Un interface possesses a complex header structure with nesting double-IP containing GTP. Through application of the technical solution put forward by the embodiments of the present invention, different types of header compression feedback information carried in control PDU can be analyzed and processed with corresponding strategies according to the information in control PDU, thus effectively realizing separate compression and feedback for double headers and improving data transmission efficiency at Un interface.07-18-2013
20100118787RADIO BASE STATION AND MOBILE STATION - An error detection coding processing section of the radio base station performs an error detection coding process with data including both first control data to be used for receiving a downlink signal and second control data to be used for sending an uplink signal as a unit. A sending section sends data on which the error detection coding process has been performed by the error detection coding processing section to the mobile station.05-13-2010
20100118784Recommending a Transmission Mode for a MIMO-Supporting UE - The present invention relates to methods, a network controller unit (05-13-2010
20090323591Receiving Apparatus, Receiving Method and Wireless Communication System - A receiving apparatus is provided which includes a receiving unit to receive a radio signal, a transfer function estimation unit to estimate a transfer function of a communication path of the radio signal, and a cross-correlation calculation unit to calculate cross-correlation between a synchronous signal contained in a radio signal received by the receiving unit and a known synchronous signal multiplied by the transfer function estimated by the transfer function estimation unit.12-31-2009
20100118792DUAL MAC ARBITRATION - A network appliance includes a first media access controller with a first transmit queue storing one or more data packets to be transmitted to a first wireless device. A second media access controller includes a second transmit queue storing one or more data packets to be transmitted to a second wireless device. A baseband processor communicates with the first and the second media access controllers. An arbitration module arbitrates access of the first and second media access controllers to the baseband processor based on whether the first and second transmit queues have data packets to be transmitted to the first and second wireless devices, respectively. When both have data packets to be transmitted, the arbitration module instructs the first or second media access controller to flush any data packets stored in the first or second transmit queue so that transmission of a flushed data packet can be re-tried.05-13-2010
20100118778Improvements in Mobile Technology - Apparatus for enabling interworking of CS (Circuit Switched) video calls with video calls using IP multimedia protocols, comprising: a MGW (05-13-2010
20110261753ENABLING IPv6 MOBILITY WITH SENSING FEATURES FOR AD-HOC NETWORKS DERIVED FROM LONG TERM EVOLUTION NETWORKS - A wireless communication device includes a plurality of different wireless interfaces to facilitate communications with a remote device over a corresponding plurality of networks. The device can switch between the different interfaces to migrate an on-going communications session from one that requires the infrastructure of a fixed wireless communication network to one that does not require the infrastructure of a fixed wireless communication network. Switching between the various interfaces allows the migration to occur while protecting the device against malicious third-party impersonation attacks.10-27-2011
20090310538METHOD FOR CONSTRUCTING DATA FORMAT IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION AND TERMINAL THEREOF - A method for transmitting downlink data to a mobile terminal is disclosed. The mobile terminal receives a particular common H-RNTI (HS-DSCH Radio Network Identifier) via an HS-SCCH (High Speed-Shared Control Channel) associated with an HS-DSCH (High Speed-Downlink Shared Channel), recognizes whether a header of a MAC (Medium Access Control) PDU (Packet Data Unit) transmitted by the HS-DSCH includes a terminal-exclusive identifier, acquires the terminal-exclusive identifier, and processes the MAC PDU as its own if the acquired terminal-exclusive identifier is intended for the terminal itself.12-17-2009
20100124193SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTING WIRELESS NETWORK ACCESS PARAMETERS - A system and method are provided for distributing wireless network access parameters in a multi-mode communications user terminal (UT). The method includes: establishing a link between a UT and a first communications network (i.e., a cellular network); accessing a parameters server via the first network; downloading access parameters for a wireless, second communications network (i.e., a Wireless Local Area Network); and, using the downloaded access parameters to establish a wireless link between the UT and the second communications network. The downloaded access parameters may include information such as a security key, Service Set IDentifier (SSID), traffic channel allocation, and optimization parameters including transmit power, quality of service (QoS) settings, and operational mode. Alternately, the database may cross-reference UT ID to parameters such as QoS, IP address, gateway information, subnet mask, Domain Name Server (DNS) information, or geographical location.05-20-2010
20100124189METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS AND CONRREPONDING RECEPTION METHOD - In order to guarantee a quality of service, the method, implemented in a first station, each first packet being transmitted by said first station intended for at least two second stations, the said second stations belonging to a set comprising several second stations, comprises: 05-20-2010
20100027474Packet Communication Device - A technique is disclosed, according to which a mobile node detects generation of redundant route optimization messages to an address owned by a node, which already recognizes and comprehends binding with a care-of address and a home address of the mobile node. According to this technique, a CN (correspondent node) 02-04-2010
20100027472INTERNET PHONE COMMUNICATION METHOD AND SYSTEM THEREOF - An Internet phone communication method includes selecting a destination media access control address from a phone book, transmitting the destination media access control address to an address server having at least one valid media access control address stored therein, checking whether the destination media access control address matches the valid media access control address, communicating with a receiver having the destination media access control address or the valid media access control address via a wireless network system other than a cellular network system when the destination media access control address matches the valid media access control address. An Internet phone communication system is also disclosed herein.02-04-2010
20080259843Method and Apparatus for User Equipment for Long Term Evolution Multimedia Broadcast Multicast Services - A user equipment is provided that includes a processor programmed responsive to receiving a point-to-multipoint (PTM) broadcast of a service at a low quality, to request a point-to-point (PTP) communication from the network. A method is provided for user equipment to receive a service. The method includes receiving a point-to-multipoint (PTM) broadcast of a service from a network, and attempting to obtain an improved quality of the service by requesting from the network a point-to-point (PTP) communication of the service10-23-2008
20110149851Enhanced E911 location information using voice over internet protocol (VoIP) - An E-9-1-1 voice-over-IP (VoIP) solution is provided wherein a 911 call from a wireless VoIP device is routed directly to the correct Public Safety Answer Point (PSAP) via dedicated trunks, together with correct location information and call-back number. VoIP gateways are implemented locally, at least one per LATA, and accept VoIP packetized data inbound, and convert it to standard wireline voice calls. Calls are routed to an IP address at the VoIP gateway, which then egresses the call to a voice port at a selective router. Dedicated voice trunks (CAMA, SS7, FG-D) are installed between each local VoIP gateway and appropriate selective routers. An Automatic Location Identification (ALI) database is provisioned with ESRKs dedicated for VoIP use. TCP/IP circuits may be established between some or all of the various local VoIP gateways.06-23-2011
20090316630RADIO COMMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A mobile station device transmits a random access preamble to a base station device and performs uplink timing alignment based on the synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response which the base station device transmits in response to the transmitted random access preamble, wherein in an uplink synchronous status, the mobile station device does not perform uplink timing alignment based on synchronization timing deviation information included in a random access response, which is a response to a random access preamble whose preamble ID is randomly selected by the mobile station device.12-24-2009
20100080172PROXY MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL (PMIP) IN A MULTI-INTERFACE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT - A communication entity (such as a User Equipment (UE), an Access Gateway (AGW), a Packet Data Network Gateway (PGW), a Policy Charging Rule Function (PCRF), and so forth) notifies another communication entity that the UE intends to use a single Internet Protocol (IP) address for connections to multiple AGWs. The communication entity also sends information that is related to at least one of the UE's IP flows to another communication entity.04-01-2010
20100080167HANDSHAKING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OFDM SYSTEMS WITH UNKNOWN SUB-CHANNEL AVAILABILITY - A method and device for determining available communication sub-channels in an OFDM communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of transmitting, on at least one first sub-channel (04-01-2010
20090290537Providing station context and mobility in a wireless local area network having a split MAC architecture - A method includes receiving a first frame at a wireless access node, the first frame being received through a first communication network and having a source address; applying a function (e.g., a hash function) to the source address to derive a destination address; encapsulating the first frame in a second frame that includes the destination address and a source address identifying the wireless access node; and sending the second frame to a second communication network for receipt by a destination node having the destination address. The destination node is an access controller that maintains state for a station that sends the first frame. The first communication network may be an IEEE 802.11 network, and the second communication network may be an IEEE 802.3 network. The address of the access controller is one of potentially many virtual MAC addresses associated with the access controller that enables an N:M relationship between a particular access node and a plurality of access controllers that may be clustered, and a N:1 relationship between a Station and a virtual access controller.11-26-2009
20090290541RADIO COMMUNICATION BASE STATION DEVICE AND CONTROL CHANNEL MCS CONTROL METHOD - Provided is a radio communication base station device capable of reducing a communication overhead by a control channel such as SCCH (Shared Control Channel). In this device, each encoding unit (11-26-2009
20100085915Overlay Network Node - A technology is disclosed for actualizing route optimization on a network base, even when privacy-sensitive information, such as a position of a mobile node, is not revealed between two different networks. In the technology, a pHA 04-08-2010
20100085919AMBLE MODULATION SERIES - A base station in a multi-hop network wirelessly transmits a preamble series to be received by a subscriber station in the network, and wirelessly transmits a reverse version of the preamble series to be received by a relay station in the network. The relay station receives the transmitted reverse version of the preamble series. The subscriber station receives the transmitted the preamble series.04-08-2010
20120033615METHODS AND DEVICES FOR SENDING POSITIONING REFERENCE SIGNALS, FOR SENDING DATA AND FOR RECEIVING DATA - The present invention discloses methods for sending positioning reference signals (PRSs), for sending data and for receiving data. When PRSs and data carried by a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH) are required to be sent on a same physical resource, only the data carried by the PDCCH or the PRSs are sent on the same physical resource; or, when a sending end sends the PRSs and the data carried by the PDCCH on the same physical resource at the same time, a receiving end is made to ignore the received PRSs or the data carried by the PDCCH; or, the sending of the PRSs or the data carried by the PDCCH is limited so that they will not be sent on the same physical resource. The present invention also discloses devices for sending positioning reference signals, for sending data and receiving data. The present invention has solved the problem that the data carried by the PDCCH are in conflict with the PRSs over the fourth OFDM symbol when the PDCCH is sent over the first four OFDM symbols in the subframe, thereby ensuring the overall performance of the system.02-09-2012
20120033612METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING DATA TRANSMISSION OVERHEAD - Methods and apparatus for reducing data transmission. In one embodiment, rather than immediately transmitting first data, a first device postpones opening a data connection; any subsequently arriving data is queued with the first data, and transmitted together. Connection overhead is optimized by delaying connection establishment until it is necessary, and in some cases eliminating idle mode operation altogether. Stochastic embodiments are also disclosed for adjusting transmission behavior to maximize one or more desirable outcomes. For example, one such embodiment queues data for a stochastically determined period of time, prior to opening a data connection. The stochastically determined time interval balances the likelihood of efficiently servicing successively arriving data, and overall performance. Mechanisms for receiving and utilizing device user and/or receiver (e.g., base station) feedback are also disclosed.02-09-2012
20110149839COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING NETWORK BASE IP MOBILITY PROTOCOL, CONTROL APPARATUS, ROUTER AND COMMUNICATION METHOD THEREOF - There are provided a communication system, a control apparatus, a router, and communication method thereof, there are capable of eliminating loss in packets during a handover and effectively releasing a resource of a router in a network base IP mobility protocol in which a mobile mode is movable without mounting a special protocol. When an MN 06-23-2011
20090207786METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA FROM RLC LAYER IN RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is a method for transmitting data from an RLC layer in a radio communication system. The method includes the steps of storing RLC SDUs transferred from an upper layer in a transmission buffer, transmitting RLC PDUs on which the RLC SDUs stored in the transmission buffer are loaded to a receiving side in order, discarding the RLC SDUs stored in the transmission buffer, checking whether a transmission mode indicator is configured, and transmitting discard information about the discarded RLC SDUs to the receiving side entirely or in part in accordance with whether the transmission MRW mode indicator is configured.08-20-2009
20090207782AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, AGGREGATE NODE, AND DEAGGREGATE NODE - A technology for providing an aggregation management system and the like which can quickly and efficiently manage aggregation in a mobile-environment is disclosed. According to the technology, an aggregate node adds mobile status information to signaling messages of end-to-end signaling sessions received from mobile terminals 08-20-2009
20110141968TECHNIQUES FOR MANAGING HETEROGENEOUS TRAFFIC STREAMS - Techniques for managing heterogeneous traffic streams are described. An apparatus may include wireless device having a transceiver and a media access control controller operative to communicate in a wireless network, the media access control controller having a traffic stream manager operative to establish a wireless communication channel between a first and second wireless device, and communicate multiple traffic streams in a single service period over the wireless communication channel, with each traffic stream having a different level of reliability for delivery of information from the first wireless device to the second wireless device. Other embodiments are described and claimed.06-16-2011
20100085920Method of Subnet Roaming within a Network - Disclosed is an apparatus and method of client device roaming from a home subnet to a foreign subnet of a network. The method includes the client device accessing the network through a first access node of the home subnet, and the client device roaming to a second access node of the foreign subnet, the client device accessing the network through the second access node, the client device maintaining a fixed client IP address, default gateway IP address and IP subnet attachment as the client device roams from the first access node to the second access node.04-08-2010
20100085910ALLOCATING COMMUNICATION FREQUENCIES TO CLUSTERS OF ACCESS POINTS - A system is used in a wireless communication system made up of cells, at least one of which includes at least one sector. The system includes first access points in a first area of a sector of a cell. The first access points are prohibited from communicating over a first frequency. The system also includes second access points in a second area of the sector of the cell. The second access points are prohibited from communicating over a second frequency that is different from the first frequency.04-08-2010
20100097981METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR PROVIDING MULTIPLE MEDIA STREAMS IN A HYBRID WIRELESS NETWORK - A hybrid cellular and IWLAN network having an access gateway providing a user with simultaneous access to GGSN base packet data services and PDG based broadband multi-media services with one IP address. The system further comprises an authentication center retrieving the user's subscription profile information from an operator network to check the user's subscription to simultaneous GGSN and PDG services, wherein said access gateway multiplexes and de-multiplexes the service sessions without any change to said user.04-22-2010
20110194500METHOD FOR PERFORMING A HARQ IN A MULTIPLE CARRIER SYSTEM - A method of performing hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) in a multiple carrier system is provided. A user equipment receives a plurality of downlink data through a plurality of downlink carriers and transmits one acknowledgement (ACK)/not-acknowledgement (NACK) signal for the plurality of downlink data through an uplink carrier. The ACK/NACK signal is an ACK signal when all of the plurality of downlink data are successfully received.08-11-2011
20110199980CHANNEL SWITCHING IN MESH TYPE NETWORKS - The present invention relates to a method and an apparatus which enable flexible channel switching by exchanging channel information among network nodes to cumulate their view of the quality and availability of the available communication channels. The network nodes can now switch to the same channel independently of one another even when initiating a switch simultaneously.08-18-2011
20110199976Wireless Aircraft Sensor Network - A method and apparatus in a sensor network in an aircraft for collecting data about the aircraft. The sensor network in the aircraft collects the data about the aircraft. The sensor network comprises a set of wireless sensors attached to a first set of locations for the aircraft, a set of wireless routers attached to a second set of locations for the aircraft, and a set of gateways connected to an aircraft data processing system. The set of wireless routers is capable of receiving the data in wireless signals transmitted by the set of wireless sensors. The set of gateways is capable of receiving data in the wireless signals from the set of wireless routers to form received data and is capable of transmitting the received data into the aircraft data processing system.08-18-2011
20110199972Wireless Chip-to-Chip Switching - Embodiments of the invention provide a system and method for chip to chip communications in electronic circuits. A router or switch receives data packets at input port ASICs. A routing table on the input port ASIC or on a routing ASIC is used to identify a destination port ASIC based upon header information in the data packet. The data packet is transmitted from the input port ASIC to the destination port ASIC using millimeter wave signals that are transmitted across a waveguide or a wireless interface.08-18-2011
20110199969 GTPv2 NODE - A GTPv2 node for an E-UTRAN or a GERAN/UTRAN access system, arranged to comprise in a session related signaling message to a peer GTPv2 node information in an information element which indicates that the GTPv2 node supports a certain feature which is identified in the information element. The information element also indicates to the peer GTPv2 node that the peer GTPv2 node should indicate information about its own support or non-support for the feature in the information element in a session related signaling message which is sent as a result of the session related signaling message from the GTPv2 node, as well as including information about the GTPv2 node's support for the feature.08-18-2011
20100080175WEB BASED SMART SENSOR NETWORK TRACKING AND MONITORING SYSTEM - A wireless sensor network including a plurality of Smart Sensors coupled to a wide area network such as the Internet via a Wireless Sensor Coordinator. Each wireless sensor network comprises a plurality of Smart Sensors, each operable to measure one or more physical quantities. Each wireless sensor communicates the measured data to a Wireless Sensor Coordinator which then stores the collected data in memory. The Wireless Sensor Coordinator further includes a web server operable to post a web site on a network that is accessible by a common web browser. Upon receiving a request for sensed data via the web site, the Wireless Sensor Coordinator retrieves the appropriate measured and stored data and converts it into HTML format pages which are then posted on the web site for review by the requestor.04-01-2010
20100080169HIERARCHICAL MOBILITY LABEL-BASED NETWORK - A system includes a label edge router associated with a geographical region, an area label edge router associated with an area that includes the region, and a route reflector associated with the area. The label edge router registers a first mobile node, creates a mobility binding for the first mobile node, and sends a first internal update message that includes the mobility binding. The area label edge router receives a second internal update message that carries contents of the first internal update message, updates a forwarding information base based on the second internal update message to establish a first label switched path, and sends an external update message. The route reflector receives the first internal update message, sends the second internal update message to the area label edge router, and receives the external update message from the area label edge router.04-01-2010
20100080168PROBABILISTIC ROUTING FOR VEHICULAR AD HOC NETWORK - A probabilistic method of determining a second vehicle in the VANET to which a packet is to be forwarded from a first vehicle is provided. The method includes determining the second vehicle to forward the packet from the first vehicle based on pre-calculated expected latency data corresponding to the second vehicle, and forwarding the packet from the first vehicle to the determined second vehicle. The expected latency data is indicative of the latency expected for communication of the packet from the first vehicle to the destination if the packet is forwarded from the first vehicle to the second vehicle, and is calculated in advance of the step of the determining the second vehicle to forward the packet. The second vehicle to forward the packet may also be determined based on pre-calculated communication probability data corresponding to the second vehicle in addition to the pre-calculated expected latency.04-01-2010
20090086666METHOD FOR ARQ-ENABLED PRE-TRANSMISSIONS IN MULTICAST AND BROADCAST SERVICES OF RELAY NETWORKS UTILIZING THE IDLE PERIODS - A method and apparatus is disclosed herein for transmitting data in a network (e.g., a relay network). In one embodiment, the method comprises performing pre-transmission of a packet to hops to enable the base station and the plurality of hops to transmit the packet synchronously to one or more mobile stations in the wireless communication system; and performing one or more re-transmissions of the packet at a first set of one or more hops in the system during a delay due to pre-transmissions at a second set of one or more hops in the system.04-02-2009
20110170479Mobility Management System and Method - A method and system for optimizing mobility routing are disclosed. A preferred embodiment comprises a first system of networks that comprise a home local mobility anchor and two or more distributed local mobility anchors, and a second system of networks separate from the first system of networks. Packets of data may be transmitted from a correspondent node anchored in the second system of networks to a mobile node anchored in the second system. Additionally, packets of data may be transmitted from the mobile node to the correspondent node.07-14-2011
20120269116CONTEXT-AWARE MOBILE SEARCH BASED ON USER ACTIVITIES - Search processes are improved by modeling a mobile device user's context for a particular mobile search activity. Activity data characterizing usage of the mobile communications device is collected. This data may include the user's usage of the music and video player, including the types of media and specific titles, as well as activity data related to phone calls and other communications activities. The activity information is used by a predictive model to predict search parameters based on recent activity data. The predictive model can provide suggested search parameters, based on the user's recent activity as well as on search-specific user input. In some cases, the predictive model may be used to re-order the search results returned from a conventional search engine, based on the collected activity data.10-25-2012
20120269118WARNING MESSAGE TRANSMISSION METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention provides a warning message transmission method and apparatus after the warning message transmission procedure is completed. The method comprises: after sending a WRITE-REPLACE WARNING REQUEST message to an eNB and receiving a WRITE-REPLACE WARNING RESPONSE message corresponding to the WRITE-REPLACE WARNING REQUEST message and returned by the eNB, a mobility management entity (MME) determining areas where warning broadcast fails based on the WRITE-REPLACE WARNING RESPONSE message corresponding to the WRITE-REPLACE WARNING REQUEST message and returned by the eNB, and then controlling the eNB to resend a warning message to the areas where warning broadcast fails. The present invention can ensure that disastrous information associated with the ETWS can be timely and effectively notified to all users in areas where broadcast fails so as send an escape or precaution warning to them to further minimize huge losses of human life and property when the disaster comes.10-25-2012
20120269117METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IMPLEMENTING DOMAIN SELECTION DURING THE TERMINATED CALL - The present invention discloses a method and a system for implementing domain selection during a terminated call, wherein, the method comprises: an application server (AS) sending, according to a received call request message, a query request message to a home subscriber server (HSS); the HSS querying, according to the query request message, a packet switching (PS) domain mobility management network element to obtain information of a called terminal and/or a network accessed by the called terminal in the call request message; the HSS feeding back the obtained information of the called terminal and/or the network accessed by the called terminal to the AS; and the AS selecting a domain to which a call message is to be routed according to the information of the called terminal and/or the network accessed by the called terminal. The present invention can greatly reduce the number of the signalings between the PS domain mobility management element and the HSS, avoids various limitations of the signaling loads generated by the HSS on network deployment, is convenient for the network deployment, and ensures the implementation of services.10-25-2012
20110268038SPACE DIVERSITY METHOD - A space diversity method is disclosed having the steps of: setting space-frequency block coder (SFBC) based on Alamouti coder as the minimum unit of space-time coder; orthogonally processing the SFBC to acquire the transmission signals of part of antenna ports in eight antenna ports, and cyclically delaying the acquired transmission signals of antenna ports to obtain the transmission signals of the rest antenna ports; transmitting the acquired transmission signal in the corresponding time and sub-carrier by each antenna port. A space diversity device is also provided which has an orthogonal processing module, a signal cyclic delay module and a transmitting module. With the method and device, the eight-antenna data transmission in the long time evolution (LTE) advanced system is achieved, and better diversity gain is acquired without adding extra pilot overhead.11-03-2011
20110268027Wireless Communication Device - A wireless communication device may obtain, from each of one or more access points, access point information including network identification information corresponding to the access point. The wireless communication device may determine, in a case where specific network identification information corresponding to a specific access point is selected by a user from among one or more network identification information, whether specific access point information obtained from the specific access point includes support information indicating that the specific access point is supporting an automatic wireless setting mode. The wireless communication device may perform a wireless setting in accordance with the automatic wireless setting mode in a first case where a determination is made that the specific access point information includes the support information.11-03-2011
20110268025DELIVERY EDGE PROFILE AGGREGATION - A system and method for aggregating subscriber information at a delivery edge is disclosed. The method comprises interfacing a user profile aggregation device (UPAD) at a subscriber location with at least one subscriber database in each of a wired network core and a wireless network core. The wired network core and the wireless network core are operated by a Multi-System network Operator. Profile information can be aggregated at the UPAD about the subscriber from at least one database in the wired network core and the wireless network core. The subscriber's aggregated profile information can be communicated to the MSO.11-03-2011
20110268028UPLINK SOUNDING REFERENCE SIGNALS CONFIGURATION AND TRANSMISSION - Methods and apparatus for sounding reference signals (SRS) configuration and transmission. The methods include receiving configuration of wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU)-specific SRS subframes for transmitting SRS and upon receipt of a trigger, transmitting the SRS for a number of antennas. The SRS transmissions may occur in each subframe of a duration of WTRU-specific SRS subframes that start a number of WTRU-specific SRS subframes after a triggering subframe. For multiple SRS transmissions from multiple antennas, cyclic shift multiplexing and different transmission combs may be used. The cyclic shift for an antenna may be determined from a cyclic shift reference value. The cyclic shift determined for each antenna providing a maximum distance between cyclic shifts for the antennas transmitting SRS in a same WTRU-specific subframe. SRS transmissions from multiple antennas in the WTRU-specific subframe may be done in parallel. Methods for handling collisions between SRS and physical channels are presented.11-03-2011
20110268024DETECTION OF CO-LOCATED INTERFERENCE IN A MULTI-RADIO COEXISTENCE ENVIRONMENT - Unscheduled transmissions of one wireless network device while a collocated wireless network device has control of a communication medium can corrupt packets received by the collocated wireless network device. Interference between the collocated wireless network devices can lead to degradation in performance of either/both the wireless network devices. In a communication system comprising a first wireless network device collocated with a second wireless network device, the first wireless network device can be configured to transmit a coexistence message to the second wireless network device when the first wireless network device transmits a packet without control of the communication medium. On receiving the coexistence message indicating that the first wireless network device transmitted a packet without control of the communication medium, the second wireless network device can discard any packets received at the second wireless network device and can request retransmission of the discarded packets.11-03-2011
20090190531Mesh Node Mobility Across Static and Mobile Mesh Networks - Methods and systems for mobility of mobile nodes in mesh networks are taught wherein the mobile mesh nodes choose an attachment point to another mesh node based on predetermined criteria, such as the characteristics of the attachment point's path to a reference destination, and other factors local to the attachment point, such as load and available capacity. The mobile nodes forward packets on each other's behalf. Static and mobile nodes and the links between them are treated differently from each other in view of their respectively different properties. A special metric is used for paths that include mobile links in addition to the static mesh links and wired mesh links. Mobility is handled completely transparently to any client devices attached to the mesh nodes, where this attachment could be wireless or wired.07-30-2009
20090190525ENHANCEMENTS TO THE POSITIONING PILOT CHANNEL - A method for communicating transmitter identification in an interlace structure of a communication network system using positioning pilot channels (PPC), comprising: 07-30-2009
20090010206MOBILE IP HOME AGENT DISCOVERY - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate Mobile IP home agent (HA) discovery in a wireless communication system. Discovery of a HA for Mobile IP can be conducted as described herein for a mobile terminal located on a network wherein movement of the terminal is managed by a network-based mobility protocol. For example, various aspects described herein can be utilized for discovery of a HA located in a 3GPP network from 3GPP and/or non-3GPP access. Further, various aspects described herein can be utilized to discover a gateway acting as mobility anchor for a network mobility protocol utilized by the network. As additionally described herein, HA discovery can be conducted in connection with DNS query formation and communication, network attach and/or re-attach procedures, Neighbor Discovery signaling, and/or other procedures.01-08-2009
20120106460CARRIER RECONFIGURATION IN MULTI-CARRIER AGGREGATION - The present invention relates to a wireless communication system which supports carrier aggregation. In detail, the present invention relates to a method and apparatus, wherein a mobile station changes a component carrier (CC) in a wireless communication system that supports carrier aggregation. The method comprises the steps of: receiving, from a base station, a CC reconfiguration command via one or more first preconfigured CCs; reconfiguring, in accordance with the CC reconfiguration command, CC-related information to change one or more first preconfigured CCs to a second CC; and transmitting a signal indicating the completion of CC reconfiguration to the base station after the reconfiguration of the CC-related information.05-03-2012
20120106458PROVIDING A DENY RESPONSE THAT SPECIFIES A DELAY TIME - A system receives, from a mobile station, a connection request that specifies a particular application type. In response to determining that the connection request is to be denied, the system sends a response denying the connection request to the mobile station, where the response includes a delay time that is applicable to the particular application type but not to another application type, and where the delay time indicates an amount of delay that the mobile station is to wait before resending another connection request.05-03-2012
20120106457COOPERATIVE TRANSCEIVING BETWEEN WIRELESS INTERFACE DEVICES OF A HOST DEVICE - A method and/or apparatus for cooperative transceiving between wireless interface devices of a host device includes processing that begins by providing an indication of receiving an inbound packet from one wireless interface device (e.g., Bluetooth compliant radio transceiver, IEEE 802.11 compliant radio transceiver, etc.) to another. The wireless interlace device receiving the indication processes the indication and, based on the processing, transmits an outbound packet in accordance with the processing of the indication. For example, the wireless interface device receiving the indication may delay transmission until the other wireless interface device has received the packet, or, if transmission of the packet would not interfere with the receiving of the packet by the other wireless interface device, the wireless interface device receiving the indication would transmit its packet.05-03-2012
20120106456METHOD, APPARATUS, AND SYSTEM FOR ROUTING USER PLANE DATA IN MOBILE NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a system for routing user plane data in a mobile network are disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention, relate to the field of communications, and solve the problem that transmission delay of packet service data is relatively great in the prior art. The method for routing user plane data in the mobile network includes that: an access network bearer and a PDN gateway bearer of a user equipment are directly interconnected through a tunnel established between an access network and a PDN gateway; and data between a Home NodeB, a Home NodeB Gateway or a macro network access network and the PDN gateway is directly routed through the tunnel. The method, the apparatus, and the system can be applied to a mobile communication system.05-03-2012
20120106455METHOD FOR GENERATING A REFERENCE SIGNAL SEQUENCE USING GROUPING - A method for a base station to receive a reference signal sequence from one or more devices within a cell of the base station in a multiple cell environment includes providing the one or more devices with information about the reference signal sequence, wherein the reference signal sequence is defined by a cyclic shift of a base sequence, wherein the base sequence is one of a plurality of base sequences divided into groups, wherein each of the groups comprises at least one base sequence for each length (N), wherein each length (N) corresponds to (12*n), (n) being a positive integer, and receiving the reference signal sequence from one or more of the one or more devices.05-03-2012
20120106454PROVIDING COMMUNICATIONS USING A DISTRIBUTED MOBILE ARCHITECTURE - A method includes receiving a call at a distributed mobile architecture (DMA) server. The DMA server includes a mobile switching center (MSC) module, a wireless transceiver, and a base station controller (BSC). The MSC module includes an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) module configured to support generation of call detail records at the DMA server. The method includes routing the call from the DMA server to a communication device. The method further includes generating a call detail record associated with the call at the DMA server.05-03-2012
20120106453WIRELESS NETWORK DEVICE, WIRELESS NETWORK SYSTEM AND METHOD OF CONTROLLING SELECTION OF ROUTINGS - Embodiments of the present invention disclose a wireless network device, a wireless network system and a method of controlling selection of routings. The wireless network device includes: a memory configured to store routing latency information for routing from the wireless network device to other nodes in a network; a processor configured to determine transmission latency requirement of transmitting data packets from the wireless network device to a destination node according to transmission latency requirement information carried in the data packets after obtaining the data packets to be transmitted, query available routes from the wireless network device to the destination node, and the stored latency information corresponding to the available routes, select a route most approximate to the determined transmission latency requirement from the available routes according to a query result of the query module, and transmit the data packets.05-03-2012
20120106451Method and Arrangement for Session Negotiation - In a method of improved session negotiation between first and second clients in a cellular telecommunication system, the two clients negotiating S05-03-2012
20120106448UNIFIED VEHICLE NETWORK FRAME PROTOCOL - A network node module includes a processing module and memory. The processing module is operable to generate a header section of a frame for transmission within a unified vehicle communication network. The header section includes a preamble, routing information, and a vehicle network field, which includes information that identifies a type of the frame. The processing module is further operable to generate a payload section of the frame. The payload section includes data payload and an integrity check field. The processing module is further operable to transmit the frame to the unified vehicle communication network in accordance with a global vehicle network communication protocol.05-03-2012
20120106447PRIORITY PACKET PROCESSING - A network node in a vehicular network processes packets based on a prioritization scheme. The prioritization scheme uses packet type, priority, source, destination, or other information to determine a priority of the packets. Packets can be stored in one of multiple queues organized according to packet type, or other criteria. In some cases, only one queue is used. The packets are time stamped when put into a queue, and a time to live is calculated based on the timestamp. The time to live, as well as other factors such as packet type, packet priority, packet source, and packet destination can be used to adjust a packet's priority within the queue. Packets are transmitted from the queues in priority order. In some cases, the network node can identify a top-priority packet, and transmit the top priority packet without first storing the packet in the queue.05-03-2012
20120106446Managing Devices Within A Vehicular Communication Network - A network node module within a vehicle operates to manage devices coupled to a vehicular communication network of the vehicle based on a use mode defining rights and privileges for operating in the vehicular communication network. Upon being configured in accordance with a particular use mode of a set of use modes, the network node module can identify a device coupled to the vehicular communication network and enable the device to operate within the vehicular communication network in accordance with the use mode. The network node module is securely reconfigurable to any use mode in the set of use modes.05-03-2012
20120106444FEMTOCELL AND INTERNET ACCESSING METHOD - A femtocell to allow a user terminal device access to the Internet includes a tunnel communication module to establish a secure tunnel between the user terminal device and the Internet and a network address translator to translate network address for the user terminal device. The femtocell selects the network address translator to allow the user terminal device access to the Internet upon the condition that the user terminal device requires a video streaming service. The femtocell further selects the network address translator or the tunnel communication module according to a speed of the user terminal device accessing the Internet upon the condition that the user terminal device requires a web service.05-03-2012
20120106443UNIVERSAL INTEGRATED CIRCUIT CARD ACTIVATION IN A HYBRID NETWORK - A universal integrated circuit card (UICC) may include a universal subscriber identity module (USIM); a code division multiple access (CDMA) subscriber identity module (CSIM); a memory to store instructions; and a processor. The processor may execute instructions to determine a type of wireless access network available to a user equipment (UE) associated with the UICC; perform activation of the UICC using the USIM, in response to detecting a CDMA enhanced High Rate Packet Data (eHRPD) network, a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) access network, or a Long Term Evolution (LTE) access network; and perform activation of the UICC using the CSIM, in response to detecting an available CDMA access network other than a CDMA eHRPD access network.05-03-2012
20120106442System and Method for Cooperative Heterogeneous Communications Systems - A system and method for cooperative heterogeneous communications systems are provided. A communications system includes a plurality of cooperation sets, such as closed-space sets. Each closed-space set includes at least two information sources configured to operate cooperatively to transmit to a plurality of communications devices operating within a coverage area of the cooperation set. There is limited cooperation between closed-spaced sets. In addition, there may be limited or no overlap between .the coverage areas of the adjacent closed-spaced sets.05-03-2012
20120106440GENERATING PLATFORM IDENTIFICATION FOR CERTIFICATION VERSION SIGNALING - A method for generating platform identification is presented. In one embodiment, the method includes determining whether a hash value collision indication presents in a table based on one or more platform attributes. The method includes generating a hash value based at least on the one or more platform attributes if there is no hash value collision indication and setting a platform identifier to a string generated based on the hash value. The method further includes sending a message including at least the platform identifier during network entry.05-03-2012
20090274101WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - Access control based on CSMA is favorably carried out with the RTS/CTS method used together.11-05-2009
20090274099METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING TRANSMITTER INFORMATION IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Methods and apparatus for communicating transmitter information in a communication network are disclosed. The methods and apparatus communicate transmitter specific information, in particular, which includes location information about network transmitters for use in location or positioning type services. The disclosed methods and apparatus include inserting such transmitter specific information within either a data flow of at least one transmission frame or a control channel in the at least one transmission frame. In addition, a transmitter identifier is encoded in a positioning pilot channel (PPC) within the at least one transmission frame, and the configured transmission frame transmitted to a user device. The user device may use the transmitter specific information of numerous transmitters along with the transmitter identifiers to measure how far it is from the transmitters, and then triangulate to determine position.11-05-2009
20090274096Method of network entry in OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems - A unified two-stage network entry procedure is provided for OFDM multi-carrier wireless communications systems. During a first stage, a mobile station performs a common network entry procedure using a primary radio frequency carrier and then exchanges multi-carrier capability information with a base station. In one embodiment, the base station transmits a network entry allowance indicator to assist the mobile station in selecting the primary carrier. The network entry allowance indicator comprises information of preference of one or more available carriers. During a second stage, the mobile station enables multi-carrier transmission over multiple frequency channels if both the mobile station and the base station support multi-carrier capability. Before enabling multi-carrier transmission, the mobile station may optionally perform additional ranging by transmitting a ranging request for a secondary carrier. In one embodiment, the base station replies with a ranging response in response to the ranging request through the primary carrier.11-05-2009
20120269115METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR ADAPTIVE RESOURCE MULTIPLEXING IN A PEER-TO-PEER NETWORK - A method of wireless communication includes determining resources available for peer discovery. The resources include first peer discovery resources with a first time interval and second peer discovery resources with a second time interval less than the first time interval. The method further includes communicating peer discovery signals through a first subset of peer discovery resources of the first peer discovery resources and a second subset of peer discovery resources of the second peer discovery resources. The second subset of peer discovery resources includes less resource elements than the first subset of peer discovery resources.10-25-2012
20110199982PROCESSING INFORMATION BLOCKS FOR WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - In general, according to an embodiment, a wireless transmitter includes a plurality of coding and modulation modules to apply corresponding coding and modulation algorithms to input information blocks. A discrete Fourier transform (DFT) precoder applies DFT processing to outputs of the coding and modulation modules, and an inverse fast Fourier transform (IFFT) module receives a DFT output of the DFT precoder, which is mapped to different subcarriers according to the resource allocation indicated by the base station, and applies IFFT processing to the DFT output. An output processing stage produces output signals based on the output of the IFFT module to transmit wirelessly to a wireless receiver. In a different implementation, the outputs of the coding and modulation modules can be provided to an IFFT module to produce IFFT-processed output information.08-18-2011
20110199981COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION METHOD, NETWORK SIDE COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL - Disclosed is a technique for performing flexible service-level access control in real-time while suppressing occurrence of signaling. According to the technique, a network entity (AAA server 08-18-2011
20110199979Method and System for Processing Bearer under ISR Mechanism - A method and a system for processing a bearer under an idle mode signaling reduction (ISR) mechanism are provided. The method for processing a bearer under an ISR mechanism includes the following steps. A mobility management network element acquires an access mode of a current network. The mobility management network element notifies a serving gateway (SGW) of the access mode of the current network, so that the SGW processes bearer according to the access mode of the current network. It can be ensured that the access mode of the current network is consistent with the access mode for a policy and charging control (PCC) strategy adopted during a bearing procedure under the ISR mechanism.08-18-2011
20110199978RECOVERY TECHNIQUES IN MOBILE NETWORKS - A technique for protecting location information of a subscriber in a mobile network is disclosed. A User Mobility Server (UMS) receives a first query from a first call state control function (CSCF). The UMS transmits a call setup and a subscriber identity to a servicing-call state control function (S-CSCF). The S-CSCF may have no record of the subscriber identity due to a restart are some other event. The UMS receives a second query from the S-CSCF based in part of the subscriber identity. The UMS transmits a home address of a mobile station to the S-CSCF. The UMS may also transmit a profile download to the S-CSCF.08-18-2011
20110199975WIRELESS BASE STATION DEVICE USING COLLABORATIVE HARQ COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS TERMINAL DEVICE, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - In a transmission device on a serving eNB side, a first packet transmission unit performs an operation of transmitting a retransmission data packet. On the other hand, in a transmission device on a collaborative eNB side, a second packet transmission unit performs an operation of transmitting a new data packet corresponding to information transferred from the serving eNB by the packet transfer unit. The control information about a communication to a UE by the serving eNB and the collaborative eNB is communicated by using only a PUCCH from the UE to the serving eNB and a PDCCH from the serving eNB to the UE. The serving eNB and the collaborative eNB perform communications of a new data packet and communication control information etc. through an X2 interface.08-18-2011
20110199973METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR CONFIGURING MULTICAST BROADCAST SINGLE FREQUENCY NETWORK RESOURCES - In the field of mobile communication, a method, device, and system for configuring multicast broadcast single frequency network (MBSFN) resources are provided, so as to solve the problem that configuration information of each radio network controller (RNC) in an MBSFN cannot be dynamically synchronized. With the coordination of a master RNC, a multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS) configuration information message is transferred through IUR interface connection, and MBMS configuration information of the master RNC and each slave RNC is synchronized. In this way, the problem that configuration information of each RNC in an MBSFN cannot be dynamically synchronized is solved, thereby satisfying the demands of soft combing and air interface combining.08-18-2011
20110199971Packet transmission/reception method and apparatus in wireless communication system - A method for simultaneously transmitting packets having different lengths to two or more users in a wireless communication system includes: generating the packets which are to be transmitted to the respective users; and simultaneously transmitting the generated packets to the respective users. Each of the packets contains information on the position of a symbol to which a tail field of the packet belongs, and the information on the position of the symbol to which the tail field belongs includes at least one of the maximum symbol number of the packet, the symbol number of transmission data of the packet, positional information of a last aggregated MAC protocol data unit (A-MPDU) subframe, and positional information of a null delimiter.08-18-2011
20110199970Method of Handling Proximity Indication and Related Communication Device - A method of handling a proximity indication for a mobile device in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method comprises the steps of entering a proximity of a CSG (closed subscriber group) cell, reporting an entering proximity indication to a network and starting a specified timer; and sending a leaving proximity indication whenever the mobile device leaves the proximity of the CSG cell even the specified timer is running.08-18-2011
20110199968Beamforming feedback frame formats within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications - Beamforming feedback frame formats within multiple user, multiple access, and/or MIMO wireless communications. A transmitting wireless communication device (TX) transmits a sounding frame to one or more receiving wireless communication devices (RXs) using one or more antennae and one or more clusters. Any antenna/cluster combination may be employed in communications between TXs and RXs. The one or more RXs receive/process the sounding frame to determine a type of beamforming feedback frame to be provided to the TX. Any one of a variety of beamforming feedback frame types and a types of information may be contained within a respective beamforming feedback frame including various characteristics of the respective communication channel between the TX and each of the various RXs. A common beamforming feedback frame format may be supported and employed by all such wireless communication devices (e.g., TX and RXs) when performing MU-MIMO operation such as in accordance with IEEE 802.11ac/VHT.08-18-2011
20110199967TECHNIQUES TO ASSIGN MULTIPLE IDENTIFIERS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Techniques are described that can be used to assign identifiers to mobile stations in a Network Access Provider (NAP) domain and a paging identifier. In some cases, the NAP identifier and paging identifier can be unique in the NAP domain and the paging group domain. The paging identifier can be derived from a NAP identifier.08-18-2011
20090003265IMS NETWORK PROVIDING PURCHASING SESSIONS TO MOBILE DEVICES THAT ARE LOCATED PROXIMATE TO A BUSINESS - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing purchasing sessions to mobile devices that are located proximate to a business. IMS network includes an application server that provides advertisements for the business to mobile devices that are located proximate to the business (i.e., the advertisements are pushed to the mobile devices). Responsive to an advertisement, the user of a mobile device may contact the application server through the mobile device to purchase one or more items from the business. The application server responds to the mobile device with receipt information for the purchase. The user may then request delivery of the purchased item through the mobile device by transmitting some or all of the receipt information to the application server. The application server may then schedule delivery of the item to the user of the mobile device.01-01-2009
20090201856RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND BASE STATION - A base station includes a first selecting unit that selects a reduction target terminal, a first calculating unit that calculates a reduction amount of assigned transmission rate assigned to the reduction target terminal, a second selecting unit that selects an increase target terminal, a second calculating unit that calculates an increase amount of the assigned transmission rate assigned to the increase target terminal, and a transmitting unit that transmits transmission rate control date to a radio terminal. The second selecting unit selects the increase target terminal and the second calculating unit calculates the increase amount when the reduction target terminal is not selected by the first selecting unit.08-13-2009
20090201853Routing Data Packets in a Communication Network - Routing data packets includes receiving data packets from a network element at a routing gateway. The data packets are determined to be destined for a mobile node. A location of the mobile node is obtained. The data packets are forwarded to the mobile node according to the location on behalf of the network element.08-13-2009
20090201855MOBILE IPV6 OPTIMISED REVERSE TUNNELLING FOR MULTI-HOMED TERMINALS - The invention relates to a method for packet-switched data transmission between a multi-homed mobile node and a correspondent node in a mobile communication system comprising a plurality of mobile networks. The method comprises the steps of selecting by the mobile node one of its home addresses to be used for communication with the correspondent node. The mobile node registers at least one of a plurality of addresses assigned to a considered network interface as care-of-address at a mobile node's home agent responsible for the selected home address. The correspondent node's home agent and mobile node's home agent receive and store candidate proxy home agent addresses. A correspondent node's home agent sends a request to the correspondent node. The correspondent node registers at least one of a plurality of addresses assigned to a considered network interface as care-of-address at the correspondent node's home agent. At least one of the proxy home agent addresses, one of the mobile node's care-of-addresses, and one of the correspondent node's care-of-addresses is selected on both the mobile node's home agent and the corresponding node's home agent, and the mobile node is triggered by the mobile node's home agent and the correspondent node by the corresponding node's home agent to switch a tunnel, so that two endpoints of the tunnel are one of the selected proxy home agent addresses and the selected mobile node's care-of addresses.08-13-2009
20090201850LOCATION TRACKING BASED ON PROXIMITY-BASED AD HOC NETWORK - A system and method is described for constructing a proximity-based ad hoc network among a plurality of sensors and for using such a network to perform location tracking. The system and method uses time-coded data received from each of the sensors to determine a current proximity of each of the sensors to one or more beacons. Then, by leveraging information relating to the effective transmission ranges of the beacons, the system and method determines the relative location of each of the plurality of sensors with respect to other sensors within the plurality of sensors. Where actual (as opposed to relative) location information is available for a particular sensor, it can be used to generate or augment location information associated with other sensors known to be spatially and temporally proximate to the particular sensor. The current location information for each of the sensors is then used in providing location-based services.08-13-2009
20090201848PATH CONTROL METHOD AND HOME AGENT - In a mobile network system composed of a mobile network with a mobile router and a terminal interconnected, and of a home agent, when the mobile router connects to an external network, the mobile router informs the home agent of path information to the mobile network including the mobile router. Receiving the path information, the home agent inquires the mobile router in the home network whether or not the mobile router connects to the mobile network informed. Then, the home agent advertises path information to this mobile network only when the mobile router connecting to the mobile network does not exist. Accordingly, the home agent can rapidly switch to an optimum path to the external network.08-13-2009
20090279484LOCATION INFORMATION SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PERFORMING NOTIFICATION BASED UPON LOCATION - According to an embodiment, a location based notification method in a SLP (SUPL Location Platform) includes transmitting, by the SLP, a session initialization message including a notification mode parameter indicating one or more of notification and verification based upon the location of the terminal to the terminal; receiving a positioning initialization message from the terminal; calculating the location of the terminal by performing a positioning process with the terminal; transmitting a session notification message including a notification element to the terminal when the location of the terminal is calculated; receiving a session notification response message including a notification response by the user of the terminal from the terminal; and transmitting the location of the terminal to a client who has requested the location of the terminal when the session notification response message is received.11-12-2009
20090279483METHOD AND SYSTEM TO MANAGE WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS OF HIGH-OCCUPANCY VEHICLES - A system and method for managing wireless communications for a plurality of devices in a high occupancy vehicle is presented. The method comprises steps of creating a global bandwidth usage map across all vehicles, routes, and passengers, transmitting the global bandwidth usage map to a vehicle controller, interpreting the global bandwidth usage map and creating a local usage map, and commanding a wireless concentrator to manage the wireless communications for the devices in accordance with the local usage map. Further, the global map can be created by gathering ticket and route information, obtaining customer productivity data from a network, and parsing obtained data into canonical form. A step of inputting the ticketing information by one of the user, and a ticketing agent can be included. A step of displaying messages using a wireless access application residing on the device can be included.11-12-2009
20090279477MOBILE STATION, WIRELESS ACCESS NETWORK APPARATUS, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile station, a radio access network apparatus and a mobile communication system that can decrease signal amount of each message to decrease connection delay are provided. The mobile station is provided with storing means configured to store a conversion table between a combination of a plurality of parameters defined beforehand and an identifier representing the combination of the plurality of parameters; uplink transmission signal generation means configured to generate an uplink transmission signal including the identifier when performing uplink transmission; transmission means configured to transmit the uplink transmission signal to the radio access network apparatus; reception means configured to receive a downlink transmission signal transmitted by the radio access network apparatus; and parameter setting means configured to detect the identifier from the received downlink transmission signal, read and set a parameter based on the identifier.11-12-2009
20090279481System and method for routing a data packet in a wireless network, computing system in a system for routing a data packet in a wireless network, and method for routing a data packet in a computing system - An embodiment of the present invention provides a method and system for detecting the inability of the designated intermediate node (A11-12-2009
20110170489METHOD AND APPARATUS OF TRANSMITTING INFORMATION IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus of transmitting information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes transmitting information based on a first resource index through a first antenna and transmitting the information based on a second resource index through a second antenna.07-14-2011
20110170492WIRELESS DATA COMMUNICATION METHOD FOR A BASE STATION USING A COMMON PILOT CHANNEL AND AN INDIVIDUAL PILOT CHANNEL - A wireless data-communication arrangements including a wireless terminal, located in a direction, receiving the pilot signal and determining a data rate according to reception quality of the pilot signal; the wireless terminal transmitting to a base station a signal for requesting the determined data rate; the base station receiving the signal and, based on the requested data rate, transmitting data to the wireless terminal with the radiation pattern, which includes the beam pattern in a same direction as the direction in which the pilot signal was transmitted, using a data channel of a second slot which is a predetermined number of slots after the first slot.07-14-2011
20110170491Communication device and communication method - A communication device with a communication protocol including at least two layers includes a data reception unit that receives data transmitted from another communication device; a buffer control unit that rearranges a storage order of data in a buffer based on a number of retransmission times and a retransmission interval of retransmission data, stores the retransmission data in the buffer when the data reception unit has successfully received the retransmitted retransmission data; and a data transfer unit that transfers the data stored in the buffer to an upper layer.07-14-2011
20110170490METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR ENABLING A MOBILE TERMINAL TO ACCESS TO A WIRELESS CELLULAR TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method for enabling a mobile terminal to access to a wireless cellular telecommunication network including plural base stations, the mobile terminal having right to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through a first base station, the mobile terminal having no right to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through a second base station. The method includes: detecting reception of a message transferred by the mobile terminal to the second base station, determining if the first base station is operational, giving right to the mobile terminal to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through the second base station if the first base station is not operational, and rejecting right to the mobile terminal to access to the wireless cellular telecommunication network through the second base station if the first base station is operational.07-14-2011
20110170488METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING PIGGYBACKED POSITIVE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIELD INDICATOR AND A POLLING INDICATOR - A method and apparatus of providing a piggybacked positive acknowledgement/negative acknowledgement (ACK/NACK) (PAN) field indicator (PANI) and a polling indicator are disclosed. A combined field of a PANI bit, a relative reserved block period (RRBP) bit and an EGPRS supplementary polling (ES/P) field may indicate a polling scheme and a presence of a PAN field. Alternatively, the presence of the PAN field in the data block may be indicated by using a specific training sequence. Alternatively, a forward error correction (FEC) coding may be performed on the data block including the header, and the presence of the PAN field may be indicated by scrambling the encoded bits corresponding the header with a specific scrambling sequence. Alternatively, a header check sequence (HCS) may be generated and the presence of the PAN field is indicated by mixing a predetermined sequence with the HCS.07-14-2011
20110170486RADIO BASE STATION APPARATUS AND BASE STATION CONTROLLER - The invention provides a radio base station apparatus forming a wireless zone in a mobile communication system and to a base station controller performing channel control over a terminal visiting a wireless zone. The radio base station apparatus has an identifying section identifying a particular radio base station that is to maintain a radio channel between the radio base station apparatus and a terminal during a process of diversity handover, a network interface section delivering a signal to a network if a local station is not the particular radio base station, and an inter-office interface section delivering to the network a composite wave of the signal and a signal having arrived and forwarded from the terminal via the radio channel at a radio base station forming a wireless zone adjacent to a wireless zone formed by the local station if the local station is the particular radio base station.07-14-2011
20110170484RADIO APPARATUS WHICH COMMUNICATES WITH OTHER RADIO APPARATUSES AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A data processing unit selects either one of a base station mode and a terminal mode so as to perform communications using packet signals. The base station mode is a mode in which a packet signal, containing data indicating that an initial source and a final destination are not its own radio apparatus, is to be communicated; the terminal mode is a mode in which a packet signal, containing data indicating that the initial source or the final destination is its own radio apparatus, is to be communicated. A control unit starts the radio apparatus by setting the data processing unit in the terminal mode. When a packet signal, which has been transmitted from another radio apparatus and which contains broadcast information, has not been received before a certain period of time elapses after the start, the control unit switches the mode of the data processing unit to the base station mode.07-14-2011
20110170482METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SIGNALING TO A MOBILE DEVICE WHICH SET OF TRAINING SEQUENCE CODES TO USE FOR A COMMUNICATION LINK - The present patent application improves DARP by allowing multiple users on one time slot (MUROS). It comprises means and instructions for signaling training sequence set information to a remote station, comprising receiving signaling from a remote station indicating if a new set of training sequences is supported, and using a channel description to signal the training sequence set to be used by the remote station for a communication channel being established.07-14-2011
20110170481METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MANAGING CSG PRIORITIES IN IDLE AND CONNECTED MODES - A method comprising detecting closed subscriber group (CSG) proximity based on an autonomous search function; signaling a proximity indication to a network, wherein the proximity indication includes at least one priority of at least one allowed neighbor CSG cell. A method comprising, performing measurements on neighboring CSG cells; and generating a measurement report including measurements of at least one neighboring CSG cell; and transmitting a message including a measurement report and a CSG priority for at least one CSG cell.07-14-2011
20110170480SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR EFFICIENT STATION IDENTIFICATION - A base station is provided. The base station includes a transmit path circuitry that generates a masking sequence to mask a cyclic redundancy check of a control channel information element. The masking sequence includes a 4-bit prefix. The three least significant bits of the 4-bit prefix indicate a message type of the control channel information element. A subscriber station is also provided. The subscriber station includes a receive path circuitry that determines a message type of a control channel information element using a three least significant bits of a 4-bit prefix of a masking sequence used to mask a cyclic redundancy check of the control channel information element.07-14-2011
20110170478METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSFERRING DATA BETWEEN WIRELESS DEVICES - A device for transferring data. The device includes a processor operable to process a header portion of data without processing a payload. Processing the header portion generates a processed header. The processor may signal a direct memory access (DMA) unit to access the payload of the data. As a result, the DMA accesses and passes the payload to a wireless interface for transmission to a destination electronic device based on the processed header. The processor used to process the header portion may be a processor of an electronic device, e.g., a cellular phone, a PDA, etc. Alternatively, the processor may be a processor of a removable memory component. In one embodiment, the processor may be a processor of a module adapted to receive a removable memory and further adapted to couple to an electronic device, e.g., a cellular phone, a PDA, etc., where the removable memory includes its own processor.07-14-2011
20110170477MOBILE BROADBAND PACKET SWITCHED TRAFFIC OPTIMIZATION - A method in an electronic device and a system for use in a communication network including a core network and at least one access network are described. Intermediate service platforms in an access network process data bound from a base station towards a core network, and vice versa. A first data channel or stream is processed by the intermediate service platform. Exemplary embodiments bypass the intermediate service platform by intercepting a second data channel or stream bound for the intermediate service platform. The data in the second data channel or stream is processed and inserted into a data channel or stream downstream of the intermediate service platform.07-14-2011
20110170476COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING CABLES CARRYING ETHERNET SIGNALS - It is provided a method for transmitting a wireless signal on Ethernet wiring The wireless signal is received in a hub unit for delivery to a remote unit In the hub unit the wireless signal is down converted to a down-converted frequency band for propagation on the Ethernet wiring A reference signal associated with a local oscillator used for the down conversion is embedded on a synchronous Ethernet stream that may include Ethernet data received at hub unit The synchronous Ethernet stream and the down converted wireless signal are submitted through the Ethernet wiring to the remote unit. The synchronous Ethernet stream may include data for management of electronic circuits installed in the remote unit, as well as a synchronization signal used thereof A converted replica of the first signal may be included in digital form in frames of the synchronous Ethernet stream07-14-2011
20080285506METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDICATING A TEMPORARY BLOCK FLOW TO WHICH A PIGGYBACKED ACKNOWLEDGEMENT/NON-ACKNOWLEDGEMENT FIELD IS ADDRESSED - A method and apparatus for indicating a temporary block flow (TBF) to which a piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) field is addressed. A PAN check sequence (PCS) is created, for example using a cyclic redundancy check (CRC) encoding. The PCS is masked with a temporary flow identity (TFI) assigned to a TBF or a mask generated based on the TFI. A data block including the PAN field and the masked PCS is then processed for transmission. The mask may be generated by converting the TFI using an (M, N) code, M being not greater than the number of bits of the PCS and N being the number of bits of the TFI. With this scheme, a TFI may be transmitted in a PAN field without using explicit bits to identify the TBF.11-20-2008
20090285157METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING VOICE CALL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND SYSTEM THEREOF - A system is provided that provides a voice call service over a Circuit Switching (CS) domain to a User Equipment (UE) that was receiving a service in a Packet Switching (PS) domain. A Mobile Management Entity (MME) sends a paging message to the UE to provide a service in the CS domain. The MME sends a suspend request message requesting suspension of the service being provided to the UE in the PS domain, upon receiving a report message indicating that the UE has switched to the CS domain. A gateway suspends the service in the PS domain upon receiving the suspend request message from the MME.11-19-2009
20090154396MOBILE COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - The present invention is to provide a mobile management communication system which can reduce the number of nodes involved in a packet delivery to a mobile terminal which has access to a home network compared to a packet delivery to a mobile terminal which is roaming and can perform a dynamic change to an anchor node suitable for a service, corresponding to a change of a service type required by a user.06-18-2009
20090262681METHOD OF PERFORMING RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of performing a random access procedure in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a random access preamble, receiving a random access response from a network as a response to the random access preamble, transmitting a connection request message comprising information on a temporary identifier, and receiving a contention resolution message from the network. The temporary identifier is randomly generated and the contention resolution message is addressed to the temporary identifier. Contentions between user equipments can be resolved through a temporary identifier occupying less radio resources in a random access procedure.10-22-2009
20090262686SESSION MANAGEMENT APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND SESSION CLEAR-OUT METHOD - Session management means holds session information concerning sessions for fixed terminals and sessions for mobile terminals including type information indicating a terminal type and status information indicating the status of communication. Session clear-out means disconnects a session the type information for which indicates a mobile terminal and in which communication has not been performed for a time period longer than or equal to a first monitoring time period, on the basis of the session information held in the session management means.10-22-2009
20090262687Wireless Communications Control Method, Wireless Base Station, And Wireless Terminal - The wireless base station sends control data relating to the processing, belonging to the upper layer (the second layer) of the first layer, to the wireless terminal through the downlink channel. Upon reception of the control data through the downlink data channel, the wireless terminal sends the response data, as a response to the control data, to the wireless base station through the control channel. The wireless base station detects the response data from the received data through the control channel, and then controls the processing belonging to the upper layer based on the response data. The above processing eliminates establishing a data channel to the wireless base station only for the response data as a response to the processing belonging to the upper layer.10-22-2009
20090262685METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MOBILE IP ROUTE OPTIMIZATION - The current application concerns a method, mobile node, home agent and system for route optimisation between a mobile node and at least one correspondent node in a packet switched network, wherein a route via a first home agent is redirected via a second home agent. The mobile node sends an extended home test initiation message comprising following information: authentication data, an address of the correspondent node, a first home address and a second home address. The first home agent receives the extended home test initiation message and sends an extended home test message to the second home agent, the extended home test message comprising the information from the extended home test initiation message. The second home agent receives the extended home test message and a communication is routed between the mobile node and the at least one correspondent node via the second home agent.10-22-2009
20090262680COMMUNICATION DEVICE, METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AN UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL MESSAGE, METHOD FOR RECEIVING AN UPLINK TRANSMISSION CONTROL MESSAGE - In an embodiment, a communication device is provided. The communication device may include a scheduling message generating circuit configured to generate a scheduling message such that the scheduling message includes a receiving scheduling information specifying when to receive an uplink transmission control message, the receiving scheduling information being defined depending on a configuration of an uplink transmission channel, an uplink transmission control message generating circuit configured to generate an uplink transmission control message to control an uplink transmission from another communication device via the uplink transmission channel, and a transmitter circuit configured to transmit the uplink transmission control message in accordance with the receiving scheduling information such that the uplink transmission control message is transmitted via an uplink transmission control downlink channel.10-22-2009
20090262679BROADCASTING SIGNAL RECEIVER AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING BROADCASTING SIGNAL - A broadcasting signal receiver and a method for transmitting/receiving a broadcasting signal are disclosed. An identifier of a cell is set in the broadcasting signal and, if the cell is changed, channel information of the changed cell can be obtained from program table information having the channel information of the cell. Accordingly, the broadcasting signal receiver can continuously output a program although the cell is changed.10-22-2009
20100097999Method and apparatus to enable multiple receivers - Briefly, a wireless communication device that includes a processor to enable a determined number of receivers of a MIMO system according to a value provided with a request to enable the receivers is provided. A method for enabling the receivers of MIMO system is also provided.04-22-2010
20090109900RADIO CONTROLLER, RADIO BASE STATION, RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, CALL ADMISSION CONTROL METHOD, PROGRAM AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a radio controller, a radio communication system, and a call admission control method, even when services such as a voice call service and a streaming service other than the best effort service are provided in communication using a shared channel, it is possible to admit a new call while guaranteeing a predetermined throughput for users in communication, the users receiving best effort services through the communication via the shared channel.04-30-2009
20090274100UPLINK RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Management of uplink resources in a wireless communication is presented. In one embodiment, management of uplink resources comprises receiving a multi-bit acknowledge (multi-bit A/N) that is available for uplink transmission and receiving other information that is available for uplink transmission along with the multi-bit A/N. Next, it is determined whether a condition has been met. If the condition has been met, an uplink message is created comprising the multi-bit A/N but dropping the other information. If the condition has not been met, an uplink message is created which jointly codes the multi-bit A/N and the other information. The uplink message is then transmitted to a receiver.11-05-2009
20090274098DATA TRANSMISSION METHOD AND DATA RETRANSMISSION METHOD - A method which can reduce loss in data transmission is provided. A data block is prepared in a high-level layer and the data block is transmitted in a low-level layer. Status report information associated with reception or non-reception of the data block is received through the low-level layer. When a receiver fails to receive data transmitted from a transmitter, the transmitter can rapidly recognize the reception failure and can retransmit the data.11-05-2009
20090274102METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR EXTENDING MOBILE IP - Methods and apparatus for extending Mobile IP to enable a Mobile IP Home Agent to forward to a default proxy MN server when it does not have a current binding for a MN home address. This can be used to route traffic when the MN is absent and to add processes onto the Proxy MN server that enables application intelligence at the Proxy MN server to act on behalf of the MN when the MN so wishes, e.g., substituting for the MN while the MN is in sleep mode or otherwise unavailable.11-05-2009
20090274097INFORMATION TRANSMISSION TO AN AIRCRAFT - A system and a method for information transmission to an aircraft and for the subsequent provision of the information, which includes an information system for an aircraft including a receiver for receiving a message in a mobile communication standard from a ground system. The message contains a message header and a message body including information prepared with a further header. An interpreter analyses the further header of the message and separates the information, and at least one display device is provided for presenting the information. The receiver is connected to the display device by way of the interpreter so as to be able to communicate. The messages transmitted are, for example, SMS messages or MMS messages.11-05-2009
20090296637WIRELESS DEVICE AND METHOD OF TRANSMITTING UPLINK DATA AND BUFFER STATUS REPORTS IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The method provides buffer status reporting for the transmission of uplink data from a wireless device to a base station. Uncompressed data is stored in a first buffer of the wireless device. A buffer status report is transmitted from the wireless device to the base station, where the buffer status report contains information indicating an amount of the uncompressed data to be transmitted from the wireless device. The information is dependent on the amount of the uncompressed data stored in the first buffer.12-03-2009
20090296636TRANSCEIVING APPARATUS AND DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM FOR COMMUNICATION BASE STATIONS - A base station apparatus adaptive for antenna arrays including at least one radio frequency (RF) header module, at least one data processing apparatus, and transceiving apparatus for transceiving data between the at least one radio frequency (RF) header module and the at least one data processing apparatus. The transceiving apparatus includes an uplink module to group data received by the RF header module according to grouping configuration information, and to transfer the grouped data to the data processing apparatus; and a downlink module to degroup the data from the data processing apparatus according to the grouping configuration information, and to transfer the degrouped data to the RF header module. Also provided are methods of receiving and sending data, and a computer readable article of manufacture tangibly embodying computer readable instructions for executing a computer implemented method of sending and receiving data for a base station.12-03-2009
20090279479Wireless communication system and method of wireless communication - A wireless communication system is provided that includes a network and a plurality of access terminals. The plurality of access terminals includes a first group of access terminals configured to receive control information at a first data rate and send a response to the received control information, as well as a second group of access terminals configured to receive the control information at a second data rate and send a response to the received control information. The second data rate is higher than the first data rate. The network is configured to send the control information via a control channel at the first data rate and the second data rate, receive responses from the access terminals, and establish a traffic channel with at least one of the access terminals based on the control information and associated response from at least one of the access terminals.11-12-2009
20090279485Method and Apparatus for Network Imposed Packet Data Flow Control - A method and apparatus provide network-based flow control for mobile station having data connections to the network. In an exemplary embodiment, a Packet Control Function (PCF) in a Radio Access Network (RAN) requests that a Packet Data Serving Node (PDSN) in a Packet Core Network (PCN) turn flow control on and off as needed for mobile station data connections. That is, if the PCF receives data from the PDSN for delivery to a mobile station that the PCF determines to be unavailable, the PCF requests that data transfers from the PDSN be suspended for that mobile station. Such suspension avoids needless continued transfer of undeliverable data to the PCF. The PCF monitors or otherwise determines whether a flow-controlled mobile station has become available again and, if so, notifies the PDSN so that it can lift the suspension and resume data transfers as needed.11-12-2009
20090279482TECHNIQUES FOR ENHANCED BACKHAUL FLOW CONTROL - Techniques for enhanced backhaul flow control are provided. In an exemplary embodiment, a backhaul control system is described that comprises a base station controller (BSC), a backhaul network, and a base transceiver station (BTS). Each is responsive to data and messaging transmitted and received. In one aspect, the BTS includes a queue and a controller. The amount of data in a queue is adjusted by a controller based upon calculating a target queue size value. The controller non-uniformly adjusts the amount of data in a queue based upon a target queue size value which is based upon communication system parameters. The target queue size and amount of data in a queue is adjusted so as to reduce buffer underrun, decrease system latency, and increase communication system throughput.11-12-2009
20090279476FREQUENCY CORRECTION IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Methods and systems for correction of frequency errors in multi-carrier communication systems. The composite frequency error associated with the downlink signals are used to infer or derive the composite frequency error associated with the uplink signals, which are used to pre-compensate the uplink signals. Special signal components are transmitted by multiple base stations to facilitate frequency-error estimation and other system control functionalities at a mobile device. The mobile device carries out temporal, spatial, or spatial-temporal processing of the composite frequency errors associated with one or more base stations to determine the clock frequency error and the Doppler shift with respect to its serving base station.11-12-2009
20090268664COMMUNICATION ROUTE OPTIMIZATION METHOD AND COMMUNICATION ROUTE OPTIMIZATION CONTROL DEVICE - The present invention provides a technique to optimize communication route when two end nodes separated away from own home perform data communication with each other. According to this technique, a communication node (the initiator node 10-29-2009
20090285161METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING EVENTS IN TELECOMMUNICATION NETWORKS - Methods and systems are provided for reporting to subscribers, wireless network events in a plurality of formats and languages depending upon the particular subscriber group to which a wireless subscriber belongs. When a subscriber requests a call, a switching node in the network invokes a trigger that identifies a location register for routing the call and sends a route request to the location register While processing the route request, if the location register detects an event that would prevent the call from being routed, the location register identifies the subscriber group of the wireless subscriber and determines a directory number associated with the identified subscriber group and the detected event. The location register then returns the determined directory number to the switching node Using the determined directory number, the switching node establishes the call to a message node, where a message associated with the determined directory number is executed. Accordingly, the wireless network reports the detected event in a format and language that the wireless subscriber, or an entity attempting to communicate with the wireless subscriber, can recognize.11-19-2009
20090285159LOAD BALANCING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for selecting a serving sector for a terminal based on server selection information in order to balance the load of sectors in a wireless communication system are described. The server selection information for each sector may be set based on the load of the sector and may be used to rank the sector for selection as a serving sector. In one design, a terminal may receive server selection information for multiple sectors. The server selection information for each sector may include an offset used to adjust a measurement made by the terminal for the sector, a priority of the sector for selection as a serving sector, a DRCLock set based on the load of the sector, etc. The terminal may determine received signal qualities of the sectors. The terminal may then select one of the sectors as a serving sector based on the server selection information and the received signal qualities of the sectors.11-19-2009
20090285158DYNAMIC COVERAGE ADJUSTMENT IN A MULTI-CARRIER COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for dynamically varying coverage in a multi-carrier communication system are described. A sector may operate on multiple carriers. The sector may vary coverage on a given carrier k based on its load, so that less interference may be caused to other sectors when the sector load is light. In one design, the sector may communicate on a first carrier at a first transmit power level and on a second carrier at a second transmit power level equal to or lower than the first transmit power level. The sector may vary the second transmit power level based on its load to vary the coverage of the second carrier. The sector may reduce the second transmit power level to zero or a low level if the sector load is light. The sector may also vary the second transmit power level based on a function of sector load or a switching pattern.11-19-2009
20090285156METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR SCHEDULING SDMA CODEBOOKS - A method for scheduling an SDMA codebook includes: selecting, by a user, a most matching precoding matrix and a minimally interfering cluster in the SDMA codebook according to Channel State Information, CSI, of the user; calculating a data transmission rate supportable when the user undergoes interference caused by the minimally interfering cluster; and feeding back an index of the most matching precoding matrix, an index of the minimally interfering cluster, and the data transmission rate to a base station. An apparatus and system for scheduling an SDMA codebook is also provided.11-19-2009
20110199974METHOD AND COMMUNICATION TERMINAL FOR IMPLEMENTING A VOICE SERVICE THROUGH A WIRELESS NETWORK - The present invention discloses a method and a communication terminal for implementing a voice service through a wireless network. The method includes: generating a request for a voice service according to a voice service access code and generating a trigger signal according to the request; setting up a connection with the wireless network according to the trigger signal; performing network registration for the voice service; and processing a call of the voice service through the network connection after the network registration is successful. The technical solution of the present invention overcomes the conflict between Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) and dial-on-demand when VoIP traffic is carried over a Packet Switched (PS) network, so that no radio bandwidth is wasted and that the user can use VoIP at any time with no need to modify the network.08-18-2011
20100220655METHOD AND A MOBILE PHONE TERMINAL ENABLING TO MERGE TELEPHONY SERVICES OVER HETEROGENEOUS NETWORKS - A method to merge telephony services over a circuit switched network (09-02-2010
20100220651Method and apparatus for broadcasting and receiving system information in OFDMA systems - A method for broadcasting system information via a broadcast channel (BCH) in an OFDMA system is provided. The BCH comprises one or more two-dimensional resource blocks. A plurality of pilot tones and a plurality of data tones are positioned within each resource block. The system information is mapped onto the plurality of data tones. In one embodiment, the plurality of pilot tones are located in configurable positions such that pilot tones of the same resource blocks transmitted by different base stations in the OFDMA system are interlaced to reduce pilot-to-pilot collision. In another embodiment, data tones that are located in pilot positions of other adjacent cells are nullified to reduce data-to-pilot collision. In one novel aspect, the property of interlaced pilot patterns and tone nullification is leveraged to estimate interference second-order statistics, which facilitates receiver implementation and improves receiver performance.09-02-2010
20100220647METHOD OF OPERATING A COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND SYSTEM,A COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND A SYSTEM INCLUDING THE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - A communication system, such as UMTS, comprises a scheduler (09-02-2010
20090290538METHOD OF TRANSMITTING CONTROL SIGNAL IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a control signal in a wireless communication system is provided. The method includes acquiring a resource index, the number of cyclic shifts (CSs) and a CS interval, wherein the number of CSs is an integer multiple of the CS interval, determining a CS index based on the number of CSs and the CS interval, generating a cyclically shifted sequence by cyclically shifting a base sequence by a CS amount obtained from the CS index, generating a modulated sequence based on the cyclically shifted sequence and a symbol for a control signal and transmitting the modulated sequence after mapping the modulated sequence to a resource block obtained from the resource index.11-26-2009
20110170487Method and Apparatus for Data Communication Between a Base Station and a Transponder - A method and system for data communication between a base station and at least one transponder via a high-frequency electromagnetic carrier signal onto which information packets are modulated. Each information packet has a header section, a middle section, and a trailer section. The header section can be provided in a forward link of a data communication between the base station and the transponders for controlling data communication. The header section is used in a return link of a data communication in order to transmit information from the transponder to the base station.07-14-2011
20110170485RADIO APPARATUS - A control unit, in cooperation with an interface (IF) unit, a modulation unit and a baseband processing unit, produces a packet signal composed of a plurality of streams. While using as a reference a first known signal assigned to one of the plurality of streams and performing a cyclic timing shift within the first known signal on a first known signal assigned to another stream, the control unit performs a timing shift also on an extensional known signal assigned to a stream where no data is assigned. The amounts of timing shift are given degrees of priority beforehand and for the stream where data signals are assigned the control unit uses the amounts of timing shift in descending degree of priority. For the stream where no data signal is assigned, the control unit uses the amounts of timing shift also in descending degree of priority.07-14-2011
20090103475TELECOMMUNICATION AND MULTIMEDIA MANAGEMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS - The present invention is directed to a node for transmitting data over a network. The node includes a first ascertaining element configured to ascertain the need to transmit one or more data streams from the node to a second node over the network, the one or more data streams including time-based media that is generated either locally or remotely on the network. The node also includes a second ascertaining element configured to ascertain a timeliness preference for reviewing the one or more data streams by one or more recipients respectively. The ascertained timeliness preference for each one of the data streams is either (a) time-sensitive where at least one recipient of the one data stream has indicated an intent to review the one data stream in a near real-time mode as received by the recipient over the network while the time-based media of the one data stream is being generated or (b) less-than time-sensitive. The node further includes a transmitter that transmits the one or more data streams using either a first transmission technique or a second transmission technique, depending on the ascertained timeliness preference of each data stream. The first transmission technique is used for the less-than time-sensitive preference data streams, whereas the second transmission technique is used for data streams with the time-sensitive preference. The first technique uses a larger first packetization interval, which is defined as the amount of time based media contained in each packet, compared to the second packetization interval used by the second technique.04-23-2009
20090103477GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A communication device for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems. The communication device includes a persistent storage device configured persistently store the voice media either generated when using the communication device or received over the network at the communication device. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting a live conversation, the communication device transmits voice media from persistent storage and stores received voice media in persistent storage at the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced during the back and forth transmissions of a conversation, the persistent storage of both transmitted and received media of a conversation provides the ability to extend the useful range of wireless networks beyond what is required for live conversations. In addition, the capacity and robustness in not being affected by external interferences for both wired and wireless communications is improved.04-23-2009
20090296632NOVEL DISTRIBUTED BASE STATION ARCHITECTURE - A novel distributed base station architecture having a multiplexer. The base station transmits base station controller interface data over an internet protocol (IP) communication channel. The multiplexer receives the data and combines it with other base station controller interface data to form a single base station controller interface data signal.12-03-2009
20090086663Selecting Aggregation Nodes in a Network - In one embodiment, a method includes determining, at a local node in a network of multiple nodes, a first neighbor node of one or more neighbor nodes with which the local node is in direct communication based on a first number of nodes with which the first neighbor node is in direct communication. The first neighbor node is selected as an aggregation node for information about the local node. The aggregation node outputs data that is a combination of data received from multiple different nodes. The method allows wireless routers in mobile ad hoc networks to automatically determine their own aggregation nodes for routing information and thus automatically enables routing protocols to scale for many thousands of mobile wireless nodes.04-02-2009
20090168702METHODS, SYSTEMS, AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCTS FOR IMPLEMENTING A VIRTUAL POSTING SERVICE - Methods, systems, and computer program products for implementing virtual posting services. Methods include receiving content from a communications device located in a geographic proximity that is serviced by an access node, storing the content in a storage device that is in communication with the access node, and tracking an amount of time the content item is stored. If the amount of time does not reach a pre-established threshold, the methods include transmitting the content to another communications device in response to detecting the presence of the other communications device within the geographic proximity and in response to an inquiry from the other communications device.07-02-2009
20090268665Method and Apparatus for Locating MediaFLO Capable Wireless Devices - Estimating a current location of a receiver in a MediaFLO™ (Forward Link Only) mobile multimedia multicast system comprises receiving digital signals comprising a MediaFLO™ superframe comprising orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols; performing slot 10-29-2009
20110205965VIRTUAL PERIPHERAL HUB DEVICE AND SYSTEM - Methods and devices provide a virtual peripheral hub and services enabling remote access to peripherals commonly connected to personal computers in a manner that simplifies device networking. A virtual peripheral hub device may include a processor and wireless communication transceivers configured to connect to cellular and/or WiFi networks to access a remote server, and wired and/or wireless local networks for connecting to peripheral devices. The virtual peripheral hub device may plug into a power source (e.g., a wall socket or cigarette lighter), connect to a peripheral device, and be configured to enable any computer attached to a local area network or the Internet to use or access the peripheral device. An associated server-based service enables discovery of the virtual peripheral hub device and connected peripherals. The associated server-based server may provide the drivers for various peripherals, store and forward data, and provide remote access to the various peripherals.08-25-2011
20110205964TIMED FINGERPRINT LOCATING FOR IDLE-STATE USER EQUIPMENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and techniques for determining the location of user equipment (UE) in a wireless network are disclosed. These techniques leverage geometric calculations for an overlaid bin grid framework mapping the wireless network area to store differential values for each frame of the bin grid framework for each pair of relevant NodeBs. A timing offset can be determined, such that when a time value from a target UE is accessed, the location can be quickly determined with minimal real time computation. In an aspect, the time value from an idle-state target UE can be accessed. The target UE time value can be searched among pre-computed differential value data sets indexed by relevant NodeB site pairs to return sets of frames that can facilitate converging on a location for the target UE. Intersecting frames can represent the geographic location of the UE in the wireless network. Further, the data can be leveraged to correct timing in the network.08-25-2011
20100118773USER DEVICE, BASE STATION, AND METHOD - A disclosed user device generates an uplink control channel including at least one of acknowledgement information and a channel quality indicator regarding downlink and transmits the uplink control channel via a dedicated frequency band when no resource is allocated for transmission of an uplink data channel. The uplink control channel includes multiple unit blocks constituting a subframe and each of the unit blocks includes a sequence generated by multiplying all chips of an orthogonal code sequence assigned to the user device by the same factor.05-13-2010
20100110993SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MULTI-NETWORK COVERAGE - A system and method are provided for a multi-network wireless communications access terminal (AT) to access multi-network coverage. The method registers a multi-network AT in a first communications network. In response to registering with the first network, the AT receives information via the first network that is required for accessing a second communications network (e.g., an IEEE 802.20 or 1xEV-DO network). The AT obtains services accessed via the second network, in response to the access information received via the first network. For example, the second network access information may be system information, channel information, or access point parameters. The AT retains the option of obtaining services accessed via the first network if the second network cannot be accessing the second network.05-06-2010
20100110987SELECTION OF WIRELESS NETWORK IN CONJUNCTION WITH SELECTION OF A WIRELESS CELL SET - An access terminal may switch to a different mode of wireless network selection as a result of manual selection of a wireless cell set (e.g., a closed subscriber group) associated with one or more wireless cells. For example, if the user of an access terminal selects a closed subscriber group in a wireless network that is different than the current wireless network, the access terminal may enter a manual mode of wireless network selection, select the wireless network corresponding to the closed subscriber group, and register on a closed subscriber group cell in the selected wireless network. In addition, an access terminal may automatically switch to a different mode of wireless network selection (e.g., the prior mode) upon losing coverage of a wireless cell set. An access terminal may also automatically select a cell of a wireless cell set if the access terminal returns to a cell of the cell set within a defined period of time after losing coverage of the cell set. Furthermore, an access terminal may return to a prior wireless network upon losing coverage of a wireless cell set.05-06-2010
20110199966CLUSTERING MANAGEMENT IN mmWAVE WIRELESS SYSTEMS - According to various embodiments, a method is disclosed that includes detecting if a first cluster capable PCP/AP is within range of a non-PCP/non-AP STA; and transmitting a message to a second cluster capable PCP/AP associated with the non-PCP/non-AP STA requesting that the second cluster capable PCP/AP start or continue the use of clustering in a basic service set (BSS) of the second cluster capable PCP/AP.08-18-2011
20100110985WINDOW CONTROL AND RETRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD AND TRANSMITTING-SIDE APPARATUS - In a retransmission control method, a transmitting-side apparatus manages an acknowledgement information reception window; and the transmitting-side apparatus does not perform the window control processing and the retransmission control processing of a packet on the basis of the acknowledgement information for a sequence number of the packet which is included in the acknowledgement information received from the receiving-side apparatus, when the sequence number takes a value outside a range of the acknowledgement information reception window.05-06-2010
20110199965RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND RADIO APPARATUS - After checking a status of frequency band usage of a primary system by preliminary sensing, a master node transmits to slave nodes a sensing request containing a target frequency band for cooperative sensing. The slave nodes perform spectrum sensing according to specified parameters and send, as responses, results thereof to the master node. The master node collectively receives these results, comprehensively determines the sensing results of the slave nodes, and makes a final determination on whether or not the target frequency band is available.08-18-2011
20110199963Systems and Methods for Managing PDP Contexts in a Wireless Data Communications Network - Systems and method are for managing packet data protocol (PDP) contexts in a wireless data communications network. A plurality of real-time applications are prioritized within a single, shared PDP context or allocated a second PDP context based upon priority levels logically assigned to the plurality of applications such that high priority applications are delivered before lower priority applications. Lower priority applications are suspended and interrupted by higher priority applications and are set to resume after the higher priority applications are completed. Priority levels are established by a priority management engine (PME) that may reside in one or more network elements, such as a General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) Support Node or a network probe system. The priority management engine establishes the priority levels based upon one or more factors including, for example, PDP utilization characteristics at a given time and/or given network location, and/or user preferences.08-18-2011
20110199962METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS TECHNOLOGY SELECTION - A method and system for selecting at a terminal at least one of a plurality of available access networks for use with a wireless application invoked at the terminal according preferences associated with the wireless application, the network service provider, the subscriber, the subscriber subscription and application content provider. The selection may be constrained by an Application Policy received from a network service provider08-18-2011
20110199961METHOD FOR PROVIDING A CONTENTION BASED UPLINK CHANNEL - A method, a mobile system, and a user communication device are disclosed. A receiving unit 08-18-2011
20100103869TRANSFERRING DATA IN A MOBILE TELEPHONY NETWORK - A mobile telephony network comprises base stations operating according to a predetermined standard. A transfer node allows the transfer of data from a first base station to a second base station in the mobile telephone network. Data is sent from the first base station to a data receiver of the data transfer node via a first wireless communications channel complying with the said standard. The received data is transferred via an interface within the transfer node to a data sender of the data transfer node. The data sender sends the transferred data to the second base station via a second wireless communications channel complying with the said standard. The interface within the transfer node does not comply with the operating standard because it transfers data only within the node. Data may be sent from the second base station to the first base station via the node in similar manner. Preferably, the receiver appears to the first base station to be a relay and the sender appears to the second base station to be a user terminal.04-29-2010
20100103882EARLY TERMINATION OF LOW DATA RATE TRAFFIC IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Systems and techniques are disclosed relating to wireless communications, and more specifically, to various systems and techniques for early termination of low rate traffic in a wireless network. A physical layer packet (PLP) grouping factor K configures the PLP into K groups and an ACK/NACK is received on each group.04-29-2010
20100103877SYSTEMS AND METHODS PROVIDING MOBILE TRANSMIT DIVERSITY - A method for use by a remote unit in an Evolution Data Optimized (EVDO) network includes sending transmissions to a base station, each of the transmissions corresponding to a respective one of multiple hypotheses of multiple antenna usage. The method also includes receiving feedback from the base station in response to the transmissions, the feedback being uninformed of multiple antenna usage and using the feedback to select at least one of the hypotheses. The method further includes transmitting data using a multiple-antenna scheme associated with the selected hypotheses.04-29-2010
20100103876MOBILE TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION MANAGEMENT DEVICE - A technology is disclosed for actualizing flow filtering associated with a packet destined for a mobile terminal while minimizing processes performed by the mobile terminal in a network environment in which a network-based mobility protocol is operating. In the technology, a mobile node 04-29-2010
20100103870CONTEXT-AWARE PACKET SWITCHING - Embodiments of a communication system, a method, and a device for use with the communication system are described. Communication between the devices in the communication system may be enabled by the method. In particular, nodes or devices (henceforth referred to as devices) in a network (such as an ad-hoc network) in the communication system may exchange a dynamic network context via communication with neighboring devices. These devices may use the dynamic network context to determine how network resources are shared during the communication, including performing context-aware packet switching of packets (including data packets) in an information flow.04-29-2010
20120294243WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO BASE STATION AND COOPERATIVE CONTROL METHOD - A wireless communication system comprises: a plurality of first radio base stations that each includes data in frames and uses a frequency in a predetermined frequency band to transmit the frames to a first terminal that is present in its own cover are; and a second radio base station that has as its own cover area the same areas as the cover areas of the plurality of first radio base stations and that includes data in frames and uses a frequency in the predetermined frequency band to transmit the frames to a second terminal that is present in its own cover area. Each of the first radio base stations reports to the second radio base station the transmission timing of frames to the first terminal, and the second radio base station synchronizes the transmission timing of transmitting frames to the second terminal with the reported transmission timing.11-22-2012
20120294235SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGING CONTENT EXCHANGES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK USING A LISTENER MODULE - A system and method for managing content exchanges in a wireless network using a listener module. A listener module receives a message broadcast by a string broadcast station. The string broadcast station message includes a network information string. The listener module also receives a message broadcast by a wireless station. The wireless station message includes the MAC address of the wireless station. The listener module associates the network information string with the MAC address of the wireless station and stores the pair a list server device. The wireless station may then request a list from the list server device of network information strings associated with the MAC address of the wireless station.11-22-2012
20120294241System for transmitting high throughput data between multiple devices - A system for transmitting data directly between a plurality of client network devices in a network having an Access Point (“AP”) device separate from the plurality of client network devices is disclosed. The system may include a first client network device having a first client (“STA”) module and a second client network device of the plurality of client network devices.11-22-2012
20120294240COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROCESSOR - A communication device on the transmission side includes: a converting device configured to perform equivalent conversion on a part of the plurality of data signals; and a weighting device configured to previously cancel at least a part of interferences among the plurality of streams spatially multiplexed, with respect to at least a part of the plurality of data signals.11-22-2012
20120294239Method and Arrangement for Network Nodes of a Wireless Communication Network - A method of operating a wireless network node of a wireless communication network is disclosed. The wireless network nodes have at least first and second downlink transmission modes, the first downlink transmission mode comprising normal operation of a particular network node and being applicable when a number of active terminals in a cell associated with the particular network node is greater than a first mode threshold value, and the second downlink transmission mode comprising restricted downlink transmission of the particular network node and being applicable when the number of active terminals in the cell associated with the particular network node is less than or equal to a second mode threshold value. The method comprises transmitting a signal indicative of a current downlink transmission mode of the wireless network node. Corresponding computer program product and arrangement are also disclosed.11-22-2012
20120294237SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DYNAMICALLY CONFIGURING NODE BEHAVIOR IN A SENSOR NETWORK - The present disclosure generally pertains to systems and methods for controlling sensor networks. A sensor network has a plurality of sensor nodes, which have sensors for monitoring operational parameters of devices within an application-specific system. A wireless communication module is provided for each node to enable the node to wirelessly communicate with other nodes of the network. A user defines various scripts for controlling the behavior of one or more nodes, and the network distributes the scripts, as appropriate, to various nodes thereby implementing the behavior defined by the scripts. Accordingly, a user can easily and dynamically configure or re-configure the behavior of any node without having to physically access the node that is being configured or re-configured.11-22-2012
20120294236METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USING CONTROL PLANE TO TRANSMIT AND RECEIVE DATA - Methods and apparatus are described for transmitting and receiving data by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) over the control plane. The methods may receive data without the use of an Internet Protocol (IP) address. In an example method, a WTRU may enter an evolved packet system (EPS) mobility management (EMM)-registered control plane only (CPO) state after receiving an attach accepted message for CPO operation, and enter an EMM-deregistered state after receiving a detach message, a tracking area update (TAU) reject message or an attach reject message. In another method, a WTRU may switch between operational modes that use an IP address and a user plane to transmit and receive data, and the CPO mode.11-22-2012
20120294233Long-Range Nodes with Adaptive Preambles for Coexistence - Wireless protocols in the unlicensed spectrum are developed for different requirements in terms of transmit range and power, which makes it difficult for multiple nodes having disparate transmit ranges to coexist in the same unlicensed spectrum. A short-range wireless node uses adaptive preambles to signal presence to long-range wireless nodes outside of its transmit range. In addition, a long-range wireless node detects an adapter preamble and backs-off transmissions for reservation period dedicated to short-range nodes.11-22-2012
20120294232SHORT-RANGE NODES WITH ADAPTIVE PREAMBLES FOR COEXISTENCE - Wireless protocols in the unlicensed spectrum are developed for different requirements in terms of transmit range and power, which makes it difficult for multiple nodes having disparate transmit ranges to coexist in the same unlicensed spectrum. A short-range wireless node uses adaptive preambles to signal presence to long-range wireless nodes outside of its transmit range. In addition, a long-range wireless node detects an adapter preamble and backs-off transmissions for reservation period dedicated to short-range nodes.11-22-2012
20120294231WI-FI ACCESS POINT CHARACTERISTICS DATABASE - A method and apparatus for determining characteristics of an access point device are disclosed. The method includes determining, at a first device, a characteristic of the access point device. At the first device, a signal is received from the access point device. The retrieved signal is communicated to a first database. In response to the communication, characteristic information is received from the first database. The characteristic information includes an estimate of the characteristic of the access point device including manufacturing information of the access point device.11-22-2012
20110205973WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - Disclosed is a wireless communication apparatus that can improve the efficiency of using data resources, while suppressing the increase in CM of transport signals in a wireless communication system in which single-carrier transmissions and multi-cluster transmissions are coexistent. In this apparatus, a multiplex manner deciding unit (08-25-2011
20110205972APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING A MAC PDU BASED ON MAC HEADER TYPE INFORMATION - An Apparatus and methods for communicating in a wireless access system using a medium access control protocol data unit (MAC PDU) is disclosed. The method comprises steps of receiving, by a mobile station (MS) from a base station (BS), a dynamic service addition request (AAI_DSA-REQ) message requesting to create a service flow, wherein the AAI_DSA-REQ message comprises a first MAC header type parameter indicating a type of a MAC header included in the MAC PDU of the service flow and a flow identifier (FID) identifying a connection associated with the service flow; transmitting, by the MS to the BS, a dynamic service addition response (AAI_DSA-RSP) message in response to the AAI_DSA-REQ message, wherein the AAI_DSA-RSP message comprises a second MAC header type parameter indicating the type of a MAC header included in the MAC PDU of the service flow; and communicating with the BS using the MAC PDU comprising the MAC header indicated by the second MAC header type parameter; wherein the MAC header type parameter indicates one of a generic MAC header (GMH) for general data packet transmission and a short-packet MAC header (SPMH) for small data packet transmission and a non-ARQ connection.08-25-2011
20110205969COMMUNICATION USING DIRECTIONAL ANTENNAS - Method and apparatus having a beamforming antenna generates a plurality of directional antenna beams. A discovery beacon is generated for use in associating with a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU). The discovery beacon is transmitted to a plurality of sectors using coarsely focused directional antenna beams. A WTRU may receive one of the coarsely focused directional antenna beams, and may then transmit a response message. Finely focused directional antenna beams are establishing for packet data transmission. A periodic beacon may then be transmitted to the WTRU using one of the coarsely focused directional antenna beams.08-25-2011
20110205967METHOD FOR SYNCHRONOUSLY MAINTAINING PDP CONTEXT STATUS BETWEEN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND MOBILE STATION AND ASSOCIATED MOBILE STATION - A method for synchronously maintaining packet data protocol (PDP) context status between a wireless communication network and a mobile station and an associated mobile station are disclosed to prevent from the asynchronous PDP context status caused by the prior arts. When both the mobile station and the network activate a PDP context for a packet-switched service, if the mobile station is to establish a circuit-switched connection with the network, the mobile station will request the network to suspend the packet-switched service. After the circuit-switched connection is established, the mobile station locally deactivates the PDP context. After the circuit-switched connection is disconnected, if the network informs the mobile station that the packet-switched service is resumed, the mobile station will inform the network that the PDP context is deactivated.08-25-2011
20110205966RADIO TRANSMISSION DEVICE AND RADIO TRANSMISSION METHOD - Provided are a radio transmission device and a radio transmission method which can suppress lowering of the throughput caused by switching between the single carrier communication method and the multi-carrier communication method while suppressing increase of the signaling amount. A PHR threshold value setting unit (08-25-2011
20110205963System and Method for Reduced Feedback in Multiuser Multiple Input, Multiple Output Wireless Communications - A system and method for reduced feedback in MU-MIMO communications is provided. A method for transmitter operations includes transmitting a pilot signal, receiving channel information feedback from a set of K communications devices served by a transmitter, where K is a non-negative integer value and K≧2, selecting M communications devices out of the set of K communications devices, where M is a non-negative integer value and M≦K, computing a precoder for each of the M selected communications devices based on the channel information feedback, and simultaneously transmitting information to the M selected communications devices. The channel information feedback includes partial information for a communications channel between the transmitter and a communications device, the selecting being based on the channel information feedback, and the information transmitted to each communications device in the M selected communications devices being precoded using a computed precoder associated with the communications device.08-25-2011
20110205961CARRIER SENSE MULTIPLE ACCESS (CSMA) PROTOCOL WITH MULTI-PACKET RECEPTION (MPR) IN A WIRELESS AD HOC NETWORK - This invention relates to systems and methods for communication in a wireless ad hoc network that employs multi-packet reception. The wireless network includes a transmitting node configured to transmit a control packet to a receiving node while other nodes within a transmission range of the transmitting node are involved in ongoing communication. The receiving node is configured to receive the control packet while simultaneously receiving a second packet from a second transmitting node, and to process the control packet without aborting the receiving of the second packet. Methods for transmitting and receiving multiple packets simultaneously are also presented.08-25-2011
20100061310COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM PROVIDING EXTENSIBLE PROTOCOL TRANSLATION FEATURES AND RELATED METHODS - A communications system may include a plurality of data storage devices each using at least one of a plurality of different operating protocols, and a plurality of mobile wireless communications devices for accessing the plurality of data storage devices. Each mobile wireless communications device may also use at least one of the plurality of different operating protocols. The system may further include a protocol interface device. In particular, the protocol interface device may include a protocol engine module for communicating with the plurality of data storage devices using respective operating protocols, and a front-end proxy module coupled to the protocol engine. The front-end proxy module may include a respective proxy module for communicating with the plurality of mobile wireless communications devices using each different operating protocol, and at least one common core service module connected to the proxy modules.03-11-2010
20100061309METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY ACROSS HETEROGENEOUS ADDRESS SPACES - A mobile node includes a processor, a network interface, and a storage device having computer program code for execution by the processor. The computer program code includes a network layer for transmitting and receiving packets and an intermediate driver that transmits packets to the network layer and receives packets from the network layer using a virtual interne protocol (IP) address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver transmits packets to the network interface and receives packets from the network interface using a routable actual IP address to identify the mobile node. The intermediate driver permits the actual IP address to change when the mobile node moves from a first subnet to a second subnet without a corresponding change in the virtual IP address. A corresponding NAT associates the virtual IP address with a second actual IP address when the NAT is notified that the mobile node is in the second subnet.03-11-2010
20100061308MANAGEMENT OF MOBILE TERMINALS IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ALLOWING FOR MULTIPLE-TRACKING AREA REGISTRATION - The invention relates to a method and network control node for detecting the point of attachment of mobile terminals moving within a mobile communication network in idle mode, wherein the mobile communication system can be logically divided into plural tracking areas to which the mobile terminals register. Further, the invention relates to a method for enabling management of mobile terminals in idle mode receiving a service within such mobile communication system. Moreover, the invention relates to a method and mobile terminal for updating the mobile terminal's tracking area registration in a mobile communication system being logically divided into plural tracking areas, wherein mobile terminal is in idle mode and is registered to plural tracking areas simultaneously. The invention suggests different mechanism how to detect terminals registering to plural tracking area, how to verify their current location in the network and how to use these information, for example for resource management.03-11-2010
20100061307Method and apparatus for supporting multiple MAC versions in broadband wireless communication system - A method and an apparatus are configured to support a plurality of Media Access Control (MAC) versions in a broadband wireless communication system. An operating method of a terminal to support the multiple MAC versions in the broadband wireless communication system includes receiving a message comprising information of one or more MAC versions supported by a base station, from the base station; and sending information of one or more MAC versions supported by the terminal, to the base station using a message. Thus, in the wireless environment where the multiple MAC versions are mixed, the MAC version can be matched.03-11-2010
20100061306CELL SEARCH METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A cell search method and apparatus for an asynchronous mobile communication system are provided. A Secondary Synchronization Code (SSC) correlator despreads a signal at every slot boundary in accordance with a z-sequence to output a SSC correlation value. The signal is received over a first symbol duration. A Primary Synchronization Code (PSC) correlator despreads the received signal in accordance with a PSC to output a PSC correlation value. A dot product calculator performs dot product calculation between the SSC correlation value and the PSC correlation value to output a correlation result of the SSC. A frame synchronization detector extracts frame synchronization information from the correlation result.03-11-2010
20100061304COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND POSITION MANAGING APPARATUS - A mobile node includes a plurality of transceivers, has a network conforming to network-based mobility as its home link and performs position registration to a positional managing apparatus and performs position registration to the position managing apparatus through a foreign network by position registration conforming to host-based mobility. In mobile node and position managing apparatus, a plurality of routes passing through the home link and the foreign link are established. Accordingly, when the mobile node has the plurality of transceivers, it can simultaneously connect to the home link and the foreign link through respective transceivers, to perform communication.03-11-2010
20100061300Method and Apparatus for Linking Mobile Communication Devices to Wireless Networks in Underground Edifices - An apparatus for linking mobile communication devices to wireless networks in underground edifices includes a plurality of base stations which are arranged at a spatial distance from one another inside tunnel systems, substantially in the direction of the tunnel axes, such that the reception areas of two adjacent base stations overlap as little as possible. All base stations operate on a single common channel. In a method used for the apparatus, the mobile station switches to an adjacent base station when a quality signal drops below a predetermined threshold value.03-11-2010
20100061296PACKET TRANSFER CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE TERMINAL AND HOME AGENT USED IN ITS METHOD - A technology is disclosed for providing a packet transfer control method that can transmit a DU message to a specific CN or a specific flow to prompt a change in destination, while maintaining a transfer request to a CoA from a HA. In the technology, when a home agent receives a packet addressed to a mobile terminal from a predetermined communication terminal, the mobile terminal transmits a second message to the home agent, the second message including information required for the home agent to transmit a first message to the predetermined communication terminal. The first message states that a currently used address addressed to the mobile terminal cannot be used. The home agent generates the first message based on the information included in the second message and transmits the generated first message to the predetermined communication terminal.03-11-2010
20100061298MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To prevent a collision from occurring at the time of random access in cases such as handover, response to paging and the like where a mobile station apparatus performs random access in response to directions from a base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus 03-11-2010
20100061297METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA PACKETS USING DIFFERENT FREQUENCY REUSE FACTORS - The method for transmitting a data signal including a plurality of data packets from a base station to a radio device comprises the steps of: subdividing each data packet into at least a first data sub-packet and a second data sub-packet; transmitting simultaneously the first data sub-packet on a first portion of total resources, having a first reuse frequency factor, and the second data sub-packet on at least one second portion of total resources having second reuse factor, said first reuse factor being different from said second reuse factor.03-11-2010
20100061299DYNAMIC NETWORKING SPECTRUM REUSE TRANSCEIVER - Systems and methods are disclosed for the operation of a network of cognitive radios in a dynamic network topology. The systems and methods make use cross-layer communications to input parameters required by network services into a reasoning engine, which in turns processes the parameter the parameter information and reports linguistic results to the network services. The cross-layer communications are leveraged to shift network service functionality to the MAC or PHY Layers. Route discovery functionality is shifted from routing services down to the MAC or PHY Layers. The route discovery functionality is implemented by a process to elect a relay node based on the number of available channels that each of the source node neighbors has available to communicate with other neighbors.03-11-2010
20100290398Unifying Local and Mobility Network Identifiers - In a mobility domain providing wired and wireless network transport to an enterprise or campus environment, a mobility switch maps a logical network identifier, such as a VLAN ID, to a “home” or wired network VLAN ID so that a mobile device is mapped to the wired VLAN for user identification, IP address consistency, and network policy enforcement. Propagation of the mapping to mobility switches ensures that a roaming user is mapped to the wired network VLAN from a remote L2 switch, and mobility tunnels across L3 boundaries allow roaming into a different broadcast domain or L3 switch connectivity in the mobility domain. Users are assigned to mobility VLAN(s) which are mapped to a VLAN in the wired domain at a mobility switch. The wireless users can roam within the wireless enterprise, or mobility domain, and the network maintains access to the user assigned mobility VLAN(s).11-18-2010
20100128672TRANSMITTER APPARATUS, RECEIVER APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A transmitter apparatus (05-27-2010
20110268034METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING CSG ID IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for transmitting a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Identifier (ID) in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes information about a number of one or more CSG IDs that the BS has and information about a list of the one or more CSG IDs in a Secondary-SuperFrame Header (S-SFH), and transmitting the S-SFH.11-03-2011
20110268031SYSTEM AND METHOD OF ENCODING AND DECODING CONTROL INFORMATION IN A MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT - Methods and apparatuses are provided for transmitting and receiving a MAC PDU. The MAC PDU including a MAC header, an extended header group and a payload is generated. The MAC PDU is transmitted to a receiving device. The extended header group includes a first field that indicates whether at least one extended header is included in the extended header group, and a second field that indicates a length of the extended header group.11-03-2011
20110268018GATEWAY, BASE STATION, COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SYNCHRONIZATION METHOD THEREOF - Discloses is a gateway, base station, communication network and synchronization method thereof. The method comprises: at time T11-03-2011
20110268019USING JOINT DECODING ENGINE IN A WIRELESS DEVICE - A method for using a joint decoding engine in a wireless device is disclosed. A first symbol stream and a second symbol stream in a received multiple input multiple output (MIMO) signal is determined. A scaled channel estimate for a wireless transmission channel and a scaled noise covariance of the MIMO signal are also determined. The scaled channel estimate and the first symbol stream are whitened. Max log maximum a posteriori (MLM) processing is performed on the whitened first symbol stream to produce a first data stream. The first data stream may be de-rate matched and decoded to produce a decoded first data stream.11-03-2011
20100135200PROVIDING USER-SPOT (U-SPOT) SERVICES IN A COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication device may be utilized to establish a localized user network that is accessible by client devices when the client devices are communicatively coupled to the mobile communication device. The mobile communication device is then operable to determine services that may be provided in the user network to the client devices, and to advertise these services within the user network. The services comprise network and/or data accessibility, and bandwidth availability. Mobile communication devices are also operable to provide, directly or via local and/or remote resources, additional services, comprising audio/video processing capability, storage, and/or processing. Offering of services in user networks is incentivized to the mobile communication devices and/or to client devices. Incentives comprise offering pay and/or credit to the mobile communication devices. Providing access to, blocking, limiting and/or modifying available/offered services is managed in U-Spot networks, based on incentives and/or availability of resources.06-03-2010
20100290393COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a communication terminal that is capable of securing a route having the finest state while suppressing a bandwidth that is consume by a transmission of a control packet at a low level, when applied in an ad-hoc network which uses an electrical power line. The communication terminal included in the ad-hoc network acquires a plurality of route candidates at the beginning of a data transmission by conducting a broadcast transmission of a route creation packet, and acquires a route having the finest state by conducting an unicast transmission of a route estimation packet to each of the route candidates in each predetermined period.11-18-2010
20100128676Carrier Channel Distribution System - Carrier channel distribution systems are presented. Wireless carrier channels can be split from their respective bands and can be allocated among remote transceiver units to ensure proper coverage for wireless services. Carrier channels can be allocated or routed individually or as a group according to reconfigurable routing policy.05-27-2010
20090003269Router Selection Method, Home Agent Device, Mobile Router, and Mobile Network System - Any mobile router or terminal informs a home agent device of a policy of selecting a mobile router, entered by the user. Then, the home agent device creates relay setting information according to the policy information informed and the characteristic information of the mobile routers, and transmits the information to the mobile routers. This relay setting information is for judging whether a packet addressed to the external network, received by the mobile routers is relayed to the external network or transferred to the own network, and if transferring, for determining a transfer destination. Each of the mobile routers relays a received packet according to its relay setting information, thus implementing communication reflecting a user's intention as needed.01-01-2009
20090003264LOAD BALANCING FOR MOBILE IP HOME AGENTS - In one embodiment, mobile nodes may be pre-provisioned with a static home agent address and a static home address. The home agent address may be the same for all the mobile nodes. The home address may be a unique identifier for the mobile node in a network. A registration request from a mobile node may be sent to the home agent address. A load balancer may be configured to receive the registration request at the home agent address. The load balancer is then configured to determine a home agent in the plurality of home agents to send the registration request to. The load balancer determines which home agent to send the request to based on the home address for the mobile node. The load balancer then sends the request to the determined home agent.01-01-2009
20110205970MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, MOBILE STATION AND MOBILE SWITCHING CENTER - A mobile communication method according to the present invention includes the steps of: transmitting, to a mobile switching center MME/SGSN, a NAS connection establishment request for the specific communication, while an AS connection, is established between the mobile station UE and a radio access network apparatus eNB/RNC; determining, at the mobile switching center MME/SGSN, to restrict establishment of the NAS connection for the specific communication, when the NAS connection establishment request signal is received and when a predetermined condition is satisfied; and restricting, at the mobile station UE, transmission of a first connection establishment request signal and transmission of the NAS connection establishment request signal, after reception of a rejection signal including a restriction time period for restricting establishment of the NAS connection for the specific communication until expiry of the restriction time period.08-25-2011
20120057524MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION FOR WIRELESS SYSTEMS - A method for a subscriber station to perform network entry in a multi-carrier wireless environment that has a primary carrier and at least one secondary carrier associated with a base station. The method includes sensing a carrier in an area serviced by the base station and determining if the carrier is a primary carrier or a secondary carrier. The method further includes performing the network entry if the determining establishes that the sensed carrier is a primary carrier and not a secondary carrier.03-08-2012
20120294234SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR REGISTERING NETWORK INFORMATION STRINGS - A system and method for registering network information strings. An information string server device receives a request to register a network information string from a computing device. The network information string may be included in a message broadcast by a string broadcast station. The information string server device determines whether the network information string has been previously registered with the information string server device. The information string server device stores the network information string in a record of an information string datastore when the network information string has not been previously registered with the information string server device. A registration acceptance message may be sent by the information string server device to the computing device when the network information string has not been previously registered with the information string server device.11-22-2012
20090097440WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND COMPUTER PROGRAM - In order to solve problems arising when a communication system such as a wireless LAN is constructed as a decentralized distributed type network without a relationship of control station and controlled stations such as a master station and slave stations, in a wireless communication system composed of a plurality of communication stations without a relationship of control station and controlled stations, respective communication stations transmit beacons with information concerning a network written thereon with each other to construct the network, and it becomes possible to make sophisticated judgment such as communication states of other communication stations by those beacons.04-16-2009
20090109901WIRELESS DEVICE WHICH SELECTS ROUTES EXCLUDING LOOP ROUTES AND A MESH NETWORK INCLUDING THE SAME - In wireless communication using links with neighbor wireless devices, a wireless device calculates ratios of throughput to maximum throughput for the links and calculates the costs of the links using the calculated ratios. Then the wireless device finds, for each destination, a route in which the sum of such calculated link costs is the minimum, and sends a packet to the destination using the route. As a consequence, routing can be done according to an isotonic, easy-to-implement routing protocol.04-30-2009
20090109898SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR SELECTING A MESSAGE TRANSPORT FOR A MULTI-MODE COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The present disclosure relates to a system and method for selecting a network for use by a communication device to process a data transmission is provided. In the method, the following actions are conducted: tracking transmission characteristics of networks used by the device; maintaining a set of options for the device relating to the networks, including at least one option based on the transmission characteristics; utilizing a selected option identify a selected network to process the data transmission by the communication device; and processing the data transmission using the selected network.04-30-2009
20110222468CONCURRENT TRANSMISSION OF MULTIPLE SIGNALS IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for concurrent transmission of multiple radio-frequency signals in a wireless network. The method is executed at a node of the wireless network and makes use of the node's knowledge of local network topology, locations of certain packets in the node's neighborhood, and local state of the radio-frequency (RF) channel to identify a relatively wide range of different opportunities for zero-forcing, aligning, and/or canceling unwanted RF signals at the receiving node(s). The identified opportunities are communicated to the neighbor nodes to advantageously cause concurrent transmissions of a relatively large number of packets.09-15-2011
20090168692Packet radio communications system - A packet radio communications system communicates internet packets to and/or from mobile user equipment. The system comprises a core network comprising a plurality of packet data networks, each including network communications elements operable to communicate internet packets using an internet protocol transport plane, and a common gateway support node. The gateway support node is operable to route the internet packets via communications bearers established through the packet data networks using the network communications elements. The system includes a plurality of radio access networks connected by the internet protocol transport plane to the core network components of the packet data networks for communicating the internet protocol packets to and/or from the mobile user equipment. Each of the radio access networks is operable to provide radio access bearers for communicating the internet packets to and/or from the mobile user equipment. The system includes a packet service control subsystem function comprising an access network part and a non access network part. The access network part is arranged to control the communication of the internet packets via the radio access bearers and the non-access network part is arranged to control the communication of the internet packets via the communications bearers using the network communications elements of the packet data networks. At least one of the radio access networks is arranged to operate in accordance with a different telecommunications standard than the other radio access networks, and at least one of the plurality of packet data networks is arranged to operate in accordance with a different telecommunications standard than the other packet data networks.07-02-2009
20100272013ESTABLISHING PACKET DATA NETWORK CONNECTIVITY FOR LOCAL INTERNET PROTOCOL ACCESS TRAFFIC - Providing for establishment of local Internet Protocol access (LIPA) for cellular communication is provided herein. According to particular aspects of the subject disclosure, provided are mechanisms to identify a request to establish a packet network connection as a request for a LIPA context. Once identified, a local gateway associated with the UE or with a subscriber-deployed base station is identified, and a packet context is established to support LIPA traffic for the UE. Additional mechanisms support UE mobility from one base station to another, including identifying and terminating inactive LIPA contexts. Further, a UE is described that can recognize and facilitate the establishment of a LIPA context for applications executing at the UE.10-28-2010
20080273485System and method of discovery of wireless control device - Disclosed herein is a wireless infrastructure node configured to receive a discovery message from a wireless control device, and reply to the wireless control device with a connection request if the wireless infrastructure node is not statically assigned to another wireless control device and the wireless infrastructure node is not being managed by another wireless control device.11-06-2008
20110222481COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication system providing a multimedia service that informs a calling terminal that a communication sent from the calling terminal to a called terminal is undesired by the called terminal. Typically, the calling terminal is connected to a calling-side communication network, and the called terminal is connected to a called-side communication network; the called-side communication network includes an access request receiving device that receives an access request sent from the calling terminal; an access request cancel determination device that determines whether or not the received access request is cancelled; and an access request cancel notice sending device that sends an access request cancel notice when the access request is cancelled; and the calling-side communication network includes an addressee information communicating device that communicates addressee information to the calling terminal based on the access request cancel notice, where the addressee information is information of an addressee to be accessed so as to withdraw the cancellation of the access request.09-15-2011
20080279137DISCONTINUOUS INQUIRY FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - A system for managing the operation of a plurality of wireless communication mediums supported by one or more radio modules integrated within a wireless communication device. A control strategy may be employed to regulate the operation of at least one wireless communication medium operating in a continuous mode, such as an discovery or inquiry mode, so as not to conflict with other active communication occurring substantially simultaneously within the wireless communication device. The regulation may occur in the one or more radio modules, and may include rescheduling part of, or alternatively a whole, discovery hop train.11-13-2008
20080279136TECHNIQUES TO INCLUDE VIRTUAL PRIVATE NETWORKS IN A UNIVERSAL SERVICES INTERFACE - An embodiment of the present invention provides an apparatus, comprising a mobile station (MS) operable to communicate in a wireless network, the wireless network including a Universal Services Interface (USI) and wherein the MS includes a USI client adapted to monitor external IP addresses of the MS and if the MS enters a virtual private network (VPN) via a VPN tunnel, the external IP address of the VPN tunnel is cached.11-13-2008
20110268022System and Method for Routing Signals Using Network-Specific Identifiers for a Common Server Module - A communication management system has a server module and a signal routing gateway that is connected to a plurality of different cellular network operators. At the signal routing gateway a request is received. The request is addressed to a network-specific address assigned to the server module in accordance with an addressing scheme of a cellular network operator. In response to the request the network-specific address is replaced with an internal address assigned to the server module in accordance with an internal addressing scheme of the communication management system. A response to the request is obtained from the server module. The response is addressed from the internal address. The internal address is replaced with the network-specific address. The response is sent to the cellular network operator. In some embodiments, this process is repeated for multiple requests from the plurality of different cellular network operators.11-03-2011
20080285505SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR NETWORK TIMING RECOVERY IN COMMUNICATIONS NETWORKS - A system and method for determining the network timing of a communications network from a mobile station that receives signals from a plurality of base stations. An estimated location of a mobile station may be determined through any number of or combination of location technologies. Network measurements such as observed time difference values and/or a round trip time values at the mobile station or base stations in the network may be utilized. Network timing relationships may be determined as a function of the estimated location and network measurements. An estimated location of a second mobile station may be determined as a function of the network timing relationships.11-20-2008
20080291866Control Station Apparatus and Base Station Apparatus - A control station apparatus ensures that, even if transmission times are changed and set, data of channels can be acquired at the receiving end. In this apparatus, a synchronization part (11-27-2008
20080291870METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING MOBILE WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS - A mobile access point is disclosed. The mobile access point includes a terminal module configured to provide one or more terminal functions for use by a user, the one or more terminal functions including a voice or data communications application, and a gateway module configured to provide one or more gateway functions for use by at least one client device, the one or more gateway functions including providing the at least one client device access to a computer network, and a processor configured to execute the terminal module and the gateway module to effectuate their corresponding functions.11-27-2008
20080291867Dynamic Discovery of Home Agent With Specific Binding - The invention relates to a method for obtaining a home node address in a packet switched network comprising nodes. The method comprises the steps of a first node sending to a first home node of a home network a request containing information about a home address of a mobile node to determine whether a binding with said home address indicating a registration of said mobile node at the first home node exists; the first home node receiving the request, said first home node comprising a stored binding table; determining whether the binding with said home address exists in any home node of the home network; and if the home address of the mobile node is in the binding table of any of the home nodes in the home network, the first node receiving a reply comprising the address of the home node with said binding.11-27-2008
20080291869Routing Method for Mobile Wireless Nodes Having Overlapping Internet Protocol Home Addresses - In mobile IP wireless data networking, methods are described for correctly routing packets through a foreign agent to or from wireless nodes where the wireless nodes have the same home network IP address. Instead of using normal IP routing, the foreign agent uniquely identifies the wireless node's home network IP address and home agent IP address with a PPP link address associated with a PPP link between the foreign agent and the wireless node. This association between PPP link addresses, home agent IP addresses, and home network IP addresses, is preferably implemented in software as a table stored in the foreign agent. The routing of packets through the foreign agent to the mobile nodes is performed by reference to the table. The table allows the foreign agent to correctly and efficiently route packets in the situation where multiple wireless nodes are registered with the foreign agent, but more than one of the wireless nodes have the same home network IP address.11-27-2008
20080304440Terminal and Method for Accessing Wireless Connection - A method for establishing a wireless connection performed by a subscriber station (SS) to receive Internet services from a given terminal node through a base station (BS), the method including: a) when an initial connection with the BS is established, establishing a first MAC connection with the BS, and setting the first MAC connection as a dedicated TCP connection; b) when a given packet is generated, the SS determining whether the given packet is a control packet for a TCP connection with the SS; c) transmitting the given packet through the dedicated TCP connection when a control packet is transmitted, and establishing a TCP connection with the SS; d) after establishing the TCP connection, establishing a second MAC connection for data communication between the SS and the BS; and e) after establishing the TCP connection and the second MAC connection, receiving data from the SS through the second MAC connection.12-11-2008
20080304442Wireless Base Station for Communications Network - A wireless base station includes: a trend factor regression expression calculator for determining, on the basis of measured wireless communication environment factor, the trend of the variation in the environment factor; a trend prediction value calculator for calculating, on the basis of the determined trend of the variation in the environment factor, the environment prediction value; an irregular variation factor calculator for calculating, on the basis of the difference between the determined trend of the environment factor variation and the measured environment factor, the magnitude of correction to be applied to the environment prediction value; and a radio environment prediction correction unit for correcting the environment prediction value according to the tolerance of the base station for its communication failure risk.12-11-2008
20080304443Standards based communictions for a container security system - A container security system includes a plurality of wireless communication devices, each wireless communication device being associated with a respective container, and a sensor assembly located in the interior of each container. Each sensor assembly includes a sensor component and a wireless communication component that is configured to wirelessly communicate with the wireless communication device of the container in which the sensor assembly is located. A standards based wireless interface is utilized in the wireless communications between the wireless communication device of each container and the sensor assembly located in the interior of the container.12-11-2008
20080304441MOBILITY MANAGEMENT MODE SELECTION IN MULTIPLE ACCESS WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate indicating and determining mobility management modes in access identifiers for wireless communications networks. Wireless devices can indicate mobility management modes to be utilized by choosing a target system and communicating the chosen system and a home system to one or more network components. The network components can infer or otherwise determine a mobility management mode based at least in part on a relationship between the target and home systems.12-11-2008
20080304438Method and Apparatus for Multimedia Communication - A method and apparatus for enabling communication of IP multimedia content to a called user during a circuit-switched call between a calling terminal (A) having called a primary communication unit (B12-11-2008
20080310342Addressing Messages in a Two-Tier Network - In one embodiment, a method includes accessing a frame including a baseline header including a recipient address (RA) field, a transmitter address (TA) field, a destination address (DA) field, and a source address (SA) field. The method includes inserting into the frame a mesh header including a mesh destination address (MDA) field and a mesh source address (MSA) field. The MSA field specifies an address of a first edge node of the wireless mesh network, and the MDA field specifies an address of a second edge node of the wireless mesh network. The first edge node is a first transmitter of the frame with the baseline and mesh headers in the wireless mesh network, and the second edge node is a last recipient of the frame with the baseline and mesh headers in the wireless mesh network. The RA, TA, DA, and SA fields precede the MDA and MSA fields in the frame after insertion of the mesh header into the frame.12-18-2008
20090323590WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION, MANAGEMENT SERVER, AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless communication system includes a plurality of base stations and a management server. Each base station includes: a carrier sensing unit which performs carrier sensing for other base stations; a list generating unit which generates a monitor list including a difference in frame timing between the base station and each other base station; and a base station transmitter which transmits the monitor list. The management server includes: a management receiver which receives the monitor lists; a calculation unit which calculates a shift amount by which the frame timing of a target base station is to be shifted, based on the monitor lists; and a shift instructing unit which instructs to shift the frame timing of the target base station by the shift amount if the differences in frame timing among the base stations when reflecting the shift amount is improved from those before reflecting the shift amount.12-31-2009
20080273484Wireless Communication System - It is an object of the present invention to provide a wireless communication system, which ensures that communication can be maintained in an excellent status although a mobile wireless station may be moved in a service area. A CPU (11-06-2008
20080291868ROUTE PROTOCOL - A route protocol is established whereby a mobile device can communicate to a multitude of (receiving) base stations though a tunnel created through a serving base station. A message that includes a Route Creation Header can be transmitted by the mobile device to create the tunnel. The Route Creation Header is reviewed by the receiving base station while the mobile device is in a Waiting-To-Open State. Various errors might occur with respect to the Route Creation Header. These errors can be conveyed to the mobile device by base station by setting one or more error code fields. Once the errors are resolved, another attempt to create a tunnel with base station can be made, if desired.11-27-2008
20080273486Wireless Protocol Adapter - A wireless protocol adapter for use in a process system includes a wireless interface that communicates with a multi-node wireless communication network using a wireless communication protocol, a wired interface that connects to a first field device over a wired link, and a processing unit that transfers process data between the wireless communication network and the first field device to enable operation of the first field device and of the wireless protocol adapter in the wireless communication network as distinct network nodes.11-06-2008
20100296441WIRELESS INTERNET SYSTEM AND METHOD - A method for providing a wireless Internet connection to WiFi-enabled devices (STAs) comprising: wirelessly connecting a first STA to the Internet through a first AP with a first SSID; remaining connected to the first Access Point (AP), the first STA creates a software-based wireless AP with a second SSID for wirelessly connecting other STAs to the Internet through the first STA. A software module running on the first STA allows a second STA a wide access to the Internet only if the second STA has a copy of the software module running installed and active therein. A method for configuring STAs to connect to a wireless network, comprising: a customer first connects a STA by wire to its network; a software on the STA copies to the STA the security information gained through the wired connection, thus setting the security parameters for the STA.11-25-2010
20080304439Automatic Base Station Configuration - A basestation in a cellular communications network is configured such that it has a different Location Area Identification from other local basestations in the cellular network. This has the effect that a Location Area Update procedure is performed when a mobile device wishes to camp onto that basestation. The basestation is able to configure itself automatically, to ensure that its Location Area Identification differs from other local basestations.12-11-2008
20080273487PUSH-TO TALK OVER AD-HOC NETWORKS - The invention proposes a network system comprising a plurality of network nodes (11-06-2008
20110007691COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, TRANSFER NODE, MOBILE NODE, SERVER APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A communication system includes transfer node 01-13-2011
20110007687QUEUING ARCHITECTURES FOR ORTHOGONAL REQUIREMENTS IN QUALITY OF SERVICE (QoS) - A node in a mobile ad-hoc network or other network classifies packets (a) in accordance with a first set of priority levels based on urgency and (b) within each priority level of the first set, in accordance with a second set of priority levels based on importance. The node: (a) queues packets classified at highest priority levels of the first and/or second sets in high-priority output queues; (b) queues packets classified at medium priority levels of the first set in medium-priority output queue(s); and (3) queues packets classified at low priority levels of the first and/or second set in low-priority output queue(s). Using an output priority scheduler, the node serves the packets in order of the priorities of the output queues. In such manner, orthogonal aspects of DiffServ and MLPP can be resolved in a MANET or other network.01-13-2011
20090003266Method of Dynamic Resource Allocations in Wireless Systems - A method of dynamic resource allocations in wireless network is disclosed. The method provides that a base station in the network allocates resources to users independently of other base stations and without resource planning. Resource allocations are done based at least in part on a local optimization objective and a channel quality indicator from one or more users, and result in efficient resource reuse.01-01-2009
20110268037MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD AND MULTI-ANTENNA WIRELESS COMMUNICATION DEVICE - The wireless communication devices A and B determine the optimal diversity combining weight information that optimizes a diversity reception state at each antenna group A11-03-2011
20080267116Routing method and system for a wireless network - A method and system for selecting a route in a wireless network for the transmission of a data packet between wireless nodes in said network using a modified link-state routing algorithm wherein only a limited number of broadcast messages are generated to synchronize the link-state database throughout the wireless network. A subset of nodes called portal nodes within the network are elected to do the broadcasting for the entire network. Each portal node broadcasts an announcement of its identity to all of the wireless nodes. Each wireless node responds to these broadcasts to select one of the portal nodes as its root portal node. It then identifies a unicast route back to its root portal node, and sends a link-state register message to this portal node. These link-state register messages received by each portal node are aggregated by them and are broadcast to each of the wireless nodes for storage. When a data packet is thereafter received by a wireless node from a neighboring node, it detects if the data packet satisfies one of a plurality of predetermined conditions and rebroadcasts the data packet to neighboring wireless nodes if none of the conditions is satisfied.10-30-2008
20100150075FILTER, DEMULTIPLEXER, AND MODULE INCLUDING DEMULTIPLEXER, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A demultiplexer has a common terminal, a transmission terminal, and a reception terminal, and furthermore includes a transmission filter connected between the common terminal and the transmission terminal, a reception filter connected between the common terminal and the reception terminal, and a phase shift circuit connected in series to the reception filter connected between the common terminal and the reception terminal. A node on the line from the phase shift circuit to the common terminal or the transmission terminal, and a node on the line from the phase shift circuit to the reception terminal are coupled via a reactance. Accordingly, it is possible to fundamentally reduce or eliminate the situation in which transmission signals from the transmission filter arrive at the reception circuit, and improve isolation.06-17-2010
20090052380Mobile media router and method for using same - A mobile media router and a method for using the same receive multimedia data from a first wireless network and reroute the multimedia data in another format without rendering the multimedia. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may reroute the multimedia data over a second wireless network to a rendering device. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may translate, reformat and/or repackage the multimedia data into a form that allows consumption of the multimedia on the rendering device. The mobile media router and the method for using the same may reroute the multimedia data in real time so that the rendering device renders the multimedia as the multimedia data is received by the mobile media router.02-26-2009
20100135212METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING THE LARGE SERVICE DATA UNIT (SDU) - Systems and methodologies are described that segment or concatenate radio link control (RLC) service data units (SDUs) into RLC protocol data units (PDUs). In accordance with various aspects set forth herein, systems and/or methods are provided that receive a first RLC SDU, partition the first RLC SDU into a first RLC PDU and a second RLC PDU, set a length indicator (LI) field associated with the second RLC PDU to indicate the size of information contained in the second RLC PDU, concatenate the second RLC PDU with a third RLC PDU associated with a second RLC SDU to form a concatenated RLC PDU, and dispatch the first RLC PDU, the concatenated RLC PDU, and a fourth RLC PDU associated with the second RLC SDU.06-03-2010
20100272017METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING ADVANCED LONG TERM EVOLUTION SYSTEM INFORMATION - A method and apparatus for processing advanced long term evolution (LTE-A) system information (SI) are described. When a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) is in an idle mode/state, an LTE-A SI broadcast may be received on at least one downlink (DL) anchor carrier, including a physical DL shared channel (PDSCH) having paging message content. At least one SI-change parameter included in the paging message content may be decoded and processed. The SI-change parameter may include a flag used to indicate an SI change on a logical partition, (a primary or a secondary SI broadcast group information change). When the WTRU is in a connected mode/state, an LTE-A SI-CHANGE-radio network temporary identifier (RNTI) transmission may be received during a modification period (MP), and an SI change may be performed during a subsequent MP. At least one SI-change parameter included in the SI-CHANGE-RNTI transmission may be decoded and processed.10-28-2010
20090016266METHOD OF TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A MESSAGE VIA AN UPLINK CHANNEL IN A WIRELESS MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method of transmitting a message via an uplink access channel in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes initiating a first preamble access procedure with Node B, receiving from Node B a first acknowledgement indication with respect to the first access preamble procedure, transmitting to Node B a first message upon receipt of the first acknowledgement indication, and receiving from Node B a second acknowledgment indication regarding the first message01-15-2009
20090190529Mobile IP Communication System - A mobile IP communication system includes a home agent 07-30-2009
20100142439REAL-TIME POSITIONING SYSTEM, METHOD THEREFOR, AND DEVICE CONTAINING COMPUTER SOFTWARE - A real-time positioning system, a real-time positioning method, and a device containing computer software are provided. The system includes a coordinator and at least one router. The coordinator carries out a signal interconnection with each router of a first layer via an omni-directional antenna, and calculates an initial distance according to the strength of the signal interconnection. Then, the coordinator carries out a signal interconnection with the router via a plurality of directional antennas respectively to analyze an initial direction of the router of the first layer according to the strength of the signal interconnection with each of the directional antennas and corrects the initial direction according to the slope angle of the coordinator, so as to position the router of the first layer according to the initial distance and the initial direction. Each router positions each router of the next layer in the same manner as the coordinator.06-10-2010
20100142450LOCALLY ADMINSTERED MAC ADDRESS BASED METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY AND EFFICIENTLY IDENTIFYING ENHANCED VERSION NODES OF STANDARDS - Embodiments of the invention provide a method for selectively identifying nodes implemented enhanced version of a protocol standard by creating a random locally administered MAC address and advertising said random locally administered MAC address as the address that implies a particular protocol amendment of a protocol standard.06-10-2010
20090109897LEGACY SUPPORT FOR WI-FI PROTECTED SETUP - Techniques and systems for automatically configuring devices to interact with “legacy” wireless access points (“WAPs”) are disclosed. According to one technique, a user programs a WPS-enabled WAP with the configuration information of a “legacy” WAP. This makes the WPS-enabled WAP “aware” of the “legacy” WAP. When any other user brings his device within discovery range of the WPS-enabled WAP, the WPS-enabled WAP sends, to that device, a list of the WAPs of which the WPS-enabled WAP is aware. The device's user selects one of the WAPs (e.g., a “legacy” WAP) from the list. The WPS-enabled WAP receives the user's selection and sends, to the device, the configuration information for the selected WAP. The user's device configures itself, using the configuration information, to interact with the selected WAP. Thereafter, the user's device can access a network through the selected WAP, even if the selected WAP is a “legacy” WAP.04-30-2009
20090109902METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT IN A COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - The object of the present invention is to provide a mechanism for a more efficient carrier search. The object is achieved by a method for sending a signal in a first node. The first node communicates with a second node via radio communication, which radio communication is performed by multi carrier transmission. The first node uses a carrier, being associated with a frequency range. The method comprises the step of transmitting an end-marker signal within or close to the frequency range. The end-marker signal is intended to be received and used by the second node for identifying the frequency range of the used carrier.04-30-2009
20080240017Method and apparatus of establishing connection in wireless local area network - An access point and a method to discover an associated station in a wireless network is presented. The access point scans the wireless network in order to discover one or more associated stations and establishes a connection with the discovered station.10-02-2008
20080240018Dynamic multi-access relaying for wireless networks - Methods, apparatuses and systems for communicating in a wireless network are disclosed. One embodiment includes a method for communication in a wireless network that comprises determining a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) for channels between a base station, one or more relay stations, and a user and selecting a relay station based on the determined SNRs. Embodiments may also include determining a time sharing parameter and a total transmitting time, transmitting by the base station to the selected relay station for a first duration, and transmitting simultaneously by the base station and relay station using multi-access code for a second duration. The simultaneous transmission may be adapted to be decoded utilizing joint decoding with interference cancellation. Other embodiments are disclosed and claimed.10-02-2008
20080240016IMS NETWORKS PROVIDING BUSINESS-RELATED CONTENT TO WIRELESS DEVICES - IMS networks and methods are disclosed for providing business-related content to wireless devices that are located within a business. For a business that has a WLAN, wireless devices within range of the wireless access point of the business receive an identifier for the wireless access point. The wireless devices then register with the IMS network using the access point ID. Through the access point ID, the IMS network identifies an application server that is associated with the business. The application server may then initiate sessions with the wireless devices, and transmit business-related content to the wireless devices while they are within range of the wireless access point of the business.10-02-2008
20080240020Routing support in heterogeneous communications networks - A device comprises a first binding unit which provides for a binding to a first tunnelling server using a first protocol, a second binding unit which provides for a binding to a second tunnelling server using a second protocol different from the first protocol, and an authorizing unit which causes the first or second binding unit to provide the binding.10-02-2008
20120195266Mobile IP over VPN Communication Protocol - The present invention supports a communication protocol for transmission of information packets between a mobile node and a virtual private network. Information packets are encapsulated and decapsulated along the route as the information packet is forwarded among the various networks on its path to the destination address; either the mobile node on a foreign network or a correspondence node on a virtual private network. A home agent on the virtual private network supports transmitting the information packets, and the information packets are transmitted from the virtual private network from the home agent or a virtual private network gateway.08-02-2012
20120195264BASE STATION APPARATUS, MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND TRANSMISSION POWER CONTROL METHOD - To suppress deterioration of throughput characteristics in the entire system even when a plurality of transmission antennas is placed in an indoor environment, a base station apparatus (eNode B) is provided with a power control matrix generating section (08-02-2012
20120195263PEER-TO-PEER WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus may be used for peer-to-peer communications. A first non-access point (non-AP) station (STA) may receive a message for establishing a direct communication link from a second non-AP STA. The message may include a service priority. The first non-AP STA may transmit another message in response to receiving the message from the second non-AP STA, and communicate directly with the second non-AP STA. The system may be an Ad hoc network comprising a plurality of STAs without an access point (AP) where each STA maintains a database of one-hop and two-hop STAs, and establishes a direct link to other STAs after informing neighboring STAs of an intention to establish a direct communication link.08-02-2012
20120195258NETWORK REENTRY METHOD AND APPARATUS IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Provided is a network re-entry method and apparatus in a mobile communication system. The network re-entry method includes sending, by a group delegate Mobile Station (MS) among MSs of a group, a ranging code based on a group Identifier (ID) to a Base Station (BS) and receiving, by the MSs, a Ranging-Response (RNG-RSP) message comprising a ranging status for the group from the BS.08-02-2012
20090190524APPARATUS FOR DISTRIBUTING DATA TRAFFIC IN HETEROGENEOUS WIRELESS NETWORKS - An apparatus for distributing data traffic in heterogeneous wireless networks is provided. A terminal for transmitting data to a plurality of wireless networks, includes a transmission rule storing unit to store a data transmission rule with respect to the plurality of wireless networks, a data dividing unit to divide first data into a plurality of first data groups based on the stored data transmission rule, a transmission network selecting unit to select an individual transmission network for each divided data group from the plurality of wireless networks based on the determined data transmission rule, and a network access unit to transmit each data group to the selected transmission network.07-30-2009
20090190530METHOD FOR TERMINATING ATTACH PROCEDURE IN MOBILE TERMINAL - A system and method by which an unnecessary General Packet Radio Service (GPRS) attach procedure is no longer performed when a service cancellation situation is generated during execution of a GPRS attach procedure according to a data service requested by a user is provided. The system determines whether an abnormal situation occurs in an Europe-oriented General Packet Radio Service/Universal Mobile Telecommunication System (GPRS/UMTS) mobile terminal and immediately terminates a currently proceeding attach procedure when an abnormal service cancellation situation occurs. The abnormal situation occurs when the user cancels a service during use of a data service (e.g., Wireless Application Protocol (WAP), Multimedia Message Service (MMS)) or when connection of the service fails due to a bad network state. By not performing an unnecessary GPRS attach procedure due to the occurrence of an abnormal situation, the mobile terminal does not perform an unnecessary routing area updating procedure, thereby reducing power consumption.07-30-2009
20120195265ACK/NACK FEEDBACK METHOD AND COMMUNICATION APPARATUS USING SAME - Disclosed is a wireless communication system, and particularly, a technology of feedbacking an ACK/NACK or multiple ACK/NACKs through a single uplink component carrier in response to multi downlink information transmitted through multiple component carriers in a wireless communication system.08-02-2012
20090122748Method and System for the Dynamic Adaptation of Service Quality Metrics in an Adhoc Network - A method and system for dynamically managing quality of service metrics in an ad hoc network including a plurality of routing nodes (05-14-2009
20120195254COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES WITH ENVELOPE EXTRACTION AND RELATED METHODS - A communications device may include an encoder generating digital baseband In-phase (I) and Quadrature (Q) signals, a processor coupled to the encoder and extracting an envelope characteristic from the digital baseband I and Q signals based upon a bandwidth of the digital baseband I and Q signals. A power amplifier may be coupled downstream from the processor and may generate an amplified I and Q signal based upon the envelope characteristic.08-02-2012
20120195253Transfer of Synchronization in a Hybrid Global Satellite Packet Network System - Networks, network devices and methods of synchronization using transfer of synchronization packets are provided. Some network devices are configured to use either a timing reference extracted based on GPS signals or an imported timing reference, as an operative time reference. A network device from which to import the time reference is selected and may be updated to meet a selection rule related to the quality of receiving the transfer of synchronization packets.08-02-2012
20120093084MODULAR WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS PLATFORM - A modular wireless communications platform is provided. The modular wireless communications platform has a modular host unit and a modular remote unit in communication with the modular host unit. The modular host unit and remote unit include a serial radio frequency communicator configured to convert serial digital data into RF sampled data and configured to convert RF sampled data into serial digital data. The modular host unit and remote unit also include an interface coupled to the serial radio frequency communicator and configured to allow transfer of the RF sampled data from the serial radio frequency communicator to a digital to analog radio frequency transceiver module.04-19-2012
20100142451WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal used in a mobile communication system complying with a carrier sense multiple access scheme is disclosed. The communication terminal includes: a receiving unit configured to receive a wireless packet transmitted by another communication terminal or a base station; a determination unit configured to determine periodic transmission timing of the communication terminal based on determination criterion information included in the wireless packet; and a transmission unit configured to periodically transmit wireless packets to the base station based on the transmission timing.06-10-2010
20100142438MESSAGE BROADCASTING OVER WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate broadcasting and receiving messages in a wireless media broadcast network. Mobile devices are equipped to receive media over a broadcast network where presentation of the data can be enabled through a content policy. Broadcast messages can be provisioned and delivered over the network such that mobile devices can receive the message regardless of the level or existence of purchased content. The messages can be broadcast for multiple purposes, including emergency messages, which can come from an emergency or amber alert system, venue and/or location specific messages, etc. The messages can be broadcast at a regional level as well by leveraging such functionality of the media broadcast network.06-10-2010
20100142449METHOD AND SYSTEM OF SYNCHRONIZATION IN DUAL-BEACON WIRELESS NETWORKS - A wireless device (06-10-2010
20100142448DEVICES FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet that may enable devices in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain devices may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet.06-10-2010
20100142447WEB APPLICATIONS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for providing a mobile, broadband, routable internet, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as sending and receiving nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual devices independent of fixed infrastructure elements, and where the mobile, broadband, routable internet enables the use of web applications.06-10-2010
20100142446BUSINESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet utilized by a management system, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain management systems may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet.06-10-2010
20100142445ENVIRONMENTS FOR A MOBILE, BROADBAND, ROUTABLE INTERNET - In embodiments of the present invention improved capabilities are described for a mobile, broadband, routable internet in an environment, in which a plurality of mobile devices interact as nodes in a mobile ad hoc network and in which packets are IP routable to the individual device independent of fixed infrastructure elements. Certain environments may be enabled on the mobile broadband routable internet by one or more enablers associated with the mobile broadband routable internet.06-10-2010
20100142442PROCESSING OF AN EMERGENCY SESSION IN A WIMAX NETWORK - In a system for processing an emergency session in a WiMAX (worldwide interoperability for microwave access) network system including a home network, at least one roaming network and at least one mobile station, an emergency call is established between the mobile station and the home network in case the mobile station is located in the home network, or between the mobile station and a roaming network (visited network) in case the mobile station is located in the roaming network. In a different embodiment, the location of a mobile station is determined in response to an emergency location request and the location (geographic) coordinates are provided in order to establish an emergency call setup.06-10-2010
20100142443APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MERGING BEACON TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION - A method and wireless device merge multiple unsynchronized beacon groups in a wireless network, each beacon group including at least one wireless device. A first beacon is received from at least one first wireless device in a first beacon group (S06-10-2010
20090161604METHOD, SYSTEM, AND DEVICE OF PACKET ROUTING FOR LOCALIZED MOBILITY MANAGEMENT NETWORK - A method of packet routing for an LMM network includes: by an LMA, determining that both a sending end node and a receiving end node are located in an LMM domain controlled by the LMA, and starting a route optimization; directly forwarding, by an access device attached to the sending end node, a packet to be sent to the receiving end node to an access device attached to the receiving end node without being forwarded by the LMA; and forwarding, by the access device attached to the receiving end node, to the receiving end node. A system of packet routing for an LMM network includes a sending end node, a receiving end node, an access device attached to the sending end node, an access device attached to the receiving end node, and an LMA.06-25-2009
20090161601Method and Apparatus for Detection of Network Having Multiple IP-Address Capability06-25-2009
20090161602WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD USING BLUETOOTH - A wireless communication apparatus which is capable of communicating with a first wireless terminal holding a first data packet by Bluetooth includes a search unit, a first transceiver transmitting, a first controller, and a scheduling unit. The search unit reserves a search, and executing the search. The first transceiver transmits the first and second control packets, and receives the first data packet and a second data packet. The first controller reserves a transmission of the second control packet to the first wireless terminal, the first controller giving instructions to transmit the second control packet to the first transceiver. The scheduling unit accepts the reservation from the first controller and the search unit, the scheduling unit preferentially allowing a transmission of the second control packet compared with the search, and allowing the search when no reservation of the transmission of the second control packet is made.06-25-2009
20090180422Interaction of VoIP calls and cellular networks - A communication system includes a switching network and a wireless network. The switching network includes a first gateway for receiving a communication from a caller, a second gateway for establishing an external connection through which the communication can be routed, and a command center that allows the first and second gateways to make an internal connection. The wireless network includes a visited mobile switch center and a home location register. The visited mobile switch center generates routing information, receives the communication from the external connection of the switching network, and routes the communication to a wireless network subscriber. The home location register locates the visited mobile switch center, and passes the routing information from the visited mobile switch center to the command center of the switching network. The command center causes the external connection to be established based on the routing information.07-16-2009
20110268040METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING DATA VIA MEDIA ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and an apparatus for transmitting and receiving data via a MAC protocol in a mobile communication system. The method includes inputting an SDU including transmission data through a logical channel and generating a first PDU that includes the SDU without including multiplexing information for identification of the logical channel, by a first transmission entity; acquiring the first PDU and generating a second PDU including the first PDU in a payload of the second PDU, by a second transmission entity that operates between the first transmission entity and a physical layer; inserting the multiplexing information for identification of the logical channel corresponding to the first PDU into header information of the second PDU; and transmitting the second PDU through the physical layer.11-03-2011
20110268035GATEWAY APPARATUS, GATEWAY METHOD, AND PROGRAM - A gateway apparatus receives a packet from the mobile high-speed network or from the IMS network, performs protocol conversion of the packet, converts an audio compression-encoding scheme, and outputs a resulting packet to the IMS network or the mobile circuit switched network, and receives a circuit switching protocol signal from the mobile circuit switched network or a packet from the IMS network to perform protocol conversion, converts an audio compression-encoding scheme, converts a resulting signal into a packet, and outputs the packet converted to the IMS network or the mobile high-speed network.11-03-2011
20110268033METHOD FOR DISTRIBUTED MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS, CORRESPONDING SYSTEM AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A method of arranging exchange of signals between user terminals in a cellular communication system and at least one base station. The base station includes a central unit and a plurality of remote units. The signals are exchanged between the central unit and the remote units as aggregated signals for plural user terminals. The signals are processed at the remote units as distinct signals each associated with a respective one of the plural user terminals.11-03-2011
20110268032METHOD FOR EFFICIENTLY TRANSMITTING PHYSICAL CHANNEL IN MULTI-CARRIER AGGREGATION STATE TO SUPPORT BROADBAND - The present invention relates to a wireless connection system, and more specifically to a method for efficiently transmitting a control channel in a multi-carrier aggregation state. According to one aspect of the invention, a method for enabling a terminal to transmit data in a broadband wireless connection system that supports multiband comprises the steps of: receiving uplink acknowledgement information from a base station through a first downlink component carrier among plural downlink component carriers available in the terminal; transmitting data to the base station through an uplink resource indicated by the uplink acknowledge information; and receiving feedback information from the base station through the first control channel of the first downlink component carrier, wherein the feedback information indicates whether there is an error in the reception of the transmitted data.11-03-2011
20110268030RADIO COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND PACKET FORWARDING METHOD - A radio communication apparatus including: a radio communication interface; and a processor; the processor being configured to detect a first radio communication apparatus and a second radio communication apparatus based on a piece of address information received by the radio communication interface; and to select one of a first layer and a second layer as a forwarding layer, in which a packet is forwarded to a next forwarding address according to the radio communication apparatus of the next forwarding address corresponding to a destination address of the packet.11-03-2011
20110268029METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A COMPONENT CARRIER DEACTIVATION TIMER IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method for a Component Carrier (CC) deactivation timer in a wireless communication system includes receiving a first Medium Access Control (MAC) Control Element (CE) for CC Management to activate a first Secondary CC (SCC) that has been already activated by using a second MAC CE for CC Management. The method then includes restarting a deactivation timer for the first SCC based upon the first MAC CE for CC Management.11-03-2011
20110268021DEVICE, SYSTEM AND METHOD OF INDICATING STATION-SPECIFIC INFORMATION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION - Some demonstrative embodiments include devices, systems and/or methods of indicating station-specific information within a wireless communication. For example, a device may include a wireless communication unit to transmit a wireless communication frame to a plurality of stations using a respective plurality of beamforming configurations, wherein the wireless communication unit is to transmit to the stations beamforming configuration information including station-specific information corresponding to the plurality of beamforming configurations, respectively.11-03-2011
20090129318METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPLICATION SERVER FOR ROUTING CS DOMAIN CALLS TO PS DOMAIN - A method and system for routing a Circuit Switched (CS) domain call to a Packet Switched (PS) domain are disclosed. The method includes a Voice Call Continuity Application Server (VCC AS) in the PS domain interacts with a Home Location Register (HLR) in the CS domain to obtain an original called number, allocates a PS domain routing number to a CS domain call, and originates a corresponding PS domain call according to the obtained original called number after the PS domain call, which uses the PS domain routing number as a called party identifier, arrives at the VCC AS in the PS domain. The VCC AS obtains the call information through the interaction with the HLR rather than the interaction with a Service Control Point (SCP). Therefore, a Mobile Switching Center (MSC) needs to communicate with the HLR only, without the requirement to communicate with the SCP, and the MSC in the present disclosure does not need to support intelligent processing.05-21-2009
20110222482RCC CONNECTION ESTABLISHMENT METHOD AND APPARATUS IN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION - A method and apparatus for establishing a RRC connection between a base station and a mobile station in a wire-less communication system is provided. A packet transmission method for a communication system including a transmitter and a receiver according to the present invention includes transmitting, at the transmitter, a packet; retransmitting, when a confirmation message is not received in response to the packet, the packet; and stopping, when the confirmation message is received in response to the packet, retransmission of the packet. An RRC connection establishment method and apparatus of the present invention allows the transmitter to retransmit the RRC Connection Response message periodically until the RRC Connection Complete message is received from the receiver, thereby improving the RRC connection success probability.09-15-2011
20110205971WIRELESS DEVICE - A data processing section (08-25-2011
20110205968Method and apparatus for performing sounding in wireless communication system - A sounding method of a transmitting terminal that transmits data to two or more receiving terminals in a wireless communication system includes transmitting a frame for requesting transmission of first sounding information to the two or more receiving terminals, receiving a frame including the first sounding information from each of the two or more receiving terminals, transmitting a frame including information for requesting transmission of channel state information and second sounding information to the two or more receiving terminals, and receiving a frame including the channel state information, which is measured by each of the two or more receiving terminals by using the second sounding information, from each of the two or more receiving terminals, wherein the channel state information measured by using the first sounding information and the channel state information received from each of the two or more receiving terminals are used to simultaneously transmit the data to the two or more receiving terminals.08-25-2011
20110205962ENHANCEMENTS FOR INCREASED SPATIAL REUSE IN AD-HOC NETWORKS - A method of facilitating communication in a wireless ad-hoc network comprises: generating, at a node in the wireless ad-hoc network, target availability information with regard to one or more transmission slots, the target availability information indicating whether the node is permitted to receive a transmission during each transmission slot; generating, at the node, owner availability information with regard to one or more transmission slots, the owner availability information indicating whether the node is permitted to transmit during each transmission slot; and broadcasting, from the node, the target availability information and the owner availability information to separately indicate availability as either an owner or a target for one or more transmission slots.08-25-2011
20110205959Packet Forwarding in Telecommunication Network - A solution for rearranging data transfer in a telecommunication network is provided. Accordingly, a data packet related to a first logical connection and originating from a first user terminal is received in a network node of a first logical connection associated with a first user terminal and a second logical connection associated with a second user terminal in a telecommunication network, wherein the data packet is addressed to the second user terminal. Then, the network node checks for an intermediate network node common to both the first logical connection and the second logical connections, and arranges a shortcut between the first and the second logical connection through the intermediate network node, if the common intermediate network node has been detected.08-25-2011
20090161600Wireless slave unit - In a network area of a wireless network managed by a wireless master device, a wireless slave device performs wireless network communication with another wireless slave device connected by wire to a terminal, and wired network communication with a terminal connected by wire to the wireless slave device. The wireless slave device includes a wireless reception unit (06-25-2009
20090141671PACKET COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND SUBSCRIBER-ASSOCIATED-INFORMATION DELIVERY CONTROLLER - In a packet communication network comprising an MNO network, and an MVNO network including an application server for providing an information service to wireless terminals via the MNO network, the MNO network includes a subscriber-associated-information delivery controller for delivering subscriber associated information of each wireless terminal, which is connected to a radio access network, to the MVNO network, and the MVNO network includes a subscriber-associated-information processor for receiving the subscriber associated information delivered from the subscriber-associated-information delivery controller.06-04-2009
20090185525NETWORK SYSTEM, DATA TRANSMITTING/RECEIVING METHOD AND DATA TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION PROGRAM - A network system including a mobile node, a correspondent node for transmitting/receiving a data packet to/from the mobile node, a first router to which the mobile node is connected at a visited domain and a second router to which the mobile node is connected at a moving destination to which the mobile node moves from the first router. The second router including a location registration message generating unit for generating a location registration message of the mobile node and transmitting the location registration message. The first router including a binding cache, a movement managing unit for receiving the location registration message and storing into the binding cache address information from before and after the mobile node moves and an encapsulating unit for receiving the data packet, encapsulating the data packet concerned, and creating and transmitting a data packet containing as a transmission destination the address information after the change.07-23-2009
20090129319INTEGRATED WEB CACHE - A gateway for mobile communications comprises a cache for storing network data recently downloaded from a network, a foreign agent, and a packet filter that directs requests for the network data from a mobile node to the cache. The packet filter directs the requested network data from the cache to the mobile node by way of the foreign agent, without forwarding the requested network data to a home agent of the mobile node.05-21-2009
20120140710METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING ACCESS OF USER EQUIPMENT TO NETWORK - A method and a system for controlling user equipment (UE) access to a network are used for controlling the access of a UE to a local network. The method includes: a Serving General Packet Radio Service Support Node (SGSN) obtains the information of the local network to which the UE requests access via an Activate Packet Data Protocol Context initiated by the UE; the SGSN instructs a Home Node B (HNB) to establish a local network bearer for the UE according to the information of the local network to which the UE requests to access; the HNB grants the UE access to the local network by establishing a local network wireless bearer for the UE based on the instruction of the SGSN.06-07-2012
20100150065MULTIPLE PANS CONFLICT RESOLUTION METHOD IN ZIGBEE - Disclosed is a method of preventing overlap of multiple PANs in a ZigBee network. According to the method of preventing overlap of multiple personal area networks (PANs) in the ZigBee network, a first node included in a first PAN of the ZigBee network verifies whether overlap of the multiple PANs occurs by verifying packets received from neighbor nodes, identifies beacon information of a neighbor node that causes the overlap of the multiple PANs by gradually adjusting radio frequency (RF) transmission wave, and adjusts a communication range based on the beacon information.06-17-2010
20090129321SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CLUSTERING WIRELESS DEVICES IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - Described are a system and method for clustering wireless devices in a wireless network. The system comprises a wireless access point and a plurality of wireless computing units grouped into a cluster as a function of a predetermined parameter. The cluster includes a cluster head unit and at least one cluster member unit. The at least one cluster member unit utilizes a first power level when wirelessly communicating with the cluster head unit, and the cluster head unit utilizes a second power level when communicating with the AP.05-21-2009
20090129315DATA DISCARD FOR RADIO LINK CONTROL IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate in-band notification of stale service data units (SDU) in a radio link control (RLC) layer for wireless communications. In particular, where SDUs become stale during protocol data unit (PDU) retransmission, in-band notifications can be packed in retransmit PDUs for receipt and interpretation by a receiver. The in-band notification can be a special length indicator that specifies discard of an SDU that was previously partially received, and the transmitter of the PDU can save payload by not retransmitting the stale SDU. In this regard, additional channels, mediums, and/or other out-of-band notifications are not required to specify discard.05-21-2009
20090141673Apparatus and method for rate control in a broadband wireless communication system - An apparatus and method for rate control in a wireless communication system are provided. The apparatus includes a preprocessor, a rate controller, a determiner, and a transmitter. The preprocessor determines feedback information on a physical layer packet using a feedback message of MAC ARQ. The rate controller updates a CQI reported from a receiver using the determined feedback information. The determiner determines an MCS using the updated CQI. The transmitter transmits data using the determined MCS.06-04-2009
20090141669TRAVEL CHARACTERISTICS-BASED AD-HOC COMMUNICATION NETWORK ALGORITHM SELECTION - A method of operating an ad-hoc communication system is provided. The method comprises determining a pattern type relating to mobile node travel characteristics over a defined traveling region. Based on the pattern type, selecting a neighbor discovery and route determination algorithm. Implementing the neighbor discovery and route determination algorithm on received location and identification mobile node information to determine communication routes to at least one of mobile nodes and stationary communication stations in the ad-hoc communication system.06-04-2009
20090279480Method and Apparatus for Retransmission Scheduling and Control in Multi-Carrier Wireless Communication Networks - In one embodiment, a method of scheduling transmissions for a base station in a multi-carrier wireless communication network comprises scheduling initial transmissions of data packets for one or more users on a first carrier, without reserving scheduling capacity on the first carrier for retransmissions. Doing so increases the scheduled capacity of the first carrier for initial transmissions. The method further includes scheduling retransmissions, as needed, for given ones of the data packets on one or more second carriers. The method allows more traffic to be scheduled on the first carrier, meaning that multi-carrier transmissions are less frequently needed to convey all of the traffic targeted to one or more receivers. Those receivers therefore spend more time operating with a reduced receiver bandwidth (as compared to the bandwidth required for receiving more than one carrier), which reduces operating power.11-12-2009
20080316956Method and Apparatus for Route Optimization in a Telecommunication Network - A method and apparatus for controlling the routing of a data packet sent from a first node towards a second node of a telecommunication network. The first node is a mobile node having an associated home network. An access router intercepts the data packet and determines whether the packet relates to a first mode of communication between the first and second nodes in which data packets generally bypass a home agent associated with the first node's home network. In a second mode of communication, home agent packets generally passed through the home agent. The access router drops the packet if the packet relates to the first mode of communication and if dropping the packet is determined to be in accordance with a pre-determined routing policy.12-25-2008
20090003267METHOD OF COMMUNICATION SCHEDULING IN A MULTIHOP NETWORK - A method of communication scheduling in a multihop network is provided. The multihop network comprises a base station and at least one relay station. The method includes allocating a downlink relay to a relay station; assigning a first one or more connection identifiers to be locally scheduled at the relay station for communication on a first portion of the downlink relay; and assigning a second one or more connection identifiers to be centrally scheduled by the base station for communication on a second portion of the downlink relay.01-01-2009
20120069799METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR EXTENDED NETWORK ACCESS SERVICES ADVERTISING VIA A BROADBAND ACCESS GATEWAY - A system and method supporting the advertising of extended network access to multimedia services via a broadband access gateway is disclosed. A representative embodiment of the present invention may comprise a wireless interface and may be capable of exchanging multimedia communication between the wireless interface and a broadband network. The gateway may determine available media-related services, and may transmit information about those services to an access device that may comprise, for example, a mobile multimedia handset, a personal digital assistant, and a personal computer. The access device may notify a user of the availability of the media-related services using visual and/or audible means. The gateway may receive from the access device capability and/or subscriber related information, and the gateway may transmit service information based upon the capability and/or subscriber-related information.03-22-2012
20120069798TIMING CONTROL IN A MULTI-POINT HIGH SPEED DOWNLINK PACKET ACCESS NETWORK - A method, apparatus, processing system, and computer program product enable association of mis-aligned subframes from a first and second downlink with one another, such that a HARQ acknowledgment message including jointly encoded feedback for the respective subframes can be correctly interpreted by the corresponding cells. Here, an RNC may provide an RRC message to the UE to associate particular subframes with one another. Further, the RNC may provide NBAP messages to the cells transmitting the downlink signals, so that the cells can associate the HARQ acknowledgment message with the appropriate subframe. Still further, additional signaling provides for changing the set of associated subframes when needed due to a drift in the timing offset between cells.03-22-2012
20120069797METHOD FOR A COMMUNICATION NODE WITH A PLURALITY OF COMMUNICATION INTERFACES TO NOTIFY DYNAMIC PATH SETUP AND ASSOCIATES APPARATUS THEREOF - A User Equipment (UE) that is simultaneously connected (via a 3G connection and a non-3G connection) to a Packet Data Network Gateway (P-GW) can direct how traffic flows would be routed from the P-GW to the UE. Typically, the P-GW would setup the 3G communication path to the UE when it receives a downlink data packet directed to the UE's 3G path. If the P-GW uses such logic for setting a communication path to the UE without knowing the user's actual intention, this might result in the case where the user would experience some service degradation for ongoing session. In addition, it is possible that the packets filters for a first UE interface are not utilized due to the erroneous setting of the packets filters for a second UE interface. To resolve this issue, the UE would indicate to the P-GW of the user's intention for communication path setup with the benefit of conserving the UE's battery.03-22-2012
20090175216Mesh Networking for Wireless Communications - A method for optimizing wireless communications in a mesh network is described. The method includes transmitting a data stream from a wireless module (WM) host to a plurality of WM devices in the mesh network. The method further includes sending status messages from the WM devices to the WM host and the other WM devices. The WM devices are configured to transmit help requests and respond to help requests based on at least one WM device needing help receiving the data stream. The method further includes generating a WM host link quality map at the WM host with the WM host link quality map being dynamically updated upon receiving status messages from the WM devices.07-09-2009
20100195570COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD AND COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER - A communication control system connects a call using a local service number valid within a local service area within which a user equipment is positioned, and forwards data via an internet protocol network, including a local number converter and a session controller group. The local number converter is located in each local service area, in response to a query specifying a local service number, accesses a database of correspondence between a local service number valid within the local service area and a global routable number, and determines a global routable number corresponding to the specified local service number. The session controller group accepts a call request including the local service number from the user equipment, queries the local number converter in the local service area to convert the local service number into a global routable number, and routes the internet protocol network using the global routable number.08-05-2010
20090185526Method and Apparatus for a Dynamic Create/Change of Service Flows - A system and method for transmitting data is provided. A preferred embodiment comprises transmitting data by concatenating parameters for multiple service flows into a single transmission. Parameters associated with multiple service flows may be grouped together and other parameters that are not associated with multiple service flows are also preferably included within the same single transmission.07-23-2009
20090185524MANUAL CELL DETECTION AND SELECTION PROCEDURES - A method for performing a manual cell search by a wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) includes receiving a manual cell search command and searching for home enhanced Node B (HeNB) cells during a time period. The time period may be a measurement gap or a discontinuous reception period. If an existing measurement gap is available for the WTRU to use, the search can be performed during that gap. Otherwise, the WTRU can request a new measurement gap to search for HeNBs.07-23-2009
20090185522SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR DISTRIBUTING CONTENT IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - The present invention allows content to be delivered to a mobile terminal over different types of networks in order to efficiently use network resources. Content can be delivered using a select delivery method over a cellular network, a local wireless network, or a broadcast network. Within any of the networks, the content may be unicast to individual mobile terminals using individual content flows, multicast to a group of mobile terminals, or broadcast to any or all of the mobile terminals. Content can be multicast or broadcast to mobile terminals via different ones of the disparate networks. During a content flow, the network through which the content flow is delivered may be changed to allow the mobile terminal to receive the content through a different network. Further, the delivery method used to deliver the content may dynamically change as the number of mobile terminals receiving or requesting the content changes.07-23-2009
20090141670MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL HEADER FORMAT - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate employing a variety of medium access control (MAC) header formats in wireless communications. The MAC header formats can be specialized for a particular type of data included in a protocol data unit (PDU). In addition, the MAC headers can have a variable length to accommodate payloads of varying sizes without incurring unnecessary overhead. Further, mechanisms are provided to enable direct access and delivery of control PDUs to associated protocol layers to ensure better quality of service treatment.06-04-2009
20090028089Communication system and method to be performed in a communication system - The invention relates to a communication method and system wherein a network element of a roaming user is attachable to a visited first network and may still be served by a serving means of the home network. The network element of the roaming user is able to indicate a preference, e.g. home or local control, when registering or initiating a connection. A network element of the visited network such as proxy means adds information on the indicated preference when sending a message to the home network. The message is preferably sent as a protocol message, in particular a message of the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP).01-29-2009
20090010201Mobile Communication Access System, Packet Transfer Device, and Path Re-Establishing Method - Disclosed is a technique for providing a mobile communication access system, etc., that can eliminate the useless consumption of resources due to route redundancy, reduce the load on the processing, such as the setup of an LSP, performed by an ingress LSR, avoid an increase in the length of a signal route for setting up an LSP, suppress a delay in providing a notification of a change for an egress LSR to which a mobile terminal is to be connected, and perform a rapid handover process. According to this technique, based on identification information for a second edge device 01-08-2009
20090052379METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING MOBILITY IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING MOBILE INTERNET PROTOCOL - A method is provided for managing mobility of an Access Terminal (AT) in a mobile communication system using a Mobile Internet Protocol (MIP). The method includes generating, by an AT that has entered a new network, a Security Parameter Index (SPI) and a security key for mutual authentication with a Home Agent (HA) of the new network, sending, by the AT, a registration request message including authentication information including the SPI, the authentication information being generated using the security key, upon receipt of the registration request message, searching, by the HA, a database for the SPI included in the authentication information, verifying the authentication information according to the search result, upon successful verification of the authentication information, generating, by the HA, mobility binding information of the AT, and sending, by the HA, a registration response message including the HA's IP address.02-26-2009
20090052378METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RELIABLY TRANSMITTING RADIO BLOCKS WITH PIGGYBACKED ACK/NACK FIELDS - Piggybacked acknowledgement/non-acknowledgement (PAN) bits in unreliable bit positions of a modulated symbol are swapped with data bits located in more reliable bit positions. In addition, a power offset value may be applied to the symbols containing the PAN bits.02-26-2009
20090052374Wireless Communication Apparatus, Communication Routing Control Apparatus, Communication Routing Control Method and Communication System - A wireless communication apparatus for performing communication via a plurality of wireless interfaces in a wireless ad hoc network is disclosed. When the wireless communication apparatus receives a request frame via one of the plurality of wireless interfaces, the wireless communication apparatus sends the request frame from at least two wireless interfaces in the plurality of wireless interfaces. In addition, the wireless communication apparatus selects a wireless interface to be used for communication from among the plurality of wireless interfaces based on the request frame.02-26-2009
20090245176DEVICE MANAGED ACCESS POINT LISTS IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate device-side access point list management. Blacklists of access points unsuitable for providing network access to a related mobile device can be maintained as well as whitelists of suitable access points. The lists can be managed using an interface provided at the mobile device. In addition, lists can be modified according to provisioned network updates. Also, the lists can be of maximum size such that older entries can be purged upon insertion of newer entries based on a number of factors; timed entry deletion is provided as well. Access points in the lists can be stored and presented according to various identifiers related to the access points.10-01-2009
20110222473PROTOCOL TO SUPPORT ADAPTIVE STATION-DEPENDENT CHANNEL STATE INFORMATION FEEDBACK RATE IN MULTI-USER COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Methods and apparatuses are proposed for supporting one or more user-dependent channel state information (CSI) feedback rates in a downlink spatial division multiple access (SDMA) system. For certain aspects, an access point (AP) may receive a channel evolution feedback from one or more stations and send a request for CSI to the stations whose CSI values need to be updated. For certain aspects, the AP may poll the stations for updated CSI values. For certain aspects, deterministic back-off timers may be assigned to the stations indicating when to send their CSI feedback. The proposed methods may improve system performance.09-15-2011
20110222471METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR OPTIMIZED TRANSFER OF LOCATION DATABASE INFORMATION - A servicing communication device may receive a subset of a location reference database that is maintained by a plurality of location servers, and may provide location related data to a mobile device that is communicatively coupled to the servicing communication device based on the received subset. The servicing communication device may determine capabilities and/or requirements of the mobile device, and may generate the location related data based on that determination. The servicing communication device may determine attributes and/or parameters that may affect determination of the subset of the location reference database. The subset of location reference database may be requested based on the determined attributes and/or parameters. The attributes and/or parameters may comprise a location of the servicing communication device. The servicing communication device may determine its location, directly based on GNSS transmissions and/or indirectly based on assisted GNSS (A-GNSS) data received from the plurality of location servers.09-15-2011
20110222480SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR PROVIDING WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TO A WIND FARM - A system and method of providing wireless communication to a user computing device at a wind turbine including a tower, a nacelle, and a plurality of rotor blades defining a sweep area. The method includes coupling a wireless bridge to an exterior of the wind turbine, the wireless bridge configured to receive the wireless communication signal and coupling a wireless access point to the wind turbine near a roof of the wind turbine, wherein the wireless access point is configured to communicate with at least one user computing device within an access area of the wind turbine, the access area including an interior of the tower and the nacelle, and the sweep area. The method also includes communicatively coupling the wireless bridge to the wireless access point, and configuring the wireless bridge to forward, to a remote device, a data request from the user computing device, the data request received from the wireless access point.09-15-2011
20090257372METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR IMPROVED DECODING OF HYBRID AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST TRANSMISSIONS - A method for improved decoding of hybrid automatic repeat request (H-ARQ) transmissions may include attempting to verify a physical layer (PHY) cyclic redundancy check (CRC) for a candidate H-ARQ encoder packet. If the PHY CRC is not verified, medium access control layer protocol data units (MPDUs) may be identified in the candidate H-ARQ encoder packet, and attempts may be made to verify a medium access control layer (MAC) CRC for each MPDU in the candidate H-ARQ encoder packet.10-15-2009
20090252091System and Method for Multi-Stage Zero Forcing Beamforming in a Wireless Communications System - A system and method for multi-stage zero forcing beamforming in a wireless communications system is provided. A method includes receiving feedback information from each mobile station (MS) in a first plurality of mobile stations (MSs), selecting a first MS from the first plurality of MSs, and broadcasting information related to the first MS to the first plurality of MSs. The first MS having a largest value of a first metric based on the feedback information received from the first plurality of MSs. The method also includes receiving feedback information from each MS in a second plurality of MSs, selecting a second MS from the second plurality of MSs, and creating a precoding matrix from feedback information from the first MS and the second MS. The second MS having a largest value of a second metric based on the feedback information received from the second plurality of MSs.10-08-2009
20110141974ELECTRONIC MESSAGING TECHNOLOGY - Techniques are described for capturing text (e.g., SMS) messages and multimedia (e.g. MMS) messages along with messages and data sent with other communication modalities. The captured information may be used for performing social networking-related, data processing and auditing operations in real-time.06-16-2011
20090046635MOBILE NODE, MOBILE AGENT AND NETWORK SYSTEM - A mobile node moves from a first IP (Internet Protocol) network to a second IP network in a network system in which the first IP network capable of executing communication in accordance with both first and second kinds of IPs and the second IP network capable of executing communication in accordance with only the first kind of IP are connected with each other. When the mobile node communicates a message with other nodes on the first network after its movement accordance with the second kind of IP, a header for the movement containing both home and foreign addresses of the first kind in IP is added to a header containing home and foreign addresses in the second kind of IP, and put to the message, is added. The message to which the movement header is thus added is used for the communication between a first mobile agent on the first network and a second mobile agent on the second network, or between the mobile node and the first mobile agent.02-19-2009
20090073923Communication device, communication system thereof, and communication setting method thereof - A communication device is disclosed. The communication device includes a radio communication section and a switching section. The switching section switches a function between a station function and an access point function. In a state that the function of the communication device has been switched to the access point function, the communication device is connected to another communication device contained in a radio communication network through the radio communication section. The communication device receives connection setting information from the other communication device through the communication section. The connection setting information has been set to the communication section. The communication device stores the received connection setting information. After the function of the communication device has been switched from the access point function to the station function, the communication device is connected to the radio communication network containing the other communication device based on the stored connection setting information.03-19-2009
20090052375HIERARCHICAL MODULATION REVERSE LINK INTERFACE NODE - A wireless communication device transmits a hierarchically modulated reverse link (RL) WWAN signal comprising a lower modulation order component and a higher modulation order component. An interface node receives and demodulates the hierarchical modulated signal to recover the extended data sent with the higher modulation order component. The interface node sends extended data to a base station that is unable to recover the higher modulation order component from the UE device.02-26-2009
20110222479Transmission and Reception of a Wideband Signal with Narrowband Interference - It is disclosed a method including accommodating, in frequency domain, a first bandwidth of a first carrier signal with respect to a second bandwidth of a second carrier signal such that the first bandwidth adjoins to or overlaps the second bandwidth, the first bandwidth being greater than the second bandwidth. In a further aspect, prior to the transmission, the interference of the modulated second carrier signal is subtracted from each of the plurality of subcarrier signals of the first carrier signal.09-15-2011
20130121239Methods, Systems, and Products for Security Services - Methods, systems, and products are disclosed for notification of alarms in security systems. An alarm is detected by an alarm controller, and an alarm message is sent to notify of the alarm. The alarm message identifies a unique network address assigned to the alarm controller. The alarm controller then receives a Voice-over Internet Protocol call to the unique network address to verify the alarm.05-16-2013
20130121240Delay Management in Shared Baseband Deployments - A method of controlling radio link delay in a multi-standard wireless system having a first Radio Equipment Controller (REC) operating with a first radio standard interface and a second REC operating with a second radio standard interface is disclosed. A time delay between the first REC and a Radio Equipment (RE) and a time delay between the second REC and the RE is determined. When radio signal data from the first and second REC are received, they are stored into a memory. The stored radio signal data is then marked in accordance with the calculated time delay. The marked radio signal data from each REC is then multiplexed into a single radio signal timed according to a reference timing clock signal for transmission to the RE.05-16-2013
20130121241Indication of Selected Core Network in a Network Sharing Environment - A network broadcasts a list of multiple core networks. A mobile station MS selects one and sends an uplink message (e.g., ATTACH or ROUTING AREA UPDATE Request) with a new format detailed by these teachings. The body of the message has a data section and an identity section, and the identity section includes: a temporary identifier for a mobile station, a bit sequence indicating that a selected core network is identified in the uplink message and indicating type for the temporary identifier (e.g., Foreign or Random TLLI), and an indication of the selected core network. For the Foreign TLLI there is an extension field for the additional bits of the Foreign TLLI as compared to the Random TLLI, and the Foreign TLLI is derived from the mobile station's PTMSI.05-16-2013
20130121243SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION OF PACKETS HAVING A PLURALITY OF FORMATS - Systems and methods for communicating packets having a plurality of formats are described herein. In some aspects, a signal (SIG) field in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether an extension field, such as an extension SIG field or SIG-B field, is included in the packet. In another aspect, one or more detectors may be used to auto-detect packets formatted as one of at least two different formats based on a short training field (STF) of a received packet. In some aspects, along training field (LTF) in the preamble of a packet may indicate whether the payload is repetition coded.05-16-2013
20130121248WIRELESS BASE STATION AND METHOD OF PROCESSING DATA THEREOF - A clustering wireless base station includes a group digital processor including a plurality of digital units (DU) and a plurality of remote radio frequency units (RRU) that are connected to the group digital processor through a transport network and that are installed in each service target area. In this case, each DU includes a decoder that decodes upward data that is received from the each DU, and each RRU includes an encoder that encodes downward data from the each DU.05-16-2013
20130121249Method and apparatus for transmitting system information in a mobile communication system - A method and apparatus are provided for transmitting system information in a mobile communication system. The method includes configuring system information including first antenna configuration information and second antenna configuration information, and broadcasting the system information. The first antenna configuration information includes information about a number of antennas of a base station.05-16-2013
20130121250DATA BREAKOUT AT THE EDGE OF A MOBILE DATA NETWORK - Mobile network services are performed in a mobile data network in a way that is transparent to most of the existing equipment in the mobile data network. The mobile data network includes a radio access network and a core network. A first service mechanism in the radio access network breaks out data coming from a basestation, and performs one or more mobile network services at the edge of the mobile data network based on the broken out data. These services may include caching of data, data or video compression techniques, push-based services, charging, application serving, analytics, security, data filtering, and new revenue-producing services, as well as others. This architecture allows performing new mobile network services at the edge of a mobile data network within the infrastructure of an existing mobile data network.05-16-2013
20130121252Information Push Method, Apparatus, and System - The present invention provides a new Push method, apparatus, and system. The Push method includes: receiving a Push message delivered by an application server; obtaining a private IP address of a UE according to a user identifier, where the user identifier is obtained from the Push message; and obtaining, according to the private IP address of the UE, a PS domain node currently connected to the UE, sending the Push message to the PS domain node, and sending the Push message to the UE through the PS domain node.05-16-2013
20130121254TIMING ADJUSTMENT METHOD, USER EQUIPMENT, BASE STATION, AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A mobile communication system having a user equipment that performs transmission process having transmission timing adjustment information and a base station that receives a signal sent from the user equipment, the mobile communication system includes, if a timer controlling a term of application of first transmission timing adjustment information expires before transmission of a signal including identification information of the user equipment is performed during a connection process including reception of second transmission timing adjustment information while the user equipment has the first transmission timing adjustment information and performing the connection process to the base station, the user equipment does not transmit the signal.05-16-2013
20130121255GATING CONTROL IN A TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and system for updating or handling the update of a media path between a first user terminal and a second user terminal in a telecommunications network is provided. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the media path includes one or more gateway nodes. Each gateway node includes a gating function for gating media packets. Each gating function has an associated controlling function for controlling the gating function. Responsive to a message indicating at an update of the gating at the gating function is required, the gating function arranges for a new gating to be opened while keeping the old gating open. The gating function determines when the media has been switched to the new path. Responsive to the determination, the gating function arranges for the old gating to be closed.05-16-2013
20090097437METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING AN ACCESSPARAMETERS GROUP MESSAGE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for transmitting an AccessParameters group message in a wireless communication system, the method comprising generating the AccessParameters group message comprising a 2 bit AccessCycle Duration field wherein the AccessCycle Duration field determines the duration of the access cycle in units of Control Segment Periods (as defined by the Physical Layer), a 5 bit AccessSequencePartition field wherein the AccessSequencePartition field indicates the partition of the access sequence space to allow the access terminal to signal pilot power and buffer status information with the access sequence, a 4 bit MaxProbesPerSequence field wherein the MaxProbesPerSequence field determines the maximum number of probe sequence that can be part of one access sequence and is set to n+1, a 4 bit ProbeRampUpStepSize field wherein the ProbeRampUpStepSize field determines the power ramp up used for probes within a probe sequence and is set to a value 0.5*(1+n)dB, a 6 bit RDCHInitialPacketFormat field wherein the RDCHInitialPacketFormat field is set to the packet format that is used on the first transmission the access terminal makes on the R-DCH after getting an access grant, a 2 bit PilotStrengthSegmentation field wherein the PilotStrengthSegmentation field comprises a PilotThreshold1 and PilotThreshold2, a 8 bit OpenLoopAdjust field wherein the OpenLoopAdjust field determines the nominal power used by access terminal in the open loop power estimate and is set to value 70+n dB and transmitting the AccessParameters group message over a communication link.04-16-2009
20090103479RADIO COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, RADIO COMMUNICATION METHOD, BASE STATION AND RADIO TERMINAL - A radio terminal 04-23-2009
20090103476GRACEFUL DEGRADATION FOR VOICE COMMUNICATION SERVICES OVER WIRED AND WIRELESS NETWORKS - A method for gracefully extending the range and/or capacity of voice communication systems is disclosed. The method involves the persistent storage of voice media on a communication device. When the usable bit rate on the network is poor and below that necessary for conducting a live conversation, voice media is transmitted and received by the communication device at the available usable bit rate on the network. Although latency may be introduced, the persistent storage of both transmitted and received media of a conversation provides the ability to extend the useful range of wireless networks beyond what is required for live conversations. In addition, the capacity and robustness in not being affected by external interferences for both wired and wireless communications is improved.04-23-2009
20110141979TECHNIQUE FOR EMERGENCY SESSION HANDLING IN A COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques of emergency session handling in a communication network are provided, in which a packet switched network control function configured to handle emergency sessions established from a user equipment via a packet switched network access, e.g. an Emergency Call Session Control Function (E-CSCF), is associated with a switching control node of a circuit switched network. The switching control node is capable of handling emergency session established via a circuit switched network access, e.g. a Mobile Switching Centre Server (MSC-S) of a mobile network. Handling of emergency sessions established via the packet switched network access is forwarded from the packet switched network control function to the associated switching control node.06-16-2011
20110141977METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CDMA TIMER-BASED REGISTRATION ON A MOBILE DEVICE - A method and apparatus for improved timer based registration for a mobile device with a network, the network having a standard slot cycle time for interrupts, the method comprising the steps of: receiving, at the mobile device, a system parameter message from the network, the message having a value indicating a frequency for periodic registration; setting a timer value on a timer at the mobile device, the timer value being greater than the standard slot cycle time; setting a counter to count expiration of the timer; starting the timer; upon expiration of the timer, decrementing the counter; upon the counter reaching zero, waiting for a paging slot to communicate with the network; and sending a registration message to the network on the paging slot.06-16-2011
20110141976FAST PATH PACKET DESTINATION MECHANISM FOR NETWORK MOBILITY VIA SECURE PKI CHANNEL - Disclosed is a method for reducing routing overheads during data transmission to a destination mobile router of a plurality of mobile routers roaming in a network. The method comprises registering by top level mobile routers with a central authority server, sending data packets by a corresponding node of the network to the destination mobile router operationally attached to a corresponding top level mobile router, locating a position of the destination mobile router by identifying attachment of the destination mobile router to the corresponding top level mobile router from the information registered by the plurality of mobile routers with the central authority server, routing the data packet directly to the corresponding top level mobile router to which the destination mobile router is operationally attached and receiving the data packet by the destination mobile router from the corresponding top level mobile router, thereby reducing routing overheads in the network.06-16-2011
20110141973METHOD FOR REASSEMBLING MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT AND RECEIVER PERFORMING THE SAME - A method for reassembling a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) of a receiver includes: receiving at least one hybrid automatic repeat request (HARQ) burst in an automatic repeat request (ARQ) disabled connection that does not support an ARQ function; extracting at least one fragment from at least one MAC PDU included in at least one HARQ burst; setting a new start point by comparing a predetermined start point with the sequence number of the fragment; and reassembling fragments having sequence numbers before the new start point.06-16-2011
20110141972TNL CONNECTION SETUP METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BASE STATION USING DOWNLINK RECEIVER - A Transport Network Layer (TNL) connection setup method for a base station includes monitoring Physical Cell Identity (PCI) values of neighboring cells. When it is monitored that the PCI values are changed, IP addresses of neighboring base stations corresponding to the changed PCI values are acquired. Thereafter, it is determined whether it is necessary to perform a new TNL connection setup with respect to other neighboring base stations, based on the changed PCI values and the acquired IP addresses. When it is determined that it is necessary to perform the new TNL connection setup, the TNL connection setup is performed with the acquired IP addresses.06-16-2011
20110141971MECHANISMS FOR INFORMATION EXCHANGE ACROSS CELLS TO FACILITATE RECEPTION IN A HETEROGENEOUS NETWORK - A method, an apparatus, and a computer program product for wireless communication are provided in which a signal including a signal from a UE is received. System information of a neighboring eNodeB is obtained. The received signal is processed based on the system information in order to enhance the received signal with respect to the signal from the UE.06-16-2011
20110141970SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR DATA TRANSMISSION ON WIRELESS ALTERNATING SWITCHING CHANNELS - A system for data transmission on wireless alternating switching channels comprises a user, which allows a user to have at least an additional service on multiple service channels. The user sends at least a service forwarder a request to get at least an additional service, and receives the replied information of a specified forwarding channel. Before the connection between the user and the service forwarder fails or ends, the user receives original service and the service forwarder uses a specified service channel and transmits or receives additional service data for the user in the service channel interval; while in the control channel interval, the service forwarder uses the specified forwarding channel and transmits selective control message and selective additional data for the user, and the user switches to the specified forwarding channel to receive the selective control messages and the selective additional data.06-16-2011
20110141969BACKOFF PROCEDURE FOR POST DOWNLINK SDMA OPERATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for decreasing a probability of post-backoff collisions that occur during uplink transmissions from multiple user stations (STAs) following completion of downlink transmission from an access point to the STAs.06-16-2011
20110141965NETWORK DISCOVERY IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Apparatuses may stay synchronized with a network via a beacon signal transmitted at a set interval. Communication-related activities may be planned around instances when beacon signals are expected, which may also be known as a target beacon transmission time (TBTT). Scanning opportunities, which are periods of time during which apparatuses may perform passive scanning, may be planned based on an interfere multiple of a network beacon signal interval. Apparatuses may, upon realizing a scanning opportunity, opt either to utilize the scanning opportunity or to participate in network beaconing. In example scenarios where apparatuses opt to utilize scanning opportunities, apparatuses may prepare a network information message and then enter a passive scanning mode. Apparatuses may remain in the passive scanning mode for the duration of the scanning opportunity, reacting when messages are received from devices outside of the network by transmitting the network information message.06-16-2011
20110141966DATA-RELATED TASK SUPPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Apparatuses may stay synchronized with a network via a beacon signal that is transmitted at a set interval. Various communication-related activities may be planned around an instance when a beacon signal is expected, or a target beacon transmission time (TBTT). While some networked apparatuses are active during every TBTT, other apparatuses may operate using a diluted beacon period that is an integer multiple of the network beacon signal interval. Diluted beacon intervals may initiate periods of time during which apparatuses may become “aware” of other apparatuses. Awareness may comprise information related to communication configuration, apparatus status, and services offered by the various apparatuses in the network. Awareness information obtained during an awake window may also comprise information on data-related tasks that are pending in one or more apparatuses which may allow for the control of further data conveyance activities.06-16-2011
20090201854Method for Optimizing the Reading by a User Equipment of Mcch (Mbms Point-to-Multipoint Control Channel) Information - The invention relates to a method for optimizing the reading by a User Equipment (UE) of MCCH (MBMS Point-to-Multipoint Control Channel) information transmitted periodically to said UE by a Radio Network Controller (RNC) in cellular communication network during a Modification Period (MP) comprising a number of Repetition Periods (RP) during which a same MCCH information is transmitted to the UE.08-13-2009
20130215831HIGH ORDER MODULATION CONFIGURATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR USER EQUIPMENT IN A CELL FORWARD ACCESS CHANNEL STATE - The embodiment of the current invention provides a higher-order modulation method and device for a user equipment in a cell forward channel state, the method comprising: obtaining cell capability reported by a base station; determining whether to deploy a higher-order modulation for the user equipment in the cell forward access channel state according to the cell capability and a current configuration policy configured by the wireless network controller; separately sending a higher-order modulation activation indication to the base station and the user equipment if it is determined to deploy the higher-order modulation for user equipment in the cell forward channel state. The method and device of the embodiment increase the peak rate of the user equipment in the cell forward channel state via introducing higher-order modulation to the cell forward channel state, and provide guarantee for additional subsequent service bearers in the cell forward channel state.08-22-2013
20130215829WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, METHOD OF CONTROLLING SAME AND STORAGE MEDIUM - Efficient selection of an access point is performed in accordance with quality of service of wireless communication required for a wireless communication apparatus. To achieve this in a wireless network system that uses a plurality of access points, the access point suited to the quality of service of wireless communication required by the wireless communication apparatus is selected automatically when the access point to which the wireless communication apparatus will be connected is selected.08-22-2013
20130215825MOBILE WIDE AREA NETWORK IP TRANSLATION CONFIGURATION - A method, system and non-transitory computer storage readable medium comprise operating a Wide Area Network (WAN) device according to a first Internet protocol (IP) translation mode of operation, changing an initial connectivity status between the WAN device and a WAN and transitioning from the first IP translation mode of operation to a second IP translation mode of operation that is different from the first IP translation mode of operation based on the change in the initial connectivity status.08-22-2013
20090097436Methods for access control in femto system - In a method for controlling access to wireless resources provided by femto cells within a femto subnet a femto management system or radio access network may control access to femto cells within the femto subnet by assigning at least one hashing class mask of a first-type or hashing class mask of a second-type to a wireless user. The hashing class mask of the first-type or hashing of the second-type class mask may be assigned based on whether the wireless user is authorized to access a first femto cell within the femto subnet. The hashing class mask of the first-type provides access to at least one first femto cell within the femto subnet.04-16-2009
20090097441METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SELECTING MBMS RADIO BEARER TYPE - A method and apparatus for selecting a radio bearer type for providing a service to a plurality of mobile terminals according to a count of mobile terminals obtained through responses to a service response request message from a network is provided. An MBMS radio bearer type is selected according to a count that includes RRC-connected mobile terminals that still need to establish a connection in order to receive an MBMS such that the radio bearer type established is sufficient to provide the MBMS to all mobile terminals desiring to receive the service.04-16-2009
20090097439METHOD OF CONTROLLING BROADCASTING IN A WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - The present invention relates to a method of controlling broadcasting in a wireless sensor network. The method includes performing broadcasting from an upper node to a lower node for a predetermined number of times, transmitting a time offset calculated according to the broadcasting from the lower node to the upper node, calculating an average of the time offsets received from at least one lower node, by the upper node and resetting the number of times of broadcasting according to the calculated average by the upper node. Accordingly, the number of times of broadcasting may be controlled according to the average of received time offsets in the wireless sensor network. In another aspect, an adjustment to the number of times of broadcasting may be received and the number of times of broadcasting may be adjusted based on an average of the received adjustments.04-16-2009
20110228724USER-SPECIFIC SEARCH SPACE DESIGN FOR MULTI-CARRIER OPERATION - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to techniques for user-specific search space design for multi-carrier operation in Long Term Evolution Advanced (LTE-A) systems. The user-specific search space can be designed for searching Physical Downlink Control Channels (PDCCHs) transmitted on one component carrier (CC) that schedules Physical Downlink Shared Channel/Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PDSCH/PUSCH) transmissions on two or more different CCs. In one aspect, multiple independent user-specific search spaces can be designed. In another aspect, one user-specific search space can be randomly derived and then expanded to accommodate search for multiple CCs. In yet another aspect, the search space design can retain randomness in starting search element indices of multiple PDSCH/PUSCH CCs, while overlapping of search spaces for multiple PDSCH/PUSCH CCs can be avoided.09-22-2011
20110228725FIELD COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND FIELD COMMUNICATION METHOD - A field communication system may perform wireless communication with field devices. The field communication system may include a connection allowing unit that determines whether or not to allow a connection to the field device by referring a field device list, the field device list listing tag names related to the field devices, an address issuance unit that automatically issues a communication address for the field device if the connection allowing unit allows the connection with the field device, an address management unit that establishes correspondences between the communication addresses and the tag names of the field devices by using the field device list, and a communication unit that transmits data to the field device designated by the tag name, the communication unit receiving the data transmitted from the field device, the data being used to control the field device designated by the tag name.09-22-2011
20090086668METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR A DUAL-STACK MN TO ROAMING IN AN IPV4 NETWORK - The disclosure provides a method and apparatus for a dual-stack Mobile Node (MN) to roam in an IPv4 network. The apparatus mainly includes a Foreign Home Agent (FHA). The method mainly includes: acquiring, by the MN, a temporary IPv4 address THOA that the FHA assigns to the MN, and registering its IPv4 Care-of Address (COA) in the FHA; and delivering, by the FHA, a packet between the MN and a Corresponding Node (CN) or Home Agent (HA), according to information about the IPv4 COA, which is assigned for the MN and has been registered by the MN in the FHA. With the method of the invention, a routing solution may be implemented for a dual-stack MN to roam from an IPv6 network to an IPv4 network.04-02-2009
20090086664Packet forwarding in multi-radio multi-hop wireless networks - A packet forwarding technique is presented that forwards data packets through a multi-hop wireless network employing multi-radio nodes. In each multi-radio node, an output buffer is shared among the radios. Outgoing packets are stored in this buffer. Whenever there is a transmission opportunity on the radios sharing the output buffer, the node examines the buffer and searches for packets that are scheduled to be transmitted to a neighboring node having an open communication link with the transmitting node. The packet in the discovered group that has the highest transmission priority is then transmitted to its next scheduled node.04-02-2009
20110222478METHOD OF TRANSMITTING DATA FRAME TO MULTI-USER IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - Provided a method for simultaneously transmitting data frames to a plurality of STAs in a multi-user based wireless communication system. The method includes: requesting sounding or feedback for the plurality of STAs by using a first control information frame containing first group information; receiving responses to the sounding or feedback request; reconfiguring the plurality of STAs composing the first group into a plurality of second groups on the basis of the responses such that the sum of maximum transport streams of the respective STAs composing one group becomes equal to or less than the maximum number of streams transmitted by an AP; transmitting a second control information frame containing second group information on the respective second groups to the plurality of STAs composing the first group; and transmitting data frames by using the second group information.09-15-2011
20110222469MODULATION AND CODING SCHEME SELECTION METHOD FOR A SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE COMPLIANT COMMUNICATION DEVICE - Transmission of data from a portable communication device to a base station via a radio frequency signal uses a plurality of modulation and coding schemes and a protocol that has recurring frames. Each frame has a plurality of transmission slots, different numbers of which can be used to transmit data. When it is desired to transmit data a higher rate than was used previously, an attempt is made to increase the number transmission slots being used. If doing so, produces a transmission results in a specific absorption rate limit being exceeded, then the modulation and coding scheme is changed to one having a greater data coding rate. The power level and the number transmission slots then are set so that the data transmission does not exceed the specific absorption rate limit. The data is then transmitted by the portable communication device.09-15-2011
20090207783COMMUNICATION METHOD AND APPARATUS USING VIRTUAL SINK NODE IN WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK - A communication method and apparatus using a virtual sink node in a wireless sensor network, in which location information about a destination node is acquired by a source node. If the location of the destination node is out of a transmission range of the source node, data including the location information about the destination node are transmitted from the source node to one of nodes adjacent to the source node, where the one node is typically closest to the destination node. The data are transmitted from the one node to another one of nodes adjacent to the one node, where another node is closest to the destination node, until the destination node is located within a transmission range of the one node. If the destination node is located within the transmission range of the one node, the data are transmitted from the one node to the destination node.08-20-2009
20090168695DEFINING A BOUNDARY FOR WIRELESS NETWORK USING PHYSICAL ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS - A system and method for defining a boundary within a wireless coverage area using a physical access control system (PACS) and limiting access to the wireless network to devices located within the boundary area is provided. The system includes a PACS for controlling access to a secured area defined by the boundary to authorized personnel and a wireless network generating system for generating a wireless network. Access to the wireless network is limited to devices associated with an authorized personnel when the authorized personnel is determined to be within the secured area and denied to devices associated to personnel determined to be outside the secured area.07-02-2009
20110228728METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR SPACE CODE TRANSMIT DIVERSITY OF PUCCH - Aspects of the invention are directed to a transmit diversity method for use in a wireless terminal having a plurality of antennas and a wireless terminal configured to implement the method. The transmit diversity method includes using a different orthogonal sequence for each antenna, or group of antennas, for transmitting an uplink control channel from a wireless terminal to a base station. A first step of the method involves assigning at least one orthogonal sequence to one or more of the plurality of antennas, each of the plurality of antennas being assigned at least one orthogonal sequence. Once the orthogonal sequence is assigned, a further step involves scrambling a signal to be transmitted on the physical uplink control channel (PUCCH) using the at least one orthogonal sequence for each antenna thereby producing a scrambled PUCCH for transmission by each antenna. The scrambled PUCCH can then be transmitted on the plurality of antennas.09-22-2011
20110228727Seek and find location method, system and apparatus - Methods, systems, and apparatus for locating the seek and find RF device are provided. An exemplary embodiment of a seek and find RF device receives a first RF cell phone signal from a requesting party device, wherein the first RF cell phone signal includes at least a location query requesting location information of the seek and find RF device, and wherein the location query is directed to the seek and find RF device using a mobile device identifier. The seek and find RF device receives at least three GPS satellite signals and determines a location of the seek and find RF device based upon the at least three GPS satellite signals. The seek and find RF device then transmits a second RF cell phone signal, wherein the second RF cell phone signal includes the determined location, and wherein the second RF cell phone signal is directed to the requesting party device using a device identifier.09-22-2011
20090201851Coordinated Channel Change in Mesh Networks - A coordinated channel change system. In particular implementations, a method includes receiving a prepare-to-change message, wherein the prepare-to-change message indicates instructions to prepare to change channels and includes a designated channel, and forwarding the prepare-to-change message to one or more child nodes. The method also includes receiving a ready-to-change message from the one or more child nodes, and transmitting a change-to-channel message to the one or more child nodes, wherein the change-to-channel message indicates instructions to switch to the designated channel. The method also includes receiving an acknowledgement message from the one or more child nodes, and changing to the designated channel.08-13-2009
20090245168Server for Enhancing Communication Between a Content Provider and a Radio Communication Device and Method therefor - The present invention relates to a server (10-01-2009
20090245170System and method for the placement of rank information in a physical uplink shared channel - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of selecting two or more orthogonal frequency-division multiplexing (OFDM) symbols in a subframe of a physical uplink shared channel, the two or more OFDM symbols are selected starting from the bottom of the physical uplink shared channel in a bottom-up manner, and repeating one or more rank information (RI) coded bits in each of the selected two or more OFDM symbols.10-01-2009
20090252090Apparatus and method of 3G mobile communication capable of implementing a multi-channel protocol - This invention discloses an apparatus and a method of 3G mobile communication capable of implementing a multi-channel protocol. The 3G mobile communication apparatus includes: an application layer, for providing applications to transmit voice data; a multi-channel processing layer, for simulating at least one physical communication port of the 3G mobile communication apparatus into virtual logical data channels by software according to priority of the data transmitted, and each virtual logical data channel is connected to the data processing layer, and a multi-channel protocol layer is provided for transmitting the data received by the 3G mobile communication apparatus to the data processing layer according to the priority of the data; and a 3G wireless communication module, which is a wireless communication interface, for connecting the bus interface and achieving a signal connection of the 3G mobile communication apparatus with a base station.10-08-2009
20090219861TRANSMITTING APPARATUS, RECEIVING APPARATUS, AND PAGING INFORMATION RECEPTION METHOD - A disclosed transmitting apparatus includes a paging indicator information generating unit generating paging indicator information including a group ID of users who are to receive a paging channel and information indicating a radio resource in which the paging channel is transmitted; and a multiplexing unit multiplexing the paging indicator information.09-03-2009
20090219859Radio Communication Terminal - A radio communication terminal according to the present invention comprises: a call request transmitter configured to transmit a call request for a destination terminal to a call control server; an input information acquisition unit configured to acquire inputted information; a message creation unit configured to create a message for the destination terminal on the basis of the information acquired by the input information acquisition unit; a starting unit configured to start the message creation unit during a period from when the call request transmitter transmits the call request until the communication path is set; and a message transmitter configured to transmit the message created by the message creation unit to the destination terminal.09-03-2009
20090219857 METHOD OF SERVING SECTOR MAINTENANCE IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - An apparatus and method for serving sector maintenance in a wireless communication system is described. A forward link shared signaling Change (FLSS) command is received and it is determined if a FLSS in the ChangeFLSS command is a member of a NonSynchronousSubset.09-03-2009
20090219860BASE STATION AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - The present invention relates to a base station for generating and transmitting system information to a mobile station. The present invention also relates to a communication method of communicating system information in a communication system including the base station and the mobile station. The base station generates system information; categorizes the system information into multiple pieces of system information; multiplexes the categorized multiple pieces of system information into multiple channels or multiple blocks; and transmits the system information on the multiple channels or the multiple blocks. The mobile station receives system information included in a portion of the multiple channels or the multiple blocks.09-03-2009
20090219858Method and System for Transmitting a Signal to a Communication Device in a Cellular Communication System - A method for transmitting a signal to a communication device in a cellular communication system is provided. The method comprises transmitting a signal using a first antenna being provided in a first sector of the cellular communication system, and transmitting another signal using a second antenna being provided in a second sector of the cellular communication system, wherein the first sector at least partially overlaps the second sector, wherein the signal transmitted by the second antenna is a cyclic delayed version of the signal transmitted by the first antenna.09-03-2009
20090219855TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD OF DOWNLINK PACKET COMMUNICATION AND WIRELESS BASE STATION - A wireless base station for transmitting a data packet to a plurality of mobile stations through a downlink shared channel determines two powers to be allocated to the downlink shared channel using two large and small transmission power margins. The wireless base station carries out a step of relating a first transmission format, which applies a phase modulation or a phase-amplitude modulation to a data packet to be transmitted by an allocation power corresponding to the larger margin, to the mobile stations and a step of relating a second transmission format, which applies only the phase modulation to the data packet to be transmitted using the allocation power corresponding to the other margin, to the mobile stations, compares the total numbers of bits to be transmitted by the respective transmission formats, and transmits the data packet by the transmission format corresponding to a larger value. With this operation, the communication fault of an HSDPA due to the transmission power margins can be prevented.09-03-2009
20090245175MOBILE RADIO TERMINAL - A mobile radio terminal has a first radio communication unit and a second radio communication unit adopting mutually different communication systems, first starts the first radio communication unit and connects to a content server CS, obtains meta-data of a desired content, and a control unit determines a communication system to be applied to downloading on the basis of the meta-data, and downloads the content data with one of the first radio communication unit and that second radio communication unit that corresponds to the determination.10-01-2009
20090245172BASE STATION AND SCHEDULING METHOD - A base station performing wireless communications with terminals includes: a scheduler scheduling data transmitted to the terminal; a desynchronization determining unit acquiring synchronization information on synchronization between the base station and a neighboring base station to the base station and determining, based on the synchronization information acquired, whether the desynchronization occurs in the base station or not; and a changing unit changing, when the desynchronization determining unit determines that the desynchronization occurs in the base station, the scheduling by the scheduler so as to restrain radio waves transmitted from the base station and radio waves transmitted from the neighboring base station from interfering with each other.10-01-2009
20090257375ACCESS GATEWAY APPARATUS, BASE STATION APPARATUS, COMMUNICATION CONTROL SYSTEM AND COMMUNICATION CONTROL METHOD - A communication control system capable of reducing the traffic amount, CPU's processing load and channel bands related to a location registering process. In this system, a paging part (10-15-2009
20090257373Methods and Apparatus for Coverage Verification in a Wireless Sensor Network - Methods and apparatus are provided for improved coverage verification schemes in a wireless sensor network that do not require information about the location of sensor nodes in the wireless sensor network. Coverage holes are detected by a first node in a wireless sensor network by obtaining an estimate of a distance to each of a plurality of additional nodes in a transmission radius of the first node; determining a relative location of each of the plurality of additional nodes in the coordinate system of the first node; identifying border segments of a sensing border of the first node, where each of the border segments comprises a section of a sensing border of the first node that is covered by a sensing radius of at least one of the additional nodes; and determining if a coverage hole exists for the first node by determining if a plurality of the border segments comprise a cyclic segment sequence. The coordinate system comprises r-map coordinates of the first node and the additional nodes, where r is based on a transmission radius of the first node10-15-2009
20090201849Transmission apparatus, transmission method, reception apparatus and reception method - A transmission apparatus which attempts improvement of signal quality in an uplink and a downlink carries out radio transmission of different signals simultaneously from respective ones of a plurality of antennas. The apparatus has pilot multiplexing means for multiplexing a pilot channel to transmit from each antenna in one or more of a time division multiplexing method, a frequency division multiplexing method and a code division multiplexing method, data multiplexing means for time-multiplexing a pilot channel and a data channel, and means for transmitting a signal in a least one of a space division multiplexing (SDM) method and a space time transmission diversity (STTD) method.08-13-2009
20090245180SYSTEM, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING MULTIMEDIA CALL CONTINUITY - A system, method, and apparatus for implementing multimedia call continuity solve the problem that when a domain transfer happens, part of a media flow in a multimedia session cannot be transfer between bearers of different access modes. Besides a remote UE, the system further includes a multi-mode terminal MTF UE that supports media flow transfer between multiple modes and carries media flow transfer context information in an initiated media stream transfer request, and a media transfer function (MTF) that acts as an agent to initiate and perform a media renegotiation with the remote UE, according to the media flow transfer context information carried in the request. After the media renegotiation, the MTF UE or the MTF is adapted to release the media flow that needs to be transferred before the media renegotiation. Therefore, when a domain transfer happens, the media stream can be transferred between the bearers of different access modes that the MTF UE supports.10-01-2009
20090245178METHOD AND APPARATUS TO REPORT AND MANAGE CELLS IN A MULTI CARRIER SYSTEM - Methods and apparatuses for facilitating managing cells in a multi-carrier system from an access terminal and base station are provided. The base station and access terminal communicate via an anchor carrier and a supplementary carrier. A triggering algorithm generated by the base station is transmitted to the access terminal. The triggering algorithm includes instructions for the access terminal to report downlink measurements as a function of trigger events detected over the anchor carrier and/or the supplementary carrier. Downlink measurements taken by the access terminal are provided to the base station. Cell management instructions based in part on the downlink measurements are then provided to the access terminal by the base station.10-01-2009
20090245177System and Method for Multiple Packet Data Network Connectivity Detachment - A system is provided that includes a component configured to promote detachment of a user equipment (UE) from a plurality of packet data network (PDN) gateways by sending a message to the plurality of PDN gateways to detach multiple PDN connections associated with the UE.10-01-2009
20090245174METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR DATA TRANSFER IN A PACKET-SWITCHED DATA NETWORK - Apparatus for and methods of enabling a gateway node of a first packet-switched data network to select a first channel for transferring a data packet to a destination packet data protocol address of a correspondent node provided service in the first network are disclosed. The gateway node is configured to select the first channel from a plurality of channels configured to transfer data packets to the destination packet data protocol address of the correspondent node, wherein the data packet is sent from a mobile node of a second packet-switched data network external to the first network, and wherein the mobile node has been in a communication session with the correspondent node while provided service in a third packet-switched data network different to the second network.10-01-2009
20100165916Wireless Star Network with Standby Central Node - A wireless network with a star topology includes a first central node, a second central node, wherein the first and second nodes are functionally equivalent. A set of leaf nodes are configured to communicate with either the first central node or the second central node via wireless links, depending whether the central nodes are active or inactive.07-01-2010
20090316631MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS AND MOBILE STATION APPARATUS - To prevent a collision from occurring at the time of random access in cases such as handover, response to paging and the like where a mobile station apparatus performs random access in response to directions from a base station apparatus. In a mobile communication system in which a mobile station apparatus 12-24-2009
20090316622METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING PACKET FORWARDING, AND COMMUNICATION MODE - A technology is disclosed for reducing the number of encapsulations required when MAP forwards a packet to a mobile node which is layered within mobile networks, with mobile networks nested and multiple mobile routers chained behind MAP (Mobility Anchor Point). When a node 12-24-2009
20090316624Monitoring and influencing the behavior and status of wireless sensor networks - Monitoring the status and behavior in a wireless network is provided. In a wireless network of operational nodes, one or more monitoring nodes are embedded in the network to monitor the status and behavior of the network without unintentionally disturbing the network. The monitoring nodes receive state information from the operational nodes. The operational nodes can be nodes in a wireless sensor network or a broadcast-only distributed wireless network. State information is sent in small state messages during the idle period of the communication frame of the operational node to be received by monitoring nodes. Transmission of state messages in the idle period for monitoring purposes does not disturb communication between operational nodes and can be energy efficient. The monitoring nodes can also intercept communications between operational nodes. Providing feedback to and influencing operational nodes are also provided.12-24-2009
20090252089PACKET RECEIVING AND TRANSMITTING METHOD - An embodiment of the invention provides a method of receiving packets from a transmitting station at a receiving station in a mobile communication system. The packet receiving method includes receiving a radio resource including a data packet and a packet indicator related to the data packet, identifying the packet indicator, and processing the data packet according to the content of the packet indicator. Another embodiment of the invention provides a method of transmitting packets from a transmitting station to a receiving station in a mobile communication system. The packet transmitting method includes receiving a response signal of a first data packet from the receiving station, allocating a second data packet to a radio resource according to the response signal, allocating a packet indicator related to the second data packet to the radio resource, and transmitting the second data packet and the packet indicator to the receiving station.10-08-2009
20090252085ROBUST WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND COMPONENTS THEREOF - A wireless communication system includes an access point and first and second stations. The first station transmits a first message that includes an address of a second station as a destination address and an address of the first station as a source address. The access point forwards the message including the address of the second station address as the destination address and the address of the first station as the source address. The second station receives the message from the first station during a first time interval and receives the first message from the access point during a second time interval. The second station processes the duplicate received message to produce inbound data.10-08-2009
20090245171WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS - A wireless communication system and a wireless communication device capable of performing communication by each transmission signal without mutual interference, when a plurality of transmission signals of different communication systems or the same communication systems exist within the same frequency band. The system includes a first wireless communication device, a second wireless communication device, a third wireless communication device, and a fixed band-pass filter and a variable band-pass filter in the third wireless communication device. The first wireless communication signal includes control information indicating a variable pass band in the variable band-pass filter, and the control information is given to the variable band-pass filter, thereby allowing the first wireless communication signal to be selectively passed through the variable band-pass filter, while removing the second wireless communication signal.10-01-2009
20090245169System and method for multiplexing on an LTE uplink control channel - A wireless communication network comprising a plurality of base stations capable of wireless communication with a plurality of subscriber stations within a coverage area of the network, wherein at least one of the plurality of base stations is capable of: determining a multiplexing scheme for multiplexing a frequency- selective channel quality information/precoding matrix index (FS CQI/PMI) feedback report with a wideband channel quality information/precoding matrix index (WB CQI/PMI) feedback report and a rank information (RI) report on a physical uplink control channel; transmitting the multiplexing scheme to a subscriber station; and receiving, from the subscriber station, an FS CQI/PMI feedback report multiplexed with a WB CQI/PMI feedback report and a RI report on the physical uplink control channel according to the multiplexing scheme.10-01-2009
20080259847Coordinated Beacon Period (Bp) Mergins for Distributed Wireless Networks - The application describes a method to merge two wireless networks in which each terminal gets a beacon slot within the beacon period. In order to merge two networks, the beacon slots have to be time-coordinated such that the beacon slots of the first network are completed before the beacon slots of the second network begin. The method includes transmitting a beacon frame having a beacon period switch information element which instructs the neighboring terminals in the first network of the need to merge, provides clock synchronization information; provides the time of the merge; and informs the neighboring terminals which beacon slot to occupy in the beacon period of the merged network. In order to deal with hidden terminals, the information needs to be forwarded terminal-to-terminal within each network.10-23-2008
20080259841SUBSCRIPTION AGGREGATION AND LOAD BALANCING IN A BROADBAND ROUTER - In one embodiment, a bandwidth aggregation router is provided including a wireless broadband modem interface for communicating with a wireless network, a wired wide area network interface, and a processor configured to aggregate bandwidth from the wireless broadband modem interface and the wired wide area network interface. The router may then efficiently allocate the aggregated bandwidth to at least one device for access to a network.10-23-2008
20090141672METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA USING DOWNLINK DUMMY CONTROL BLOCK AND SYSTEM USING THE SAME - A method for transmitting data using a downlink dummy control block and a system using the same. The method includes receiving, by a Base Station, data to be broadcast to Mobile Stations (MSs) from a mobile communication service provider server, and inserting, by the BS, the received data into a padding bit field within a downlink dummy control block and broadcasting the downlink dummy control block to the MSs.06-04-2009
20090252088Method for routing via access terminals - An access-terminal routing methodology is provided that may be used to enable a wireless, meshed backhaul between base stations using existing wireless-access resources (time, bandwidth, code-space, power), protocols, and base station infrastructure. Accordingly, the invention provides a means to extend the coverage of existing networks by adding standalone base stations without wired or specialized wireless backhaul.10-08-2009
20090257378METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A REAL-TIME COMMUNICATIONS SERVICE - A real-time media session is established between user equipment and a media communication server via a serving access network. According to the Invention, dummy data (e.g. a dummy message) is sent in order to maintain a dedicated channel during the inactive periods of a real-time media session or to trigger an early setup of a dedicated channel in the access network. In this manner, user equipment logged on to a real-time media (e.g. PoC) session are prevented from going to a radio resource idle state, thus avoiding potential long extra delays during real-time media (e.g. PoC) service usage. The invention further allows the sending and receiving user equipment to set up dedicated channels (DCH) already during the start-to-talk procedure of the transmitting user equipment, which in turn potentially reduces end-to-end delays during the conversation.10-15-2009
20100150077APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR WIRELESS COMMUNICATION VIA AT LEAST ONE OF DIRECTIONAL AND OMNI-DIRECTION ANTENNAS - Techniques for using at least one of omni-directional and directional antennas for communication are described. A station may be equipped antenna elements selectable for use as an omni-directional antenna or one or more directional antennas. The station may select the omni-directional antenna or a directional antenna for use for communication based on various factors such as, e.g., whether the location or direction of a target station for communication is known, whether control frames or data frames are being exchanged, etc.06-17-2010
20100150066 Method For Communicating Data, A Transmitting Unit And A Computer Program Product - The invention relates to a method for communicating data via a shared wifeless channel. The method comprises the steps of preparing a data packet for transmission via the shared wireless channel (06-17-2010
20100150072GATEWAY DEVICES AND WIRELESS CONTROL NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM USING THE SAME - An object of the invention is to improve the reliability of a wireless control network management system. Gateway devices for relaying data communication between a monitoring/controlling host connected thereto via a wired network and a plurality of wireless nodes connected thereto via wireless circuit and constituting a wireless network, wherein the gateway device comprises wireless communication means for sending data from the host to at least any one of the wireless nodes, and redirect means for causing the wireless communication means to send the data to one of the wireless nodes and to transfer the data to the other gateway device connected to the wired network.06-17-2010
20100150070SENSOR NODE HAVING SELF LOCALIZATION FUNCTION AND SELF LOCALIZATION METHOD THEREOF - Disclosed are a sensor node having a self localization function and a self localization method of the sensor node. The sensor node calculates a location thereof by receiving location information measured at each of two mobile nodes at different times and using four location information of the received location information. Additional cost and power consumption required for installing additional equipment such as an anchor node, a ultrasonic transceiver and a signal amplifier are reduced.06-17-2010
20100150067DEVICE AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN A WIDEBAND WIRELESS NETWORK AND COMPUTER PROGRAM PRODUCT - A device for transmitting data in a wideband wireless network. The device may include a transmitter for transmitting data via a channel of the wideband wireless network, the transmitter is arranged to start the transmitting in response to a start signal. A first transmission controller is connected to the transmitter, for controlling transmission of data by the transmitter. The transmission controller includes an energy detector for detecting the amount of energy in the channel. The energy detector is arranged to repeat the detecting in response to a repeat signal. A comparator is connected to an output of the energy detector and to a control input of the transmitter. The comparator is arranged to compare the detected amount of energy with an energy threshold, to output the repeat signal to the energy detector in case the detected amount of energy exceeds the energy threshold; and to output the start signal to the transmitter when the detected amount of energy is below the energy threshold.06-17-2010
20100150056WIRELESS COMMUNICATION MOBILE STATION APPARATUS AND RACH DATA TRANSMITTING METHOD - A mobile station capable of reducing the probability of collision of RACH data in a random access. In this mobile station, a moving speed determining part (06-17-2010
20090262683Method and Apparatus for Setup and Release of User Equipment Context Identifiers in a Home Node B System - Some embodiments are implemented in a communication system that includes a first communication system comprised of a licensed wireless radio access network and a core network, and a second communication system comprising a plurality of user hosted access points and a network controller. In some embodiments, each access point operates using short range licensed wireless frequencies to establish a service region. In some embodiments, the network controller communicatively couples the core network to the plurality of access points. The method covers the sending of a registration request for a user equipment from an access point to the network controller and receiving a registration accept response with a unique identifier for the user equipment allocated by the network controller.10-22-2009
20090129320Communications Terminal, Server, Playback Control Method and Program - The communications terminal comprises: a playback device which playbacks content; a reading device which reads in access information recorded on a prescribed recording medium, the access information being necessary for downloading the content which can be played back by the playback device, via a network; a communications device which downloads via communications the content corresponding to the access information according to the access information read in; a storage device which stores the downloaded content, the storage device storing details of the access information in association with the content, the details of the access information being used in downloading the content; a judging device which judges whether or not the content corresponding to the read access information is present in the storage device, according to information which is stored in the storage device, when the access information is read in by the reading device; and a control device which controls the playback device, the reading device, the communications device, the storage device, and the judging device, wherein: if the judging device judges that the content is present in the storage device, the control device controls for acquiring the content corresponding to the access information read in from the storage device, and for playing back the content; and if the judging device judges that the content is not present in the storage device, the control device controls for downloading the content corresponding to the access information read in, and for playing back the content.05-21-2009
20110141967METHODS AND APPARATUS RELATED TO SUBSTANTIALLY REAL-TIME DATA TRANSMISSION AND ANALYSIS FOR SENSORS - In some embodiments, a system includes a mobile base station, multiple sensors, and multiple communication devices. Each sensor is configured to collect sensor data. Each communication device is coupled to at least one of the multiple sensors. Each communication device is coupled to an encryption engine configured to receive and encrypt data from at least one of the multiple sensors. Each communication device is configured to send the sensor data from the respective sensor to the mobile base station.06-16-2011
20100002633MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, ACCESS DEVICE, AND GATEWAY INFORMATION STORAGE DEVICE - A gateway information storage device (01-07-2010
20100002631APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR NOTIFYING CHANGE OF SYSTEM CONTROL INFORMATION IN A BROADBAND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - An apparatus and method for notifying a change of system control information in a wireless communication system are provided. The method includes, changing a Group Configuration Change Counter (GCCC) and upon change of a Secondary-Super Frame Header/Sub-Packet1 (S-SFH/SP1) whose transmission period is changeable within a range of one or more super frames, changing the GCCC and information representing the change of the common control message upon change of at least one common control message, and transmitting the GCCC and the information representing the change of the at least one common control message.01-07-2010
20100002630METHOD FOR PROCESSING NDI IN RANDOM ACCESS PROCEDURE AND A METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING A SIGNAL USING THE SAME - A method for processing NDI in a random access procedure and a method for transmitting and receiving a signal using the same are disclosed. The method for transmitting an uplink signal from a user equipment (UE) to a base station comprises receiving a first uplink (UL) grant signal through a message identified by a temporary cell identifier (Temporary C-RNTI) from a base station, the first uplink grant signal including a new data indicator (NDI) toggled if the base station indicates new transmission; receiving a second uplink grant signal through a downlink control channel identified by a cell identifier (C-RNTI) from the base station, the second uplink grant signal including a new data indicator (NDI) with a predetermined value; and determining uplink signal retransmission of the user equipment depending on whether the NDI of the second uplink grant signal has been toggled, wherein the UE ignores the NDI received using the temporary cell identifier.01-07-2010
20100002629System and Method for Mobility Restriction in Wireless Communications Systems - A system and method for mobility restriction in wireless communications systems is provided. A method for base station operations includes receiving a request for service from a terminal, sending a request for authorization of the terminal to a controller, receiving in response to the request for authorization, an indication that the terminal is authorized, and granting access to the terminal. The indication includes a mobility restriction classification associated with the terminal.01-07-2010
20100002627SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR USE OF A SHORT BEACON IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A system and method for use of a short beacon in a wireless communication network is disclosed. In one embodiment, the method comprises generating a short beacon comprising PHY information, wherein the short beacon excludes MAC information and transmitting the short beacon via the wireless network. In general, three types of short beacons are disclosed, a first type consisting only of a PHY preamble, a second type also including a PHY header, and a third type also including a MAC header. In addition, the scheme of common beacons and individual beacons is described. Common beacons are broadcast omni-directional at the beginning of each superframe with low data rate and individual beacons are unicast to individual devices directionally with high data rate. A common beacon contains information intended for all of the devices of the network. An individual beacon contains information intended for one particular device.01-07-2010
20100002625METHOD OF CONNECTING A CLIENT ON A MOVING CARRIER WIRELESSLY TO ONE OR MORE ACCESS POINTS - A method of connecting a client on a moving carrier wirelessly to any stationary access point in a list of stationary access points in a predetermined order. The method includes authenticating the client to a first stationary access point in the list of stationary access points. The method includes identifying the client as an authenticated client and informing other access points in the list of stationary access points with respect to the authenticated client. The method includes bypassing an authenticating process when establishing network connections between the authenticated client and one of the other stationary access points.01-07-2010
20100150068COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system includes sector units composing base stations, and mobile subscriber stations each being in sectors corresponding to the sector units. The mobile subscriber stations transmit channel estimation signals to the sector units corresponding to the sector and sector units corresponding to sectors contiguous to the sectors. A sector unit that corresponds to the sector forms, based on a channel estimation signal received from the mobile subscriber station in the sector corresponding to the sector unit and channel estimation signals received from the adjacent mobile subscriber stations in the sectors contiguous to the sector, a transmission beam that is directed to the mobile subscriber station but is not directed to the adjacent mobile subscriber stations to transmit data to the mobile subscriber station. By configuring the system in such a manner, interference from contiguous sectors can be avoided.06-17-2010
20100150071RADIO NETWORK SYSTEM - The radio network system includes a plurality of mobile stations, a radio network controller operable to receive first location registration information for a location registration request from the mobile station, operable to transmit second location registration information including a femtocell identifier used to identify that the radio network controller is a device for a femtocell in the first location registration information to a first core network device, a first core network device operable to receive the second location registration information transmitted from the radio network controller, operable to transmit location registration rejection information used to indicate a rejection of storing location information to the radio network controller, and a second core network device operable to receive the second location registration information transmitted from the radio network controller that have received the location registration rejection information transmitted from the first core network device.06-17-2010
20100150064IP TUNNELING OPTIMISATION - A node arranged in use to communicate over an IP network, the node comprising means for receiving an IP packet either from a peer node or from a higher protocol layer within the node, means for XORing a header of the packet or part thereof with a pad to translate the header or part thereof, and means for sending the packet to a peer node or for delivering the packet to a higher protocol layer within the node.06-17-2010
20100150069Reverse Link Acknowledgment Signaling - Techniques, apparatuses, and systems can include mechanisms for transmitting and receiving data on one or more reverse link acknowledgement channels.06-17-2010
20100157900METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR ESTABLISHING LOCAL ROUTING IN MOBILE COMMUNICATION NETWORK - A method and a system for establishing a local routing in a mobile communication network, and for allowing different mobile stations connected with the same Access Service Network GateWay (ASN GW) to transmit and receive traffic without delivering such traffic to a Home Agent (HA) are provided. In the method, a session server determines whether first and second mobile stations are connected with the same ASN GW by using their location information. In case of a connection with the same ASN GW, the session server establishes a local routing in the ASN GW so that traffic between the first and second mobile stations is directly routed to each other at the ASN GW. Then the ASN GW receiving the traffic from one of both mobile stations transmits the traffic to the other according to the local routing.06-24-2010
20100157894METHOD OF OPERATING TUNNEL POINT SUPPORTING ROUTING SCALABILITY AND MOBILITY - Provided is a method of operating a tunnel point that provides a tunnel between a router group including at least one router and a mobile node. The method includes: providing a tunnel between the mobile node and the router group by authenticating the mobile node; receiving a packet including an identifier (ID) of a target node from the mobile node; converting the ID of the target node in the packet into a locator corresponding to the ID of the target node; transmitting a packet including the converted locator to the router group; and maintaining the ID of the mobile node by authenticating the mobile node through the router group when the mobile node is connected to another external terminal node.06-24-2010
20100157897MOBILE GATEWAY APPARATUS AND METHOD OF CONNECTING IP BASED SERVICES USING THE SAME - Disclosed are a mobile gateway apparatus and a method of connecting IP based services using the same. The mobile gateway apparatus assigns identifiers to user terminals that have accessed the mobile gateway apparatus through multiple internal interfaces based on various network access standards, and selects an appropriate external interface from multiple external interfaces based on various network access standards, thereby providing IP based services Even if the user terminals and the external networks operate based on various network access standards, the mobile gateway apparatus allows IP based services to be effectively provided to the user terminals by supporting more various network access standards while ensuring higher bandwidth.06-24-2010
20100157895METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING UPLINK TRANSMISSIONS USING MULTIPLE UPLINK CARRIERS - A method and an apparatus for uplink transmission using multiple uplink carriers are disclosed. A wireless transmit/receive unit (WTRU) selects a dedicated channel medium access control (MAC-d) flow with highest priority data to be transmitted and performs uplink carrier selection and enhanced dedicated channel (E-DCH) transport format combination (E-TFC) restriction and selection to select a carrier among a plurality of carriers and select an E-TFC based on a maximum supported payload, a remaining scheduled grant payload of the selected carrier and a remaining non-scheduled grant payload. The WTRU then generates a medium access control (MAC) protocol data unit (PDU) for E-DCH transmission via the selected carrier based on the selected E-TFC.06-24-2010
20100157893APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING DATA IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Disclosed is an apparatus and method for transmitting data in a wireless communication system. The apparatus for transmitting a packet data in a wireless communication system includes a Media Access Control (MAC) layer for determining the number of the number of preambles to be inserted based on a feed-back reply signal from a receiver, and generating a multi-preamble aggregation packet by inserting the determined number of preambles into packets received from an upper layer and a physical layer for forming the multi-preamble aggregation packet generated in a data processing unit, by using a physical layer packet, and transmitting the formed multi-preamble aggregation packet.06-24-2010
20100157888SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR IMPROVING EFFICIENCY AND RELIABILITY OF BROADCAST COMMUNICATIONS IN A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS MESH NETWORK - Systems and methods are provided for improving efficiency and reliability of broadcast transmission in a multi-hop wireless mesh communication network. In some implementations, systems and methods are provided for a leaf mesh node to acknowledge reception of a broadcast packet broadcast by an Intelligent Access Point (IAP), and for allowing the IAP to determine whether to re-communicate the broadcast packet that it had previously re-transmitted when no acknowledgment is received from a leaf mesh node.06-24-2010
20100157882Communication Network Control System, Communication Terminal, and Communication Network Control Method06-24-2010
20100157885SYNCHRONIZATION SYSTEM AND SYNCHRONIZING METHOD FOR PLURALITY OF BASE STATIONS AND MOBILE STATION IN A FORWARD LINK WIRELESS TRANSMISSION - There is provided a radio communication system in which a mobile station which has decided to switch a base station can immediately be synchronized with the base station to which switching is to be made. Each of the base stations creates a synchronization signal for the mobile station to synchronize with the base station from an upstream pilot signal received from the mobile station, creates upstream propagation quality information from the upstream pilot signal, and creates a downstream control signal including the synchronization information and the upstream propagation quality information, and transmits them. The mobile stations creates an upstream pilot signal, transmits the signal, receives a signal including a downstream control signal from each of the base stations, extracts the upstream propagation quality and information on synchronization with the base stations from the received downstream control signal, and selects an optimal base station from the received upstream propagation quality as a new current base station. If the selected base station is different from the current base station, the transmission timing of the upstream pilot signal is modified to the transmission timing based on the synchronization information extracted from the downstream control signal of the selected base station and transmitted.06-24-2010
20090316629CONCENTRATOR FOR MULTIPLEXING ACCESS POINT TO WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTIONS - Systems and methodologies are described that facilitate multiplexing communications from multiple downstream access points to one or more mobility management entities (MME). In particular, a concentrator component is provided that can establish a single transport layer connection with an MME along with multiple application layer connections over the single transport layer connection for each of multiple downstream access points and/or related mobile devices. The downstream access points and/or mobile devices can provide identifiers, such as tracking identifiers, to the concentrator component, which can utilize the identifiers to track communications with the MME. In this regard, the MME can send paging messages, and the concentrator component can determine downstream access points related to the paging messages based on a stored association with a tracking identifier in the paging message.12-24-2009
20090316626Method for transmitting uplink signals - A method of transmitting uplink signals is disclosed. The method includes transmitting, by a user equipment, periodic control information on a Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) at a predetermined period, dropping the periodic control information and multiplexing uplink signals except the periodic control information when the user equipment is operating in subframe bundling transmission mode where the uplink signals are transmitted in a plurality of consecutive subframes, and transmitting the multiplexed uplink signals on a Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH).12-24-2009
20090316625METHOD FOR ESTABLISHING ADAPTIVE MOBILE CLUSTER NETWORK - The invention discloses a method of establishing an adaptive mobile cluster network. The method comprises the steps of: (a) determining a network service requested by a mobile communication device; (b) according to the requested network service, determining at least one communication parameter needed by the mobile communication device; (c) according to the needed communication parameter, selecting a header device from a plurality of wireless communication devices by the communication device; (d) selecting a plurality of agent devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the header device; and (e) selecting a plurality of normal devices from the remaining wireless communication devices by the agent devices, so as to establish the adaptive mobile cluster network.12-24-2009
20090290539Method and apparatus for home agent address acquisition for IPv4 mobile nodes - A method and apparatus for home agent address acquisition for IPv4 mobile nodes is provided. A method for device operation includes sending a request message to an authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server, and receiving a reply message from the AAA server. The reply message contains an assigned Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) address of a home agent and the home agent is deployed with a dual stack mobile Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6) function.11-26-2009
20090274092Transmission of internet packets according to a priority - A telecommunications system is operable to provide a facility for a communications session to a mobile node using an internet protocol. When changing affiliation from one of a first and second packet data network to the other of the first and second packet data network, a mobile node is operable to generate a service level identifier representing a requested priority to be afforded to the internet packets communicated to and from the mobile node with respect to other internet packets communicated to and from other nodes. The mobile node is also operable to generate a binding update internet packet providing a care of address of the mobile and an indication of the service level identifier in the binding update internet packet and to communicate the binding update internet data packets to a home agent of the mobile node. The home agent is operable in response to the binding update to identify the service level identifier and to communicate the internet packets in accordance with the requested priority represented by the service level identifier. The telecommunications system can prioritise the transmission of internet packets according to a priority requested by the mobile node represented by the service level identifier thus reducing a likelihood that mobile node will experience delays or interruptions in the transmission of data.11-05-2009
20100150059STATIC ADDRESSING OF DEVICES IN A DYNAMICALLY ROUTED NETWORK - A method of routing in a network includes dividing a time corresponding to a predetermined maximum registration age of a first node registered with a second node into a number of first time intervals and second time intervals. The first time intervals each have a predetermined duration and the second time intervals each have a duration greater than the predetermined duration of the first time intervals. Each of the first and second time intervals are assigned a metric designating a cost associated with a path between the first node and the second node. The metric increases in value for each of the first and second time intervals as registration age increases. The second node sends a message including the metric associated with the time interval during which it is transmitted.06-17-2010
20100150073MOBILE STATION AND LOCATION INFORMATION ACQUISITION METHOD - A mobile station comprises: a memory; a location acquisition unit that acquires location information of the mobile station; a detecting unit that detects a communication-ready network; a determining unit that, when the detecting unit detects the communication-ready network and determines whether the memory stores the location information in association with the network; and a control unit that, when the determining unit determines that the memory stores the location information in association with the network, performs a predetermined process using the stored location information, and when the determining unit determines that the memory does not store the location information in association with the network, instructs the location acquisition unit to acquire the location information of the mobile station, performs the predetermined process using the location information acquired by the location acquisition unit, and causes the memory to store the location information in association with the network detected by the detecting unit.06-17-2010
20100150058Ofdm communication system with fast frequency hops - A method for operating a radio communication system involves the use of OFDM and involves a first sending station modulating a first OFDM symbol onto a first carrier frequency and sending the first OFDM symbol to a first receiving station via a first transmission channel using an air interface. The first sending station changes the first carrier frequency during a time used for sending the first OFDM symbol, the change in the first carrier frequency being made independently of a change in transmission characteristics of the first transmission channel over time. A fast frequency hopping system is disclosed.06-17-2010
20100150063METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR A NODE TO JOIN A WIRELESS AD-HOC NETWORK - A method for a new node to join an ad-hoc network is provided. The method includes two basic functions. When the new node is allowed to join the network, the indicating device of the node being joined generates an indication. When the new node joins the network, the indicating device of the new node also generates an indication. The method further includes two commands, the join-rejection command and the joined-rejection command, to cancel the join procedure when the indicating device of the new node and the node being joined do not indicate correspondingly. Accordingly, the method efficiently reduces the possibility of joining an unanticipated node.06-17-2010
20100150074WIRELESS COMMUNICATION TERMINAL AND WIRELESS COMMUNICATION METHOD - A communication terminal used in a mobile communication system complying with a carrier sense multiple access scheme is disclosed. The communication terminal includes: a receiving unit configured to receive a wireless packet transmitted by another communication terminal or a base station; a determination unit configured to determine periodic transmission timing of the communication terminal based on determination criterion information included in the wireless packet; and a transmission unit configured to periodically transmit wireless packets to the base station based on the transmission timing.06-17-2010
20100150060SENSING DEVICE ORIENTATION IN WIRELESS NETWORKS - Sensing installed orientation of an antenna or access node in a wireless digital network. According to one aspect of the invention, an orientation sensor such as a 2 or 3 axis accelerometer is provided in the access node. The orientation sensor may be attached to the access node housing, directly or through a substrate, attached to the main logic board of the access node, or may be mounted to an antenna. The orientation sensor may be mounted to the same substrate as is used to form an antenna, or may be mounted on a separate substrate. When associated with an antenna, such as the orientation sensor on the same substrate as the antenna, or co-located with the antenna such as inside the same package, the orientation of the antenna may be sensed. Orientation data on the access node and/or antenna may be transmitted to the controller for the access node, and/or to clients of the access node. This orientation information may be used for example to verify or validate installation and positioning, for example comparing the actual orientation to the desired orientation as stored in a database. The orientation information may be used in modeling and/or displaying access node coverage. In access nodes with selectable antennas, the orientation information may be used to switch antennas.06-17-2010
20100150061Device and method for arranging access point in wireless location - Provided are an access point arrangement device and a method for wireless location determination. An access point is arranged on a numerical map, received signal strength of a signal received from the access point for each grid point is calculated, and DOP and position error per grid point are calculated by using the received signal strength per grid point. It is determined whether to rearrange the currently arranged access point based on a ratio of a grid point with DOP less than a threshold value for entire grid points on the numerical map and a ratio of a grid point with a position error that is less than a threshold value.06-17-2010
20100150055AGGREGATION MANAGEMENT METHOD, AGGREGATE NODE, AND DEAGGREGATE NODE - A technology is disclosed that provides an aggregation management method, an aggregate node, and a deaggregate node that can quickly and efficiently manage aggregation. The technology includes a step at which, when an aggregate node 06-17-2010
20090086665METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REQUESTING PILOTREPORT IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - A method and apparatus for transmitting PilotReportRequest message in a wireless communication system is described. A PilotReportRequest message comprising an 8 bit MessageID field and an 8 bit ReportFormat field is generated, wherein the ReportFormat field indicates the format of the PilotReport being requested from an access terminal. The PilotReportRequest message is transmitted over a communication link04-02-2009
20100157891FEMTOCELL CALL MANAGEMENT - When a call is received for a device within a femtocell area of coverage, all devices within the femtocell area of coverage are rung. The call is connected to the first device that picks up. All devices can be rung at the same time or in a predetermined order. The first device rung can be the device that was most recently moved or the device that was most recently active.06-24-2010
20100157883VOICE OVER IP CELL PHONE - A cellular telephone is disclosed that allows a user to access a VoIP service provider using the WAP protocol to send and receive telephone calls to other users via the internet or other data network. The cellular telephone includes a cellular portion that formats messages to be sent to and from a cellular base station, a WAP portion that interfaces with the internet to send, receive, and display data therefrom. The cellular telephone also includes an audio gateway to sample, analog to digital convert, compress, and packetize an audio signal to prepare the audio signal to be transmitted via the internet to the second user,06-24-2010
20100002632PACKET SCHEDULER AND PACKET SCHEDULING METHOD - A method for scheduling packets from a plurality of radio bearers by a scheduler of a first layer includes calculating a virtual scheduling time for the radio bearers by using a packet delay variation of the radio bearers, and transmitting the packet of the radio bearer having the greatest virtual scheduling time from among the plurality of radio bearers to a second layer.01-07-2010
20100002628METHOD, APPARATUS AND COMMUNICATION NETWORK FOR THE TRANSMISSION OF DATA - A method of transmitting packets (01-07-2010
20100002624Wireless Communication Network System and Method - A system for wireless communication network is disclosed. The system includes several nodes and at least a gateway. Each of the nodes includes several first wireless network interface. Each of the first interfaces utilizes one of channels to send, receive or forward signals. Wherein the first interfaces of the same node utilize different and non-overlapping channels to send, receive or forward the signals at the same time. Each of the gateways includes a network interface and several second wireless network interfaces. The network interface connects to the Internet to receive or forward the signals. Each of the second wireless network interfaces utilizes one of the channels to receive or forward the signals. Wherein the second wireless network interfaces of the same gateway utilize different and non-overlapping channels to receive or forward the signals at the same time.01-07-2010
20100157884BASE STATION DEVICE AND MOBILE STATION DEVICE - A base station device and a mobile station device both enabling improvement of the reception quality of transmission data at a mobile station by preventing a sequence for establishing synchronism and the transmission data from interfering with each other. In the base station device (06-24-2010
20100157906Techniques for femto cell synchronization in wireless networks - Techniques are disclosed that provide for femto base stations to become synchronized with other base stations in a wireless network. For instance, a macro base station may instruct a mobile station to engage in a synchronization operation that synchronizes one or more timings (e.g., OFDM timings) of a femto base station with one or more corresponding timings of the macro base station. This may involve the mobile station having timing references of the macro base station. Further, this may involve the mobile station performing scanning operations and/or handover ranging operations with the femto base station. The mobile device may determine timing offsets between the femto BS and the macro BS. These offsets may be sent to the macro base station or to the femto base station. Also, the femto base station may adopt timings employed by the mobile station. The macro base station or a femto base station may direct a femto base station to achieve synchronization either directly with timing adjustment offset, or with a list of already synchronized femto base station as synchronization reference.06-24-2010
20100157899DISTRIBUTED GEOSPATIAL COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - A method on a first mobile node for facilitating exchange of pertinent data between mobile nodes over a wireless communications network can be provided. The method can include establishing, by the first mobile node, a wireless network connection with at least one other mobile node inside a predefined geospatial area, wherein the wireless network connection is established over the wireless communications network. The method can further include determining that a future position of the first mobile node is outside the predefined geospatial area and transmitting pertinent data residing on the first mobile node over the wireless communications network exclusively to the at least one other mobile node inside the predefined geo spatial area, wherein the pertinent data is associated with the predefined geospatial area.06-24-2010
20100157898COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND GATEWAY APPARATUS - To control the communication quality on the terminal basis without making the base station more complicated, it is provided a communication system, comprising at least one computer and a gateway that is connected to the at least one computer through a first network. The gateway is connected to at least one terminal through a second network. The at least one terminal performs communications with the at least one computer via the gateway. The gateway estimates quality of the communications between the gateway and the at least one computer in the first network; and determines a priority for the communications between the gateway and the at least one terminal in the second network according to the estimated quality of the communications in the first network.06-24-2010
20100157896METHOD FOR GENERATING FRAME AND TRANSMITTING FRAME INFORMATION - The present invention relates to a frame generation and transmission method of a wireless communication system. The frame generation method includes dividing a frame into a plurality of subframes, allocating the respective subframes as one of a plurality of predefined modes, and allocating mode allocation information of the respective subframes to the frame information.06-24-2010
20100157890METHOD OF WIRELESS COMMUNICATION USING AUTHENTICATION INFORMATION - A data communication method includes providing a sender node having a data packet of information. The data packet includes at least one first field and a second field. The second field has content that is dependent upon actual content of the at least one first field. The content of the second field of the data packet is transmitted from the sender node to a receiver node. The receiver node is used to predict the actual content of the first field of the data packet. The receiver node is used to calculate the content of the second field of the data packet based upon the predicted content of the first field. The predicted content of the first field is confirmed to be equivalent to the actual content of the first field. The confirming step includes comparing the calculated content of the second field to the transmitted content of the second field.06-24-2010
20100165912WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM FOR WIRELESSLY TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING CEC MESSAGE - In a wireless communication system including a source device and a sink device for wirelessly transmitting and receiving a CEC message specified in an HDMI standard, a CEC controller of the source device generates and outputs a CEC frame including the CEC message. A controller generates a wireless data packet including the CEC message in the generated CEC frame. A wireless transceiver circuit wirelessly transmits a wireless signal including the generated wireless data packet to the sink device, and receives a wireless signal including a wireless ACK packet and wirelessly transmitted from the sink device in response to the wireless data packet in the wirelessly-transmitted wireless signal.07-01-2010
20100182951Apparatus and method for rate control in broadband wireless communication system - A method for rate control in a wireless communication system includes feedback information indicating whether a packet is received, is received from a receiver. A channel state value measured by the receiver is received. It is determined whether the same feedback information is received from the receiver successively more than a predetermined frequency. A target error rate is controlled if the same feedback information is received successively more than the predetermined frequency.07-22-2010
20100182953METHOD FOR INFORMING HOME SUBSCRIBER SERVER OF STORING PACKET DATA NETWORK GATEWAY ADDRESS INFORMATION - The present invention discloses a method for informing Home Subscriber Server (HSS) of Packet Data Network Gateway (PDN GW) address information to be stored in the HSS in the System Architecture Evolution. The method comprises: the Mobility Management Node acquires that the PDN GW address information is not stored in the HSS, or the Mobility Management Node selects another PDN GW; the Mobility Management Node informs the HSS of the PDN GW address information to store. According to the present invention, the HSS can obtain the PDN GW address information directly from the MME without the help of the 3GPP AAA Server and the roaming interface between the PDN GW and the HSS.07-22-2010
20100182949METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR GENERATING AND READING AN AUTOMATIC REPEAT REQUEST (ARQ) STATUS FEEDBACK MESSAGE - An automatic repeat request (ARQ) receiver is provided. The ARQ receiver comprises a receiver configured to receive a plurality of ARQ blocks. The ARQ receiver further comprises a processor configured to generate a feedback message configured to provide status of the plurality of ARQ blocks. The feedback message comprises an acknowledgement sequence number (ACK_SN) field and a flag field. The processor is configured to provide a first value in the flag field if the feedback message contains only the ACK_SN field and the flag field. The processor is also configured to provide a second value in the flag field if the feedback message contains one or more fields in addition to the ACK_SN field and the flag field.07-22-2010
20100177701TIMER POLL RETRANSMISSION EXPIRY IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Providing for improved acknowledgment and retransmission protocols for wireless communication is described herein. By way of example, the acknowledgment and retransmission protocols can comprise including a poll element, or reply command, within a data unit that is part of a wireless transmission. A timer is set following sending the wireless transmission, and if a reply is not received within expiration of the timer, retransmission is triggered. According to specific aspects, retransmission comprises resending the data unit that includes the poll element or reply command. In this manner, redundant retransmission can be mitigated, whether because a receiver fails to successfully receive one or more subsets of the wireless transmission, or because the transmitter fails to obtain a reply to the wireless transmission.07-15-2010
20090052377MOBILE COMMUNICATION TERMINAL, COMMUNICATION APPARATUS, MOBILE COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - An object of the present invention is to make it possible to appropriately maintain PPP-based communications even in an environment in which the terminal moves and the communication environment continually changes. A mobile communication terminal comprises a plurality of wireless accessing means for establishing PPP-based communication links for respectively different modes of wireless communications with a fixed communication apparatus, which is a communication partner; a PPP device for combining the established communication links; and a valid wireless LAN searching portion for detecting that wireless communication is possible for a wireless LAN adapter. The PPP device executes control so as to establish communication links for the wireless LAN adapter detected as being capable of wireless communication, and for a L2TP virtual device.02-26-2009
20090116425ERROR CONTROL METHOD, MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) FRAME DESIGNING METHOD, AND TERMINAL REGISTRATION METHOD IN WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND RECORDING MEDIUM - In a method of registering with an access point in a terminal of a wireless communication system, a frame includes a downlink sub-frame including a broadcast interval and a first management connection interval, and an uplink sub-frame including an access interval and a second management connection interval, the broadcast interval being used for transmitting a map message, the method includes: sending a first ranging request message to the access point using the access interval; receiving allocation information of a ranging slot from the access point using the map message; performing ranging through the ranging slot; sending a registration request message to the access point using the second management connection interval; and receiving information on whether to permit the registering from the access point using the first management connection interval.05-07-2009
20100189029DISTRIBUTED IP ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT PROTOCOL FOR A MULTI-HOP WIRELESS HOME MESH NETWORK WITH COLLISION DETECTION - An apparatus and method for a multi-tier wireless home mesh network is described. The method may include formation of a wireless home networking environment comprising a collection of nodes that operate as a decentralized, wireless network with multiple sub-networks or tiers that are responsible for different functions within the network. Each node of the multi-tier network is configured to forward data to other nodes and is assigned to a particular tier based on the node's performance capabilities. The method may include the automatic establishment of a unique Internet protocol (IP) address within a multi-hop wireless home mesh network with the ability to do automatic collision detection and correction. Once established as either a mobile node or a stationary node of the wireless home mesh network, a new node (the home electronics device) may wirelessly communicate with one or more existing nodes of the wireless home mesh network. Other embodiments are described and claimed.07-29-2010
20100189038CIRCUIT AND METHOD FOR MAPPING DATA SYMBOLS AND REFERENCE SIGNALS FOR COORDINATED MULTI-POINT SYSTEMS - A method of mapping data in a wireless communication system is disclosed. The method includes forming a first frame (07-29-2010
20100260111MULTI-FA PERSONAL SUBSCRIBER TERMINAL AND METHOD OF ORDERING PROTOCOL DATA UNIT THEREOF - A multi-FA personal subscriber station and a method of ordering protocol data units thereof having advantages of simultaneously accessing two frequency channels to transmit and receive data and appropriately ordering protocol data units transmitted through each frequency channel, thereby minimizing errors in TCP/IP packet transmission, are disclosed. According to the multi-FA personal subscriber terminal and the method of ordering protocol data units thereof according to exemplary embodiments of the present invention, two frequency channels are simultaneously accessed to transmit and receive data and protocol data units transmitted through each of the frequency channels are ordered, thereby minimizing errors in TCP/IP packet transmission.10-14-2010
20100260104 METHOD OF CONFIGURING THE ABSOLUTE GRANT MAPPING TABLE FOR DRIFTING RADIO NETWORK CONTROLLER - A method for configuring an absolute grant mapping relationship table for a drift radio network controller, comprises: a serving radio network controller informing the drift radio network controller of the absolute grant mapping relationship table used by an enhanced-dedicated channel absolute grant channel (E-AGCH) by signaling; and the drift radio network controller returning a response message to the serving radio network controller after storing the information configured. The present invention guarantees that absolute grant values corresponding to the Node B and the user equipment are obtained from the same absolute grant mapping relationship table, i.e. from the same table of relationships between absolute grant values and indexes, and the allocation and use of the power resource by them are consistent, so that efficient use of resources and security of the system are guaranteed.10-14-2010
20100260108SETTING UP A REVERSE LINK DATA TRANSMISSION WITHIN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM - Aspects including methods and apparatuses for setting up a reverse link data transmission within a wireless communications system are disclosed. An access terminal sends, to an access network, an initial data packet in a sequence of data packets including a data portion and a header portion including an identifier of a first type, the identifier of the first type configured to uniquely identify the given access terminal in more than one of a subset of sectors of the wireless communications system. The access network sends a message to the access terminal to (i) assign a dedicated channel to the given access terminal, or to (ii) assign an identifier of a second type to uniquely identify the given access terminal in a single sector of the wireless communications system. The access network thereafter receives additional packets from the access terminal in accordance with the assignment.10-14-2010
20100189034WIRELESS COMMUNICATION APPARATUS AND SERVER APPARATUS - Each of wireless communication terminals UA07-29-2010
20100189044MULTI-NODE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF REQUESTING, REPORTING AND COLLECTING DESTINATION-NODE-BASED MEASUREMENTS AND ROUTE-BASED MEASUREMENTS - A multi-node communication system and method used to request, report and collect destination-node-based measurements and route-based measurements is disclosed. The communication system may be a mesh network including a plurality of mesh points (MPs). In one embodiment, a destination-node-based measurement request is sent to one or more destination nodes via destination-unicast, destination-multicast, or destination-broadcast, using routes specified via next-hop-unicast, next-hop-multicast, or next-hop-broadcast addressing. In another embodiment, a source node sends a measurement request message to a final destination node, whereby each node along the route individually sends a measurement report message to the source node. Alternatively, measurement results of each node are combined and appended to the measurement request message, and a measurement report message including the combined measurement results is sent to the source node.07-29-2010
20100189041UTILIZATION OF THE INTERNET PROTOCOL TO FACILITATE COMMUNICATION INVOLVING MOBILE DEVICES - A data communication system capable of forwarding IP-addressed data to devices as such devices move among networks having different IP addresses is dislcosed herein. The system includes first and second networks containing first and second pluralities of nodes. At least one of the first plurality of nodes is adapted to receive data transmissions from an external IP-based network. Upon joining the first network, this device is assigned an IP address which remains with it irrespective of whether it moves beyond the range of the first network. When this device roams into the vicinity of the second network, data addressed to the device which is received at the first network is forwarded via at least one node of the second network to the roaming device.07-29-2010
20100260099HSPA Evolution Architecture - A telecommunications network, including an evolved base station node having a node controller and a first radio network controller (RNC), the node controller configured to communicate with user terminals, and the first radio network controller configured to communicate with a packet switched component of a core network, but not with a circuit switched component, may further include a second RNC that communicates with the node controller and also communicates with the packet switched component of the core network and a circuit switched component. A method of establishing communication between a user terminal and the core network via the second RNC, when the user terminal has a control plane connection with the evolved base station node, such that the first RNC is the serving RNC (SRNC), may include tunnelling communication set up messages over the control plane between the node controller and the core network via the second RNC.10-14-2010
20110128909METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MUTIPLEXING REFERENCE SIGNAL AND DATA IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - Techniques for efficiently multiplexing a reference signal and data on different sets of subcarriers in the same symbol period are described. In one design, a user equipment (UE) performs a discrete Fourier transform (DFT) on a set of modulation symbols for data to obtain data symbols. The UE also obtains reference symbols generated based on a reference signal sequence corresponding to a cyclic shift of a base sequence. The UE maps the reference symbols to a first set of subcarriers and maps the data symbols to a second set of subcarriers. The UE then generates a transmission symbol based on the mapped reference symbols and the mapped data symbols. The UE may also transmit reference signals and data (i) in multiple symbol periods of a slot or a subframe and/or (ii) from multiple antennas using frequency division multiplexing (FDM) or code division multiplexing (CDM).06-02-2011
20100182957APPARATUS, SYSTEM, AND METHOD FOR MANAGING REVERSE LINK COMMUNICATION - An apparatus, system, and method efficiently manage reverse link resources by allowing a mobile station to select between transmitting a payload at a standard power level and transmitting a smaller payload at a boosted power level. The mobile station, therefore, can autonomously select a QoS (Quality of Service) level for physical layer packets. Based on reverse link transmission information received from a base station, the mobile station derives a reverse link transmission guideline defining the power levels and associated payloads for at least a standard service and boosted service. The mobile station selects a reverse link transmission power level from a plurality of power levels including at least a standard reverse link transmission power level associated with a standard payload size and a boosted reverse link transmission power level associated with a boosted payload size where the standard payload size is greater than the boosted payload size.07-22-2010
20100182954Private Base Station and Radio Network Entity - There is provided a private base station including a processing unit configured to scan data of overlaying macro cells of a public radio network in order to report the location of the private base station; a communication unit configured to request a connectivity service from the public radio network by using identification data of the private base station and the location of the private base station; and a communication unit configured to receive grant to utilize the re-quested connectivity service once the identification data has been verified by the public radio network.07-22-2010
20100182955Matching Used and Allowed Radio Access Technology Types - The present invention provides methods, an application node (07-22-2010
20100182952RRC message transmission method in wireless communication system - A Radio Resource Control (RRC) message transmission method and apparatus for a wireless communication system operating in TTI and acknowledge mode is configured to reduce interruption time by minimizing retransmission times of RRC message. The message transmission method for a wireless communication system includes generating, at a transmitter, a message; transmitting the message two or more times consecutively from the transmitter to a receiver; analyzing, at a receiver, the message transmitted by the transmitter; transmitting an acknowledge message or a negative-acknowledge from the receiver to the transmitter depending on the analysis result; and terminating, at the transmitter, a retransmission process of the message upon receipt of the acknowledgement message.07-22-2010
20100182950SENSOR-BASED WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS USING COMPRESSIVE SAMPLING - Methods, devices and systems for sensor-based wireless communication systems using compressive sampling are provided. In one embodiment, the method for sampling signals comprises receiving, over a wireless channel, a user equipment transmission based on an S-sparse combination of a set of vectors; down converting and discretizing the received transmission to create a discretized signal; correlating the discretized signal with a set of sense waveforms to create a set of samples, wherein a total number of samples in the set is equal to a total number of sense waveforms in the set, wherein the set of sense waveforms does not match the set of vectors, and wherein the total number of sense waveforms in the set of sense waveforms is fewer than a total number of vectors in the set of vectors; and transmitting at least one sample of the set of samples to a remote central processor.07-22-2010
20100182948COMMUNICATION METHOD AND TERMINAL APPARATUS USING THE COMMUNICATION METHOD - A wireless unit 07-22-2010
20090103480HYBRID ARQ SCHEMES WITH SOFT COMBINING IN VARIABLE RATE PACKET DATA APPLICATIONS - A system and method for transmitting high speed data on fixed rate and for variable rate channels. The system and method provides the flexibility of adjusting the data rate, the coding rate, and the nature of individual retransmissions. Further, the system and method supports partial soft combining of retransmitted data with previously transmitted data, supports parity bit selection for successive retransmissions, and supports various combinations of data rate variations, coding rate variations, and partial data transmissions.04-23-2009
20100189043Seamless Wireless Mobility - Seamless wireless mobility is described. In one embodiment, a mobility manager can query a subscriber catalog for a current registration status of handset. The mobility manager can then use the registration status to send a first signal to the handset over either a wireless network or an Internet protocol-based network.07-29-2010
20090046633DIGITALLY SIGNING ACCESS POINT MEASUREMENTS FOR ROBUST LOCATION DETERMINATION - In an example embodiment, a wireless client sends a probe request frame and waits for responses to the probe frame. The responses to the probe request from comprise encrypted data representative of the signal strength of the client as measured by the respondent that are digitally signed by the respondent's certificate. The client aggregates the responses and forwards them to a location based server.02-19-2009
20090046630Data-Transmitting Method for Wireless Sensor Network - A data-transmitting method for wireless sensor network comprises: constructing a wireless sensor network having a plurality of nodes for information sensing and a sink for quest raising and data collecting; clustering the nodes to form a plurality of groups, with one of the nodes in each group being identified as a kernel; identifying one of all the nodes as a summit dissemination node and the kernels in all the groups as first level dissemination nodes; and transmitting data between the quest-raising sink and one of the first level dissemination nodes or summit dissemination node to collect information sensed by a source that is one of the nodes.02-19-2009
20100189042METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR TRANSMITTER OUTPUT POWER COMPENSATION - Aspects of compensating for transmitter output power may comprise sampling an on-chip transmitter circuit temperature at various time instants and determining a feedback temperature compensation value. At least one digital-to-analog converter may be adjusted by utilizing the feedback temperature compensation value, which may correspond to the sampled temperature. The digital-to-analog converter may be an I-component digital-to-analog converter and/or a Q-component digital-to-analog converter. At least a portion of the on-chip transmitter circuit may be characterized to determine power output dependence of the on-chip transmitter circuit on temperature variation of the on-chip transmitter circuit. Based on this characterization, a feedback temperature compensation value that may correspond to the sampled temperature may be used to adjust the digital-to-analog converter. The feedback temperature compensation value may be, for example, from a lookup table or an algorithm.07-29-2010
20100189033Method and System for Operating a Communication Network - A network node, a coordination node, a management node, a communication system and method for operating a communication system having a first type of communication network and a second type of communication network, wherein a request message identifying a network node in the first type of communication network is sent to the coordination node in the first type of communication network by the management node in the second type of communication network, the network node is removed from the first type of communication network by the coordination node, the removed network node is included in the second type of communication network by the management node, and a data interchange is performed between the management node and the network node inserted in the second type of communication network.07-29-2010
20100189030MULTIPLE ANTENNA MODE CONTROL METHOD BASED ON STATION - The present invention provides a multiple antenna mode control method based on Station, including the steps: step 1 the Station reports a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Station to the Access Point; step 2, the Access Point returns a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by the Access Point to the Station, or returns directly a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by both the Station and the Access Point to the Station; and step 3, a multiple antenna mode is chosen from a multiple antenna mode set or subset supported by both the Station and the Access Point for communicating between the Station and the Access Point. Thereby, a best transmission quality can be achieved during data transmission, and furthermore, the retransmission times and the error frame rate are reduced, and the network throughput is decreased.07-29-2010
20100189032FREQUENCY HOPPING IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORK - Techniques for performing frequency hopping in a wireless network are described. In an aspect, frequency hopping may be performed based on both cell identity (ID) and system time information. In one design, a user equipment (UE) may determine a cell ID of a cell and may obtain system time information for the cell. The UE may determine resources to use for transmission with frequency hopping based on the cell ID and the system time information. In one design, the UE may initialize a PN generator in each radio frame with an initial value determined based on the cell ID and a system frame number (SFN) for the radio frame. The UE may determine the resources to use for transmission based on a hopping function, a mirroring function, and a PN sequence from the PN generator. The UE may send a transmission on the resources to the cell.07-29-2010
20100260106NETWORK COMMUNICATION METHOD AND NETWORK DEVICE USING PREAMBLE - Provided are a network communication method and a network device using a preamble. According to the network communication method and the network device, network coexistence is easily achieved by using network identification transmitted in the preamble, and an unknown terminal, which has a low reception signal to noise ratio (SNR) and has not yet been connected to an existing network, is easily connected to the existing network.10-14-2010
20100260101ROUTE OPTIMIZATION FOR DIRECTLY CONNECTED PEERS - Aspects relate to allowing peer nodes that establish a communication through a home agent to move that session to a directly connected link. Thus, the directly connected nodes can exchange packets natively without encapsulation. Further aspects allow a node that does not have any home agent entity to switch from a local network to a global network without losing ongoing sessions.10-14-2010
20100260102COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL FOR WIRELESS ENHANCED CONTROLLER AREA NETWORKS - A method and system for communication in a wireless enhanced control area network including wireless station nodes is provided. One implementation involves each wireless station node employing a wireless communication protocol for wireless communication of control area network (CAN) messages among the wireless station nodes on a wireless communication medium, wherein each CAN message comprises a content-identified data message or an error message. The wireless communication protocol including a medium access control protocol for controlling access to the wireless communication by the wireless station nodes.10-14-2010
20100085916Systems and Methods for Hybrid Wired and Wireless Universal Access Networks - A method for operating a network having one or more nodes wherein each of the nodes having one or more resources, comprising the steps of: forming the network using one or more nodes, wherein certain one or more of the nodes is a gateway connecting to two or more different network connection types; and managing the one or more nodes of the network; wherein the nodes are segregated into one or more cells each having one or more of the nodes and one or more supernodes; wherein the nodes within the same cell are interconnected; and wherein the supernodes are interconnected.04-08-2010
20100177704METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR PROVIDING CROSS-LAYER QUALITY-OF-SERVICE FUNCTIONALITY IN A WIRELESS NETWORK - A method for providing cross-layer quality-of-service (QoS) functionality in a wireless network is provided. The method includes obtaining QoS data from each layer of an application stack for a particular application. A QoS matrix is generated based on the obtained QoS data. Packet distribution for the particular application may then be prioritized based on the QoS matrix.07-15-2010
20100177700METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENABLING MULTIPLE TRANSMISSION MODES BASED ON MULTIPLE SEARCH SPACES - Certain aspects of the present disclosure relate to a technique for enabling multiple transmission modes based on control information of different formats.07-15-2010
20100177696Apparatus and method for sharing information through presence service in a communication network - An apparatus is capable of sharing information through a presence service in a communication network and capable of providing presence information of a Mobile Station (MS). The apparatus extracts at least one of application information and contents indication information from an application in execution. Presence information is generated that includes at least one of the application information and the contents indication information, and transmitting the presence information to a presence server.07-15-2010
20100177699METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR MOBILITY MANAGEMENT AND EFFICIENT INFORMATION RETRIEVAL IN A COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK - A method and apparatus of forming a generic overlay network for efficient information retrieval in a communications network, comprising receiving in a domain router a register request from a mobile communications apparatus, the register request including an identification of said mobile communications apparatus; looking-up an address to a next-hop router associated with the identification; sending the register request to the next-hop router; receiving a reply from the next-hop router; and if the reply includes an address to a home router, sending a reply to the mobile communications apparatus including the address of the home router, said reply initiating the establishment of a connection between the mobile communications apparatus and the home router.07-15-2010
20100177691METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING CAPABILITY OF A SERVING SYSTEM FOR ANCHORING A CALL USING AN INTELLIGENT NETWORK PROTOCOL07-15-2010
20100177687Communication method using statistical multiplexing and apparatus for performing the same - A communication method using statistical multiplexing in which pre-determined hopping patterns are respectively allocated to two or more users who communicate with a base station using orthogonal resources, the communication method includes: receiving a transmission signal transmitted using the orthogonal resources; and acquiring data from the received transmission signal, wherein each of the users belongs to one of two or more groups and the pre-determined hopping patterns are allocated to prevent collision between the users belonging to the same group.07-15-2010
20100177685TRANSFER OF MOBILE SUBSCRIBER CONTEXT IN CELLULAR NETWORKS USING EXTENDED ROUTING PROTOCOL - A new architecture provides network-based mobility in cellular networks that is built on Internet Protocol (IP)/Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) technologies, such as Virtual Private Local Area Network (LAN) Service (VPLS), the Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) and BGP MPLS Layer 3 Virtual Private Networks (VPNs). The architecture consists of several building blocks that provide functionality for different aspects of cellular network mobility. One building block is network-based macro mobility in IP/MPLS networks. The macro mobility techniques described herein are built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block relates to transferring subscriber context between network devices while preserving the IP address of the subscriber. The techniques described herein provide a subscriber context transfer mechanism for mobile subscriber management that is built on extensions to a routing protocol such as BGP. Another building block of the mobility architecture is network-based micro mobility based on VPLS.07-15-2010
20100177688MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, BASE STATION APPARATUS, USER APPARATUS AND METHOD - A base station apparatus for use in a mobile communication system includes: a unit configured to generate a reference signal; a unit configured to generate a transmission symbol including the reference signal; a unit configured to transmit the transmission symbol for each sector; and a unit configured to monitor a radio propagation state. The reference signal is generated by multiplying a first sequence formed by a non-orthogonal code sequence which is different at least between an adjacent cell and an own cell, by a second sequence. Whether to form the second sequence by using an orthogonal code sequence which is different among sectors or by using a non-orthogonal code sequence is determined according to the radio propagation state.07-15-2010
20100177682METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR IMPROVING RESPONSE MESSAGE TRANSMISSION RELIABILITY - Certain embodiments of the present disclosure improve a robustness of some critical MAC management response massages transmitted from a base station (BS) to a mobile station (MS). In this way, a reliability of transmission can be increased and a messaging failure that results in out of sync state between the MS and the BS can be avoided.07-15-2010
20120195262INTEGRATED INFORMATION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A communication system, for functioning without the use of dedicated lines or the Internet so as to ensure communication speed, communication quality, and communication trouble countermeasures, including a communication network and domain name server. The domain name server includes a domain name tree with a country number of a telephone number as a level 08-02-2012
20100260112QUICK PAGING IN TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEMS - In an orthogonal frequency division multiple access communication system, unused frequency resources during a conventional preamble signal are used for a quick paging mechanism. A set of quick paging signals is sent over the unused frequency resources to signal one or more subscriber stations.10-14-2010
20120195261MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - In a mobile communication system capable of switching between a first communication state and a second communication state, in a case of a first communication state, a VoIP media signal is exchanged between a mobile station. UE #08-02-2012
20120195260Packet switched eCall connection - The present invention relates to a server unit (08-02-2012
20080212522METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECEIVING SYSTEM INFORMATION FROM BASE STATION IN A MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A method and apparatus for receiving system information from a Base Station (BS) in a Mobile Station (MS) in a mobile communication system are provided, in which it is determined whether there is buffered system information in a buffer, if current system information has an error, it is determined whether a combining condition is satisfied, in the presence of the buffered system information, the combining condition being defined by at least one of a Master Information Block (MIB) value tag, a System Information Block (SIB) value tag, and modification time information that are associated with the current system information, and the current system information is combined with the buffered system information, if the combining condition is satisfied.09-04-2008
20120195259Remote Transmission System - A transmission apparatus includes a plurality of modems, which are configured to communicate via respective wireless communication channels and includes at least first and second modems configured to communicate respectively over separate first and second wireless communication networks. The transmission apparatus also includes a stream processor, which is configured to receive and process an incoming media stream so as to provide multiple upload streams for transmission by different ones of the modems, including first and second upload streams for transmission by the first and second modems, respectively.08-02-2012
20120195256METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TIMING AND/OR FREQUENCY OFFSET MONITORING AND HANDLING - Methods and apparatuses are provided for obtaining downlink or uplink signal characteristics of at least one access point in a network. The signal characteristics may be obtained through user equipment receiving the signal characteristics, through the at least one access point, or through another access point. Frequency or timing offset between two or more access points may be determined based on the obtained signal characteristics, where the frequency or timing offset may be handled through post processing. For example, a clock servo may be controlled or adjusted in response to the determined offset, the absolute frequency of a master network oscillator may be calibrated, traffic anomalies within the network may be detected and corrected, and/or respective clocks of the two or more access points may be synchronized.08-02-2012
20080232303IP mobile communication system and base station - When mobile communication exchange detects that SIP client has moved out of communication area of base station, the mobile communication exchange generates a BYE message, sends the generated BYE message to SIP client and ends a session.09-25-2008
20080232302Wireless data transferring system for a lavatory with wireless local area network module - A wireless data transferring system for a lavatory comprises a host having a decoder to decode a data from a data source, a tuner coupled to the data source to select a desired data, a first WLAN module coupled to the decoder or the data source to transfer data; and at least one sanitary equipment coupled to a receiver, wherein the receiver is coupled to the first WLAN module, and a data output coupled to the receiver to output the data.09-25-2008
20080232300REFERENCE SIGNAL SELECTION TECHNIQUES FOR A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM - A technique for improving link performance in a wireless communication system includes detecting whether subscriber stations in the wireless communication system are power-limited. The subscriber stations include at least a first subscriber station that is power-limited and a second subscriber station that is not power-limited. The technique assigns a first reference signal having a first cubic metric to the first subscriber station and a second reference signal having a second cubic metric to the second subscriber station. In this case, the first cubic metric is lower in magnitude than the second cubic metric.09-25-2008
20080232301Slow Adaptation of Modulation and Coding for Packet Transmission - Systems and methods for performing MCS adaptation are provided. In some cases, the network performs MCS adaptation based on received NACKs. In other cases, the mobile station determines an MCS based on channel quality measurements, and feeds back the MCS adaptation decision to the network. In either case, NACK-only feedback may be implemented to reduce interference.09-25-2008
20080232299Method for Wireless Data Transfer - A method for wireless data transfer between first and second multimedia devices connected via a wireless connection operated according to a first wireless standard or to a second wireless standard, which are different from and/or not compatible with each other. The method includes: choosing the first wireless standard or the second wireless standard as a chosen wireless standard; processing connection commands, connection parameters, and/or connection data to obtain processed connection commands, processed connection parameters, and/or process connection data of the chosen wireless standard; and sending the process connection commands, process connection parameters, and/or process connection data out via the wireless connection according to the chosen wireless standard. The method thus enables a seamless switching from one wireless standard to another wireless standard, wherein upper layers do not notice the switching.09-25-2008
20110103304PACKET BUFFERING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUCING PACKET LOSS IN PROXY MOBILE IPv6 - Disclosed are a packet buffering apparatus and method for reducing packet loss in a proxy mobile IPv6, which include a first Mobile Access Gateway (MAG) requesting a Local Mobility Anchor (LMA) for packet buffering when outgoing Mobile Node (MN) being served by the MAG is detected, and the LMA for buffering the packet transmitted to the corresponding MN when receiving a request for the packet buffering.05-05-2011
20100232352PRECODING TECHNIQUE FOR MULTIUSER MIMO BASED ON EIGENMODE SELECTION AND MMSE - The present disclosure proposes a method for preceding of a transmission signal at an access point of a multiuser system based on eigenmode selection and minimum mean square error (MMSE) processing. The most reliable eigenmodes of every multiple-input multiple-output (MIMO) channel in the system can be selected at each user terminal and corresponding eigenvalues and eigenvectors can be fed back to the access point. The linear MMSE precoding (beamforming) applied at the access point based on the selected eigenmodes may provide an improved transmission capacity performance compare to techniques from the prior art.09-16-2010
20100189031Wireless Communication Apparatus - In a wireless communication device, a switching section (07-29-2010
20100020747Method and Apparatus for Home Agent Redirect - A method and apparatus for home agent redirect is provided. A method for redirecting a device from a first home agent to a second home agent includes sending a first message to the first home agent, receiving a second message from the first home agent, and sending a third message to the second home agent. The first message includes a binding update, and the second message includes a binding acknowledgement and a redirect indication that the device is being redirected to the second home agent. The third message includes a binding update, and an address of the first home agent.01-28-2010
20100214986METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING CONNECTION PAYLOAD INFORMATION IN MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL PROTOCOL DATA UNIT - A method and system for encoding connection payload information of a plurality of connection payloads in a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU) are provided. The method includes encoding connection payload information of a first connection payload from the plurality of connection payloads in a first header of the MAC PDU. The method also includes encoding connection payload information of each of a second set of connection payloads from the plurality of connection payloads in a second header of the MAC PDU, wherein the second set of connection payloads includes the plurality of connection payloads excluding the first connection payload. Further, the method sends the MAC PDU with encoded information. Thereafter, the method also includes a procedure to decode connection payload information of a plurality of connection payloads from a Medium Access Control (MAC) Protocol Data Unit (PDU).08-26-2010
20100195569COMMUNICATION TERMINAL DEVICE AND COMMUNICATION METHOD - Provided is a communication terminal device that reduces, in a network using a power line, the percentage of bands consumed for transmission of control packets in the bands consumed for all the communication, so as to ensure transmission of data intended to be transmitted. A PLC terminal F08-05-2010
20090116429NETWORK SYSTEM - MTID of a terminal apparatus is preliminarily registered into a database of an ISP. In step S05-07-2009
20090116427ADVANCED TECHNOLOGY FRAME STRUCTURE WITH BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY - An advanced technology frame structure is described herein. The advanced technology frame structure can enhance a first technology frame structure in dimensions of time, frequency, or a combination of time and frequency. A second technology frame structure time division multiplexes second technology subframes with the first technology downlink and uplink subframes. The first technology downlink subframe can be divided into a first technology downlink subframe and one or more second technology downlink subframes. Similarly, the first technology uplink subframe can be divided into a first uplink subframe and one or more second technology uplink subframes. These principles can be expanded upon and can be applied in many communication systems.05-07-2009
20090116424TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD, MOBILE STATION, AND RADIO BASE STATION - A packet communication method according to the present invention includes: transmitting, at a mobile station, a random access request that includes mobile station information assigned to the mobile station, to a radio base station through a random access channel allocated to a predetermined radio resource; receiving, at the radio base station, the random access request from the mobile station; and transmitting, at the radio base station, a random access response signal that notifies the receipt of the random access request and includes the mobile station information, to the mobile station through a downlink shared control channel corresponding to the random access channel.05-07-2009
20100157892MOBILITY SUPPORTING METHOD - Provided is a mobility supporting method of a mobile router. The method includes generating an area identifier to identify an open shortest path first area; and transmitting routing information including the area identifier to an access router.06-24-2010
20100157901WIRELESS NETWORK ARCHITECTURE AND METHOD FOR BASE STATION UTILIZATION - Wireless network system including a plurality of base stations each configured to manage active links to mobile stations within a range; and a controller configured to control the base stations to provide at least two of the active links from two different base stations simultaneously to a given mobile station in integral manner for joint processing.06-24-2010
20100157887System, Arrangements And Method Relating To Access Handling - The present invention relates to a system comprising a core network access packet data node (06-24-2010
20100177705SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR HANDLING SIMPLE IP TO MOBILE IP TRANSITION - Methods are provided for transitioning between SIP and MIP. Mobile devices, upon detecting a new system, automatically attempt a MIP session to avoid the default position of SIP. A history is maintained of systems visited, and for systems that did not support MIP in the past, a MIP session is not attempted, but rather SIP is initiated from the start.07-15-2010
20100177703Persistent Mesh for Isolated Mobile and Temporal Networking - A structured wireless mesh network is disclosed where a tree-like connection topology is formed. In one embodiment, each node has separate uplink and downlink radios operating on different channels. When a cluster of such nodes becomes isolated as in the case of a mobile mesh application, a node in the cluster according to this invention acts as a root node thus enabling the tree structure to persist, even in isolation. Example methods of joining sub networks are disclosed that guide the joining of mesh networks and channel management. Nodes that may operate in isolation also support a distributed DHCP capability such that IP addresses are assigned to clients even when a connection to a central DHCP server is unavailable.07-15-2010
20100177694APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING UPLINK CONTROL INFORMATION - A method for a user equipment to transmit uplink control information to a base station, the base station being configured to receive uplink control information on a plurality of groups of subcarriers. The method includes: randomly determining one of the groups of subcarriers; and transmitting uplink control information on the randomly determined group of subcarriers.07-15-2010
20100177697BASE STATION AND BROADCAST CHANNEL TRANSMISSION METHOD - A disclosed base station transmits a broadcast channel to a user device a predefined number of times in a predetermined cycle for communication with the user device. The base station includes a repetition unit configured to repeat the broadcast channel, after the broadcast channel is channel-coded, for the predefined number of times to generate multiple broadcast channels; and a signal waveform changing unit configured to process the generated broadcast channels such that the processed broadcast channels have different signal waveforms. Positions of the broadcast channels in the order of transmission in the predetermined cycle are associated with the signal waveforms of the broadcast channels.07-15-2010
20100177695TECHNIQUE FOR INTERFERENCE MITIGATION USING MOBILE STATION SIGNALING - A Mobile Station (MS) and a Closed Subscriber Group (CSG) Femtocell Base Station (FBS) for Interference Mitigation (IM) in a wireless communication system, and methods for their operation, are provided. A method for operating the MS includes determining if the MS cannot access a first CSG FBS due to interference from a second CSG FBS, the first CSG FBS being a CSG FBS that the MS is authorized to receive service from and the second CSG FBS being a CSG FBS that the MS is not authorized to receive service from, and if it is determined that the MS cannot access the first CSG FBS due to interference received from the second CSG FBS, transmitting an IM-Signal to the second CSG FBS requesting that the second CSG FBS mitigate the interference to the MS.07-15-2010
20100177692METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANAGING COMMUNICATION SESSION - A method and device for managing a communication session via a plurality of wireless carriers in a wireless communication network (07-15-2010
20100177690WIRELESS COMMUNICATION UNIT - A wireless communication unit includes a baseband module and a radiofrequency module. A communication interface connects the baseband module to the radiofrequency module. Data can be communicated from the baseband module to the radiofrequency module and/or vice versa via the interface. The communication interface includes one or more data compression arrangement, for compressing original data to be transmitted over the communication interface, from a transmitting side of the communication interface to a receiving side of the communication interface, into compressed data and decompressing the compressed data after transmission and restoring the original data. The data compression arrangement may include a data compression unit at the transmitting side of the communication interface, and a data decompression unit at the receiving side of the communication interface.07-15-2010
20100177693METHOD OF MAC HEADER GENERATION AND DATA TRANSMITTING - A method of generating MAC header and a method of transmitting data using the generated MAC header are disclosed. A mobile station can receive a message from a base station, the message including an indicator for identifying a service flow (SF). If the mobile station is connected with the base station to generate the service flow, the mobile station and the base station can map the service flow with the indicator. Accordingly, the base station can generate MAC header, which includes the indicator and a parameter representing whether the MAC header has been compressed.07-15-2010
20100177683Method and Apparatus for Cell Searching - A cell searching procedure is modified to enable a user terminal to determine whether a detected signal originates in a known cell or a new cell having the same cell identifier as the known cell. When a signal is detected, the user terminal determines the cell identifier and timing of the detected signal. If the cell identifier matches a known cell and the timing is outside the timing window of the known cell, the user terminal compares detected signal with a corresponding received signal received from the known cel